UC-NRLF
$B bOS ^55
German Composition
8go r«3 n a «gK>»iymi^i^
PAUhVMAcon
^S\
m
"^^
M
!^
GIFT or
«1
olslQjl*^ -% <S»M-^
GERMAN COMPOSITION
BY
PAUL VALENTINE BACON
jDcr 2)eutfd^c tft gelct^rt, tuenn er fetn 2)cutfc^ tjcrfte^t.
— ©oct^c.
ALLYN AND BACON
Boston Neijj gork Cfjfcago
COPYRIGHT. 1913. BY
PAUL VALENTINE BACON.
::>
• • •> , • ••
NoTtoooti 9tm«
.1. 8. Cuwhlnsr Co. — Berwick A Smith Co.
Norwood, Mms., U.S.A.
THE AMERICAN TEACHER
OF GERMAN
335658
VOit btc bcutfd^e 5prad?c pcrftei^t unb ftubicrt
bcfinbet fid? auf bcm JHarftc, mo allc Hationcn il^rc
Waxtn anbieten, cr fptdt ben DoImetfd?er, inbcm
er fid? felbft berctd?crt.
— Letter from Ooethe to Carlyle, July 20th, 1827.
PREFACE.
This book is the result of a conviction that in the study
of German too little emphasis is laid on the meanings of
words. When we use a wrong gender, case, or mood, Ger-
mans rarely misunderstand us, but when we use a wrong
word, they often get no idea whatever. Emphasis, there-
fore, is here put on distinctions in the meanings of common
words, though forms and syntax are not neglected.
Above all, the book aims to be practical. The ideal way to
teach German composition is to use nothing but German in
the classroom. But this presupposes pupils who are pre-
pared to "think in German," and such students have al-
ready reached a state of proficiency far beyond the scope of
this volume, which is intended as a practical step toward an
ideal goal.
The treatment does not claim to be exhaustive. As in
the case of my German Grammar, I have clung to the belief
that a thorough discussion of important things furnishes a
better foundation for future work than less intensive study
spread over a wider field. Though not made for the pur-
pose of forcing the "direct method" upon teachers, this
Composition — like the German Grammar and "Im Va-
terland '' — readily lends itself to the use of German in the
classroom.
A partial list of the books used in preparing the Composi-
tion will be found in the Teachers' Handbook, but in the
treatment of many words and constructions, especially where
no book sufficed, I have drawn not only on my own experi-
ence, but also on that of many German friends.
vii
Viii PREFACE.
Thanks are due first to my former teachers, Fraulein
Anna and Fraulein Minna Sannemann, of Hannover, who
went over the manuscript with critical care. A like service
was performed by Dr. Romer, of the Herderschule, Char-
lottenburg. Dr. Zingler, of the Werner Siemens Realgymna-
sium, Schoneberg-Berlin, and Dr. Schindler of the Annen
Realgymnasium, Dresden. Valuable help on points of de-
bated usage was received from Dr. Gropp, of the Siemens
Realgymnasium, Charlottenburg. Besides these, I wish to
thank Dr. Martin Hartmann, of Leipsic, for permission to
use his name in connection with his letter-writing exchange ;
Professor Schrader, of the University of Breslau, for exam-
ining my drawing of the Indo-European languages; Pro-
fessor Richard M. Meyer, of the University of Berlin, for
suggestions in regard to Chapter IV, Part II; Professor
Wilhelm Victor, of Marburg, for explaining his attitude on
certain disputed points in phonetics ; Professor Sievers, of
Leipsic, for lending the weight of his authority to some
statements which might otherwise seem presumptuous; and
Dr. Max Walter, of Frankfort, for taking valuable time to
explain and demonstrate the method he employs so success-
fully. To Fraulein Hedwig Klatt, of Berlin, I am doubly
indebted, not only for valuable suggestions upon the entire
book, but for generous permission to use the results of her
remarkable researches in teaching pronunciation.
The anatomical drawings in Chapter III, Part II, are by
Miss Blair, of the Harvard Medical School.
P. V. B.
Apbil, 1918.
PLAN OF THE BOOK.
Part I, containing thirty-six chapters, is for study.
Each Chapter, except the Eeviews, has four parts : (1) Ger-
man Story, (2) Syntax, (3) Notes, (4) Exercises.
(1) The Story furnishes the foundation for conversation
or "direct method" work, and illustrates the Syntax and
Notes which follow. In connection with the Historical
Notes the stories give a sketch of German history.
(2) The Syntax furnishes discussion and further illustra-
tion of the constructions treated in the chapter.
(3) The Notes offer a detailed and definite explanation of
word difficulties.
(4) The Exercises (a) review the Syntax and Notes by
questions, (ft) furnish Colloquial Idioms for memorizing,
and (c) give three sets of Idiomatic Exercises to be written
in German, the last of the three being a connected story.
Every fourth chapter is devoted to Review, as are also the
last four chapters, making twelve reviews in all. They
contain Questions and Exercises, with a note on some idio-
matic particle like bod) or IDO'^L
Quotations from the Classics, some four hundred in num-
ber, acquaint the pupil with the leading names in German
literature. These citations include those which one hears
most frequently in the conversation of cultured Germans.
Pictures and Historical Notes serve two purposes. For
those who wish to use them, they furnish excellent material
for conversation and " direct method " work. For those who
do not care to do this, they make good "breathing spaces "
in the lesson.
ix
X PLAN OF THE BOOK,
Part II, containing five chapters, is for reference.
Chapter I gives forms and suggestions for letter writing.
It should be consulted whenever the teacher wishes to vary
the regular exercises by work on letters.
CJiapter II furnishes illustrations and explanations of the
more common ways in which German words are derived and
combined. It may be used either for study or reference.
Chapter III gives some of the delicate distinctions be-
tween English and German pronunciation. It should be
used discreetly, and only by those teachers who make a
point of accurate work in speaking. Even by these, only
one thing — Assimilation, the Glottal Catch, and so on —
should be treated at a time.
Chapter IV contains an outline sketch of the history of
the German language, including a very brief statement of
Grimm's Law. It should be used only for reading and
reference, not for study.
Chapter V includes (1) a few words spelled alike in both
languages, not treated in Part I, (2) a list of abbreviations,
familiarity with which will help a pupil in his German read-
ing, and (3) about one hundred current idioms which can
scarcely be called literary, but a knowledge of which will be
of advantage to those who are planning to go to Germany.
Vocabularies and Index are especially complete. The for-
mer contain specific reference to the sections where the
words are discussed, while the latter includes not only the
syntactical, but the historical, ai-tistic, and literary matter of
the book.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE
Illustrations xiii
Drawings and Maps xv
German Equivalents for Grammatical Terms . . . xvi
PART I.
CHAPTER
I. Word Order — Inverted. 2)ie ^ermaTtn8f(i)Iad)t . . 1
II. Transposed Order. Simple Tenses. S)eutf(^e Sreue . 7
III. Transposed Order. Compound Tenses. 2)ietrid^ oon
iBern . 15
IV. Review, ^cnn 22
V. Word Order. Position of nic^t, tarl hex ©ro^c in ber
@ci)ule 24
VI. Word Order. Position of Adverbs. 2)cr ^oknbsbogen 32
VII. Word Order. Position of Objects, ^einrid^ ber ^ogler 39
VIII. Reviewo 9Zot^. 46
IX. The Modal Auxiliaries. Simple Tenses, .^aifer Otto
ber 3)ritte in ber @ruft tarig beg ©ro^en. ... 48
X. The Modal Auxiliaries. Compound Tenses. !Die 'D^o-
(anbjaufen 56
XI. Two Infinitives with Other Verbs than Modals. f^rieb=
rid) ajotbart 64
XII. Review. SBo^I 72
XIII. Prepositions with the Dative. 2)ie SSeiber t)on 2Beiiig=
berg 74
XIV. Prepositions with the Accusative. S)er @angcrfrteg auf
ber SSariburg 84
XV. Prepositions with either Dative or Accusative. 9Zurn=
berg 92
XVI. Review. <Btiion 102
XVII. Inseparable Verbs. S)te i8ud)brucferfun[t . . .106
xi
Xii TABLE OF CONTENTS.
OBAPTEB PA»«
XVIII. Separable Verbs. ?l(brc(!)t Dflrer . . .113
XIX. Common Prefixes. ?utl)cr unb bcr Xeufet . .121
XX. Review. Ubcr^aupt 128
XXI. ^obcn and fcin as Auxiliaries. 2)ic U^rcn ^aifcr ^arl8
bcs^ttnften 130
XXII. English Verbals translated by German Infinitives.
Xex '3)rct{3ifljat)rige ilrieg 139
XXIII. English Infinitives and Verbals translated by German
Clauses. Xet ©rofec ^urfurft 148
XXIV. Review, ^a 166
XXV. The Passive Voice, ^ricbrid) bcr ®ro^e unb tie 2Binb=
mut)(c 168
XXVI. Adjectives. J^riebrid) bcr ©rofec unb Saftjtngtou. . 167
XXVII. Use of Tenses. @octl)C unb ed)iUcr . . . .^76
XXVIII. Review. ^01^ ... 186
XXIX. The Subjunctive. S]?eetl)ODen . . . .• . 188
XXX. Subjunctive and Conditional, ^buiflln 2vii\t . . 196
XXXI. Special Subjunctives. 3)q8 gronffurtcr ^arlomcnt . 206
XXXII. Review. 3war, ^^lUcrbing^ 212
XXXIII. Review of Chapters i-8. StSmortf unb baS 35eutfd)e
mid) 214
XXXIV. Review of Chapters 9-16. Golfer Sll^clm bcr ®ro§f . 219
XXXV. Review of Chapters 17-24. 2)cutfd)c 2Bif|cnfd)Qft . 224
XXXVI. Review of Chapters 25-32. 2)cutf(^cr ^anbcl . . 228
PART II.
I. Composition of Letters 236
II. Composition of Words 242
III. Composition of Sounds. Phonetics .... 266
IV. Composition of the German Language . 278
V. Miscellaneous, i. Identical Words. 2. Abbreviations.
3. Slang 289
German-English Vocabdlart awd Word-Index .297
English-German Vocabulary and Word-Index . 330
Special Index 355
ILLUSTRATIONS.
The Imperial House of Parliament .... Frontispiece
PAGE
1. Teutoburg Forest. The Hermann Monument ... 2
2. Trier. The Palace of the Roman Emperors ... 8
3. Trier. The Porta Nigra, or Black Gate .... 13
4. Ravenna. Tomb of Theodoric 15
5. Charlemagne, from a painting by Albrecht Diirer ... 24
6. Aachen. The Cathedral 30
7. Rolandseck. The Arch of Roland 33
8. Quedlinburg. The Cathedral 39
9. Blankenburg. The Regenstein ' . 44
10. Aachen. The Vault of the Cathedral and the Coronation
Chair 49
1 1 . Goslar. The Palace of the Emperors 53
12. Bremen. Roland . 57
13. Halle. Roland 61
14. Kyffhauser. The Monument to Emperor William I . .65
15. Kyffhauser. Barbarossa 67
16. Bad Reichenhall. Barbarossa 70
17. Weinsberg. Fortress Weibertreu, seen from the town . . 74
18. Weinsberg. Fortress Weibertreu, seen from a neighboring
hill 79
19. Fortress Weibertreu. The Octagonal Tower ... 82
20. Eisenach. The Singers' Hall at the Wartburg ... 84
21. Eisenach. The Wartburg 87
22. Nuremberg. The Pegnitz and the Walls .... 92
23. Nuremberg. Statue of Hans Sachs 97
24. Nuremberg. The Women's Gate 100
ziii
XIV ILLUSTRATIONS.
PAOK
25. Mayence. Statue of Gutenberg and the Cathedral . . 105
26. Portrait of Albrecht Diirer, painted by himself . . .114
27. Nuremberg. The House of Albrecht Diirer . . . .117
28. The Wartburg. Luther's Room 121
29. The Wartburg. Inner Court 124
30. Martin Luther, painted by his friend, Lucas Kranach . 127
31. Charles V, painted by Titian 131
32. Rothenburg 139
33. Coburg 143
34. Berlin. Statue of the Great Elector 149
35. Potsdam. The Mill at Sans Souci 159
36. Potsdam. Sans Souci, the Palace of Frederick the Great . 163
37. Berlin. Statue of Frederick the Great 169
38. Weimar. Statue of Goethe and Schiller . . . .177
39. Weimar. Goethe's Garden House 181
40. Bust of Schiller, in the Library at Weimar . . . .184
41. Portrait of Beethoven 188
42. Wagner 190
43. Bust of Goethe, in the Library at Weimar . . . ,195
44. Portrait of Queen Luise, in the Gallery at Cologne . .197
45. Frankfort. Church of St. Paul, where the Parliament met . 205
46. Ernst Morltz Arndt, member of the Frankfort Parliament . 207
47. Ludwig Uhland, member of the Frankfort Parliament . .211
48. Rudelsburg. Statue of Bismarck as a Student . . .214
49. Bismarck, from a photograph 217
50. Coblentz. Monument to Emperor William 1 . . . 219
51. Moltke 222
52. Roentgen, discoverer of the X-ray 224
53. Mommsen, one of Germany's great historians . . . 226
54. Hamburg. The Harbor 228
55. Barmen-Elberfeld. The Hanging Railway .... 230
56. Kiel. The Canal, with the Battleship CfiarUs the Great . 231
DRAWINGS AND MAPS.
PAGE
Facsimile of Intimate Letter 236
Facsimile of Friendly Letter 238
Facsimile of Formal Letter . .241
Figure!. Position of Tongue for letter i 258
Figure 2. Position of Tongue for letter a 258
Figure 3. Position of Tongue for letter u 259
Figure 4. Diagram of Tongue-positions for German vowels . 259
Figure 5. Position of Tongue for letter I 270
Figure 6. Position of Tongue for trilled t . . . . . .271
Figure 7. Position of Tongue for uvula t 271
Figure 8. Diagram of Indo-European Languages . - . . 279
Figure 9. Diagram of Grimm's Law 281
Map of German Dialects to follow 282
XV
GERMAN EQUIVALENTS FOR
GRAMMATICAL TERMS.
The letter (of the alphabet), ber :53uc^'ftabe.
The vowel, ber ^oM, or ber (gelbft'laut.
The consonant, ber 5lonfonant', or ber iO^it'laut.
The sentence, ber ^a^.
The subject, ba^ (Subjeff; the predicate, bo^ "iprdbifaf.
The main clause, ber §aupt'f a^.
The subordinate clause, ber 9f?e'benfa^.
The parts of speech, bie $Re'beteUe.
The article, ber 5lrti'fe(, or ba^ ®efd)(ec^t«'n)ort.
Definite, beftimtnt'; indefinite, un'befttmmt.
The noun, ba« ^ub'ftantio, or ba« §aupt'wort.
First, second, third class, er'fte, gtuei'le, brit'te ^^(affe.
The pronoun, ba« ^iprono'men, or ba« giir'iDort.
The adjective, ba« 5lb'ie!tit), or ba« (5i'Qentc^aft<<lDort.
The numeral, ba« S^utuera'Ie, or ha^ ^a^'xvoxt.
The adverb, ba^ 5(bt»erb', or bai< Um'ftanb«tt)ort.
The verb, ba« i8er'b(um), or bad ^eit'ttjort.
Strong, ftarf ; weak, fc^tuac^ ; separable, trcnn'bar ; in-
separable, un'trennbar ; transitive, tranfitio'; intran-
sitive, intranfitio'.
The preposition, bie ^J^rapofition',* or bod 3?er()Qlt'nidH)ort.
The conjunction, bie ,Sionjunftion', or bad ^in'betvort.
The interjection, bie Qnterjcftion', or bad 5(ud'rufung<MiHnt.
The gender, bad ^efd)Ied)t': masculine, monn'lid) ; feminine,
lueib'ttd) ; neuter, fadj'Iid).
The number, bie 3al)l'form.
Siugular, ber 2iiuvihu', or bie (5in'^a()(.
Plural, ber ^tUu'ral, or bie lV(ii)r'^al)l.
GBAMMATICAL TERMS. XVH
The case, ber i^alt (pi. bie gal'te).
The nominative, ber ^lo'minatit) ; genitive, ber ©e'ttitit) ;
dative, ber X)a'ttt) ; accusative, ber 5lf fufatit).
The inflection, bie ^te'guTtg ; to decline, befUnte'ren,
The declension, bie ^e!(tnatton'; strong, ftarf; weak,
f(f)tt)a(^ ; mixed, gemtfd^t.
To conjugate, fottjugte'ren ; conjugation, bie Conjugation'.
The comparison, bie Comparatton', or bie (Stei'gerung ; to
compare, ftei'gern ; positive, ber *i|3o'fittt) ; comparar
tive, ber Com'paratit) ; superlative, ber @u'per(attti.
The tense, ha^ Xent'pu^, t>k ^eif form ; present, t>a^ ^rci'*
fen^; past, ba^ Qm'ptv\dt; future, ba^ gutur' (ba^
er'fte gutur'); perfect, t>a^ ^erfeff ; past perfect, ba^
^(u^'quamperfeft ; future perfect, ba^ ^tDei'te gutur';
simple, compound, ein'fac^, ^ufam'mengefe^t.
The mode, ber SJlo'bu^ ; indicative, ber 3^n'bt!atit) ; subjunc-
tive, ber Con'juncttD ; imperative, ber -3m'peratit> ;
infinitive, ber 3^^'P^^tit) ; participle, ba^ '^artictp'.
The accent, ber Xon ; raising and lowering of the voice, bie
gebung unb Senfung ber (gtimme.
Position, order, bie (gtedung, bie Orbnung.
Word order, bie SKortfoIge ; inverted order, bie 3^nt)erfton'-
Page, bie (Seite ; line, bie 3^i(e, bie dtti\}t (row).
Note. — Properly the foreign terms should have the accent on the
last syllable ; but in the language of the schoolroom the accent has
been shifted from the meaningless ending to the distinctive part of the
word.
PART I.
CHAPTER I.
WORD ORDER — INVERTED.
Pie ^ermannsfd^Iad^t
1. S3or tJtelen, uteten ^a^ren gab e^ in 1)eutf(^(anb
noc^ feme ©tcibte. !t)te atten Deutfc^en tDo^nten mitten in
grogen SBcitbern, Unter if)nen lebte bamaf^ ein tapferer
§e(b, germann, ben bie 9f^omer ^Irminiu^ nannten* Qn
biefer ^eit ^errfc^te in ^f^ont f aifer 5Iuguftu^. ^a er bie
^eutfc^en miUtme^fiii— njoflte, fanbte er feinen gelb^errn
SBarug gegen fie.
liefer fnc^te ben ^einb im Xeutoburger SBalbe, aber
§ermann trartete nid)t anf il)n; er griff bie 9?dnter an
unb bernic^tete beina^e ba^ gan^e rt^mifc^e §eer. !5)a^ wav
ba« erfte ^at, ha^ bie ^dmer in :t)entfc^(anb gefc^fagen
tDnrben. 511^ bie 9^ac^ric^t baoon nac^ 9^ont getangte, rief
taifer 5(ugnftu^ an^: „^d) SSaru^, iSarn^, gib mir nteine
gegionen toieber!"
Syntax.
2. Inverted Order. — In the inverted order the verb
or auxiliary comes before the subject. The rest of the
sentence has the normal order. Inverted order is used
not only, as in English, in interrogative and imperative
sentences, but also in declarative sentences when intro-
duced by some element other than the subject. Eng-
lish sometimes inverts a declarative sentence, as in.
Here comes the bride. But English may also say, Here
'.s!;ma^ composition.
[§2.
1. The Hermann Monument in the Teutoburger Forest.
the bride eomes^ while German cannot follow this latter
order, \)\\\ must invert.
(1) (Miniaii is very partial to the inverted order.
Often wlitji o an English declarative sentence begins with
Chap. 1.] WOUDOEDEB — INVERTED. 8
the subject, German starts with some other element.
Where we say, I saw the emperor in Potsdam yesterday^
a German would probably use one of the following
sentences, according to what he wanted to emphasize :
©eftern ):)Qiht \6) in ^ot^bam ben ^aifer gefe^en, or, !Den
^atfer ^be id) geftern in ^ot^bam gefe^en, or, ^n "ipot^bam
^abe ic^ geftern ben ^aifer gefe^en.
(2) Special care should be taken to invert the main
subject and verb when the sentence begins with a sub-
ordinate clause.
If I havenH a knife^ I canH carve.
^ctttt itl) feitt aJJcffcr ^abc, fann it^ ntrl)t fjl)tteibctt. — ^itlern.
When I was still a boy, I thought of nothing but stories of magic
and wonders,
^l§ tt^ no(^ etn ^naht toav, bai^tc td| an nic^tS aW an S^^^^^'
unb SButtbcrgcf (^ii^tcn. — § e i n e.
Notes.
3. Historical Note. — Hermann the Liberator was a German
prince who had served as a youth in the Roman army. He
tried to unite the German tribes so as to drive the Romans out
of Germany, and after the victory in the Teutoberg Forest (9 a.d.),
the Romans did remain for a time west of the Rhine. But the
German chiefs were jealous of each other and of Hermann. They
betrayed his wife Thusnelda to the Romans to be led in chains
through the streets of Rome in the " triumph " of the Roman gen-
eral Germanicus. And finally they murdered Hermann (21 a.d.)
when he was in his thirty-seventh year. In the story in § 1, the
Germans, bic ©ertnaneTt, are referred to as „bie 2)eittfd^en/' though
this term is of later origin (about 800 a.d.).
4. English ago is usually 'oox with the dative case.
A week ago I bought this book.
f&ox ctttcr 9®o(i^c Ijabc id) btc§ S3ttd^ gcfauft.
Long years ago there lived a man in the East.
f&9x graucn ^tt^rcit UW tin 'Mann m Often. — $?ejfing.
4 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§ 7.
Note. — When ago is used with a form of the verb to 6e, German
generally uses I)cr following an adverb or the accusative.
It^s a long time ago. (gg ift langc l^er.
That is fifty years ago.
2)a8finb nun fiinfgig 3a^rc I)cr. — SSltbcnbrud).
5. When denoting extent of time, English for is rendered
in German by the accusative of time. This is often followed
by the adverb (ang.
For three hours^ for a whole month.
^rci Stiittbctt (tang), ctnctt ganjcn SUionat (tang).
And so he sat for many days, sat for many years.
Uttb fo fa^ cr tiictc Xagc, fa^ tttcF '^a\^xt lang. — ©t^iirer.
Note. — Unmodified words expressing time are united with long
and written as adverbs (not with a capital) : for hours, for days, for
weeks, for months, for years, ftunbentang, tagelang, tt)od)en(ang, mona=
telang, ja^relang.
6. English to live has two German equivalents : too^nen
and Uhtn.
(1) SSo^nen (reg., aux. ^aben) is used in the sense of to-
dwell, to reside.
I live on Charles Street, ^r^ wo^nc in bcr ^orfftro^e.
She lived a long time here in Sorrento.
(5ic Xjai (augc ^icr in Sorrento gcwo^nt. — ^t\)\t.
(2) Seben (reg., aux. l^aben) is used in the sense of to he
alive, to exist,
Man lives not by bread alone.
^cr 9Kcttfd) tcbct ttid|t oom SBrot allciu. — 33ibel, matt, 4, 4.
He didn't live like others, ©r lebtc ttit^t Wic aubere* — ^ c H e r.
7. English to look for, to hunt for, is fu(^en (reg., aux.
I)aben) with the accusative. Think of the English word
seek, and do not use filr.
miat are you looking for 9 SBafil fur^Ctt 8ie ?
And I had no idea of looking for anything.
Unb md)t!$ su fu(t)cn, bad war mein 8inn. ~ @ o e 1 1^ e.
Chap. 1.] WORD ORDER — INVERTED. 5
8. English to wait for is tnarten auf (reg., aux. '^abetl) with
the accusative. Never say irarten fiir.
We waited for you for half an hour.
995ir ^abcn cine Ijalbc ©titttbc auf i»t(^ (or ®ic) gcttiartct.
But now I wonH wait any longer for him!
3(ticr ic^t ttiart^ ii^ iiod^ m^t laitgcr auf tl|tt ! — ® e r ft a d e r.
9. English no, not a, not any, is fctlt* ^td^t ein means not
one and is used only in emphatic cases; even then feitt eittjig,
not a single, is preferable.
Haven't you a pencil ? ^abctt Sic f ctnctt 93(ctfttft ?
He hasnH made a single mistake.
@r \\ai fctncn eittjtgctt %t\\Ux gcmarfjt.
Who doesnHjind any, doesnH need to furnish any.
9Ber fctnc ftnbct, braudit audi f ctttc abjultcfent. — @ t o r m .
He did not speak a single word. — ©r ^pvad) !cttt cinjigc^ 995ort.
— .t' e b b c f .
Exercises.
10. (a) 1. Decline: ber grof^e Salb, ettt ta|)ferer vtSelb,
teine ®tabt, ba^ erfte 33^a(. 2. G^ii;e ^/ie principal ^mrts of:
geben, (eben, nennen, fenben, fc^lagen, rufen.
{h) 1. Which sentences in § 1 illustrate the inverted
order? 2. When must German invert a declarative sen-
tence which does not need to be inverted in English ?
3. Find examples of the inverted order among the quota-
tions in §§ 4, 5, and 8. Find in § 4 an illustration of § 6, 2.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. 3Ba^ [ui^ftbu?
2. 3Sor jnjei 3^a^ren ^abe t(^ in ber ^arlftra^e geiuo^nt.
3. Sarten (Ste boc^ ni^t (anger auf mtc^ ! 4. ^c^ ^atte
feine ^di. 5. :r)a^ tDar aber (ange ^er. 6. ^c^ ^abe etne
ganje ©tunbe gearbettet.
11. (a) 1. A year ago we lived on (tn ber) Hermann
Street. 2. For two hours he looked for his friend. 3. We
6 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§11.
have waited for you for hours. 4. Augustus lived many
years ago. 5. For a whole week we didn't have a lesson
((Stunbe). 6. But that was long ago.
(6) 1. For a whole year they lived on Winter Street.
2. Augustus lived in Rome, but that was many years ago.
3. For days I looked for an interesting book, but I didn't
find one. 4. Will you wait a moment for me ? 5. Many
years ago Germany did not have a single large city.
6. What are you waiting for (ttjorauf)? Are you looking
for something ?
(c) Hermann the Liberator. — 1. Many centuries ago
(there) lived in Germany a brave hero, Hermann. 2. At
that time (§ 1, line 4) the Germans did not have cities ;
they lived in huts in the forest. 3. When the Emperor
Augustus wanted to subjugate the Germans, he sent his
general Varus against them. 4. Hermann was at that
time twenty-five years old, but he was already the German
leader. 5. For days Varus looked for him, but Hermann
did not wait for him; he attacked Varus and almost anni-
hilated his army. 6. That was nineteen centuries ago,
but the Germans will never forget Hermann the Liberator.
CHAPTER II.
WORD ORDER — TRANSPOSED. SIMPLE TENSES.
Peutfd?e Creue.
12. Der rbmifc^e ^tftorifer, Xacttu^, er^ci^It, ba^ tm erften
^a^r^unbert na(^ ^^riftM etnige ©efanbte be^ T)eut[d)ett
SSolfe^ nad) 9f?om gingen. !Dort bat man fie, mit in^ ^o(of=
feum ^u ge^en, urn fic^ bie ^ampffpiek anpfe^en. T)a fie
unter ben rdmifc{)en (Senatoren einige SJZcinner fa^en, tk
ni^t Corner n)aren, fragten fie i^re greunbe, tDer biefe Sente
ba feien.
9}^an fagte i^nen, eg iraren grentbe, bie fi(^ bnrc^ i^re
Xreue gegen ^om an^ge^eic^net flatten. T)a gingen bie
T)entfc^en an ben Ort, tt)o biefe 3}^anner fagen, nnb fe^ten
fic^ 3U i^nen. „3Benn e« Saffen ^u fitf)ren ober Xreue
^u fatten gilt," fagten fie ben $Ri3mern, „fo iibertrifft !ein
aJienfc^ bie T)entfc^en."
Syntax.
13. Transposed Order. — Simple Tenses. — With simple
tenses in the transposed or dependent order, the verb
is put at the end of the clause. This order is followed
in all dependent clauses, that is, in those introduced by
a relative or by a subordinating conjunction (aU, ha,
ba§, h)eit, njenn, n)0, etc.). Whenever one of these
introductory words occurs, drop all thought of the verb
till every other word in the clause is translated, be-
cause, except for the verb, the order is normal.
GERMAN COMPOSITION,
[§14.
I found them when I put the empty baskets back in the boat.
^^ fttttb ftc, al§ id) bic Iccrcit tiirbc wicbcr in bic S3ar!c fc^te.
— ^c^fe.
/am thankful for the severest criticism, if it is only to the point.
5d) bin battfbar fiir bic frfjarfftc ^riti!, wcnn ftc imr faj^Iic^ bkibt.
— SBiSmarrf.
Notes.
14. Historical Note. — In the two centuries after the „§cnnann«-
f(f)tad)t" the Romans extended their power beyond the Rhine and
organized ithe province Germania. Thus relations between Romans
2. Ruins of the Palace of the Roman Emperors at Trier.
and Germans became more intimate; Germans often went to
Rome, and Romans built theatres and palaces in Germany. Of
these buildings the best remains are at Trier, the residence of sev-
eral Roman Emperors. But the Germans never adopted Roman
civilization. Tacitus in his " Germania " gives us a vivid picture
of German life and customs, the simplicity of which he contrasts
most favorably with the luxury of the effeminate Romans.
Chap. 2.] TBANSPOSEB OBDEB. 9
15. The English verb to ask is usually btttctl or fragcn*
(1) bitten (bat, gebeten, aux. ^aben) means to beg, to
ask for.
(a) To ask for something is translated by bittetl Uttl.
Both verb and preposition take the accusative.
May I ask you for another glass of water 9
^arf id) @ic urn ttod) cm (^U^ SBoffer Witn ?
I do not ask for my life.
^^ bittc nidjt urn mein Scben. — @ (^ i U e r.
(6) To translate the English phrase, to ask some one to do
something, use bitten with a phrase, not a clause.
She asked him to loaitfor her. @tc hat i^tt, auf fie 5tt ttiartctt,
I ask you not to drag it (the communication) out too long.
^dj bittc Sic, bicfctbc (bic SUlitteilung) ni(^t ju longc au^5ubcl|uctt.
— greljtag.
2^ote. — 53itte (for tcf) bitte) is used for English if you please, and
also for you are welcome in answer to thank you (banfe).
(2) i^ragen (reg., aux. ^aben) means to inquire, to ask
(a question). It takes the accusative or two accusatives.
(a) To ask if or ask whether is fragen ob, followed by a
clause, not a phrase.
Did yoM ask me something 9 ^abcn Sic tttit^ ctttia^ ficfragt ?
iJe asked her if she could go along.
@r fragtc fie, ob fie mitgcljett fonnte.
J also will ask you one thing.
3t^ Will cttc^ and) citt SSort fragcm — S3 1 b c t, 2Jfatt. 21, 24.
(5) To translate ^o ask about or asZ: a/^er something, use
fragen nac^ with the dative.
They asked after his health. Sic fragtctt naU) feincr ©cfunbljeit.
Then I asked about my indebtedness.
^a fragt^ it^ nadf bcr St^utbigfeit, — U t) ta n b.
]}^ote. — (a) Remember that fragen always takes the accusative of
the person to whom the question is put, while fagen, to say to, to tell,
10 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 17.
always has the dative of the person to whom the statement is made.
Compare fragten fie iljre greunbe (§ 12, 1. 6) and jagten fte ben 9tomcrn
(§ 12, 1. 12).
(&) To ask (put) questions is ^ragen ftcUen with the dative.
Now Twill ask you a question or two.
^c^t ftcU^ id) ^Ijitcii citt paav f^ragcn.
A fool asks more questions than a hundred wise men can answer.
©in ^avv ftcUt me^r ^^ragcn, al^ ^unbcrt SSctfc beantwortcn fonncn.
— @prid)n)ort.
16. The English adverb there is usually bort or ba.
These adverbs, ba and bort, should never be used for the
factitive there in expressions like thei-e are, there was, and
so on.
(1) T)OVt is used for more distant places than ha, or when
the speaker wishes to be more definite. English over there
is always bort.
I don't sec anything over there. Xovt fc^^ id) ntdjt^.
The fairest maiden is sitting so wondrous up there.
%\t fd|ijttftc ^ungfrau fi^ct bort obcu ttiunberbar. — ^ e i n c.
(2) ^a is generally used in cases where no particular
place is specified.
There they were without [an] umbrella.
^a marcn fie ol)nc 5Rc0cnfd)irm.
There stood poor Hans thunderstruck.
%a ftaub ber ttrmc ^aw^ wic bom Conner gcrii^rt. — ip i ( ( e r n.
17. The German ba has several other common uses.
(1) !^a, {and) then, is used at the beginning of a sentence
to keep a narrative lively.
And then it broke out afresh, ^o fltng c^ ttiicbcr (o«i.
And then Mariette went out and wept bitterly.
^a flittfl ^ilWaricttc l)iimu<< uiib loctntc bittcrlid). — Sfdjoffe.
(2) ^a, here, is less detinite than l)ier. It refers especially
to one's being at homey or hack, having arrived.
Chap. 2.] TRANSPOSED ORDER. 11
Is Miss Fisher here, please f S3ttte, tft fjraittcttt f^ifdjcr btt ?
Fm glad yoiCre here again.
0:2 frcut mid), ha^ Sic ttJiebcr ba finb.
.Here / am again, ^a bin id) ttiicbcr. — § e b b c I.
(3) '^a, as, is a conjunction and is followed by the de-
pendent order. It is used when as gives a reason.
As it is late, ice must go.
^a t§ ft^ott f^rit ift, miiffcn toir fort.
As he wasnH here by eleven o''clock, he wonH come.
^tt tx hx^ df Ul)r nid)t ba war, bleibt cr axi^, — @ e r ft ci cf e r.
18. English to sit (doivn) has two translations in German :
fi^cn and ftc^ fc^ctt.
(1) (St^en (fag, gefeffen, aux. ^aben) means to sit, to be in
a sitting posture. The place where is indicated by a prepo-
sition with the dative.
Where did you sit ? SSo I)abctt @ic flcfcffctt ?
/ was sitting on a mountain. '^^ fa^ ailf cittCttt S3crgc, — ® r it n.
(2) (gic^ fe^en (reg., aux. l^aben) means to sit down, to put
oneself into a sitting posture. The place where (whither) is
indicated by a preposition with the accusative. The idea
of ^notion towards something is often strengthened by the
particle ^in*
Where shall I sit ?
2Bo f oU it^ mid) l)ittfc^ctt ? or, 933ol)itt foil id) mid) f c^cn ?
Here he sat down in the armchair by the window.
^icr f c^tc cr fid) in bcit Scl)nftttl)l ati)^ fjcnftcr, — @ t o r m.
19. English man is usually rendered by bcr SOlcnfd^ or
bcr SO^ann. Never use matt (§ 57).
(1) !Der Sy^ettfcf) (be^ SJ^ettfc^ett) is used in the general
sense of person, human being (Latin homo).
Man proposes, God disposes.
^cr SJlcnf d) bcnft, @ott Icttft. — @prid)tt)ort.
12 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 21.
Man errs as long as he strives.
e^ hrt bcr aWcnfd), folang^ cr ftrcbt. — @ o c t ^ c.
(2) '^tv Wlann (bte SJ^dnner) is used for man as distin-
guished from woman (Latin vir). It is also the common
word for husband, ber (^atte and ber @ema^( being more
formal.
He was a real man. dr toav tin center SJJatttt.
YoM German men, say no, you German women, join in !
^^r bctttfd)Ctt Mmntx, rufct ncin, i^r bctttfd)Ctt IJrttucn, ftimmct
ettt ! — 2) a "^ Ti.
T!^e husband, the protection and refuge of the wife; the wife, the
ornament of the husband, '^cr SSlann bciS 993ctbc^ @t^u^ unb ^ort,
bai8 295cili bc^ ajiatmc^ 3icr. — ^reiligrat^.
Exercises.
20. (a) 1. Decline : ettt romtfc^er (Senator, bte beutfcf)e
Saffe, eittige Seute, ba^ erfte 3<a^r^unbert. 2. (?a'e ^/ie
principal parts of : gel)en, fe^ett, [eitt, ^aben, fi^en, fe^en,
bitten.
(h) 1. Which sentences in § 12 illustrate the transposed
order? 2. What is the part of a transposed sentence
that makes most trouble ? 3. Find illustrations of the
transposed order in §§17 and 19. 4. Point out in § 12
three different uses of 'tio., 5. Find an example of § 17, 1
in § 15, 2 ; of § 19, 1 in § 6, 2 ; of § 19, 2 in § 4. 6. Find
in § 17 one sentence illustrating both § 17, 2 and § 17, 3.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize : 1. ^arf id} VLXtl
3^r ^n^ bitten? 2. Sa« \)ahcn ®ie mid) gefragt?
3. 3rf) fage 3I)nen, e« tft ntdjt \>a. 4. 5Ber Wxit nod)
gragen ftellen? 5. ^itte, fe^en (2ie fid) bovt biiitcn!
6. 3<e^t bin id) ttJteber ba!
21. (a) 1. He asked if Miss Fisher were here. 2. I
asked the man to sit down. 3. As he wasn't sitting at
Chap. 2.]
TRANSPOSED ORDEB.
13
his own seat, the teacher asked him to sit down over there
(§ 18, 2). 4. And then we asked the man a couple more
questions. 5. As she asked so courteously for the book,
we told her (§ 15, 2, Note a) that she could have it.
6. Did you ask after her health ?
(5) 1. For hours the man sat there in (an) the same seat.
2. If you are looking for his house, why don't you ask some
3.
The Porta Nigra, or Black Gate, at Trier.
Roman ruin in Germany.
■The most imposing
one the number ? 3. The teacher asked so many ques-
tions, that the pupil asked him to stop. 4. As you are
here again, I will ask you to sit down over there. 5. He
asked me what I wanted, and I. asked him for his knife.
6. No man can answer all the questions [which] a child
asks.
14 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [| 2L
(c) T7ie Germans in Rome. — 1. Many years ago the Ro-
mans asked some Germans to see the combats in the Colo-
seum. 2. There the Germans saw some men, who were
fitting among the Eoman senators, but who were not
Romans. 3. When the Germans asked their friends who
these men were, they were told (\aQtt man i^nen) that these
people were strangers. 4. They had distinguished them-
selves by their fidelity to the Romans. 5. Then the Ger-
mans went over there and sat down by (ju) the strangers.
6. They said that no man excelled the Germans.
CHAPTER III.
WORD ORDER — TRANSPOSED. COMPOUND TENSES.
Dtetrtd? t>on Bern.
22. 5t(te beutfc^e ^agen er3a{)Ien, ba§ ^tetric^ Hon -Q3ern
aUe anberen tonige befiegt ^abe. ^J^orf) anbere (Sagen er-
^(i^ten t)on Siegfrieb, ber ben T)rac^en erfd)(ng. !Da beibe
4. The Tomb of Theodoric at Ravenna. — The most important
Gothic monument in existence. The roof is hewn from a single
huge rock and weighs nearly a million pounds.
^elben hx^tv in jebem ^'antpfe gefiegt fatten, fnrrf)tete fic^
ber eine nic^t t)or bent anberen.
!l)te f(^i3ne ^riemt)t(be^ b ie 53rant (Siegfrieb^, fagte i^rent
15
16 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§24.
SSerfobten, bag er mit :t)tetric^ fdmpfen fode. (giegfrieb n)ar
unt)ertt)unbbar, ireU er fic^ im T)xa6)tnhlut gebabet ^atte, aber
^Dietric^ fc^Iug i^n fo ^eftig, baj? er oI)nmdrf)tig ^u ^riem-
^t(ben^ gitgen nieberfan! unb nun alfo ber ^efiegte n)ar.
^ietrid^ fd)en!te i^nt ba^ Seben unb fet)rte mieber unbefiegt
in feine §etmat guritcf.
Syntax.
23. Transposed Order — Compound Tenses. — With com-
pound tenses in the dependent order, the auxiliary is
put at the end of the clause, whether it is an auxiliary
of tense (f)aben, fein, irerben) or of mode (burfen, fbnnen,
and so on). The infinitive or participle comes just
before the auxiliary.
(1) As the auxiliary is the element that tells mode,
tense, voice, person, and number and so gives definite-
ness to the sentence, it is appropriate that it should
occupy a more emphatic place — the end position —
than infinitive or participle. Thus German clauses are
always periodic. (German generally uses the past tense
in narrative, but in § 22 the perfect is used, the better
to illustrate compound tenses.)
He said that he would come. @r fagtc, ba^ cr fommcn luitrbe.
What is once printed belongs to the whole world for all time.
aSttiS ciumal gcbrutft ift, jjcljort bcr ganjcn 9Bc(t auf cniiflc S^itcn.
— Vefjiug.
It was a branch that he had fastened to a dead tree.
e§ war cin %\i, ben cr an cincn biirren ©aunt gcbunbcn ^attc.
— @ r i m ni.
Notes.
24. Historical Note. — Theodoric the Great was ruler of the
East (joths, a German tribe living on the Danube. lie led his
people across the Alps to settle in Italy, and in 490 a.d. won a
Chap. 3.] TRANSPOSED ORDER. 17
great battle at Verona (53crn) which left Northern Italy in his
hands. He established his capital at Ravenna and was recognized
as the greatest of the German cliieftains. After his death (526)
the Gothic power fell away before the Lombards, who were in turn
to give way to the more powerful Franks, by whom the first Ger-
man Empire was to be founded. But Theodoric of Verona,
S)ietri{^ Don 33ent, has always been a central figure in German
legend.
25. English to be afraid of is ft(^ f iirt^tCtt (reg., aux. ^aben)
trnr with the dative.
He was afraid of the dog. (£r fur(i|tctc fid^ tior bcm ^mibc,
I am afraid of no one but you.
^t^ fiirj^tc mid) nit^t, tior fctttcm, at§ nnv oor Mr. — §et) fe.
26. English so has two common German renderings: fo
and alfo.
(1) As an adverb of manner or degree in the sense of
thus, so is German fo. (So is also used to translate the first
as in comparisons, like as good as, fo gut (tt>te), as far as, fo
votit (lt)ie).
I meant it so. ®o ^bc ir^^!§ gcmcittt
The concealer is as bad as the stealer.
^cr ^c^lcr ift fo f djlimm ttiic bcr ®tc!^(cr. — @^ric^tt)ort.
But everything that drove me to it was oh ! so good, so dear.
^o(^ aMt^ ttiaS mid^ ba^u trieb, ^r>it ! mar fo gut, at^ ! tout fo (teb.
— @oetl)e.
(2) In the sense of then (therefore), so is^ usually German
alfo, which never means English also.
So you will come at ten. Sie fommcn ttlfo urn scljn.
So we can be as dilatory as we icish.
Wiv fottitcn a(fo fo tticitlaufig fcitt, mic tt»ir tooUcn. — ®d)tUer.
Note. — For thafs so, just so, thaVs true, thaVs right, German
uses the adverb ebcu.
18 GERMAN COMPOSITION. I§ 29.
27. English to conquer is fiCQCn or ficflCflClt. Both are
weak verbs and take ^abeit as auxiliary, but fiegen is in-
transitive. So when conquer is transitive, befiegen must be
used. 53efiegen never means besiege (belagerti).
The Germans conquered (won). "Die Dcutft!)cn fteQten.
The Germans conquered the Romans.
Die Dctttfd)cn befiegten bic JRiimer.
Yo^i must conquer or fall ; conquered by one is conquered hy all.
Dtt mu^t fiegett ober fallen ; befiegt bon etnem ift bcftegt bon alien.
— @d)itler.
28. English to tell has two common translations in Ger-
man : crgafilcn and fagcm
(1) (Srjci^Ien (reg., aux. '^aben) means to relate, and is
used chiefly of telling stories or relating events.
You told us an interesting story.
®ic ^aben nn^ eine intereffante ©efr^id)te erjoljlt*
7'Z/ tell you a funny tale.
^d) wiU end) erjolilen ein 9JJard)en gar ft^nnrrig. — Surger.
(2) i^agen (reg., aux. ^aben) is used in less formal cases
for to tell somebody (dat.) something (ace.) or to tell somebody
(dat.) to do something (clause).
What shall I tell him ? 9Ba^ foU id) il)m fagen ?
Please tell him to come here.
$itte fagen 8ie it)m, '^a^ er ^ierber fommen foU.
You didnH tell her of my visit ?
Dn l)aft \\)x nidjt )iif>\\ meincm iBcfud) gefagt ? — 5 1 o v in.
29. English the one(s) has three common renderings in
German.
(1) As a demonstrative, especially before the relative
(ber or It)e(c^er), theoyie is usually translated by the demon-
strative ber, bic, bad. The relative cannot be omitted in
German,
Chap. 3.] TRANSPOSED ORDER. 19
Is John the one you mean f ^ft ^oljattn tstx, bctt ®!C mcilicn ?
I am the one who huilt it. ^d^ bin i>er, bcv C^ bautc.
— Ap a u p t in a n n.
Woe to the one who (tells) lies. 293cl|^ bem, ber lugt*
— @ r i It p a r 3 e r.
Note. — In more formal style berjenige (biejeuifle, baSienige, gen.
begjcnigeu, etc.) may be used for the one (loho) instead of ber. It is
rare in conversation.
(2) For one, the one in contrast with one or more others
(anbere) German uses ber etne.
One translated loell, the other didnH.
^er ctttc \)ai gut iiberfe^t, ber anbcrc m^i,
■ The one was a head taller than the other.
^cr cine war eiuen ^opf grii^er at§ ber anbere. — SBilbenbruc^.
(3) For one following an English adjective, as the 7ieiv
one, German uses simply the inflected adjective following
the definite article. It must have the gender of the noun to
which it refers.
That isnH my hat ; mine is the little one.
^a^ ift mein ^nt mdjt ; ber Heine geprt inir.
I had a comrade ; youUl not find a better one.
^dj Ijatt^ einen ^amcraben, cincn bcffern finbft bn nit (nidjt).
— U()(onb.
30. English other is usually anbcr or noc§ ein.
(1) 5lnber (-er, -e, -e^) means other when used in the sense
of different.
Bring me another cup ; this is cracked.
©ringen @ie ntir eine anbere %n\\t ; biefe Ijat einen S^rnng.
He can go some other time.
@r !ann ein anbre§ WaX (or ein anbermat) geljcn.
What you donH want done to you, donH do another.
938a§ bn nidjt ttiiUft, baj? man bir ixV, ba^ fitg^ and) feinent anbern
jn. [The ' ' golden rule " in German] — ® |) r i (^ lu o r t.
/ cannot do otherioise. I^d) fann nid)t anber^. — V u t de r.
^0 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [5 31.
jV'oie. — English else is usually anber in positive statements, jonft in
questions.
To-morrow he xoill begin something else.
aiiorgen fcingt er tiwa^ anbcre^ an. — Xt)oma.
What else., by the Styx 9 There is nothing else f
2Ba« jonft, bcim @tt) j ? 9^i(i|t8 anbcrS gibt'8. — 1 1 e i ft.
(2) 9^orf) ein means other in tlie sense of one more of the
same kind. 9^od) should always be used in asking for more
of anything.
Bring me another cup of coffee ; it tastes fine.
a3ntt8en ®ic mtr no(^ ctnc %a^t toffee ; er fd)merft ttortrefflid)
(compare § 30, 1, first example).
He can go once more {one more time).
@r fanu nod) einmat geljen (compare § 30, l, second example).
Another bite., and ifs done.
9lottf cinen Si^ fo ift'g geft^c^en. — @ o e 1 1) e.
Exercises.
31. (a) 1. Decline: }eber ^ampf, bie alte beutfd)e ^age,
ba?^ !Drad)enb(ut. 2. Give the ^mndpal parts of : erfd)(agen,
nieberftnfen, fc^enfen, juritdfe^ren.
(h) 1. Which sentences in § 22 illustrate the transposed
order for compound tenses ? 2. When does an English
verb come at the end of a subordinate clause ? 3. Find
illustrations of the transposed order in § 30. 4. Find an
example of § 30, 1 in § 29, 2. 5. Find in § 26 one exam-
ple which illustrates both § 26, 1 and § 26, 2. 6. Memo-
rize the last examples in § 29, 1 and § 30, 1.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize : 1. ^llfo fiird)te
bid) nic^t ! 2. ^omm bo^ fo fd)nel( \mt mdglid) ! 3. ^c^
l)ab' e^ i^m fd)on flefagt. 4. !Dcr cine xot\% t^, ber anbere
nid)t. 5. @eben (2ie mir, bitte, nod) cinen :33of;cn *=Papier.
6. 3c^ ()abe gtoei §iite ; ber a(te ift gran, ber neue fdjiuarj.
Chap. 3.] TRANSPOSED OBDER, 21
32. (a) 1. I'm not afraid of any man (§§9 and 19, 1).
2. A saga tells that Siegfried had usually won, but Dietrich
conquered him. 3. I told him that I had been looking
for something else. 4. The Germans were not so much
afraid of the Romans after Hermann had conquered them.
5. She told me that she would bring another book. 6. The
one told the other that he did not mean it so.
(b) 1. Did you tell him to (ba§ er , . . fottte) bring an-
other cup of tea? 2. This is my old hat, but I have
another one. 3. The teacher told us that this exercise
would not be so hard as the other one. 4. If it is, he
will give us another easier one. 5. Perhaps he will tell
us a story, how Dietrich conquered Siegfried. 6. The
one was not so much afraid as the other.
(c) Siegfried and Dietrich, — 1. An old saga tells us that
Siegfried had always conquered when he fought. 2. So
Kriemhilde told him to conquer Dietrich. 3. The one
was not afraid of the other. 4. But Dietrich struck Sieg-
fried so hard that he sank down unconscious. 5. These
two heroes are the ones of whom we have heard so often.
6. Siegfried is the younger one, Dietrich the older one.
CHAPTER IV.
REVIEW.
33. The Germans use the particle bcnn in almost every
spoken question. It is not translated in English. When
it would otherwise come at the end of a sentence, it is often
followed by etgentltc^, really.
What's that ? SBa^ tft beuit ba§ ?
Where are you going f 9!Bol)iu flcljcn 8ic bcnn etflcnt(id) ?
Beally ? Hoio so ? Ifoic so ?
393al)Htd)? 29Sicfobcnn? ^ic bcnn fo '? — ?efiing.
Why does he have to go to Capri 9
SBarum mn^ cr bcnn nad) 6a^ri ? — 1? e i) f p.
Exercises.
34. (a) 1. Explain in detail the inverted and trans-
posed orders. 2. Illustrate each with sentences of your
own making and also with quotations from the authors
cited in the text.
(6) 1. Make a list of the different classes of nouns that
have already appeared in the German stories. 2. Make a
list of the classes of strong or irregular verbs that have
already been used in the German stories.
(c) Conversational Idioins. Memorize: 1. ^ilnio ift betin
ba«? 2. Ser ift benn fertifl? 3. So UHil)nen 2ie
benn etf^entlic^? 4. Sffier I)at benn noc^ eine i^-rai^e '^n
fte((en? T). ^\{{t, moKen etc un<J bic (<»^efcf)tcf)te er3a^(en?
(). Sa^ fud)en v^ie benn, ein anbrei< ^nd) ?
22
Chap. 4.] REVIEW. 23
35* (a) 1. If she asks for another sheet of paper, why
don't you give it to her ? 2. I haven't the book of
which (lt)ot)on) you told us. 3. Where is the one I asked
for (iDorum) ? 4. He was so afraid, that the other man
conquered him. 5. So I told them that they shouldn't
ask any more (§§9 and 30, 2) questions. 6. For a whole
hour we waited for the man, while (ind^rettb) he was look-
ing for his money.
(b) 1. It was many weeks ago that you told us the story
of Hermann. 2. As long as (folancje) my father lived,
we lived on (in ber) Charles Street. 3. xVs the boy told
the teacher he was sick, the teacher did not ask him any
questions. 4. A week ago, as the boy didn't have any
money, he asked his father for a quarter (ettie 3}lar!).
5. Please sit over there where I can see you better.
6. So he told her that he did not want to ask any ques-
tions.
(c) 1. I told him that one or the other must conquer.
2. Please give me another pen ; haven't you a good
one ? 3. This isn't the one I asked for ; this is an
old one. 4. In another saga they (man) tell how Die-
trich had conquered Siegfried. 5. He was afraid of the
teacher who asked him such hard questions, so he sat very
quiet in his seat. 6. jSTo man can ask so many questions
as a child.
CHAPTER V.
WORD ORDER. POSITION OF mttjt
Karl 6er ©rofe in 6er Sd^ule.
36. tarl ber @rof?e be{)errfc^te beina()e bie ^an'^^t (5f)riften*
^ett, aber er fonnte faunt (efen unb fc^reiben. 311^ er iilter
murbe, tpimfd)te er t^aii
nacf)^ul)olen, wa^ er in
feiner 3uc\enb nid)t ge*
ternt I)atte. 3lber feiner
fd)meren ,f)anb tt)o(Ite ei<
nic^t neliniien, bie feinen
iBuc^ftaben ,^u mac^en.
5U^ er an feine ^ugenb
bacf)te, in ber er ba^
9?eiten nnb ged^ten fo
Ieid)t gelernt I)atte, mngte
er fenfgen.
„Sa^ !ann id^ bafnr/'
fac^te er, Mf> nieine .'panb
nid)t an bie Ieid)te geber,
fonbern an bavj fdjmere
^djmert gen)o()nt ift!
3lber ma^ unrb man non
einem ,Shii|er benfcn, ber
feinen 9lamen nid)t fd)rei=
ben fann?" "Tod) brand)-
te ^aifer ,^ar( feinen '3iamcn nid)t mit ber gebcr 3n fd)reiben,
24
5. Charlemagne. — From a painting
by Albrecht Diirer in the Germanic
Museum at Nuremberg.
Chap. 5.] POSITION OF ^fJic^t* 25
benn er i^at if)n mit feinen 3:aten in \)a^ S^nd) ber ^eiten
gefc^rteben.
Syntax.
37. Position of mrf|t — When nti^t modifies the whole
clause, it comes at or near the end. In main clauses
with simple tenses it comes at the end (e), except that a
separable prefix follows it (a). In main clauses with
compound tenses it comes just before the participle
or infinitive (5). In subordinate clauses it comes just
before tlie verb, whether simple or compound (c) ; with
infinitive phrases, just before git (c?).
(a) I won't admit that. ^a§ gcbe id) ntdjt gu.
(&) I haven'' t seen him the last few days.
^d) Ijabc il)n in bicfctt Jc^tcit Xa^m ttid)t gcfcljctt,
(c) He looked as if he hadnH understood.
(5r fol) att)§, a(^ ob cr nidjt ucrftanbcit ^tte.
{d) They don't wish to go. @ie ttiiinfcljcn nid)t ju gdien.
(e) jy<? couldn't see the wood for the trees.
©r f o!| ben SBaJb bor (outer Siiumen nid)t. — @^rirf)tt)ort.
^o^e. — The above rule, and in fact most rules for German order,
are special cases of the general principle that in the predicate of a Ger-
man sentence the more important parts come last. Of course, there
are exceptions, but it is interesting to apply this rule to the many
apparent peculiarities of German order. The negative is naturally,
with the exception of the verb, the most important element in the
predicate ; hence its position.
(1) When nic§t does not modify the whole clause, it
stands just before the particular word or phrase it
negatives.
You gave it to me, not to him. Sic l)aben ei§ ntir, ni^i \\)m gegeben.
Who himself is not farther than you, can't bring you any farther.
9Ber felbft ntrfjt weiter tft al§ ^vi^ ber !ann bid) and) nidjt meiter
bnngen. — 9i ii cf e r t.
26 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§40.
Notes.
38. Historical Note. — After the death of Theodoric (526) the
power of the Goths declined, and later another German tribe, the
Franks, gained the supreinacy. Of the Franks the greatest was
Charles the Great or Ckarlemaf/ne, as he is also called (768-814).
(In this book the dates of rulers are usually those of their reigns.)
He occupies as important a place in German history as Dietrich
von Bern does in German myths. The last great figure in a long
line of powerful Frankish kings, he extended the Frankish king-
dom to include France, Germany, and part of Italy, and on Christ-
mas Day, 800, the Pope at Rome crowned him Emperor of the
Germans, the so-called Revival of the Roman Empire in the West.
But this glory was of short duration. In 843, only twenty-nine
years after his death, his realm fell to pieces, never again to be
united in its entirety.
39. English to helj) has two common German renderings.
(1) To help in the sense of to assist is !^elfen (^a(f, ge=
^olfen, aux. ^aben), followed by the dative.
Will you please help me ? SBittc, ttioUcit 3tc mir I|effen ?
I canH help you, child, ^d) foiin bir ttit^t ^clfen, ^inb. — Ap e i) f e.
(2) The English idiom help it is rendered by bafiir. For
the negative either nicf)t or ntd)tv5 may be used.
I couldn't help it. '^d) foimtc iiidjt bafiir.
He caiiH help it. ^tx faitii ttiditfi* bafiir. — S i I b e u b r u d).
Note. — When the English idiom help is followed by a verbal in -ing
{he can't help crying), German usually says simply to have to, miiffen.
I couldn't help believing it. 3cf) mu^te cS glaubcn.
40. English to want (to), to ivish (to), has two German
equivalents : tOoUcn and hjunfc^cn*
(1) SSotten (reg., aux. ^aben, pres., ic^ Wiii, bu \mii\t) means
will, intend to, or ivant to. It is less definitely a wish than
U)iinfd)en and is followed by the infinitive without ^u.
Chap. 5] POSITION OF ^xdjt 27
He imnted to go home. @r ttioUtC itad) ^nufe flcljcn.
WonH you take off your wraps? 23SoUcn (Sic ttidjt ttblcgctt?
/ will not — will not hear.
^d) wiU ntct)t — Witt tttti)t Ijoreit. — ^auptmann.
(2) 5Biin|d)en is used for the definite expression of a wish
for something. It denotes an immediate desire, and is
rather rare in conversation. For purposes of variety it
may replace iDoKen, but it is really more formal, to desire,
while IDottett is more to ivant.
What do you wish ? 2Ba^ ttJUttfd)cn Sic ?
I wish for a hall for my birthday !
3um (^cbiirt^tag ttJiinfdjc id) mix cinctt S8aU»
It is easy to icish for too much.
Wan wiinf djct Icid)t jum Ubcrftu^, — U f) ( a n b.
41. English to think of is benfcn (barf)te, gebad)t, aux.
^aben) with an or Don.
(1) !l)enfen an (with the accusative) means to think of
in the sense of to consider, to remember.
I didn't think of that, ^avatt l)abc iti) m(i)t gcbad)t.
The gallant man thinks last of himself.
^er brotic Wlann bcn!t an fi(^ fclbft ^ntt^U — @ (i) i U e r.
Note. — For I shouldnH think of (such a thing), German says:
(Sg fdltt mir (gar) nid)t cin, It doesn't occur to me.
What are you thinking of? 2Ba^ fdllt bir etn ? — @ o e 1 1) e.
(2) "^enfen t)on (with the dative) means to think of only
in the sense of to have an opinion of
What do you think of him ? 2Ba^ bctt!ctt @tc boit il)m ?
That's what she thinks of me ! So bcnft fic bott ttttr ! — ^ r e t) t a g.
42. In English to get is used in countless ways. Its
three chief German equivalents are Befommen, fjolcn, and
tticrben*
28 GERMAN COMPOSITION. (§43.
(1) :53e!otnTnen (befatn, befommen, aux. ^aben) means to
get in the sense of to receive, to secure. It never means to
become (trerben).
What did you get for Christmas ?
933a§ Ijaft bu ju SScilittttdjtCtt befommeit ?
He wonH get anything from us old people, either.
Sott tttt§ 5tltett bc!ommt cr aud| nid)t^. — ® t o r m.
(2) ^f)o(en (reg., aux. l^aben) means to get in the sense of
to go and get, to fetch.
You must get some more paper. @tc IttuffCtt nod) ^a^ter ^olcit.
WeUl go into the forest and get wood.
9Btr ttJoUcn in \>tn 2Bttlb gc!|cn nnb ^0(5 bolcn. — @ r i m m.
(3) SBerben (ttjurbe, gett)orben, aux. fein) means to get only
in the sense of to become.
It's getting terribly hot here. ,f)ter Wtrb t^ furd)tbar Ijci^.
It is getting stiller in the streets.
SttUcr ttJirb c^ ouf ben Btva^crt. — tome r.
43. The English conjunction but has two German equiva-
lents.
(1) 5lber is generally used for but, in the sense of
however.
He was poor, hut proud. @r War arm, obcr fto(,v
They icere not tired, but we asked them to be seated.
<Bic maren ntd)t miibe, aber ttiir baten fie, fid) an fc^cn.
For many are called, but few are chosen.
^enn bide finb berufen, aber wenige finb aui^ertua^Iet.
— 53tbcl, ajJott. 20, 16.
Note. — In the second example above, though a negative precedes
hut, no contrast or alternative is indicated. ':}tber may follow the
subject or even the verb and object.
The adverb hut is nur ; nothing but is iiid)t^ Q.U.
But I loon't do it. 3c^ aber tuc e« uid)t, or, 3d) tiic c<5 nbor iud)t.
Chap. 5] POSITION OF 91^^ 29
We live but once [in the world'\.
Man Uht nur einmal in bcr 28e(t — @^ri(i)tt)ort.
One is desperately little when one is nothing but honest.
'Sflan ift DeqtDeifelt irenig, weim man titd)tg alg e^dic^ ift. — !^ e f fi n 0.
(2) @onbern, in the sense of but instead, but rather, is
used only to indicate an alternative after a negative.
He was not poor, but rich.
@r ttJor ntdjt arm, fonbertt rcirt).
But she didnH go past, but stopped.
%bev fie ging nit^t tfothci, fonbcrtt bticb ftctjcn. — 3 j d^ o f f e.
Exercises.
44. (a) 1. Decline: ^ar( ber (^roge, (tarl^ be^ ©rofeen),
bte (eid}te g^^^^^ ^<J^ f(^tt)ere ©c^mert. 2. 6^/ve «/ie prin-
cipal parts of : (efett, benfen, f(i)reiben, nai^()o(en, brauc^en.
(b) 1. Which sentences in § 36 illustrate the position of
nic^t? 2. Give the general principle for order in the
predicate of a German sentence. 3. Does the general
principle apply to transposed order? To inverted order?
4. Learn the last example before the Note in § 37, in § 41, 1,
and in § 43, 1, and the last example in § 43, 1, Note.
(c) Co7iversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. .^d) !ann TttC^t
baf iir! 2. "iBo iDoKen ®ie benn ^in? 3. (5r \)(ii aber
ni(f)t baratt gebac^t. 4. Sa^ faltt bit benn ein ? 5. ©o(e
nid)t ba^ rote ^uc^, fonbern '^a^ branne. 6. ^ttte, mein
gerr, ma^ tDUnfd)en ©ie?
45. (a) 1. As he would not get his books, the teacher
did not help him. 2. She got quite red, but she could
not help it. 3. I was not thinking of the long saga, but
of a shorter one. 4. What were you thinking of, when
you helped that pupil ? 5. I didn't help him, but his
little brother. 6. If she didn't want to help him, I
couldn't help it.
30
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
»45.
SB
tB' •i.M.J^'W^
^S
r^
1 j
" - ■ " , :*
./J
The Cathedral at Aachen.— The Carolingian part of the church,
under which Charlemagne was buried.
Chap. 5.] POSITION OF ^\^t 31
(b) 1. What do you think of this hat? Isn't it what
you wished? 2. I can't help it if you did not get a
good one. 3. She didn't want that little hat, but a
big black one. 4. I did not think of that, but of some-
thing else. 5. What did you get for your (^um) birth-
day? 6. It's getting very warm here, but I cannot
help it.
(c) Charlemagne. — 1. When Charles the Great became
Emperor, he wanted to learn to write. 2. His friends
helped him and got a pen and paper, but his hand wasn't
used to the pen, but to the sword. 3. He wished that
he had thought of it oftener, when he was young.
4. "I can't help it," he said, and he got quite angry.
5. "What will they (man) think of me?" he asked.
6. But Charles the Great did not write his name upon
paper, but in history.
CHAPTER VI.
WORD ORDER. POSITION OF ADVERBS.
Der Kolanbsbogen.
46. ^axl ber ^roge ^atte etnen ^effen, ber 9?oIanb l^ie^,
unb ber gem an alien gelbgitgen teilna^m. ^f^olanb, ber
noc^ nic^t t)er^eiratet inar, n>olIte nac^ feiner dlMk^v Don
einem gelb^ug nac^ (Spanien hk fc^dne §Ubegunb f)eiraten.
^^ tierging Idngere ^txt, utele Malt famen ^oten Dom
^rieg^fd)anplat^e, aber !etn etnjtge^ SJ^al l)orte man tUm^
t)on il)nt. -3a, eine 3^^^^^^9 W^^ ^^^^ i^^ foQ'^^ f»r
tot, benn man ^atte t^n iiberall uergeben^ G^fnc^t. <Setne
treue ^raut jeboc^ iDartete (ange anf i^n ; enblicf) ging fie
traurig in ein ^lofter.
9?olanb !el)rte aber fdjIie^Uc^ boc^ gurlicf unb Iiat bann
iiberall tiergiwifelt feine -^raut gefudjt. 31U er l)drte,
bag fie 9^onne geioorben fei, baute er ein Bd)io^, oon mo
au^ er auf i^r ^lofter ^inabfdjauen Jonnte. i^on biefem
(Sd)(o§ ftel)t je^t nur noc^ ein ein^,iger ^ogen. Ten
nennt man ben ^?olanb^bogen.
Syntax.
47. Position of Adverbs. — A single adverb has the
same position in the sentence as nic^t. When two or
more adverbs occur together, they follow the order
(1) time, (2) place, (3) manner. (Think of the num-
ber of letters in those three words : 4, 5, and 6.) Ad-
verbial phrases also follow this same order. This is
32
Chap. 6. J
POSITION OF ADVERBS.
33
7. Roland's Arch on the Rhine. — Some of the famous Seven Moun-
tains are seen in the distance.
only another phase of the general principle for order
in the predicate, § 37, Note.
We looked for the hook to-day eagerly everywhere ,
9Bir Ijobctt ba^ 83ttd) Ijcutc iiberaU cifrig gcfurfjt.
34 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§49.
He hasn't been therefor so long.
er tft fo langc md)t bort flcwcfcn. — 5 r e t) t a g.
Owe o/«en hears in the distant wood a muffled ringing from above.
9Katt ^8rct oft im fcritcn "ii&tiWi, tjon obculjer ctn bum^fc^ fiautcn.
— Ut)(anb.
(1) When an adverb modifies an adjective or another
adverb, it stands immediately before the word it qualifies.
It is most probable. &§ ift ^OtI)ft tt>al)rftI)Ctuntf).
Pm much better now. ^e^t ficl)t C^ mir t»icl bcffer.
The mills of God grind slowly, but they grind exceeding small.
^ottt^ ^ut)fen ma^Ien (angfam, ma^ien abcr treffltd) !letn.
— !?ogau.
Notes.
48. Historical Note. — In the battle of Tours (732) the Franks,
commanded by the grandfather of Charlemagne, drove the Mo-
hammedans (Moors) from Southern France back into Spain and
thus saved Europe to Christianity. But the Moors remained in
Spain until the year America was discovered (1492). All through
the Middle Ages, until the time of the Crusades to the Holy Land
(1095), pious knights used to go to Spain to fight the Moors. Of
these knights the most famous is Roland, about whom an interest-
ing group of legends has grown up similar to those of Dietrich
von Bern and Siegfried. Some of these tell how Roland was
killed at Roncesvalles in the Pyrenees on his return from one of
these campaigns. Still others tell the story as it is given here.
49. English to be called, to be named, is rendered in Ger-
man by ncnncn and ()ct^ctt»
(1) Bennett (nannte, fjenannt, aux. ^aben) is used both
actively and passively for to call, while t)ei§en has usually
only a passive meaning.
Elsewhere they call him a hero.
5(nbcrcin>o ncmit moii il)it ciucu .S?c(bcit. — ^ ii b c v in a u ii.
I must call this inadii'ss.
^ic^ mufe id) 3Bal)HJiuu iicimcn. — a> a u p t m a u a.
Chap. 6.] POSITION OF ADVERBS. 35
(2) geigen (^teg, ge^eigen, aux. l)aben) is used chiefly
for my name is, your name is, and so on.
What's your name, please 9 S8tttc, ttiic I)ei^en 'Bit ?
His name was Charles. @r l)ie^ ^orl.
Were I cautious, my name ivould not be Tell.
933ar^ ^ bcfonttcn, l)ic|' id) ni^^^t bcr S^cU. — @(f)illcr.
iVb^e. — In the classroom to be (translated) is regularly rendered
by ^ei^en.
What is that in German f 2Bic ^ei^t baS auf bcutfd) ?
WJiat is the whole passage ? 3Sie ^ei^t bie ganje ©telle? — ^effing.
50. The English word time has several German trans-
lations.
(1) !©ie ^txt is used in the general sense of duration of time.
The times are hard. l5ic ^txitn ftnb fd)tticr»
I have no time to be tired, ^d) ^abc fcinc ^txi, tnitbc Jtt f citt.
— taiferSBiltjelml.
(2) (Sine 3^it^^^9^ ^sed only in the accusative case, is
the regular equivalent of English for a time. Compare § 5.
For a time Hived in Hermann Street.
@ittc Bcttlang I|ttbc id) in bcr ^crmannftra^c gctt)ol)nt.
For a time he walked up and down in his room.
@r ging ciitc ^citlang in fcincm 3i»tntcr auf unb uiebcr. — >e t o r m.
Note. — Do not confuse this with a long time, which German ren-
ders simply by the adverb lange.
Hooked for it a long time. 3(i) ))<xbz eg tange gejurf)t.
Durer's answer was a long time coming.
2)iirer8 Stnttuort blieb lange aug. — §iUeru.
(3) !^a^ 3)ia( (bie 9}^a(e) is used to denote a particular time.
ril be glad to go some other time.
(gin ottbcrcig 9Wa( (also written eitt onbcrmat) gcljc id^ gem.
She was wrong both times. Sic \^at fid) bctbc Wlalt gctrrt.
Because he had given in the first time he had to also for the second
time. 993ci( tx ba§ crftc 9Jltt( ttttd)gc8cbctt Ijattc, fo mu^tc cr c§ aud)
sum smcitcn 9JlaI. — @ r i m in.
36 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§ 51.
Note. — Sometimes is always jutuetlen. Once, twice, three times,
and so on are einmal, ^Wtimal, brcimor, and so forth. How many
times is ttJtc oft.
Sometimes I eat four times a day. 3"^^^^^" ^\U ^ Diermot toglid).
Hoio many times have you been in Germany?
SSic oft itiaren @ie fc^on in 3)eutfd)ta:ib ?
07ice doesnH count. (Sinmat ift feinmat. — ®pric^tt)ort.
(4) What time is it ? is SietJtel Uf)r ift e^? or 2Bie fpat
ift e^? O'clock is also translated by U^r. As in the case
of English o^clock, U^r is omitted when it is not exactly the
even hour.
What time is it ? It is ten o'^clock.
SBtcoicI Ul)r ift ciS ? or, g^ic f^St ift c^ ? ©§ ift 5cl)n UI|r.
(At) what time must we be there ?
Urn mictiicl U!)r miiffcii n>tr fd|on ba fcitt ?
It was Jive o'' clock in the afternoon.
@^ war fitttf U^r iiat^mittog^. — ^ i H e lu r o n.
Note. — In telling the quarter and half hours, German reckons
toward the coming hour. Thus quarter past twelve becomes ettt
iUertct txn^\ half past twelve, \)(dh cin^. In quarter to one, German
counts the hour three quarters gone, and says brci S^icrtel Ctllfii.
Minutes are expressed as in English, Uor or nad^ the hours.
(5) To have a good time is fief) (gut) amitfieren. Never
say eine gute ^txt ^aben.
Did you have a good time ? ^aft bit bid) (|ut nmitficrt ?
Yes, I had a splendid time, ^a, id) I)abc mid) Vrfld)tuoU amiificrt.
He'^s having as good a time as a pug dog in a table drawer (that is,
he is bored to death).
(Sr amiificrt fid) mic bcr 9Ko^^ im 2:ifd)!aftcn. — ®prid)tt)ort.
51. English to marry is translated in German by tier=
l^ctratcn and f)ctratcn.
(1) 33ert)eiraten (reg. insep., aux. ^aben) is the commoner.
It means to give in marriage {to, mit). The adjective mar-
Chap. 6.] POSITION OF ADVERBS. 37
7'ied is always tier'^etratet, never ge'^eiratet. To get married
(to) is the reflexive \i(i) t)er^eiraten (mtt).
You are engaged ; when do you get married f
^crfobt fittb Sic f j^oit ; manit wcrbcti ®tc fid^ ticrl)eiratctt ?
She married her daughter to a count.
©ic Ijat iljrc Xod^tcr mit eittcm (SJrafcit t»er^ciratct,
^e i/?as never married. (Sr ttiar tttc ticr^ctratct — § e t) j e.
(2) §eiratett (reg., aux. I^aben) is used actively of both
man and woman.
He (she) married her (him). @r (fic) I)Ot ftc (tl|n) {JCl^CtratCt.
Julia, the daughter, married a land-owner.
Sttlcrl (dialect), bie %o^itx, \\ai cinctt (SJut^beft^cr ge^eirotct.
— 9{ j e g g e r.
Exercises.
52. (a) 1. Decline: eitt 9^effe, feine treue ^raut, fetn
einjtge^ 30la(, biefe^ (S(l)to6- 2. 6r^^'e ^/^e principal parts of:
t)erl)eiratett, fatten, fommen, fte^en, ^tnabfe^en.
(h) 1. Which sentences in § 46 illustrate the position or
order of adverbs ? 2. What is the simplest way to re-
member the order of adverbs ? 3. In what way is
this rule a phase of the general principle, § 37, Note ?
4. Find an example of the order of adverbs or adverbial
phrases in § 50, 2.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. SSte !^ei^t ha^
auf beutfc^, auf englifc^? 2. (Ste fagen, (Ste fatten feine
3eit? 3. 3ft S¥ greunb tjer^eiratet? 4. Stetjtet
Uf)r ift e^? T)rei ^tertef ^e^iti* 5. Sir ^abett uM |)rad)t^
t)o(( amltfiert. 6. '^k^ ift bag le^e SJ^at, bag td)'^ 3^nen
fage.
53. (a) 1. What was her name before he married her ?
2. Her name was Margaret, but after she was married, her
38 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [i S3.
husband called her Gretchen. 3. We looked for the
glove for a long time over- there. 4. He asked you
politely twice, what time it is. 5. At quarter to nine
we are sometimes here at school. 6. The last time I
went to the theatre I had a fine time.
(6) 1. This is the last time that I shall ask you what
that is in German. 2. What do they call a woman
who has married once, but is no longer (mel)r) married ?
3. It is now nearly ten o'clock, and you tell me that you
hadn't any time ! 4. Did you have a good time when
you lived for a time in Charles Street ? 5. The first
time that we lived there, we wanted to stay there a long
time. 6. I looked for a friend eagerly for a long time,
but did not find a single person (§ 19, 1) whom I knew.
(c) The Kniglit Roland. — 1. The nephew of Charlemagne,
named Roland, wanted to marry a beautiful girl called
Hildegund. 2. The last time that he took part in a
campaign, she waited for a time for him. 3. They told
her he was dead, but she thought so much of him that she
never thought of marrying another. 4. As she got no
news of him for months, she finally went sadly into a con-
vent. 5. For a long time no man knew that Roland
lived. 6. When he finally returned, no one could help
it, that Hildegund had not waited for him.
CHAPTER VII.
WORD ORDER. POSITION OF OBJECTS.
^etnrtd? bet Pogler.
54. 511^ tontg tonrab ftarb, fannten bie beutfc^en giirften
nur einen SD^ann, §eittrtc^ tjon (Sarfifen, ber ftar! genug tuar.
8. The Castle Church at Quedlinburg. — The tomb of Henry the
Fowler is beneath the grating in the foreground.
fic^ auf bent Zi)vom gu befiaupten. ®o be[c^(o§en fie, biefem
§er^og bie ^'rotte an^,ubieten. ^etnrirf) befanb fi(^ batnat^ auf
bem 33oge(fang, unb er n^ugte nod) ni^t^ t)on feiner SSat)L
39
40 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§56.
5l(^ fic^ t^tn bie I'lberbrtnoer ber :^otfc^aft nd^erten,
fd)eu(^ten fie bte 33dge( tneg. T)a rief @einric^ : „3Ba^ njotten
bie fitter benn? T)ie gerren t)erberben mir htn Qanjen
^ogetfang." 5(ber al^ man i^m fagte, bag er ^um tonig
erlDa^It tt)are, rief er au^ : „T)u gabft mir einen guten gang,
§err ®ott, it»ie bir'^ gefcittt." (Seitbem nennt man it)n
„§einrid^ ben iBogler."
Syntax.
55. Order of Objects. — The order of objects in Ger-
man is like the English order. A single object fol-
lows immediately after the verb. Of a direct and
indirect object, the indirect (dative) usually precedes
when both are nouns, and follows when both are pro-
nouns. When one object is a pronoun and the other
a noun, the pronoun precedes.
I gave the boy my book, ^d) Ijabc bcm ^nabcn mcin ^\\d^ flCficbcn.
He gave it to his sister. (Sr I)at c§ fcincr Sd)Wcftcr flcficbcii.
She gave it back to me. Bit l)ttt c^ mir suriirfflcgcbcu.
He told me so to-day, himself.
©r fclbft Ijot c^ mir ^cutc gcfagt. — ^ r e t) t o g.
Note. — In the sentence, / gave my brother the book, if you want
to emphasize to whom you gave the book, you say : 3cl) l)abc ba8 53ud)
mcinem S3ruber gegcben. But if you want to emphasize tchat you gave
your brother, you say: ^d) ^abe meincm 33rubcr baS 53ud) gcgcbcu.
Compare this with the general principle, § 37, Note.
Notes.
56. Historical Note. — In less than a hundred years after the
death of Charles the Great, his empire had not only separated into
the two great divisions later to be known as France and (Germany,
but even the title of Emperor, borne for a time by the kings
of Germany, had fallen into disuse (809). However, the idea of
the Empire had not died out, and it was revived later by the
Chap. 7.) POSITION OF OBJECTS. 41
Saxon kings of Germany. The first of this family, Henry the Fowler
(919-936), extended the eastern boundaries of Germany, built
strongholds on the frontier, and beat back the Hungarians. This
work of extension and defence was carried on by his son Otto I
(936-973). In the battle of the Lech/eld (955) Otto defeated the
Hungarians so decisively that they never again invaded Christen-
dom, but instead accepted Christianity and later became a part of
the Empire. Having now united the different parts of Germany,
Otto felt powerful enough to lead an army into Italy and to
restore the Empire under the name of " The Holy Roman Empire
of the German Nation" (962).
57. The German man must not be confused with ber
3}Zann (§ 19, 2). ^an is used to translate the impersonal
use of they, we, one, you, in expressions like they say, 07ie
often hears, and so on. It begins with a small letter and is
always singular. It has for the possessive, feitl, for the
dative, etnem, and for the accusative, einen.
They say the man cannot live.
aWait fagt, bcr 9Jlann fonnc ntt^t (cben.
Hoio do you get to the station f
SBic fommt matt ttad) bcttt Saljttl)of ?
They sat down at the table, Elizabeth at Beinhardfs side.
Wm\ fc^tc fid) ait ben Xifrf), ©Hfabctli m DfJcin^arbt^ Seitc,
— <S 1 r m.
58. English to know has three German translations :
toiffcn, fcnncn, and fiinncn*
(1) i£3iffen (iDU^te, geiDugt, \6) iueig, aux. ^aben) means
to have knowledge of. It has to do with acts of the mind.
The forms of the present, bu IDet^t, etc., must not be con-
fused with forms of H)ei§en, to whiten, and tceifen, to direct.
He didn't know that. ^a§ ttltt^tc er mti)t
I do not know what it means.
^H} ttici^ tttdjt, ttia§ foU t§ bebctttcn. — § e i n e.
42 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§59.
(2) ^ennen (fannte, gefannt, aux. ^aben) means to be
acquainted with. It usually has to do with what the eye
can see.
DonH you know him f Bennett 8ic il)tt bcnn ntt^t ?
He does not know you ; hut I do.
@r fcnnt VxH) m^i, ir^ abcr fcnuc biji^, — @c^ titer.
(3) Stinnett (fonnte, gefonnt, ic^ fann, aux. ^aben), aside
from its regular use as an auxiliary, to he able, can, is also
used as a transitive verb meaning to know how to do, to be
master of. It applies to what one has learned to do, and is
used in this sense chiefly of languages.
I don't know {can't speak) English, ^d) frtitn fcin GngUfd).
He knoivs- German, ^tv fanii ^Ctttflt). — § e b b e (.
Note. — (rt) Good illustrations of the difference between tuifjcn and
fbnnen are shown in the following sentences :
SSiffen ift gut, bod) fonnen ift beffer. — @ c i b e I.
2)a« ^l^ubUfiim (public), ha^ ift ein SD'Jann,
2)er aUe§ \m\^ unb gar nic^t^ faun. — 2. ijRobert.
(h) One of the best illustrations of the difference between fennen
and fonnen is the following sentence referring to the paintings in the
Sistine Chapel at Rome :
The chapel I know right loell^ I know the paintings almost by heart.
2)ie ^apelle fenne id) red)t gnt, id) fann bie ©emdibe fa ft answenbtg.
— ©oet^e.
(c) The following sentence illustrates the difference between
fennen and roiffen :
Give me your names, I wan^ to know you, I want to know what you
were, ^f^ennt end) nitr, id) will end) fennen, id) tinll luiffen, wa^ iljr
ttjar't. — @ r i U p a r J c r.
59. English then has three common German renderings :
t>a\m, hamate, ha. Never translate then by benn (§ 33).
(1) ^ann always looks to future time with reference to
what has just been said. It is almost like next.
Chap. 7.] POSITION OF OBJECTS. 43
miere shall we go then ? 2Bo ttJoUctt to'xx batttt ^ttt ?
And then — my father — vihat did he do then ?
Uttb bann — mcin 85atcr — ttia§, wa^ tat cr tsunn ? — ©ubermann.
(2) 'Damal^ always refers to a point in the past. It
should be used where at that time can be substituted for
then in the English sentence.
Then the Germans were still heathen.
%\t ^Ctttfdjeit toarctt bamal^ nod) ^ctbcn.
You were still a child then.
X)tt ttiarft nod) citt ^iitb bama(§» — § e i) f e.
(3) T)Ci has the meaning theyi chiefly in a narrative, where
it adds life and is usually translated and then. See § 17, 1.
Exercises.
60. (a) 1. Decline: ber beutfd)e gitrft, man, etn 9J?ann,
bte ^otfc^aft, ber ^oge(. 2. Give the principal parts of:
fennen, tierberben, anbieten, ermci^ten, tt)iffen.
(b) 1. Which sentences in § 54 illustrate the order of ob-
jects ? 2. Does thjB order of objects in German differ from
the English order ? 3. Apply the general principle, § 37,
Note,' to each illustration of the order of objects in §§ 54
and 55. 4. Find in § 43, 1, Note, three illustrations of
§ 57. 5. What is the difference between X)ann l^aben tDXV
un^ gut amitfiert and :Dama(^ ^aben tt)ir un^ gut amltfiert?
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. ^onueu ^\t
gut T}tViiW' 2. Da^ meig x^ ntc^t. 3. T)ainal^
fannte ic^ i^n noi^ ntc^t. 4. Wan tuetg ntc^t ttnmer, ma^
man tDeiJ. 5. :t)ann tt)irb man e^ beffer (efen fbnnen.
6. Stffen ®ie, ob fie tf)n fennt?
61. (a) 1. Sometimes one doesn't know what to give
children for (ju) Christmas. 2. The children sat down
on a bench, and the man told them a long story. 3. Three
44
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
[§61.
years ago he lived for a time in Brown Street, but I did not
know him then. 4. I know a man who knows German
and French. 5. He asked for my German grammar
and I gave it to him. 6. But he gave it back to me
because he knows German so well.
(b) 1. He couldn't help it that he didn't know any
(§ 9) German then. 2. Another time I'll work harder
(fletfttger) and then I'll know it better. 3. We have a
The Regenstein near Blankenburg. — A picturesque ruin of one
of the many castles built by Henry the Fowler.
good time in [the] school, when we know the questions the
teacher asks. 4. He knew her, but she didn't know it
then. 5. After some (einiger) time he asked her to marry
him and then they got married. 6. They say they got
many presents and lived for a time in a beautiful house.
Chap. 7.] POSITION OF OBJECTS. 45
(c) Henry the Fowler. — 1. They say Konrad knew that
Henry was then the strongest prince in Germany. 2. So
he asked the other German princes to choose Henry [gum]
king. 3. When they gave him the crown, he was not
yet called emperor, but only king. 4. But he thought
of the Empire, when he gave the kingdom to his son.
5. We know his son, who was named Otto, as the man who
after some time restored the Empire. 6. That was nearly
a thousand years ago, but they still call him " Otto the
Great."
CHAPTER VIII.
REVIEW.
62. The particle nod^ is used in German, aside from its
regular meaning of still, more, yet, whenever the idea of yet
or more enters a sentence. It occurs mostly in negative
sentences and is not usually translated in English.
Who else ? 993cr fonft nod) ?
He has never been in Germany. @r toat nod) nic ttt '^CUtfdjtonb.
But he didnH begin at once. (Sr fing abcr nodi nidjt glcid) an.
— S i I b e n b r u d).
Exercises.
63. (a) 1. Explain in detail the position of nic^t; of a
single adverb. 2. When two or more adverbs occur, in
what order do they come? 3. Do these rules for posi-
tion seem to conform to the general principle (§ 37, Note) ?
Explain how. 4. Does the rule for objects seem to con-
form to the general principle (§ 37, Note) ? 5. Explain
how in each of the different combinations of noun and
pronoun objects. 6. What is the difference between
^6) ergd^Ite meinem :53ruber bie (5^efd)ic^te and 3cft er5at)lte
bie ©efc^ic^te meinem ^ruber?
(6) 1. Make a tabulated list of the classes of nouns that
have occurred thus far in the stories, and add the new
ones in their proper class as you go on through the
book. 2. Do the same for the classes of strong or ir-
regular verbs.
46
Chap. 8.] REVIEW, 47
(c) Conversational Idioms. Me^norize: 1. ^^ bin nod^
m6)i ferttg. 2. :DamaI^ \)aiit er noc^ nte baran gebac^t.
3. Sir ^aben noc^ !eine ^inte befommen. 4. :Da^ ift noc^
range (% a good deal) nic^t ric^tig. 5. 2Bo((en ®ie un^
noc^ einmat fagen, toxt H^ auf beutfc^ (leigt? 6. 2Ber
fonft nod) it)i(( noc^ Sragen ftetten?
64. (a) 1. Who else knows what this is in German?
2. We had never had such a good time as then. 3. She
doesn't know what the teacher will ask her. 4. I couldn't
help it that he wouldn't help me. 5. They say that a
German general named Moltke knew seven languages.
6. I get envious when I think of it.
(h) 1. I fear you have but a short time to get the other
books. 2. She did not know him then, but after some
time they got married. 3. Then her husband wanted to
live over there, but he didn't tell her, so she didn't know it.
4. Can you (§ 57) get paper and pens here, or must you
look for them down town (in ber (Stabt) ? 5. I don't
know, but I will ask if they are here; then you won't
have to (miiffen) wait so long for them. 6. We couldn't
help (§ 39, 2, ^ote) thinking of you, when we were having
such a good (fo gut) time.
(c) .1. I know but little German ; will you please help
me? 2. I shouldn't think (§ 41, 1, Note) of asking the
same question twice. 3. She didn't want to get a pencil,
but a pen. 4. In Germany they know how to have a
good time. 5. She did not know any foreign languages.
6. Before he knew her well he called her Miss Smith for a
time ; then she told him her name was Margaret.
CHAPTER IX.
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. SIMPLE TENSES.
Katfer (Diio ber Dritte in ber ®ruft
Hatis 5es ^rofen,
65. ^er junge ^aifer Dtto ber dritte tvoUtt einft m bie
®ruft ^axi^ be^ ©rogeti p Sloc^en f)mabftetgenr 33ergeben«^
uerfuc^te man il)n baDon abpbrtngen. „3Sa^ fumntert mid)
bie Df^u^e ber ^oten?" fagte er, nnb er (ie^ bie @rnft offnen.
X)a fag anf golbenem X^rone bie ^eic^e ^axi^ be« ®rogen,
t)or ber ber tiefbeluegte Dtto nieberfniete.
%U er nad) einiger ^cxt fortge()en woUtt, jtuang i^n ein
unn)iberfte()(irf)er !Drang, tin golbenem ^reug Don ^art^feruft
3U reigen. Da fie( bie lOeid)e in @tanb ^nfammey T)k^c
%at n?arf einen (Sc^atten anf fein gan^e^ fpdtejj^ l^eben.
Unb nad)bem Otto, ber nic^t^ ^ebentenbe^ gefdjaffen l)at,
geftorben mar, mngte man feine JBeic^e Don 3^talien nad)
5Iac^en bringen, tueit er neben ^ar( bem ®rogen begraben
n)erben woUtt ; „Denn/' fagte er, „ber Xatenlofe foU beim
^atenreic^en rnften."
Syntax.
66. The Medals in Simple Tenses. — In simple tenses
(present and past) the modals throw the infinitive to
the end of the sentence. With them the infinitive never
takes p. Modals are rarely used alone as in English
he can^ you must. They should be followed by ed or
by some object. In a negative sentence of this sort, e«
48
Chap. 9.] MODALS — SIMPLE TENSES.
49
10. The Coronation Chair of the Emperors in the Cathedral
AT Aachen.-
may be omitted ; ntc^t is then thought of as completing
the modal.
Shall I show it to him ? @oU id) e§ tl)m ^cigcn ?
I cannot, hut you can. I^d) fautt m^i, ®ic abcr fbttitcit c§.
50 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§68.
But he couldn't and wouldn't say more.
^oi!^ mc^r fonntc er utrt> ttiolltc cr itti^t fogctt.— 3fd)of fc.
Belief is eternal^ its form is earthly ; we may improve it, yes, we
ought to. X)cr ©loub^ tft cttitg, irbtfd) tft bic f^orm ; ftc burfcn ttiir
bcrbcff crit, ja, tt)ir f oUcif !§. — 9i a u p a d).
Bm^ he wanted by all means to have it, and they had to call Cinder-
ella. @r woUtc c§ abcr burt^auiS ^abcn, unb ^f(^en)iutte( mu^te
ficntf en iucrbcn. — @ r i m m.
Note. — The syntax of the German rnodals is simple and uniform.
English modals are defective ; but the German have full conjugations.
When we say, / could speak German, we may mean that we used to
he able to formerly, or that we might be able to if it were not so hard.
English has but the one word, could, for both these meanings, for
both past and conditional. German would say for the past, 35or
jtranjig 3af)ren fonntc \6) 3)eutf(^ f)}red)en ; for the conditional : 3d)
fonnte 3)cutfd) fprec^cn, trcnn c8 nid^t fo fd^wer ttJdre. So we might
almost say that the difficulty with German modals is with the English !
At any rate the exact meaning of the English expression must be
analyzed before it can be put into German.
Notes.
67. Historical Note. — Just as the descendants of Charles the
Great had failed to keep his realm intact, so the heirs of Otto the
Great were unable to cope with the difficulties which beset the
Empire. Otto II. reigned but ten years, and Otto III. (983-1002)
was only three years old when his father died. During his
minority his mother and grandmother ruled for him and the
power and independence of the nobles grew, thus foreshadowing
another breaking up of the Empire. Otto, although intellectually
so brilliant that he was called the "wonder of the world," was
young and impractical, and neglected Germany to dream of the
restoration of Rome as a world capital, where he was to rule in
oriental splendor, liut his dream was impossible; he accom-
plished nothing, and died in the midst of defeat.
68. English to ham is rendered in German not only by
^ahtn, but by fcin, muffen, and loffcn.
Chap. 9.] MODALS — SIMPLE TENSES. 51
(1) §aben (^atte, ge^abt, aux. ^aben) denotes possession
and is also an auxiliary of time, like the English to have.
What have you there 9 SSa§ l)oft bit bciltt ba ?
/ have enjoyed earthly happiness ; I have lived and loved.
Stij ^abe gcnoffcn '^a^ irbift^c (^\M ; id) l)abc gcicbt \in'i> geUcbet.
— @ d) i n e r.
(2) (gein (mar, gemefen, aux. fetn) is used for to have only
as the auxiliary for intransitive verbs. For a full treat-
ment see § 166.
Have you been sick? @tttb @tc franf getticfcn ?
The sun had not yet risen.
%xt Sonne mar nod) nidjt anfgcgangcn, — § e t) f e.
(3) English often substitutes to have to for must. This
substitution may take place in the present ; it must occur
in the past and future, as English has no form of must for
these tenses. When to have to in English means must,
German uses miiffen (mu^te, gemu^t, aux. ^aben). Com-
pare also § 39, 2, Note.
7'to sorry^ hut we have to go.
@§ iVLi mtr (cib, abcr ttiir miiffen ge^en (or miiffen fort)*
You will have to translate it twice.
(Bit wcrbcn e§ aweimaf iiberfc^en miiffen.
No Oh ! or Ah ! helped her., she (the rose) just had to stand it.
^alf il)m boi^ fein SGSei) nnb 5(d), mn^V t^ eben (eibem — @ o e 1 1) e.
(4) iOaffen (Heg, gefaffen, aux. ^aben) is used for to have
in the sense of to cause to he {done or made).
You must have that made, ^a^ miiffen @ie mad)en taffen,
Francisca, have the carriage drive around !
^^ranji^f tt, lo^ ben SBagen borf a^rcn. — :? e f f i n g.
The baron had had it loritten up so.
@o Ijatte e^ ber S3aron anff d)reiben (affen, — 9?ofegger.
Note. — The infinitive after laffen is translated active when a
personal direct object follows taffen, and passive when the personal
object is indirect (dative).
52 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§69.
He is having his son build a house.
@r Id^t fcinen @o^n ein §au8 bauen.
He is having a house built for his son.
(5r la^t feinem @o^ne ein §au§ bauen.
/ am having my daughter make a dress.
3d) laffe meine 2;oc^ter ein ,t(eib madjen.
I am having a dress made for my daughter.
3d) Iaf[e meiner Soc^ter ein ^(eib madjen.
Are you having the children read the book aloud ?
iBaffen @ie tie tinber ba« 33ud) oortefen?
Are you having the book read aloud to the children ?
i^affen @ie ben ^inbern ba« 33ud) oorlefen?
69. English shall and ivill have three common German
eqLuivalents ; ttjcrbcn^ fotten, and ttiottcn.
(1) SSerben (iDurbe, geiDorben, aux. fein) is the future
auxiliary. It is used only when in English shall and iviU
have simple future meanings, whether in declarative sen-
tences or questions. Compare § 42, 3.
I shall not be there. ^^ tucrbc md|t ba fein.
Will she come to-day ? SSirb fic Ijcutc fommctt ?
But nothing loill come of it.
@)§ mirb bot^ nid)tg borau^ mcrben. — Storm.
(2) (gotten (foUte, gefoKt, id) fo((, aux. Ijabeti) means s/io//
only in the sense of ought to, to be asked to or ordered to. It
never means will. With foHen the necessity or intention
depends on some one besides the subject.
Shall he help you ? (Do you want him to ?)
8oU cr ^l)ncn I|c(fcu ?
Shall we read on ? (Do you want us to ?)
@oUcn ttiir mcitcrlcfcn ?
TAoz< .s/t«?< 7io« steal. (Somebody else forbids it.)
^u foUft nid)t ftcljicn. — S3 i b e t, 2 m^\t 22, 15.
r/ie JJnion (newspaper) shall be sold, (/will sell it.)
^ic Uttiott f oU ucrfauft werbcn. — J^ r e t) t a q.
Chap. 9.]
MODALS — SIMPLE TENSES.
53
11. The Imperial Palace at Goslar. — A favorite residence of the
early emperors.
(3) 3Ko(len (iDottte, getnodt, ic^ toilt, aux. ^ben) means
will in the sense of want to (see § 40, 1). It is especially
common in questions. With tDoKen, the desire or intention
depends upon the subject.
He won't pay attention. (He does not want to.)
©r wiU nidjt auf^affcn.
Shall we read on ? (Do we want to ?)
SBoUctt mir ttjcitcrlcfctt ?
Will you please pass the butter f (Do you want to ?)
Sittc, njoUctt Sic itttr bic 83utter rci(^cn ?
If I wanted to do what I should^ I could do all I wanted to.
SSctttt i(^ wotttc, ttiai^ i^ foUtc, Imnf \^ aUc§, ma^ tii) tuoUtc,
Note. — SBotten means shall only in questions in the first person
plural. SSoUen trir is much commoner than foUen tt)ir. When in
doubt as to how to translate shall we, use joUen h)tr only when you
can say are we to. Otherwise use iroUen tt)ir.
54 GERMAN COMPOSlflON. [§ 71.
(4) Summary. — (a) The simple future auxiliary, whether
expressed in English by shall or will^ whether in declarative
sentences or questions, is always in German some form of
tperben.
(6) Intention is expressed by iroKen when the question
rests with the subject of the verb, by fotten when it depends
upon some person or thing besides the subject.
(c) In general when in English you can substitute a form
of is going to, use iDerben ; a form of want to, use tt)o((en ;
and a form of ought to, use foKett.
Exercises.
70. (a) 1. Which sentences in § 65 illustrate uses of
the modals ? 2. What causes the chief trouble when
we translate English modals into German ? 3. Find
illustrations of the use of modals in § 15, 2, a, § 15, 2, h,
Note h, § 26, 2, § 27, § 28, 1, § 30, 1 (two examples), § 33,
§ 39, 1 and 2, § 40, 1, § 42, 2, § 49, 1, § 50, 3, and § 58, 1
and 3. The frequency of these illustrations shows how
common, and so how important, is the use of modals.
4. Find in § 68, 3 an illustration of § 39, 1. 5. Memorize
the last example in § 69, 3.
{h) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. ^\i er C\t'
gangen, ober ift er nod) ba? 2. Soden (2ie "ba^ macf)en
laffen? 3. 2Bo(Ien xo\x ^eute abenb m^ XI)eater gel)en?
4. ^Berbett bie anberen I)eute abenb im Xf)eater fein?
5. (Sod i(^ einen neuen ^Injng mad}en laffen? 6. ^a,
ba« mUffen (Ste.
71. (a) 1. Shall we sit down over there and tell the
little girl a story ? 2. Shall I ask you some more ques-
tions ? 3. Will he have to have a new suit ? 4. Yes,
Chap. 9.] MOBALS — SIMPLE TENSES. 55
he will have to have a new one made. 5. Has he gone
to the tailor, or will he come home first? 6. Will you
tell me what to do (§ 69, 2) ?
(5) 1. The next time I shall have to have a better suit
made. 2. When he had been in Germany for a time, he
had to have a new one made. 3. Shall we wait for the
others or will you look for them ? 4. Mr. Brown, shall
we translate the next page for to-morrow? 5. He shall
not marry her; they will be unhappy. 6. Will you
please tell me how I shall get all these books ?
(c) TJie Third Otto.—l. Shall I tell you the story of
Otto the Third, or shall we read it ? 2. After Otto had
had the vault of Charles the Great opened, he returned to
Italy. 3. He was not afraid of the Italians, but he
had to conquer them to maintain himself on the throne.
4. After he died, they (§ 57) carried his body to Aachen
and buried him beside Charlemagne. 5. If you read
history, you will learn how long he lived. 6. Will you
do that, or shall I have to tell you [it] ?
CHAPTER X.
THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. COMPOUND TENSES.
Pie Kolanbfdulen.
72. 3m 'J)^itte(a(ter ()atten bie beutfc()en 2t'dhte nur iDenige
^ecf)te. 3^^^ft burften fie !ein (^eric()t fatten; t>a^ fonnte nur
ber ^onig tun. 5lber fpciter braucf)ten bie taifer t)dufig @e(b,
njenn fie ^rieg fit()ren luoKten, unb ba I)aben fie oft an bie
@tabte 9?ec^te t)erfaufen miiffen, urn ba^ ®elb ju er^alten.
T)ie ^itrger gaben i()r (^elb gern fitr t>a^ ^t6)t, eigene ©eric^te
fatten ju biirfen.
5(uf biefe Seife I)aben fic^ t)iele ©tobte t)oin faiferlii^en
©eric^t befreien !dnnen, unb fie l)oben a(^ (Sinnbilb biefer
i^rei^eit auf bem 9J?ar!tp(a^ ba^ ^tanbbilb eineS riefigen
9^itter^ errid)ten bitrfen. @oIc^ ein 9?iefenftanbbi(b fann
man ^eute nod) in i?ie(en beuifc^en (Stcibten fe^en. ^Man
nennt e^ eine 9?olanbfdu(e ober blo^ einen 9^o(anb.
Syntax.
73. The Modals in Compound Tenses. — Compound
tenses of the modals, when not used with another verb,
are regular.
I couldn't, ^d) Ijalic c§ tttdjt gcfonnt.
/ have sung ivhat I ought to.
9Bo^ ittj flcfoUt (tjalic), ^ab^ id) flcfuitgcn. — lUjIanb.
(1) When used in compound Un%eB with another verh^
the past participle of German modals has the same
form as the infinitive. This participle with infinitive
66
Chap. 10.] MODALS — COMPOUND TENSES.
57
12. The Roland at Bremen.
,,HoIanb bcr Htcf am Hatt^aus 3u Bremen." — Hiicfert.
58 GERMAN COMPOSITION. (J 75
form always follows the main verb (" two infinitives "),
exactly the reverse of the English order.
Bid you want to go f ^abctt @ic gcljctt tooUeit ?
We had to stand for half an hour.
Sine ^albc ©tunbc l)abcn tair ftcljcn ittiiffcn. — X f) o m a.
I haven'' t yet been able to bid you loelcome.
^d) ^abe bid) nod) nic^t miUfommcn ^ci^cn fonncn. — Ji? effing.
(2) In the dependent order the tense auxiliary C^aben
or lt)erben), instead of standing at the end of the clause,
comes just before the two or more infinitives.
I think that ive shall have to go.
^d) glaubc, ba^ ttiir wcrbcn octjcn miiffcn.
He said that he could not do it.
@r fagtc, ^a^ cr t^ uidjt l)abc tun fonncn.
You know that you wanted to have me murdered.
^f}x to\% ta^ i\}V mid) l)abt ermorbeit (affcu tuoUcn. — ® d) i ( ( e r.
Notes.
74. Historical Note. — One of the greatest influences In medieval
and modern history is the growth of the towns. In Germany they
originated under Henry the Fowler as fortified places for markets
and fairs, and grew rapidly in importance. Soon they began to
secure by war and purchase " charters of liberties," which gave
them their own courts and often municipal freedom (exemption
from imperial taxation). They were called free cities of the Empire,
and a Roland statue was the emblem of this 'independence. Later
most of these cities belonged to a powerful league, the Hansa or
Hanseatic league, whose flag floated for centuries over a majority
of the ships in the North Sea. Three of these free cities, Ham-
burg, Bremen, and Liibeck, entered the German Empire in 1871
on a basis of equality with the other states of the present German
Empire.
75. English 7nay is variously rendered in German.
(1) T^iirfett (burfte, geburft, id) barf, aux. f)aben) is used
Chap. 10.] MODALS — COMPOUND TENSES. 59
when may denotes permission, ^iirfett never means dare
(magen).
You may go now. ^c^t burfett Sic gcl)Ctt.
May people go through here ? ^arf matt \)itr burd)0C^Ctt ?
But if I may ask a favor, I ask just one thing.
^oc^ barf \ii) bitten, bitt^ id) citt§, — @ o e 1 1) e.
(2) ^annen (fontite, gefottnt, tc^ !ann, aux. ^ben ; not to
be confused with fenneti, § 58, 2) and mogen (moc^te, gemo(i)t,
\6) mag, aux. ^aben) are used for may chiefly with to he.
That may he. ^a§ fatttt fcitt, or ba^ tttag fcin*
It may he. @§ titag fcitt. — g r e t) t a g.
Note. — The commonest meaning of fonnen is English can, to he
ahle. 9}iogeti is commonly used for to like. See below, § 76.
(3) Where perhaps can be used in English instead of
may, or where may is emphasized, indicating doubt, titel^
(etcf)t is generally used in place of an auxiliary to translate
may.
It may rain to-morrow. 25icUcir!)t rcgttct C§ Ittorjjctt.
We may be too late. SicUcitI)t fottttttett ttiir jtt fpat.
These people may have speculated carelessly, may be.
^icfc Scute Ijabctt bicUcidjt (eitt)tfittttig f^cftiticrt, tttag fcitt.
— 33 i g m a r (f .
(4) Summary. — When denoting permission, may is al-
ways some form of blirfen. When it denotes possibility
{perhaps), German uses t)tettet(^t. Other uses are practically
limited to, That may he, which German renders : ^a^ !ann
feitt, or less frequently, !Da^ mag fetti..
76. English to like has three common German renderings.
(1) M^^xl (mod)te, gemoc^t, ic^ mag, aux. ^aben) is
employed for most uses of English to like with a direct
object. (S^ern ^aben may also be used. Compare § 76, 2
below.
60 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§77.
Don't you like Tannhduser?
Wi^tn ®tc Xotttt^aufcr itidjt? or ^ahtn Sic Xann^dufer nic^t gem?
You don't like her any more?
^u magft fie mm itit^t me^r ? — ^au^tmaniu
Father likes you, too.
9Kcitt Sttter l)at ©ut^ auti^ gem.— ©erftad er.
(2) Where English has to like followed by an infinitive,
/ like to sing, German uses simply the finite verb with the
adverb gem, / sing gladly. @ertt is compared: Iteber,
rather, to like better to, to prefer to; am (tebften, to like best to.
Do you like to study German? Scnictt @ic gern ^cutfr^ ?
She'd rather play the piano. @ic f pictt licber 5?ttttiiet.
I like best to sing. ^^ fingc am Ucbftcn,
/ don't like to do it. ^d) ixC^ ttid)t gem. — ^thhtX.
(3) befallen (gefiet, gefallen, er gefadt, aux. ^aben),
always with the dative, is used where English can use a
form of to please in place of like.
How did you like the play?
SSic Ijat ^^nett ba§ 8d)oiM>ie( gefallen ?
He doesn't seem to like that. 1)a§ f(^eint iljiit ttit^t ju gcfaUett.
Annie of Tharau is the girl Hike.
^nndjen Hon Xljarou ift, bic mir gefaUt. — '^ai^.
Note. — Never use g(ci(^en (gUd), gefllid)en, aux. !)abcn, always with
the dative) for to like, ©leic^cn means to be like, to look like, never
to like.
He looks like his father. (Sr glcic^t fcinem SSater.
My heart is just like the sea.
aJJein ^erg glcic^t gan^ bem 3iJ^eere. — § e I n e.
(4) Summary. — SJiijgen and gern (()aben) are used inter-
changeably for to like. When English like means not so
much fondness for as pleasure in, that is, when it can be
rendered by to be pleased with, German uses gefallen.
@(eid)en is never used for to like.
77. English to do has two common German renderings ;
mac^en and tun*
Chap. 10.] MODALS — COMPOUND TENSES, 61
13. The Roland at Halle.
„5u f^allc auf bcm ITTarft,
Da ftct^t cirt grower Hiefe." — f^cine.
62 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§78.
(1) DJ^ad^en (reg., aux. ^aben) contains an idea of definite
accomplishmeyit, of making something. It is a bit more con-
crete than tun.
You've done a fine job ! ^a l^aft btt ctttjai^ SdjiJnc^ gcmadjt !
-He (^iVfw'« do that. %n^ \)at cr tttd)t gcmad)t.
WArt^ caw ?)e done is being done.
'iQaii btt gcmad)t werbcn tann, wirb gcmadjt. — ^ i 8 tn a r cf .
Note. — Xun can be used in all the above cases, but mac^eu is
preferable.
(2) Xun {{(xtf getan, aux. I^aben) can be used in most
cases for English to do. It must be used when do replaces
another verb.
Children, what are you doing ? Yo%i mustnH do that !
^ittiJcr, ttitt§ mttrf)t (or M) tljr bcnn ba •? ^a§ ntii^t iljr nid)t turn
It is forbidden to smoke here., but they do it just the same.
&§ ift ticrbotctt, l|icr ju raud)cn, abcr man tut c§ borij.
Whatsoever ye would that men should do to you, do ye even so
to them. %Uc§ itttii, ttia§ il)r moUt, ba| cud| bic ficutc tun foUcti,
bag tut iljr iljuen. — « i b e r, 99? a 1 1. 7, 12.
JVbie. — As auxiliary in the indicative or interrogative, do is ren-
dered in German by the simple verb. In the imperative, emphatic do
is usually bod).
Do you play the piano ? @pic(en 'Bit ^(oDier?
Yotir hands donH look it.
©ure §anbe fel)eti nic^t tanad;) aue.—@er ft defer.
Oh ! do see ! do see !
Ot) ! feljen Bit bod) ! @et)en @te bod) ! — i^ e fj i ii g.
Exercises.
78. (a) 1. Which sentences in § 72 illustrate compound
tenses of modals ? 2. What is the chief difference be-
tween compound tenses of English and German modals
when not followed by another verb ? 3. Does the " two
infinitives" construction seem to conform to the general
principle, § 37, Note ? 4. Verify with the last example
Chap. 10.] MODALS — COMPOUND TENSES. 63
in § 73, 1 the rule about reversing the English order of
the verbs in translating into G-erman. 5. Find in § 75, 1
an illustration of § 15, 1.
(6) Conversational Idioins. Memorize : 1. §aben @te e^
nic^t tun fdnneti? 2. g^^ein, ic^ ^abe e§ nirf)t gefonnt.
3. !Darf i(^ 3f)nen ^elfen? 3d) in' e^ gem. 4. !4:)a^
^uc^ gefallt mir, aber id) mag ben §e(ben ntc^t. 5. !Da^
!ann fein, aber Dtel(eid}t irerben ©ie ein beffere^ finben !bn^
nen. 6. (gr fann nic^t bafitr, bag er feinem ^ater g(ei(^t.
79. (a) 1. May I ask if yon will wait for us? 2. It
may be that we shall be able to have a good time. 3. I
may go to the theatre ; how did you like the play ?
4. I liked " William Tell " very much ; I like to go to the
theatre. 5. She likes to sing ; has she been able to hear
the opera? 6. I don't know a single soul (§§9 and 19, 1)
who looks like me.
(b) 1. He may be able to think of the right word.
2. May I ask you to sit down there and tell us the story
of Siegfried? 3. She likes to tell stories to the pupils,
but she doesn't know any German. 4. In the theatre
they always know it, if the public likes the play. 5. May
we ask you if you like Wagner's operas ? 6. I don't
like this suit ; I shall have to have a new one made.
(c) The Old German Cities. — 1. May I tell you of the
German cities in the Middle Ages? 2. You may not
like these .old stories, but I like to tell them. 3. In the
Middle Ages many German cities had wanted for a long
time to get their freedom. 4. That is to say (ba^ ^^ifet),
they wanted to be able to hold their own courts. 5. The
emperors had to sell them these rights, because the emper-
ors had to have the money. 6. That was a long time ago,
but some German cities still have the same rights as then.
CHAPTER XT.
THE ''TWO INFINITIVES" CONSTRUCTION WITH
OTHER VERBS THAN THE MODALS.
^riebrid? Kotbart.
80. (g^ war einmal ein beutfd)er ^atfer, griebric^ 9?otbart
genannt, ben bie ^eutfc^en tne^r a(^ a((e anberen ^aifer
liebten, unb t)on be[fen gtdnjenben Xaten audj bie ^adjWtit
t)te( \)at reben ()dren. ©r tpar ein fietjreidjer .f)eerfiif)rer nnb
man Ijat i()n oft an ber Spit^e feiner flitter in ben £ampf
;^ief)en fet)en. T^od) ftarb er Diet jn frii^ fiir fein ii^aterlanb ;
er ertranf, aH er im britten ^iren^^uiie nac^ bem .^eiligen
I'anbe jog.
i)la6) feinent Xobe fe()nten fic^ bie "Deutfc^en nac^ i^rem
fiegreic^en ^aifer, menn e<5 ^rieg gab. ;I)arou^ entftanb
n)ot)( bie (Sage, ba|l er nirf)t tot fei, fonbern im .Qijff^dnfer
:^erg fd)(iefe, nnb iDieberfommen miirbe, irenn bie ^Deutfc^en
bereit feien, fic^ gn uereinen. (2ieben l)nnbert ^a^re fpdter ift
ba^ bentfd)e 9f?eid) t)on ^in)e(m bem (Srften nnb :^i^marcf nen
gegrUnbet iDorben, nnb an^ !Danfbar!eit I)at ba^ bentfd)e i>oIf
feinem ^aifer auf bem " ^t)ff()dnfer " ein X)en!ma( erric^ten
(affen, an beffen (So(fe( ^aifer 9totbart bargeftettt ift, une er
gerabe ani bem ®d;(afe ertuad^t.
Syntax.
81. Two Infinitives with Other Verbs than Modals. —
Besides the modal auxiliaries the commonest verbs that
take an infinitive without 5U are : braud)en, to need ; fit^*
(en, to feel ; l)ei§en, to hid ; ^etfen, to help ; l)bren, to hear ;
64
Chap. 11.]
TWO INFINITIVES.''
65
14. The Monument on Kyffhausek. — The ruin in the distance is all
that remains of a castle Barbarossa built here.
taffen, to let; (e^ren, to teach; lernen, to learn; mac^en,
to make; and fe^en, to see. Besides the regular past
participle these verbs mai/ have a past participle with
infinitive form, when used with another infinitive.
Saffen is the only one whose past participle must
6Q GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§83.
have the infinitive form when used with another in-
finitive.
T/iey were learning to read. ®te Icmteit Icfctt.
She taught me to speak German.
Sic ))ai mid) ^cutfd) fprettjcn Icljrcn (or gc(c!)rt).
I saw him go. ^t^ Ijabc 'x\)\\ gcl)cn fcljcn (or gcfcljcn).
Didn't you have him come ? .^abctt @tc \\)\\ ntd)t fommctt laffcn ?
/ heard a sicJde rustle.
^d) \}'6tV eitt Stttjlcttt rauf d)cit. — i^ o f f « li e b.
You made me sweat with a vengeance.
^l)r l^aht mt(^ wcibfic^ fdjttii^cn madjcn. — @ o e t ^ e.
Notes.
82. Historical Note. — Vor a century and a half (1002-1152)
after the death of Otto III, the different German Emperors wasted
time and armies in fruitless campaigns against the armies of
the popes in Italy. In 1152 Frederick of Hohenstaufen, called
Barharossa (from the Italian for red heard), came to the throne.
He brought the glory of the German Empire to its highest point
and was considered the most powerful ruler in Christendom. But
like his predecessors he wasted northern energy to subdue a
southern land ; six times he led across the Alps armies whose
vitality Germany needed for itself. In those times all emperors
were irresistibly drawn to Italy, and we cannot blame Frederick
for neglecting Germany. His genius, valor, and renown have
made him the darling of the German people. His descendants,
like himself, waged fruitless war with the papacy for nearly a
century, and the last of the proud Hohenstaufen line, Konradin,
was executed at Naples in 1268.
83. English a.s and than are usually rendered by Ger-
man hjic or at^.
(1) In comparisons tt)ie means as and alS means than.
The first correlative an in expressions like «.s good as, as far
as, and so on is fo (§ 26, 1). Just as is ebenfo.
He is not >>s sfmng as you. (^t ift tttd)t fo ftarf ttiic bu.
lam older than she. ^d) bin filter nlc* fie.
Chap. 11.]
TWO INFINITIVES.
67
15. Barbarossa. — As represented on the base of the Kyffhauser
Monunaent.
You can go just as well as I. @ic fonncn cbcnfo gut 8cl)cn, wic id).
Who has less than he desires m^ist know that he has more than he
is worth. 2Ber mcnigcr \)at, al^ cr begc^rt, mu^ wiffcn, ba^ cr mc^r
f^at, al§ cr wort ift. — 1' i d) t e n b e r g»
68 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§84.
(2) 5l(^ is preferable to luie for as, when as is a conjunc-
tion of past time (not of reason. See § 17, 3). ^ie is
oftener used with the present.
Just as he began whispering, the teacher looked at him.
%i§ tv eben anftng p flitftern, fal) il|n ber fie^rer an.
And as he sits and listens, the flood divides.
Unb mte tx fi^t unb mie er kufd^t, teilt fi(^ bie ^Int empor.
— @oetl)e.
84. English when has three common German equivalents :
aU, tomn, and toann.
(1) 5l(^ regularly translates when with past tenses. But
never use a(^ if whe7i can be replaced by ivhenever.
I knew Mm when he was a child.
^d) t)abe il|tt gcfaunt, aW cr nod) ^inb ttiar»
But loheu she saw the knife, she had to believe it.
%htx a\^ fie ba^ ^cffcr fal|^ t^a mu^tc fie^£( mo^r g(auben.
— Ap i n e r n.
(2) $Benn translates (a) ?t7ien with the present or future
and (h) whenever witli all tenses. With a subordinate clause
in past time, use Jt)enn if the word always can be inserted
in the main clause without changing the meaning.
(a) When you are through, leVs go.
SBetitt btt fcrtijj bift, (o^ m\^ fort.
When they are gone, Pll go and buy some more.
9Bcnn fie 511 @nbc fiiib, geV id| «ub faufe ueue. — ^ e ij f c.
(6) When Dietrich fought, he always won.
SBenn ^ictrid) ffim^jfte, fo fiegte cr immer.
When, as a youth you used to sing, you never got to the end !
3fanbeft bu olisi ^iingting bod), nicnn bu fangft, bocJ @nbc iiic !
— .^blberltiu
(3) SKann is used for when as interrogative.
When does the train leave f SBaitlt fol)rt bcr ^Mfl flb ?
And when will the day come f
Uub toanu toirb bcr Xag fommcu ? — % r c i) t a g.
Chap. 11.] '' TWO INFINITIVES.''' 69
Note. — It is better to avoid tiie use of toann in the general sense
of when(ever), although it used to be common and we read it often.
85. English there is (are) is rendered in German in two
ways : c§ gtfit and e;^ tft»
(1) (S^ gibt (e^ gab, e^ ^at gecjeben), with the accusative,
is used in general cases when no definite place is mentioned.
(5^ is never omitted.
There is no such thing. 'J)a§ gibt e§ nid^t.
Well, ichaVs up ? 9iutt, ttia§ gtbt^^ ?
There were no railroads a hundred years ago.
25or l|Uttbcrt ^o^rcn \)ai c^ fctnc ©ifcttbaljncn gcgcbcit*
And there aren't any witches.
Uttb ^cjcn gibt c§ ttid|t. — "p a u ^ t m a n u.
(2) (5^ tft, e^ finb (e^ tt)ax, e^ ift gertjefen), with the nomi-
native, is used for cases where a definite thing is mentioned,
usually in a definite place. The verb agrees in number
with the nominative which follows it. ^^ is omitted in the
inverted or transposed order.
There were three mistakes in this exercise.
@§ marctt brci f^c^tcr tit bicfcr 5(ufgabc, or ^it btcfcr Stttfgabc
warctt brci f^e!)(er»
There is only one thing that can save us.
@^ ift ttitr cittc^, ttJO§ ttn^ rettctt f attit» — ©(filter.
In my father'' s house [there'] are many mansions.
Stt itteiitcS ®atcr§ ^attjg jtttb uiele SBo^mtttgctt.
— iBibct, 3ot). 14, 2.
Note. — This similar use of e8 as grammatical subject extends to
other words than fein, and is commoner in German than in English.
There came three fellows across the Bhine.
©« ^oflen brei 33itrf(^e n)ol)t iiber ben '^i)em. — U^Ianb.
Men talk and dream much of better future days.
S8 reben unb traumen bic 9)icnf(^en diet oon befferen fiiufttgen 2^agen.
— ©d^iUcr.
70
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
[§87,
Exercises.
86. (a) 1. Which sentences
in § 80 illustrate "two infini-
tives " ? 2. What is the only
verb besides the modals that
must have its past participle in
the infinitive form when used
with another infinitive?
3. Find in § 83, 1 an illustra-
tion of § 58, 1, in § 83, 2, of
§ 18, 1, in § 85, 2, Note, of § 19,
1. 4. Memorize the last ex-
ample in § 85, 2, Note.
(p) Conversatio7ial Idioms.
Memorize : 1. §aben (2ie i^m
liberfetjen ()e(fen? 2. (Sr \)Cii
t)te( beffer lefen (ernen, a(§ ^ie.
3. 3Kann ()aben ^ie ben grauen
9?ocfTnacI)en(af)'en? 4. SSa«
gibt'^? (5« ift nic^t« ^ter.
5. ($^ gibt 50^enfd)en, bte md)t
finiien (ernen itjoden. 6. ($i?
finb feine 3ef)(er in biefer
5lufgabe.
87. (a) 1. As he had not
been able to do his work, he
sat down and waited for his
friend. 2. His friend was
16. Barbarossa. — As he probably
really looked. From a carefully
executed contemporary sculpture
in a Bavarian monastery.
Chap. 11.] '' TWO INFINITIVES."' 71
not so old as he, but he liked to help him. 3. As they
were sitting in the garden, an old man told them a story.
4. When there are mistakes in my exercise, I have to ask
the teacher questions. 5. Whenever he had to learn
to read a new German story, he did not know what to do.
6. There were three old men in the house, and they did
not like to hear us sing.
(h) 1. I like this book better than that red one, but not
so well as the other blue one. 2. When you have learned
to read these books, you will know German. 3. When-
ever I made a mistake the teacher asked if there were
difficulties in the exercise. 4. There are four mistakes
in this exercise ; next time you have to do better. 5. What
are you doing ? Don't you know that you mustn't do that ?
6. When he had heard the boys sing for a time, he told
them that he liked it.
(c) Emperor Redbeard. — 1. We have often heard the
teacher tell of Barbarossa. 2. There have been many
German emperors, but we hear more of Frederick the
First than of the others. 3. He is the one who did so
much for the Empire. 4. His enemies were afraid of
him whenever they had to fight against him. 5. When
he conquered them, he wanted to go to the Holy Land.
6. But he was drowned there in a river.
CHAPTER XII.
REVIEW.
88. The particle tool^I is used in German whenever the
idea of probability enters a sentence. It may be translated
in English by perhaps^ maybe, I think, by a question, or by
almost any expression indicating uncertainty.
He's sick, I think. @r ift n)oI|( fratif .
Yoii arenH prepared to-day, are you ?
<B\t fittb ^ctttc w^\\{ tttd|t oorberettet ?
Maybe I shall stay a long time to-day in Capri.
:^d) blcibc I|eutc woljl (ong^ ouf Gapri. — §ct)fc.
Note. — 2So{)t rarely means well, except as a predicate adjective
applying to health. As an adverb n^cll is gut ; as an exclamation,
nun.
Well, did he dn it icell? ^Jhiu, t)at ev (^ n^it nfi"fld)t ';*
He felt as well in this quiettide as a fish in the water.
©8 ging i^m fo wo^l in bicfcr Ungcftbrt^eit wic cincm j^ifd) im SBaffer.
— teller.
Exercises.
89. (a) 1. Add to your tables of declensions and con-
jugations the new nouns and verbs in §§ 65, 72, and 80,
and review this table at each Review Lesson. 2. Name
the commonest verbs that 7)iay take the "two infinitives"
construction when their past participle follow^ an infinitive.
8. Name the seven verbs that must take the "two infini-
tives" construction when their past participle follows a verb.
(h) 1. Illustrate in German sentences four different
meanings of English have; three of English shall; two of
72
Chap. 12.] REVIEW. 73
English will. 2. Illustrate in German sentences three
meanings each of English as, may, when, and to like.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. !^arf id) Utn
noc^ einen 53ogen papier bitten? 2. !l)a^ mogen @ie iDo^t
ntc^t fo gem wit ba^ anbere. 3. X)a biefer Slnjug 3^nen
nidjt gefadt, fo merben (Sie einen nenen ntac^en (affen miiffen.
4. gr ^at ba^ SJ^dbc^en tt)of)( nod) ntc^t fennen gelernt.
5. 3[Ba^ gibt'ei? Sa^ madien ®ie benn ba? 6. Pollen
rvix {e^t ettpa^ anbere tnn? Qa, gem.
90. (a) 1. May I have another sandwich ? 2. Shall we
learn to write German now, or what shall we do ? 3. I
do not like Wagner's " Tannhauser '' so well as his " Sieg-
fried." (Express the verb in three ways.) 4. It may
be that you will hear him sing, but I do not know. 5. We
may like this book better than the other, when we learn to
read well. 6. I asked him when he would probably do it.
(b) 1. When I heard the boy sing, I liked him better than
the man. 2. There were many mistakes in his exercises,
whenever he w^rote them. 3. Shall I ask him if we may
sit down over there ? 4. Shall we look for a bench on
which (tDorauf) we may sit? 5. As you like this book
as well as the other, I should think (bdc^te ic^ Voolji) you
would read it faster. 6. Will you please tell us when
you want to have that coat made ?
(c) 1. Whenever we asked them what they were doing,
they told us nothing. 2. If you want to have a good
suit, you will have to have it made. 3. We may like him
better than now when we get acquainted (learn to know)
with him. 4. May I pass you the bread or do you like
rolls better (tteber) ? 5. Shall we buy this dress or shall
we have something made ? 6. He does not know when
he learned to speak German.
CHAPTER XIII.
PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE.
Die IDeiber von IPeinsberg.
91. X)te ffeine (Btabt SBetoberg in Slirttemberg murbe im
gttjaiften 3al)r^unbevt oon tciniG tonrab belagert. (Sic
17. The Ruin of the Fortress Weibertreu.
city of Weinsberg.
74
As seen from the
Chap. 13] PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE, 75
letftete fo ^artnddtgen Stberftanb, bag tonrab nac^ etniger
3ett in 3orn geriet. (5r fd)n)or, bet ber Ubergabe ber Stabt
alle aJ^cintier gu tbten, bte grauen jebocf) au^ ber Stabt ab^te^en
au (affen unb t^nen au ertoben, i^r teuerfte^ (^ut mit^u*
nel^men.
511^ Sem^berg fi(^ enbltc^ narf) (anger :53eragernng ergeben
mugte, ba (nben bte granen t^re SJ^anner anf ben 9^it(fen nnb
gtngen mit i^nen au^ ber (Stabt. 'A^it ^ift geftel bent ^ontg
nic^t, aber er fagte : „(gine^ ^dntg^ Sort foK man ntc^t
bre^en nnb benteln," nnb er i^at fie rn()ig gte()en (affen. 5(nf
biefe Seife famen bie granen mit i^ren 9}?annern g(ii(f(ic^
bat)on. (Seit ber 3^tt n)irb bie ^nrg ^n Sein^berg uon atlen
l^enten „bie SBeibertren" genannt.
Syntax.
92. Prepositions with the Dative. — The commonest prep-
ositions with the dative are ; an^, anger, bei, mit, nac^,
feit, bon, p.
9?ar^ btr ft^mnc^t^ ir^, jti btr ctF tj^, bn gcHcbte Cuettc bu !
9ttt§ bir ft^o^f^ irf), Bci bir WJcir trf|, fc^^ bent @^icl ber SBcflett p;
aWtt bir ft^crj^ tt^, tiou bir lertt^ i^ fetter bitrr^ ba)§ iJcbcn njottctt,
^(ngclat^t tJon ^'rit^Ung^btumctt uttb begrit^t tion ^iar^tioattcn.
— dlamUv,
Note. — The general principle for Word Order (§ 37, Note) applies
also to prepositional phrases. A prepositional phrase follows directly-
after the particular word it modifies : 5Bein8berg in SSiirttenxberg. In
adverbial phrases the order is usually the same as for adverbs:
(1) time, (2) place, (3) manner. See § 47. But usually German
puts one of these phrases first and throws the sentence into the
inverted order. See §2, 1. For histance, He was at home in the
evening in a good humor, would probably be translated, %m 3lbenb
trar er jot ^aufc bei gutcr i^aunc.
76 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§95.
Notes.
93. Historical Note. — The siege of Weinsberg (1140) is typical
of the incessant conflicts in Germany in the Middle Ages. The
whole country was split into principalities, duchies, and walled
towns, each indejjendent of, and frequently at war with, the others.
This was the time of the picturesque castles with their " robber
barons," of whom Bryce says : " These petty tyrants, whose boast
was that they owed fealty only to God and the Emperor, showed
themselves in practice equally regardless of both powers."
94. %n^ generally denotes source. It has two commou
English renderings.
(1) 5lu^ regularly means from, out of.
rmfrom America, ^d) bin ott§ 5(mcrtfa.
A fairy tale from olden timfs, I can't get it out of my head.
©in Wax&^tn oii^ altcit ^txitvi, ba^ fommt mir itirtjt au^ bcm Sinn.
— .^ c i u c.
(T) 5lU^ is used for English of in such expressions as :
What has become of him ? 9®ai§ ift an^ i!)m flcttorbcit ?
Spring weaves a net of colors, sounds, odors.
^er f^ritl)liug ftricft ein 92e^ auS ^artien, XHntn, Xitftciu
— 9{ucfcrt.
95. Set has several meanings. It is never used with the
passive to translate English by (toon, § 99, 2).
(1) In showing position near or by, bei means not so near
as an and neben.
The Battle of (near) Leipzig. *^tc ®d)(a(i^t bet Seip^ig.
Near Anderyiach on the Bhine lies a deep sea.
!8ci ^nbcniad) am JRljcittc Itcgt cine tiefc See. — g. ©djlegct.
(2) :Q3ei is also used to introduce a condition or circum-
stance (like the Latin ablative of attendant circumstance).
In this use bei generally means in, tvith, or when there is.
Chap. 13.] PEEP08ITI0N8 WITH DATIVE. 77
Thus, Qf^ fc^tafe bei offenem genfter, means, I sleep with the
window open, not, / sleep by an open window, ^ti Xifc^ does
not mean near the table (am Zx\d}), but at table, that is dur-
ing a meal.
In this weather ; with such a throng.
S3et btefcm SScttcr ; bci ctncm fofdjeu (SJebrangc.
You canH see a thing in this light.
S3ci bicfcm fiidjt fann man gar ntii^t^ fcljcn.
In icy rain and winds.
S3ci cifigcm OfJcgctt unb 2SSitt&cn. — 33 ii r g e r.
(3) ^et is also used for English with in expressions like :
I live with the Fishers, ^c^ ttJOljttC bci ^if d)cr§.
Have you any money with you f fatten @ie (^c(b bei fid) ?
How goes it with you at home f
Wu ocljt^sf bei bir 311 ^m^ ? — § a u p t m a n ii.
96. S!JJtt is usually English ^mth, but it is sometimes
^ used for other English prepositions.
All at once there he stood. W\i eiuem 9JJa(c ftaitb er be.
rm not engaged to him. S^) bin tti(^t mit il)m tJerlobt.
Ood is with us and we with him.
(^fiii ift m\i m\^ unb toxx mit il|m. —Corner.
97. 9la^ is akin to nci\)t, near, and most of its uses can
be traced to this meaning.
(1) It regularly denotes motion toward or to a place.
(See ju, § 100.)
We went to Berlin. 993tr fuljrett na(^ S3er(itt.
He went home. Nothing came of it.
@r ging nat^ ^an^. '^a warb nit^t^ brau^. — Berber
(2) 9flad^ translates English after both for time and place.
After the Emperor came the Crown Prince.
9lot^ bcm ^aifcr fam ber ^ron^nns^
78 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 99
After work Ws good to rest.
9iac^ bcr 3(rbcit ift gut niVn. — ? e f f i n g.
(3) ^aii) also means according to (by, in). In some cases
it may follow its object.
Every one according to his taste, ^cbcr ttttrf) fctncitt ©efd^lttttcf.
lie knows me only by {according to my) name.
Gr fcnttt ttttd) mir bcm ^'Jamcn uad)*
Read to us according to your mood, according to your pleasure.
Sic§ wtt§ naj^ Saunc, nad) Suft, — @ d) 1 H e r.
98. @cit has two English renderings.
(1) When used with a word meaning a particular time
or event, fett is translated since.
I've been waiting since ten o^ clock. Scit jcljlt Ul)r tuartc \^ ft^on.
Since that hour my body has been wasting away.
@cit jcncr @tutti>c tjerjeljrt fid) mciu Scib. — ip e i n e.
(2) When feit is used with an expression denoting an
extent of time, it is usually translated /or or in.
IhavenH seen him for (or in) weeks.
Sd) l)abc il)tt fcit a33od)en nit^t gcfcljctt.
Fve been wandering for years.
^d) ttianbrc f d)ou fcit ^aljrcn. — % ^ d) ( e g c {.
99. !S8on usually denotes source, but less definitely than
(1) Its commonest meaning is from.
We are going from here to Cologne.
993ir fa^rctt uon !)tcr nad) f^'oUt,
The brooklets spring from the monutitins.
^tc $ad|Iein boit ben Scrgcn f^jriiigcii. — CS i rf) e ii ^ o v \ f.
(2) 55on is always used for by with the passive voice to
tell the agent. Never use bei, y.j^ii
Chap. 13.] PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE.
79
18. The Weibertreu from a Neighboring Hill. — Notice the rectangu-
lar vineyards from which Weinsberg receives its name.
The sentence was first translated by a girl.
^cr @a^ Wttrbc jucrft tion ctncm SOlabdjcn iibcrfc^t.
You want to get beaten by an old soldier.
(Bit ttioUctt ft(^ tJOtt cittern alUn Wlititav fd)tagctt laffctt.
•greljtag.
(3) 3$on is used for many translations of English of.
80 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ lOO.
He is a friend of mine. @r ift citt ^'tCUttb tton ttltr,
Frederick of Hohenstanfen was Emperor of Germany.
^ricbridi tion .t>oI|enfta«fcn mar ^aifcr non '^cutfrtitanb.
They sing of spring and love., of blissful., golden time.
<B\t fingctt t)Ott 2ctt5 «nb Sicbc, uon fcfgcr golbncr 3cit. — U ^ I a n b.
iV^o^e. — (a) When in English of is a sign of apposition or of
measure, t>on is omitted in German.
The month of June., the city of Dresden., a glass of water.
!Der Momi 3unt, bie @tobt 2)regben, ein @la8 2Ba[fer.
In the beautiful month of May.
3m n)unberfd)onen 9Honat 9Wai. — § e i n e.
(6) In expressions where of seems very closely connected with the
preceding word, as tired of in spite of because of don cannot be
used ; the genitive must be.
In spite of the weather we went. Xro^ beS SBctterS gingcn \v'\x.
O, I am tired of the turmoil.
^d|, ic^ bin be« Srelben^ ntube. — @ o e 1 1) e.
100. 3tt lias various renderings in English.
(1) For English to^ p is used with persons (contrast
nad) with places, § 97, 1) and with places where there is a
definite purpose or object involved, or where no motion is
indicated.
Go to your mother! @el| ju bcincr SDJuttcr!
Pm going to bed. ^(^ gcljc 5tt 83ctt.
He came home to his parents. @r fain \\ti^ «^anfc 5tt fctncn (Sltcm.
This street leads to the station, ^icfc Strafe filljrt jum SJa!|n^of.
She sang to him., she spoke to him.
®ic fang 5U il|m, fie f^rad) 5u il)m. — @ o e t Ij c.
(2) 3u usually means at with names of cities and in a
few idioms.
His patience is at an end. ^c^t ift fciuc OJcbulb JU (?nbc.
At Qucdlinburg in the cathedral 7'esounds the clang of bells.
3u DttcblinbHtfl im ^omc crtflnct ©(orfcunanfl. — iDhlUer.
Chap. 13.] PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE. 81
(3) ^u means for in phrases like the following :
We always have soup for dinner.
Snm aUittagcffeit Ijobcti ttJtr immer Buppt.
You are too proud for submissiveness, I for falsehood.
^tt bift 5tt ftolj jur ^cniut, id) jur fiiigc. — ^djilUv,
(4) In idioms p is variously translated :
Afoofu, on horseback, in a carriage.
Om^ o/ i^e window, in at the door.
3ttm ?^cttftcr Ijtttou^, jur ^^iir I)crcttt.
Count Bichard came along on foot.
©raf 9flir^arb f am p f^u^ bal)cr» — U ^ I a n b.
iVb^e. — English too is translated by 511 when it modifies another
adverb or an adjective, by auc^ when it modifies a whole clause (as
English a?so) .
Is is too warm for you ? 3ft e« 3^uen ;;u rt)arm?
/ think so, too. !Da6 glaub' id) oitc^.
Ah, he sleeps too long a time. %(i), ex jrf)Idft ju lanqe ^e\\.
-- ^ a n e r ^ ( c b c n.
Exercises.
101. (a) 1. Illustrate with sentences the different Ger-
man equivalents for English at. 2. Illustrate with sen-
tences the German equivalents for English to. 3. For
English with and /or (§§ 5, 8, 15, 1, a, 98, 2, and 100, 3).
(b) 1. Find in § 15, 1, 6 an example of § 100, 4, Note ;
in § 15, 2, Z> of § 97, 2; in § 27 of § 99, 2; in § 28, 2 of
§ 99, 3. 2. Find in § 33 an illustration of § 97, 1 ; in
§ 41, 2 of § 99, 3 ; in § 47 of § 99, 1 ; in § 50, 3 of § 100, 3.
3. Find in § 76, 3 an illustration of § 99, 3 ; in § 85, 2, Note,
of § 99, 3.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize : 1. ^et folc^em
SBetter mug man gu $aufe btetben. 2. 9}?etner S[RetnuTi(j
nad) ift e^ 3U wcit, su guf? 3U ge^en. 3. ($r ift au^ ^Itnerifa^
82
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
[§ 102.
abcr er njo^nt bet einer beutfrfien gatniUe. 4. ^a6:) 3e()n
9Jitnuten ge^en n)ir oon ^ter nac^ §aufe. 5. ^c^ toaxtt
fc^on fett jtDiJlf U^r auf bid). 6. T)a« trirb oon ben anberen
t)iel beffer getan tDerben.
102. (a) 1. According to his story ((grja^(ung) he was
from Linden near (§ 95, 1) Hannover. 2. What has
become of the dress that you had made by my tailor?
3. Since last fall we have lived (use pres. tense) with [the]
Browns. 4. In (§ 95, 2) such a crowd it is hard to walk
home from the theatre. 5. It's after half past ten ; I'm
going to bed. 6. What
did you get from your father
for your (iise def. art.) birth-
day?
(b) 1. For (§ 98, 2) three
days he has stayed (use pres.)
at home with (§ 95, 3) his
parents. 2. In (§ 97, 3) my
opinion, we ought to go home
with you after the theatre.
3. Tell us of the man who
told you he was from Berlin.
4. Since last fall I have lived
(pres.) in Schoneberg near
(§ 95, 1) Berlin. 5. In
such weather I like to stay
at home with my friends.
6. Did I tell you of my new
clothes that were made by
your tailor for (§ 100, 3) two hundred marks ? *
(c) Tlie Women of Weinsberg. — 1. According to an old
story the city of Weinsberg was besieged by Konrad of
i
•V. ♦*
^.»'*,
■'■ ■-"'.V"' '"^
19. The Octagonal Tower of
Weibertreu. — This is the
highest part of the ruin; it
stands near the center of the
park.
Chap. 13.] PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE. 83
Hoheustaufen. 2. After a long siege the fortress near
Weinsberg had to surrender. 3. Konrad told the people
that the women might (§ 75, 1) come out of the fortress
with all that they could carry. 4. When the messenger
with this message came to the women, they went out of the
fortress on foot with their husbands on their (def. art.)
backs. 5. The ruin of the fortress is now a park.
6. When I asked a girl by whom it was kept up, she told
me : " By the women of Weinsberg."
A
CHAPTER XTV.
PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.
Der Sdngerfricg auf 6er XPartburg.
103. ^t^ gegett ha^ ^nbe be^ WxtteMttx^ befc^aftigten
fic^ bie beutfc^en fitter t)iel mtt ber X)ic^t!unft. :5}iefe
T)tc^ter fangen i^re !i^teber unb iDurben be^^alb yj^innefdnger
genannt. :Der Sanbgraf Hermann t)on Xl)urmgen, ber auf
ber SBartburg iDoljnte, \}atU eine befonbere iBoriiebe fiir biefe
20. The Singers' Hall at the Wartburg. — Scene of the Singers'
Contest. On the wall of the raised alcove at the back are written the
songs of the principal contestants.
84
Chap. 14.] PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE. 85
SfJltntte [anger unb jetc^nete fic^ burc^ gro^e ®aftfrei^eit gegen
fie au§.
Qm 3a^re 1204 tjeranftaUete er ben Befannten ^^anger-
!rteg" auf ber SKartburg, an bem atk bebeutenben SJ^inne-
fdnger teilna^men^ diner fuc^te ben anberen in fetnen
ii^iebern ^n ubertreffen. ®egen t>a^ (5nbe be§ gefte^ trat
ein fc^tanfer danger anf, ber fo tpnnbertioK fang, ha^ man
il)m ben "ipret^ guer!ennen mu^te. '^a^ irar SSalt^er tion
ber il^oge(n)etbe, o^ne 3^^^f^^ ^^^ beliebtefte t)on aden Winnt^
fangern. 3?on it)m fc^rteb etn befannter T)tc^ter fpater:
„$err Saltier t)on ber 3SogeItt)eibe, njer ben Dergage, tdf
nttr (eibe."
Syntax.
104. Prepositions with the Accusative. — ^The common-
est prepositions with the accusative are : bt^, burcf), fitr,
gegen, o^ne, urn, lt)tber.
5(tt cinctt ^rcuttb.
'^nv^ bid) ift iiic SBcIt mir fdjijit, oljuc bid) miirb^ id) fie ^affcn ;
^i\v bid) (cb^ id) jjattj aUcin, urn bid) t»iU id) gertt crbtaffctt,
^cgctt bid) foU fein 5Bcr(cumbcr mtgcftroft fid^ jc bcrgel)tt»
aSibcr bid) fein g^cinb fid) maffncu ; it^ mitt bir 5«r ©cite ftcl)tt.
— 9^ a m I e r.
Notes.
105. Historical Note. — The Minnesanger (SD^innc, love) began to
flourish under the Hohenstaufen Emperors. These minstrels were
usually well born, sometimes of noble birth, and they attached
themselves to the great lords, whose guests they entertained. In
return the great lords honored and rewarded them ; in fact,
Walther von der Vogelweide (1160-1230) received an estate (fief)
from Emperor Frederick 11. Though Latin was still the official
language of church and state, the everyday tongue was German
(Middle High German), and in this the Minnesanger composed
86 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 108.
their songs. The tale in § 103 is not absolutely true. There are
many conflicting stories ; the most authentic account of the
" Sangerkrieg " says that Wolfram von Eschenbach won through
Walther's help.
106. Prepositions with it (them) and which.
(1) When referring to an inanimate object, ba'(r) is used
with prepositions instead of a pronoun : with it, bamit ; for
it, bafiir ; out of it, barau^ ; against it, bagegett.
(2) When referring to an inanimate object, tt)O'(r) is
used with prepositions instead of an interrogative or relative :
after which, tvouad) ; of what, n)ot)on ; through which, iDOburc^ ;
about what, itjoruttt ?
Note. — Stumer, bi§, and o^nc do not combine with ba or \vo, and
tt)ibcr does not combine with hjo. With these a form of bcrjelbc is
generally used for the personal pronoun and a form of hjcl(^er for the
relative or interrogative.
107. 83t^ is used alone and with other prepositions.
(1) When used alone bt§ usually refers to time and
means till or until.
ril wait for you till twelve o'' clock.
^&\ wartc auf bir^ bt^ jwiitf Uljr.
Until this day, oh, was that good, was it reasonable 9
SiiS bicfctt Xajj, o war ba^ gut, wor'^ biUig? — @cI|iUcr.
(2) In connection with other prepositions bi6 often refers
to space and means as far as.
ril go along as far as the corner. S?i^ tttt btc @rfc gc^^ id) mtt.
And lo, I am with you alway, even unto the end of the world.
Unb fie^e, i(^ bin bet eu(^ aUc ^age, btS an ber 9Be(t @nbc.
«lbel, aWatt 28, 20.
108. ^ur(3^ is practically always English throughy and as
such presents no special difficulties.
Chap. 14.] PBEPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE.
87
21. The Wartburg at Eisenach. — The most famous and interesting
castle in Germany.
The river remains turbid that has not gone through a lake, the
heart troubled that has not passed through woe.
^cr f^ltt^ hUiht tvnh, ber ttit^t burd^ cincit <Sce gcgangcn, ha§
^ers uttlautcr, bajg nir^t burd) ctn 938c^ gcgangctt* — @ o e 1 1) c.
109. gw^^ is used regularly for English, for and in a few
other expressions.
(1) i^nt may translate many meanings of for.
Is that for me 9 ^ft btt§ fiir ttttd) ?
TFi^ai do you take me for f SSofiir I)a(tcn @tc mid) ?
^wd wow: ?/ow y^ave good precepts enough for to-day.
Unb nutt \\(iU t^r fiir bicfctt ^ag ^vAt Scljrctt gcnug, — @ t o r m.
88 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ ill.
(2) In idioms the meaning of fUr varies.
Day by day, year by year, piece by piece.
XaQ fitr Xa^, ^a\}v fitr ^a\)v, BtM fiir Stiirf.
Are you interested in music 9 ^ntcrcfficrcn Sic fid) fiir SWufif ?
0, Fm an ardent admirer of Wagner.
3tdj, id) fd^tndrmc fitr SBagner*
Man by man to-day weUl redden the iron with blood.
SBir tuoUen ^tuit Wann fitr Waww tttit '^Xvii '^a^ @ifen riitctt.
— Strnbt.
110. ©cgctt usually means against or fo, toward.
(1) The meaning against is usually literal or concrete.
^e ran against the door. Gr ratttttc fiCflCIt bic J^iir.
/« rai>> she held her met hands against her burning rherks.
Umfonft t)telt fte bie ttaffett ^dttbe de^en bie brennenbcn SBanoen.
~ ''O C I) j f .
(2) (?^egen means toward, to, usually in a figurative or
abstract sense.
He arrived tovmrd evening. (Sr ift flcnctt 5(bcttb nuncfommcn.
Toward friends be modest, toward yourselves be strong and firm.
^cgctt f^rcunbc fcib bcfd)ctbcn, gegcn citd) fetb ftrcng uitb fcft.
— .^"^ e V b c r.
111. Ultt usually means around, for, or at.
(1) When um is used for around, about, the adverb '^erum
may follow the object of um.
He went around the garden. @r gtltfl ttm bcit ©ttrtcit (Ijcrttm).
Bound about the light, white house gardens were laid out.
Um bttiS lctd)tc, wci^c ^an^ l|critm marctt ©ortcn aitgclcgt.
—better.
(2) Utn meaning for is usually figurative.
We donHplay for money. 9Bir f^tetcit nid)t ttm @c(b.
IdonH care for any one. ^d) ftlmittcrc mid) ttiit fctttctt. — ^ct)f c.
Note. — In German, to compete at anything is to do it, um bie 2Bctte,
for a wager ; to row a race, um blc SSctte rubcrn ; to run a race, um
bte SBcttc (aufcn.
Chap. 14] PBEPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE. 89
(3) Um meaning at is confined to expressions of time :
At lohat time loill you come? Uttt ttltCDtel UI|r foitttticn @tc ?
So it was at eight, so at nine, so at ten o'' clock.
@o toav t§ ttttt ac^t, fo um ncun, fo nm $cl|tt XL^v. — @ e r ft a c! e r.
112. SBiber differs nowadays from gegett in that it is
used only in a figurative sense. Hence it is much less
common than gegetl. In the literal use of against, see
gegen, § 110, 1.
He did it against his will. @r I)at c§ ttJibcr fctitcn SSSiUcn gctait.
Thoii shalt not bear false witness against thy neighbor.
^u foUft nii^t fttlfr^(cg) Bcugni^ rcbcn mibcr bciuctt Mrfjften.
^ — 33ibel, 2 moU, 20, 16,
113. English all is usually rendered in German by gatlj
or att*
(1) ©anj is used only in the sense of entire, the whole,
taking all as a unit. As an adverb it means quite, in the
original sense of entirely. Before neuter names of cities or
countries it is indeclinable.
All Berlin was astir. @an5 S3cr(ttt War auf ben 93ctttcn»
I dreamed all night, ^d) ^ttbc btc gaitjc 9lati}t gctrftumt.
Are you quite well again? @tttb @ic Wtcbcr Qatl^ toof^l?
For every whole work one needs a whole man.
3u jcbem ganjcn aScrf ge^ort tin ganger aWann. — 9tu(f ert.
(2) 5l(( is used for all in other cases, usually referring to
each and every one of a group. It may be indeclinable
before ber, btefer, or a possessive.
7s that all 9 ^ft t^^^ ^V^t^ ?
7/iave read all these books, ^d^ Ijabc aU(e) btcfe 83ii(^cr gclcfcn.
All good things come in threes {of all good things there are three').
WXtx guten ^ingc finb bret. — ®|)rid)rtJort.
If he only had half of all the blows !
^Mt cr nur crft bte ^alftc uoit alien ben Srf)Iogen! — ^effing.
90 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§115.
Exercises.
114. (a) 1. Which sentences in § 103 illustrate the use
of prepositions with the accusative ? 2. Make sentences
illustrating the uses of at and for as treated in §§ 109
and 111. 3. Find in § 15, 1, a an illustration of § 111,
2 ; in § 26, 1 and in § 39, 2 of § 106, 1.
(b) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. !Da^ a((e^ tat
er tDiber fetnen SStKen. 2, ^egett ge^n U^r f)abe ic^ bie
gauge (Sette Uberfe^t. 3. ^^ intere[ftere mtc^ fiir bie
beutfc^e £)per, aber ic^ fc^tDarme fiir ^eet^ot)en. 4. $?efen
@te h\^ iMX niit^ften *Sette! 5. Urn bret U^r fu^r \&j burc^
bie ^i(x\ii bi^ an^ Xor. 6. giir bic^ iDlirbe ic^ um bie gauge
Sffielt reifeu,
115. (a) 1. We all went on foot through the deep wood
as far as (to) the little village. 2. Shall we begin at eight
o'clock or toward nine ? 3. We (§ 57) have to answer
questions against our will all the time. 4. Hermann
fought against Varus till late in the evening. 5. Round
about them lay all their dead friends. 6. Will you
please ask for some more ink for me ?
(p) 1. All the city voted for him against the old man.
2. For heaven's sake, don't go through the wood at mid-
night. 3. All right (fc^ou), I will go around the wood
as far as (to) the gate. 4. At what time did he get it for
you? 5. Have you any objections {literally, anything
against it) if we go through your garden? 6. He sat
all day and thought of the stories we had told him.
(c) The Singers' Contest at the Warthurg. — 1. Toward
evening on a beautiful day in the year 1204, one could hear
songs resound through the Wartburg. 2. It was the
Minnesingers, who were singing for a prize. 3. Around
Chap. 14.] PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE. 91
the wide hall there were (§ 85, 2) chairs and benches on
which (§ 106, 2) all the guests could sit. 4. All the
evening the}^ sang, and there was (§ 85, 1) a beautiful
wreath for the best singer. 5. Some voted for Walther,
and some against him. 6. We (§ 57) do not know
exactly who got the wreath.
^^
CHAPTER XV.
PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE
Icurnberg.
116. Unter atten beutf^en <Stdbten mirb man in ^liirnberg
am metften an ha^ Wxtttlaittv ertnnert. S^ Uegt auf betben
Ufern ber ^egni^, bie ^tutfi^en ben atten v^dufern ba^infliegt.
^od) je^t umj^eben bie alten geftung^mauern bie ^tabt, unb
Winter i^nen fie^t man bie alten @ebaube emporranen. Unb
1
m.
^^^
1^^
MLjffmi
■9^
' -^'- ^^P77^lV.3Hh
^^^^^r
^liHH^K^j^H
j^^l
■BK^-i^MME
'^^^^r^n
^^^Kfl|
^^E^^^SI
■y
mH|
HRRi 3h^i^||r3
M
^^IKi^' 'i^^^^^^^^B
22. The Pegnitz at Nuremberg. — Notice the fortifications and the way
the wall with its covered passage is carried over the river.
02
Chap. 15.] PBEP08ITI0NS WITH TWO CASES. 93
toenn man ^eute auf ben ^oben be^ aften — {e^t trocfenen
— geftung^graben^ ^inunterblid t, fie^t man ©ebiifc^ nnb
^(umen bort.
§ier in bte[er tntereffanten (BtaU blii^te im 3Jiitte(a(ter
bte ^nnft. §ter matte t^or me^r a(^ t)ter ^nnbert 3^^^^^^
5l(bre^t X)urer ; ()ier fangen bie 3)Zetfterfanger ; l^ter ma^te
ber gutmiitige §an^ (Bad)^ @i^n^e nnb @ebtc^te, beibe nac^
SO^ag, nnb ^ter gengen nod) ^ente bie fd)5nen -^anten beg
WxtttMttH t)on bem ^nnftfinn nnb bem 9?ei(^tnm ber
:^iirger 9^urnberg«^.
Syntax.
117. Prepositions with Dative or Accusative. — The
prepositions which take either dative or accusative
are ; an, anf, l^inter, in, neben, itber, nnter, t)or, gnjtfcfien.
They take the dative in answer to the question, where ?
too? and the accusative in answer to the question
whither? n)o^tn? In other words, the end or direction
of motion is indicated by the accusative ; rest or the
place- of motion by the dative.
He walked into the room.
@r ging in ba^ ^twiner (direction of motion) .
He walked up and down in the room.
@r ging in bem ^t^mcr mtf unti ab (place of motion).
He sat in the room.
©r fa^ in bem Btmmer (rest).
I stood on high mountains and looked into the deep valley.
^d) ftanb auf Ijo^en 23ergen nnb f al) tn§ tief c Xal — ^ o If 8 It e b.
(1) The above rules apply only in concrete cases.
In figurative uses — that is, when neither rest nor motion
is expressed — these prepositions usually take the
accusative. 3ln, anf, and itber are the most common in
figurative use. Review §§8 and 41, 1.
94 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 119.
They laughed at my story. @tc Ijabcn ubcr mcinc ®cf(l)td)tc gclad)t.
DonH count on what is in the future^ don'' t figure on what has been
promised ; don't complain about what has been lost, and donH think
of what has been broken.
3lttf MttftigciS redone nid^t, \xnts ^mV ni(l)t ouf SBcrf|)rod)nc^ ; !(ag^
Mm ^ttUxMt^ tttt^t unb bcttr nx^i aw ^txhxodi^nt^. — 9iucfert.
Notes.
118. Historical Note. — Nuremberg received its freedom from
Frederick II in 1219. From that time on, the busy city, freed
thus from political interference, built up a flourisliing trade.
Safely guarded by massive walls and wide moats, its prosperous
burghers devoted their time not only to commerce but to litera-
ture and art as well. Thus Nuremberg came to be the industrial
and artistic centre of Germany, the home of many Mastersingers.
These Mastersingers were so called because .they learned poetry as
a trade. This poetry was made according to fixed rules, and these
had to be mastered by the apprentices, who later became journey-
men, and finally masters. Thus poetry became a trade like car-
pentry or shoemaking, and the masters of it, instead of being
master-carpenters or master-shoemakers, were master-singers^
bie 3)^eifterjanger.
119. 5(n has several English renderings.
(1) In indicating position, an means to or at (the side of).
It suggests closer proximity than bet and neben.
I wrote on the blackboard, ^dj fdjricb ait bic S9?aitbtnfcf.
I wrote at the blackboard, ^c^ fd|ricb aw bcr ifi^anbtafcl.
The mother sat by the fire ; a boy stood at her knees, two daiighters
pressed up close to her. ^\t ,t>nM^fratt fa^ am ^'Cucr ; ctn ^nabc fianb
an il)rcn ^ntcn, jwci X^H^itx braitfltcn fid) ait fie Ijcrait. — @oetl)f.
(2) The commonest verbs with which an is used in close
connection are: benfen, to think of; (^tauben, to believe in;
fic^ fietDiJl)nen, to get used to; fid) erinnern, to remember; and
fd^retben, to write to. Notice that they contain an idea of
mental motion toivards; hence the accusative.
Chap. 15.] PEEPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 95
I must lorite to my mother, ^d) mu^ an tticitte SWuttcr fd^rctliett.
So I think of my distant love.
So bctt!^ id) ait tncin fcrnc^ fiicli* — ^ a u f f.
Note. — Some verbs take an with the dative. The commonest are :
3tt)eifeln, to doubt ; fterben, to die (of) ; orbeiten, to work {at) ; and
leiben, to suffer (from).
(3) When used with adjectives, an usually means m;
arm an, poor in; xdd) an, rich in; k^m an, lame in. Here
it takes the dative.
There sat a proud king, rich in land and victories.
^ort fa| citt ftoljcr tiinig, an iiaitb nnh (Sicgcn rcid^. — Utjtanb.
Strong in mind, tveak in body, sits the aged Kaiser Budolf
^iaxl an (SJcift, an Scibc fr^wad), fi^t ber grcifc ^aifcr IHttbolf,
— ^' e rn e r.
Note. — For am with the superlative see § 218, 1. In special cases
an varies both in meaning and in the case it takes.
On Tuesday, in the evening, in the morning, on the first of January.
%m 2)tcngtag, am 3lbenb, am 9)Jorgen, am erften 3anuar.
In the sky, am §immel (im §immet means in heaven).
Ifs my turn now. 3e^t ift bte 9tci^e an mir.
A bird by its song, a man by his gait, a fool by his words, we recog-
nize everywhere (at all places).
(Sinen SSoget am @ang, einen 9JJann am ®ang, einen 2^oren an ben
SBorten erfennt man an alien Orten. — ©pri^mort.
120. 5(uf has several English translations.
(1) When denoting position, auf means upon, on top of.
We were sitting on a bench. 2®ir fa^Ctt auf ctttcr S3attf,
We sat down on a bench. 2Bir fc^tcn ttn§ auf cine S3ttn!.
My glance fell upon the captain, whose eyes rested upon the boy.
Wtxn S3Itrf fid auf bctt ^au^ttnantt, bcffcn ^tugcn auf bem ^nabcn
ttt^tctt. — SBitbenbrud).
(2) The commonest verbs with which auf is used are:
antmorten, to answer, reply to; ^offen, to hope for; ^ord^en,
to listen to; rec^nen, to count on; fid) tjertaffen, to rely on;
96 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 121.
ad)ttn,to pay attention to; tvavttn, to wait for. With these
it takes the accusative.
You can count on me. @ic fonnctt auf midj rcd)nctt.
I listened to the field-song.
^d) !l)ord)tc auf ben ^clbgcfang. — 2;iecf.
(3) The commonest adjectives with which auf is used are
ftolg, proud of; bbfe, angry at; neibtft^, envious of; auf-
tnerffatn, mindful of. Here it takes the accusative.
He was proud of his voice. @r ttiar ftolj auf fciuc 8timme.
I was right angry at myself for not being able to be angrier at you.
S^ uiar re(t)t bof^ auf mi(^, ba^ id^ auf ($u(^ nit^t bofer merbcn
foutttc. — @ e 1 1) e.
iVb^e. — (a) In many special cases auf means in or at with the
dative and to with the accusative. Chief of these are : auf bcm or
bag ?anb, m or to the country ; auf bcr or bic ^oft, a« or to the post-
office ; auf bent or bcu S3aU, at or to a ball {dance) ; auf bem or ben
53al)nl)of, at or to the station ; auf bcr or bie Uuioerfttat, at or to the
university (of students ; of professors, aw.)] and auf bem or baS ®^IoB,
at or to the castle.
(b) Other comjnon uses to which no definite rule applies are :
In German, auf beutfd^ ; in this way, auf biefe SBeije ; at any rate,
auf allc ^dlle ; by no means, auf feiueu gall ; for to-morrow, auf
morgeu ; for next week, auf na(i)fte Sod)e ; abroad {on travels), auf
9leijeu.
/t can oijZy be said in Greek.
@« tafjt fic^ uur auf griedjifd) jageu. — SS i e t a u b.
121. 3^11 usually means in when used with the dative, and
into with the accusative. In a few expressions its meaning
varies.
I was in town, in church, in school, in the theatre.
^d) war in bcr 8tabt, tn bcr ^ird|c, in bcr 8d|u(c, tm ^Ijcatcr.
I am going to town, to church, to school, to the theatre.
Sd) 0c^c in bic @tabt, in bic ^ird)C, in bic ®d)ufc, ini^ Xl)catcr.
Whom God wishes to show .special favor, lie sends into the tcide
world; to him he shows his wonders in mountain, loood, .stream, and
field. aScm Q^oit ttJiU rcdjtc (iJunft crnicifcn, bcu fdjicft cr in bie
Chap. 15.] PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES.
97
23. Hans Sachs' Statue at Nuremberg.
tocitc 995c(t, bcm ttittt cr fciuc SBunbcr wcifcit in Serg mtb ^ait> unb
Strom ttttb ?^c(ii, — (S i d) e ii b o r f f.
Note. —The expressions jur ^irc^e, jur @d)ute suggest regular at-
tendance with a purpose, while the above use with in refers usually
to a particular act. See § 100, 1.
98 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 125.
122. 9le6en means beside, but not so near as an. As we
seldom wish to specify so closely in English, an and neben
may be used interchangeably in most cases referring to
places.
Who sits by you? SBcr ft^t ncbctt ^luntn ?
Close beside the inn stood the old church.
^icl)t ttcbcn bcm 26trt§I)aufc ftanb bic aitt ^ird)c. — ©crftarfer.
123. iibcr is used literally and figuratively.
(1) When used literally iibet means over, above, across.
Over all hilltops is rest. Ubcr alien dJi^fcIn ift JRu^. — @ c 1 1) e.
With arms crossed over her breast she stepped down aci'oss the
court. Wlit iibcr bcr ^ruft gcfrcujten 3lrmcn, fdjntt fie uber ben ^of
Ijinttb, — (Storm.
(2) Figuratively liber usually means about, and takes the
accusative.
What were you talking about ? SBornber f^rad)en ®te ?
'"''One can laugh about all that now,''' he continued.
„Uber \ia^ aUe§," fnljr tx fort, „fonn man je^t Jadjcn."
— SBilbcnbrucf).
Note. — liber is also used for by way of, in 3(i) fa^rc iiber ^Berlin.
It means from in such expressions as : a week from to-day, a year
from to-day, Ijeutc iiber ad)t %(i^t, t)eute iiberS (or iiber ein) 3a^r.
124. Untcr means under or among.
I have that among my books, ^a^ l^abe id) nnter meinen IsBiirfjern.
Neither do men light a candle and put it under a bushel, but on a
candlestick. Wnn fjiinbet and) nidjt ein fiid)t an unb fc^t t^ nnter
eincn 8d)effe(, fonbcrn anf eincn iiend)ter. — ^ i b c I, 3JZ a 1 1. 5, 15.
126. f8ot is used literally meaning before and figuratively
in various meanings.
(1) Literally tior is used with both dative and accusative
and means before, in front of.
Chap. 15.] PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 99
We rode in front of the castle. 993ir rtttett t)or ba§ @d^to^.
By the spring in front of the gate there stands a linden tree.
Sim Srumictt tior bcm %r>xt \i(i \it\)i ein iiinbcubaum. — aRiiUer,
(2) Figuratively t)or is used with the dative in many
senses, usually with expressions implying a certain state
of mind. See also §§4 and 25.
She got red with anger. (Sic ttiurbe rot tior ^^xxt,
I warn you of the danger, ^t^ ttiarnc bit^ tior bcr (IJcfaI)r»
Tou jump for joy. ^u I)tt^f eft \a tior ^rcubctt, — d ^ a m i j f o.
Exercises.
126. (a) 1. Find in § 4 an illustration of § 121 ; in § 8
of § 120, 2; in § 13 of § 121; in § 18, 2 of §§ 119, 1 and
121. 2. Find in § 23, 1 an illustration of § 120, 3, Note
h and § 119, 1; in § 25 of § 125, 2; in §41, 1 of §119, 2; in
§ 50, 2 of § 121. 3. Find in § 85, 2 an illustration of
§ 121 ; in § 85, 2, Note, of § 123, 1 ; in § 88, Note, of § 121.
{h) 1. In the illustrations in § 126, a, above, give the case
following each preposition and the reason for it. 2. Illus-
trate with sentences the uses of at, to, and for in this
chapter.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize : 1. !^a^ ift rtc^tig ;
®ie fdnnen [ic^ barauf Derfaffen. 2. 5luf feinen gait tPoHen
iDtr iiber ^o^ton fa^ren. 3. 5(uf ber UniDerfitat mu^ man
Dor aden 1)ingen an bte 5lrbeit benfen. 4. ^6) ):)(xht m\6)
noc^ nic^t baran getDi5^nt. 5. gr n)ar fo b5fe auf mic^,
\>(x^ er rot t)or 3^^^ tfurbe. 6. 5luf morgen tt)o((en xoxx
bie (Seite 101 lefen.
127. (a) 1. He was sitting at the window on a bench.
2. I sat down beside her in an arm chair. 3. What are
you laughing about? 4. I'm not laughing; I'm trem-
bling with anger. 5. Among all the books in the library
100
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
[§ 127.
there is nothing about the singers' contest at the Wartburg.
6. On the first of July I'm going to the country.
(b) 1. I am used to paying attention to ray teachers.
2. Are you afraid of ghosts, or don't you believe in them?
3. We went across the street and sat down in front of the
24. The Wall and Moat at Nuremberg.
old house beside the church. 4. At any rate she will
not be very angry at us. 5. We sat by the spring in
front of the gate and listened to the birds under the trees.
6. A week from Monday (§§ 119, 3, Note, and 123, 2, Note)
we shall be on that high mountain.
(c) A Letter. (See § 296, Note.) — 1. Dear Mother : Here
we are in Nuremljerg, where we are constantly reminded of
the Middle Ages. 2. AVe arrived early in the morning
Chap. 15.] PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES, 101
and went across the old moat, under the gate between the
beautiful buildings, and listened to the river which flows
through the town. 3. Then we went to the old castle
by way of the market, where on market days there is much
in which you would be interested. 4. In front of the
castle is a very deep well, and beside a church is a little
tavern called the " Bratwurstglocklein." 5. When one is
travelling in Germany one ought above all to visit Nurem-
berg. 6. You can depend upon it that you will be wild
about it. Your loving daughter.
'i^''^.^i'
CHAPTER XVI.
REVIEW.
128. The particle fc^on is used in German not only to
translate English already, but in other cases. See also
§ 228, 2.
(1) Whenever the idea of already enters a sentence,
German uses f(^on. It is not necessarily translated in
English.
Have you been in Germany? SBarctt Sic fd|on in T)Ctttf(I)Iani) ?
/ have translated twice, ^d) l)abc fd)on jwctmat iiberfc^t.
He had gone out of the room.
@r war f djon an^ bcr ©tube gcgattgcn, — 2B i I b e n b r u rf).
(2) (Scroti is also used when the sentence contains an
idea of future accomplishment. It may be translated in
English by all right or rieverfear,
ril he there on time, all right.
^d) iDcrbc fdjoit pr rcd)tctt 3ctt ba fcin.
He'll pass, never fear. @r ttJtrb fd)Ott licrfc^t Wcrbcm
We'' II find the others all right.
2Bir fittbcn btc anbcrcn fd)Ott. — ® t o r m.
You shall hear nothing further from me, never fear.
^tt f oUft f c^ott ntt^tiJ lotcbcr bott mir l|iircn. — § c t) j e.
Exercises.
129. (a) 1. Make a table of all the German equivalents
for English at that have been treated in Chapters XIII,
XIV, and XV and illustrate them with sentences. 2. Do
102
Chap. 16.] REVIEW. 103
the same for the German equivalents of English to. 3. For
the German equivalents of English for.
(b) 1. Apply the general rule for order (§ 37, Note) to
prepositional phrases. Illustrate with one or more sen-
tences. 2. How does German translate it and which fol-
lowing a preposition? Illustrate with sentences. 3. Are
there any exceptions to the preceding answer? If so, give
them with illustrative sentences.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. iBitte, tDarten
(Ste einen Slugenbltd auf mid^ ; ic^ tuerbe fc^on baran benfeti.
2. 5Baren (Ste fc^on auf bem ^anbe? 3. §aben ®te
etma^ bagegen, itjenn tc^ burc^ -3^ren (Garten ge^e? 4. Sir
^aben frf)on t)te(e ^Vdm auf morgeu iiber ac^t Xage. 5. 5lu
mem ift bte 9f^et^e? 6. 5luf feiuen gad bltrfen @te fo
barauf autttjorten.
130. (a) 1. All these people are from Schoneberg near
Berlin. 2. In such weather we ought not to go afoot as
far as to the castle. 3. We stayed all summer in a little
village beside a broad lake. 4. Among all my friends
there aren't any to whom I write year by year. 5. This
man was so angry at the other that he went across the
street every time he met him (begegueu with dat.).
6. Who is to blame (@^u(b baran) that you did not write
to your mother on Sunday ?
(6) 1. We climbed onto the mountain by way of a
narrow path between two large rocks. 2. Above all
(§ 125, 2) she wishes a dress of silk for her birthday.
3. When he came back to his friends he hadn't any money
with him. 4. In my opinion we cannot go from here as
far as to the castle before seven o'clock. 5. In such rain
I go out of the house only against my will. 6. At four
104 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 130.
o'clock we shall go across the river and before five we shall
be up (oben) on top of the mountain.
(c) 1. At Nuremberg there were many old houses in
which we were all interested. 2. Toward sunset I went
across a wide river where I rested till night. 3. After
dinner will you go to town with me by way of the old
church? 4. A week from (§ 123, 2, Note) to-day I'll
write to you about my trip to Berlin. 5. Have you any
objections (anything against it) if I go with you from the
hotel as far as to the post-office ? 6. We must wait for him
till to-morrow, as he has all the money for us with him.
CHAPTER XVII.
INSEPARABLE VERBS.
Die Bud^brucferfunft.
131. Urn ba^ 3a^r 1450 erfanb ^^o^ann (Gutenberg in
9)2ain3 bie ^uc^bruderfunft, bie fii^ f(f)ne(( iiber ganj !5)eutfi^^
25. Statue of Gutenberg at Mainz. — In the background rises the
famous Mainz Cathedral, historically one of the most interesting in
Germany.
105
106 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§ 133.
latib t)erbrettete. Wan etnpfanb em (eb^afte^ ^ntereffe fiir
bie neuen ^itc^er, unb ber ^eruf eine^ ^ucf)brucfer^ erfc^ten
toieten aU fe!)r tjerlocfenb.
ObH)of)( btefe llunft ntd)t in ^^iirnberg entftanb, fo trat
biefe (Stabt boi^ fe^r balD an bie ^pii^e be^ ^uc^I)anbe(^.
§ier ht^a^ 5lnton ^^berger bie cjrdjte "Druderei in gan^
(Suropa, benn er befrfiaftigte ^unbert @efe((en mit ber ^ebie=
nung feiner Dierunb3rt)an3ig ^reffen. ^i^ 1504 ^atte er
liber gtDei^unbert ^er!e gebrudt, unb um fie gu oerfaufen,
burc^reiften feine 3lgenten gang !Deutfd)(anb.
Syntax.
132. Inseparable Prefixes. — The commonest insepa-
rable prefixes are be, em^, ent, er, ge, ntig, t)er, ger* They
are never accented ; in fact, in ordinary conversation
they are pronounced only as "grace notes." Verbs
compounded with these particles are conjugated exactly
like their corresponding simple forms, except in tenses
with the past participle. They form the past participle
without the prefix ge: befe^fen, befaf)!, befo^Ien; erga^Ien,
ergii^fte, ergd^ft.
, Let him who possesses learn to lose.
393cr befi^t, ber Icrnc bcrlicrcn. — @ d) i 1 1 c r.
And there is no neio thing under the sun.
Mttb gcfdjicljt ttid)tfii Is^icucci uutcr ber Sonne.
— 33ibcl, ^rebiqer @ a torn on is 1, 9.
Duty fulfilled is always still felt as debt.
erfiiUte *^flid|t em|)finbet fic^ immer no(^ a\& ®d|u(b. — @oet^e.
Notes.
133. Historical Note. — After the fall of the Hohenstaufens,
the next great imperial family was the house of Habsburg.
Rudolph, the first of the line (1273-1291), abandoned the Italian
policy of his predecessors and devoted his energies to Germany.
Chap. 17.] INSEPARABLE VERBS. 107
He insisted that all official documents and proclamations be
written in German (instead of Latin as heretofore) and thus
helped to develop the German language. But the greatest boons
to the German tongue were to be the invention of printing and the
Protestant Reformation. When manuscripts had to be laboriously
copied by hand, books were rare, nor were they of the kind to
appeal to the people. But Gutenberg's invention brought them
within reach of all, while Luther's writings furnished matter of
compelling interest.
134. It must be clearly understood at the outset that it is
impossible to give a definite meaning in all cases to insep-
arable prefixes. The following notes, which partially cover
the commonest uses, may help students to acquire some
feeling for the more important meanings.
135. S3e= has usually one of three meanings.
(1) It may merely strengthen a simple verb : befe^en, to
look at {carefully), bebeuten, to mean (exactly), be^alten, to
keep.
What does that mean ? 933a§ Bcbcutct btt§ ?
ril visit yon this very week.
^d\ bef ud)c end} in bief cr SBodjc nod). — ^et}\t.
(2) ^t^ may mean to provide ivith the thing indicated by
the root of the verb: befratt^ett, to provide with a wreath;
befletben, to provide with clothes; befc^irmen, to provide with
protection; bebedetl, to (provide with a) cover.
Keep your hat on, sir {cover yourself).
S3cbcrfett @tc fid), rttctn ^crr.
Do you leant happiness made happy, reward rewarded 9
893oUt \\)x ba^ QMM bcgtiirft, ben ^ii\)\x htU\\\\i ? — ^auptmann.
(3) :53e' may simply make transitive an intransitive verb :
ftagen, to complain — beflagen, to mourn; ftegen, to win —
beftegen, to conquer; reifen, to travel — bereifen, to travel
through, to "do"; tDeinen, to weep — belDeitien, to bemoan,
108 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 137.
weep for; ga^fen, to pay out money — beja^fen, to pay some-
body; antnjorten, to (make) answer — beotlttDorten, to answer,
reply to.
Why don't you answer ? 993arum ontttiortctt @ic md|t ?
IcanH answer the question. '^^ fatttt btc f^raflc md)t beanttuorten.
To make war on oneself is the hardest fight, to conquer oneself the
finest victory. @id| fclbft bcfncflcit tft bcr fdjttierftc ^ricg ; ftc^ fclbft
beftegen ift bcr frfjonftc ®icg, — ? o g a lu
136. ©nt= usually has one of two kindred meanings.
(1) It denotes the becoming, the beginning of an action,
often in a figurative sense : etltfte^en, to arise (figurative,
begin to starid) ; entbretttiett, to flame up (figurative, begin to
bum) ; entbUi^en, to blossom out (begin to bloom).
He is afiame with love for her. @r ift mit fiicbc p i^r etttbrannt.
There arose a great hubbub.
@§ entftanb ctn gro^c^ ^aW^, — 3S i I b e n b r u d).
(2) From this idea of passing into another state comes the
idea of separation', which is now the commoner meaning:
entlaufen, to run away; enterben, to disinherit; ent5te!)en, to
draw away; etttne'^men, ^o take from. Compare bemdffem,
to water, with entluaffem, to drain.
Many quotations are taken from Goethe's works.
SBtcIc Bittttc fiitb 6JoetI|e^9!Bcrfctt enhtommctt.
A?id when itfiees., belief also flees away.
Uttb flic^t'^, cntflicl|t bcr ©laubc oud). — ^ a u p t m a n n.
Note. — Before f, ent= becomes cmp^ : em^fc^lcn, to recommend ;
cm^ftnbcn, to feel; cm|3fangen, to receive; but in all these cases it has
lost its original meaning.
He is received with joy in the springtime.
6r n)irb im IVnj mlt lUift cmpfangen. — 9^ u a 1 i «.
137. G^r= comes from an old root meaning out ; hence, to
the end, thoroughly. Compare English tired out. It usually
Chap. 17] INSEPARABLE VERBS. 109
contains the idea of finality, accomplishment, sometimes
success; ermitbett, to tire out; erfinnen, to recall (think out) ;
erfinben, to invent (find out) ; erretd)en, to reach (out and get) ;
erfennen, to recogriize (know thoroughly).
I shouldn't have recognized you. ^rf) IjSttc @tc bot^ ttit^t erfattttt.
But finally he let himself he persuaded after all.
©ttblir^ lic^ cr fit^ obcr bot^ crbittcn* — ® t o r m.
138. @C= meant originally completeness, or a being together,
but its meaning is almost entirely lost, except that it occurs
regularly as the prefix to the past participle.
Pm glad to do it. @§ tft gcnt gcfr^eljctt*
Enjoy what God has allotted to you ; be glad to do without what
you have not. ^enic^c, ttitt^ bit %t^ii Iieff^ieben, ctttbcl)rc gem, ttia^
bunid)tl)aft — ©ellert.
139. S'Jlift^ means defective, false, had, ivrong: mi^Oer^
fte^en, to misunderstand ; tnigtingen (from gelingen, to suc-
ceed) , to fail.
I misunderstood that, ^a^ I)abc i(^ mi^ticrftanbcn.
And a councilman of Breisach abuses his {Durer''s) favorite pupil
like a rascal! Uttb cin ^(ii^\)txv tJon S3rcifa(^ mipanbclt fcinen
fiicbltttg^ft^tilcr ttiic cincn Sc^uft ! — § i U e r n.
140. ^tt' is the most puzzling of the prefixes, but it
usually has one of three meanings.
(1) The old root meaning is on, to the end: tjerge^ett, to
X>ass (of time, to go on to the end); t)er^(Ien, to die away
(of sound, to sound to the end); t)erfd)(tngen, to swallow
(entirely).
How the time flies ! 2Btc ft^ncU ticrocl)t bic ^^xi !
The last tones have died away. %\t Ic^tCtt Xdnc fittb bcr^ttttt
— S^antijjo.
(2) Thus t)er* comes to mean beyond the end, into a dif-
ferent or opposite state : Dera^tetl, to despise (ac^tett, to
110 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 142.
honor); t)erbieten, to forbid (gebieten, to bid) ; Derlernen, to
unlearn ((emett, to learn) ; t)er!aufen, to sell (faufen, to buy).
Betrayed and sold. ScrratCtt unb Ocrfauft, — @prid)tt)ort.
It is easy to put things out of tune, but not every one can put them
in tune, ^erftitttmett ift ltiti)t, ahtv ftimmen fann nt(^t jeber.
— S3brnc.
(3) So tjer* comes finally to have the meaning not
necessarily opposite, but just wrong, false. In this sense
it is often reflexive: fic^ t)erfel^en, to see wrong; firf) t»er-
f pred^en, to misspeak, to say wrong ; t)er!ennen, to mistake for
some one else; t)erfiif)ren, to lead astray; t)erbre^en, to twist,
to give a wrong meaning to.
Excuse me, I misspoke I SJcr^ctljCtt Sie, id) ^abc mi^ Uerf^roi^ett*
DonH sit about too long, don't lie around too much, donH fly too
high. S^erft^^ bid) ux^i, tjcdicg^ V\&\ nid)t, ^u \!^f>&i l|inou§ Dcrflicg^
bid) ntd)t» — (S d) e f f e (.
Note. — But there are countless words with t)er= to which none of
these meanings can be traced. Nor can one foretell the meaning of
\}tX' in any given case. For instance, ad^tcn means to esteem and cl^ren
means to honor, but t)crad)ten means to despise, while tjcrc^rcn means
to honor exceedingly. So, too, tterfpred^en means to promise, ftd)
Oerfpre^en, to misspeak ; berfjeben with the dative, to forgive, with the
accusative, to give away. Read again § 134.
141. ^tX' regularly means separation, destruction, to pieces :
^tVYti^tXlf to tear to pieces; itrhvcdjCXlf to break to pieces ; ger*
ftOren, to destroy (disturb to pieces).
I smashed my cup. ^d) I)abc mciuc Xaffc 5crbrod)Cit»
The halls are destroyed. 1)ic fallen finb jcrftijrt, — lU) I a n b.
Exercises.
142. (a) 1. Point out the illustrations of inseparable
prefixes in § 131. 2. Explain those that can be explained
according to the Notes in this chapter. 3. In what
way do inseparable verbs differ from simple verbs ?
Chap. 17] INSEPARABLE VERBS. Ill
(6) 1. Find and explain according to the Notes (§§ 134-
141) the examples of inseparable verbs in the following
sections : § 15, 2, b, Note b, § 23, 1, § 27, § 28, 1, § 43, 1.
2. In § 51, 1, § 58, 1, § 66, § 69, 2, § 73, 2, § 76, 3.
3. In § 92, § 100, 2, § 104, § 113, 1, § 117, 1, § 119, 3, Note,
§121.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. (^te l^abetl e§
n)o^( t)ergeffen, ober ^aben ^k e^ tni^tierftanben? 2. ^er*
3eif)en (Ste mtr; icf) ^abe mic^ Derfproc^en. 3. @^ gefc^ie^t
(serves) i^m re^t, enterbt gu tuerben. 4. 3<(^ empfinbe
ein (eb^aftee ^ntereffe bafiir. 5. ^ijnnen (Ste fic^ nt^t
erinnern, itja^ ba^ bebeutet? 6. Senn @ie ba^ be^atten,
fo miiffen (Sie me^r beja^Ien; ic^ hjitrbe e^ tierfaufen, U)enn e^
mtr ge^drte.
143. (a) 1. He didn't succeed in remembering what the
sentence meant. 2. Don't tear up that piece of paper ;
keep it to cover your German grammar. 3. There arose
such a noise that one could hardly recognize one's own
voice. 4. Have you heard to whom the big house be-
longs ? 5. I misunderstood the waiter and paid him too
much. 6. I can recommend these chairs; they are of
oak and you can't break them easily.
(b) 1. The thief succeeded in getting away with a great
deal of (t)ie() money. 2. The man complained of his
loss, but later he forgot it entirely. 3. Kriemhilde re-
ceived Siegfried and crowned him with a wreath, when he
reached Worms. 4. It often happens that pupils who
have forgotten, claim (bel)aupten) that they misunderstood
the question. 5. If you twist the sentence so, I cannot
help (§ 39, 2, Note) misspeaking. 6. The time passed
so rapidly that we did not succeed in reaching the top of
the mountain.
112 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 143.
(c) John Gutenberg. — 1. When Gutenberg invented the
art of printing, people did not feel any particular interest
in it. 2. They paid him very little and he did not
succeed in showing others what his invention meant.
3. But when they recognized its importance there arose
great competition. 4. In Nuremberg the biggest print-
shop belonged to Anton Koberger. 5. Only a little time
passed before thfe art of printing had spread over all Ger-
many. 6. And we must not forget that we owe this to
Gutenberg.
CHAPTER XVIII.
SEPARABLE VERBS.
2llbred?t Purer*
144. T)er groBte beutfc^e ^itnftler bee Wxtttlalttr^, ^U
hxtd)i !Durer, ^at fic^ burc^ feitie n)unbert)o(Iett ©emcilbe
auegejetc^net. 5l(e ^iingling hjanberte er nad) ^talten aM,
n)o er titele Orte befuc^te unb ftc^ an ben bebeutenbften (Bt'dU
ten ber ^unft eifric; in ber SO^alerei itbte. 5^a^ eintger ^tit
!el)rte er in fein 33ater(anb ^nrltd nnb, aU er in ^f^iirnberg
eintrof, ^eic^nete fic^ feine ^unft burc^ i^re griftf)e unb,
':)?aturtreue aue. ($r irurbe t)om ^aifer aj^a^imitian freunblic^
oufgenommen, befam aber !eine ©tettuncj.
^eine (^emcilbe finben n)ir in alien bebeutenben ©aterien,
aber nirf)t nur ale SO^aler fc^ci^en mir i^n fo ^o^» @elten ^at
fic^ ein 9J^a(er gu gteirfjer ^eit auc^ bur^ folcfje tjorgiigli^en
fupferftidie unb ^ot^fc^nitte auege^eic^net, \vit !5)itrer ee
getan ^at. Unb abgefel)en mn alt feiner funftlerifc^en ^e*
beutung mar er au^ ein angefe^ener ^itrger t)on ebtem
(Sf)ara!ter, auf ben gan^ !i:)eutfc^Ianb mit ^ec^t ftof^ fein !ann
unb ftol^ ift.
Syntax.
145. Separable Prefixes. — The Separable Prefixes in-
clude all tliose not inseparable, that is, all except those
mentioned in the last chapter. They may be (1) prepo-
sitions, as an and aue in an^ie^en, to put on; aue^ie^en,
to take off; (2) adverbs, as ^in and Dorbei, in ^inge^en,
113
114 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§ 145.
26. Portrait of Albrecht Durer. — Painted by the artist himself.
Chap. 18.] SEP AB ABLE VEBBS. 115
to go {away) ; tiorbeige^en, to go hy, to pass ; or (3) nouns,
as $au^, in ^au^^atten, to keep house; ^iaii, in ftattfinben,
to take place*
146. German is partial to separable verbs, especially
in conversation. If two verbs have the same meaning
and one is separable, this one is usually preferred in
talking, though the other may be used regularly in
more formal language. For instance, one sees signs on
doors : „T)k ^iir fc^Uegt t)on fetbft," and in trains : „^xttt
bie Znv nid)t ju offnen, bet)or ber 3ug pit," and in theatres :
„^te ^orftellung (performance) begtnnt um oc^t U^r."
But in conversation Germans say regularly : „SKolIen
@ie bttte bie Xiir jumai^en?" „(gr mac^te ba^ genfter auf,"
„SSann fctugt bie 33orfte((ung an?"
147. Separable verbs have three peculiarities.
(1) For simple tenses (present or past) in independent
clauses the prefix is put at the end of the clause, except
that a complementary infinitive follows it.
It now begins to dawn. @^ fangt tttttt an, ju taQtn* — g o u q u e.
The people is aroused, the storm breaks loose.
^a^ S5otf ftc^t auf, ber Sturm Wx^t to^» — Corner.
(2) For simple tenses in dependent clauses the prefix
is attached to the verb, just like an inseparable prefix.
He is not so stupid as he looks.
er ift nidjt f o t>nmm, wic cr au§ftel)t. — @:pri(^tt)ort.
Who doesnH go ahead, goes back.
893cr ttid)t tJorangcljt, Ummi swriirf. — @ o e t ^ e.
(3) For compound tenses, whether in dependent or
independent clauses, the prefix precedes the verb and
is attached to it. When the infinitive with ju is used,
116 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 149.
gu (like ge in the past participle) comes between prefix
and verb.
iShe stopped reading aloud. Bit l)at oufgc^iirt, tiorjurcfen.
A thing put off is never done.
5lttfgcfd)otiCtt ift ttidjt aufgcljobcn. — ®^ric^tt)ort.
Though time may have flown, memory never yields.
^ft bic 3cit autt^ tjingcfioncn, bic ©rinncrung ttictdjct nic. — U t) la n b.
Notes.
148. Historical Note. — After the death of Rudolph of Hahshurg
(1291), half a dozen different families furnished emperors, but in
1438 the crown fell again to the Habsburgs and from then on
remained in that family. The most interesting and romantic of
the Habsburgs was Maximilian I (1493-1519), "the last of the
knights," the patron of Diirer (the Kaiser Max in Hillern's ^o^er
al^ bie ^irc^e). Under him a noble effort was made to reconstruct
the Empire and to modernize Germany, but it failed because of
the petty jealousies among the German states, of which there were
at that time between three and four hundred.
149. ,§tn and f|cr» Nearly all German verbs of motion
are compounded with the adverbs l)tn and ^er to denote
direction of motion.
(1) §in means motion away from the speaker, \)tx motion
toward the speaker.
There he goes, ^a gcl|t cr l)tn.
Is she coming across >• i^ommt fie Ijcritticr ?
Whither thou goest, I will go.
993o btt l)ingcl)cft, tta miU id) au^ l)iugcl)ett, — 33ibel, $RutI) l, 16.
(2) §in unb l^er means to and fro, hither and thither, and
is usually treated as an independent adverb, rather than as
a separable prefix.
He ran hither and thither. @r tft l)in unb l)cr gclaufcn.
Wretched thoughts tore him hither and thither.
^ammertiolle (^ebanlcn riffcn i^n l)in unb ^er. — (^ r e t) t a g.
Chap. 18.]
SEPARABLE VERBS.
117
27. Albrecht Durer's House in Nuremberg.
118 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 150,
Note. — The difficulty with l^in and l^cr lies in the fact that in Eng-
lish we have no equivalent word to translate. The idea is contained
in our verb, but German adds a word of direction, which we forget to
use when we put our English thoughts into German. But especially
with ge^en and fommen it is easy to get the habit of using ^tn and ^cr.
These phrases should be practised till they become second nature.
Come up, come over, come here.
fommen @te ^erauf, fommen ®ic ^eriiber, fommen @te l^ierl^cr.
Go up, go across, go out.
®elien @le f)inauf, ge!)en @ie f)miiber, gel^en @ic l^tnauS.
He came no one knows whence, he loent no one knows whither.
©r fam, unb niemonb meife ttjo^cr ; er ging, unb niemanb roeife tt)oI)tn.
— Jcjfttig.
150. English place has several German renderings.
(1) ^er Ort (bie Orte or bte Orter) is used for a
definite place in a broad sense, as one might refer to a city,
a field, or any large space.
That is a pretty place. 'iSai^ ift citt ^iibft^cr Ort.
This truth changes according to time and place.
^icfc 933al)rl|eit mcri^fclt nnrfi 3cit unb Oxt — 53 i« m a r cf.
(2) '^tx ^lci% (bie ^rS^e) usually means (a) public square,
(6) room, in the sense of space, (c) a seatf at the theatre or
in a similar place. It rarely means place.
{a) I saw him in the Paris Square.
^(^ I)obc tl|n auf bcm ^arifcr ^lo^ jjcfcl|cn.
That spreads abroad through streets and square.
^aS bringt in btc 393citc burd) ©affcn unb ^la^.— U^tanb.
(6) Have you room enough f .^abctt <3ic ^tn^ flcnufl ?
There^s room for us both in the sea.
(&^ ift ^ta^ fiir wnS bctbc im 9Kccr. — $e^fe*
(c) Is this seat taken ? ^ft bicfcr ^(a^ bcfcgt ?
Young L. stood erect in his seat.
^o« flcinc 2. ftonb nufrcdit ouf fciitcm ^lo<?.
— SBilbeubruc^,
Chap. 18.] SEPARABLE VERBS, 119
N^ote. — In poetry, ber 9laum is regularly used for roonu'm the sense
shown in (&).
Give room [make way'] , ye peoples. @ebt 9laum, i^r 35otf er. — 3) a I) n.
In the smallest hut there is room for a happy loving pair.
SfJaum ift in ber ficinften ^iitte fitr ein gliidtid) Uebenb(e«) ^aar.
— ©(^itlcr*
(3) jDie 'Stette means p/ace in a narrow ^qh^q, d^ particular
place, more as English uses spot.
I donH understand this place (passage).
^tcfc ©telle tjerftel)e idj ttid)t.
7 s/iowZd rfo lY on the spot. ^(^ tatc t^ auf bcr @tcUe, — ^ r e t) t a g»
(4) ^te (Stedutig means place in the sense of position,
either an actual position, a figurative one, or a job.
The maid doesnH like her new place.
^ie neue StcUuttfl gefaUt ber 9Kagb tttd^t
I fear that the ministers have got into an awkward place.
^tt) furi^tc, i»a^ bic 9Jltitiftcr lit cine fri)iefc ©tellung geraten ftttb.
— ^i^morcf.
Exercises.
151. (a) 1. What are the three peculiarities of separable
verbs ? 2. Which of these three peculiarities is illus-
trated by each of the examples of separable verbs in § 144 ?
3. Give sentences illustrating all the uses of f)m and l^er.
(b) 1. Find separable verbs in the following sections :
§ 9, § 15, 1, b, § 19, 2, § 30, 1, and Note, § 43, 1, § 50, 2,
Note, § 62, § 68, 4, § 92, § 111, 1. 2. Which of the three
peculiarities of separable verbs does each of the sentences
in Question (b) 1 illustrate ?
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. ^attgetl ©ie
hodj ntd^t an, U^ id) aufge^ort ^be! 2. ^omtnen (Bit
fjerein; t)ter ift noc^ t)iel ^(a^. 3. (5r lief ^in unb ^er,
aber er fonnte ben Ort nic^t finben. 4. ^c^ "i^aht brei
120 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§ 152.
^la^e fiir STann^aufer ; troden @te tnttge^cn? 5. 2Bo
ge^ftbu^tn? ©^ ift noc^ nic^t 3ett an;jufangen. 6. ^omm
bod) i)tv unb ^trf mix ; i^ tjerfte^e biefe ©telle nic^t.
152. (a) 1. As I sat down in (auf) my seat, the teacher
began to talk. 2. There he goes ; when do you think he
will come back ? 3. Eead on (meiter) ; this is not the
place where the exercise stops. 4. Come here and look
at (anfel^en) this picturesque little square. 5. How do
you like your new place, and when does your work begin ?
6. I shouldn't think (§ 41, 1, Note) of beginning before
Monday.
(b) 1. The dog ran hither and thither in (auf) the
square. 2. Where are you going and when do you arrive ?
3. If you will come here I will tell you of my new place.
4. Is this the place where you want to have your house
built ? 5. I shouldn't think of it (§ 41, 1, Note) ; there
isn't room enough here. 6. We went to and fro and
looked for a more comfortable seat.
(c) Oerman Picture Oalleries. — 1. When one begins to
speak of the galleries in Germany, it is hard to stop.
2. There is no room here to tell of all the places where
we can look at beautiful paintings. 3. The best are prob-
ably (tDO!^() in Berlin, Dresden, and Munich ; these places
are especially distinguished for (bur(^) their galleries.
4. Every year great art exhibitions take place, where
countless pictures are brought together. 5. The Germans
are so interested in art that thousands go (§ 149, 1) to visit
these exhibitions. 6. There are usually so many people
there that there is hardly room enough to look at the
pictures.
CHAPTER XIX.
COMMON PREFIXES.
Cutl}er unb 6er Ceufel.
153. TO ^Jlaxtin Sutler ^rofeffor an ber Unit)erfitat gu
Sittenberg n)ar, wurbe er iDegen feiner (Sc^riften uerfolgt.
5lber feme greunbe unterftit^ten i^n unb brac^ten i^n ^eim(irf)
auf ber Sartburg unter. !Dort fu^rte er feinen ^lan burc^,
28. Luther's Room at the Wartburg. — Sight-seers are said to have
carried away the inky plaster as souvenirs.
121
122 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 154.
ba^ 9^eue ^eftament ou§ bem ©ried^ifc^en tn^ T)eutfc^e gu
iiberfe^en.
2l(^ Sutler auf ber $3artburg bei btefer 5lrbeit luar, ^at er
f{(^ fo iiberarbeitet, bag er tt)i(be ^rugbilber fat). (5ine^
5lbenb^ gtaubte er, ber Xeufet fei ba unb mode i^n umftricfen.
T)a trarf ^ut^er fein XmtenfaB bem Xeufel an ben llopf.
^er ^eufet tjerfc^njanb, aber ber glecf an ber Sanb, too bie
^inte ^inf^ri^te, ift noc^ ^eute ^u fe^en.
Syntax.
154. Common Prefixes. — The four prepositions burc^,
iiber, urn, and unter may be separable or inseparable.
(1) They are separable when both prefix and verb
are used in their natural meaning. The verbs are then
often intransitive, take the same auxiliary as the simple
verb, and have the accent on the prefix. Like other
separable verbs, they take ge- in the past participle be-
tween prefix and verb.
(2) The prepositions are inseparable when used in a
figurative sense or one not exactly literal. The verbs
are then usually transitive, have '^aben as auxiliary, and
take the accent on the root of the verb, not on the
prefix. They do not take ge* in the past participle.
The inseparable use is much commoner than the sepa-
rable.
One who is already soaked through boldly lets himself get rained on.
O^ne 8it)eu burdjregnen Vd^t ber ft(^, ber fd)on gattj burd^na^t.
— ©prlc^njort.
He only wishes to instruct you, not to convince you.
9tnt unterweifen wiU er bid), nidjt ilberwetfen. — U t) ( a n b.
No one who doesnH convince himself will be convinced by you.
9liemanb, ber ftd| nid|t felbft uberjeugt, tuirb oon bir Ubcr^cugt
ttjerbcn. — ^^3 1 a t e u.
Chap. 19.] COMMON PREFIXES. 123
Note. — When the preposition has an object, the verb cannot be
classed as separable. 3rf) bin burc^ ©eutfc^Ionb gereift, / traveled
through Germany, is a sentence with a simple verb and preposition.
Scf) ^abe S)eutfrf)Iaitb burrf)reift, / toured Germany, has an inseparable
verb. 3c^ bin bur(^gereift, / traveled through, illustrates a separable
verb.
I translate the sentence. 3d^ iiberfe^c ben ©ai? (inseparable).
/ put (ferry) my friend across.
3c^ 'i^^e^ mcinen ^rennb iiber (separable).
I put (ferry) my friend across the river.
3c() fct^e meinen ^reunb iiber ben gln^ (simple verb and preposition).
3cf) ^cibe ben @atJ iiberfe^t (inseparable).
3d) ^abe meinen ^reunb iibergefe^t (separable).
3rf) ^ciht meinen ^reunb iiber ben gUi^ geje^t (simple verb).
Notes.
155. Historical Note. — Martin Luther is known as the "father
of the modern German language." Under Emperor Maximilian,
efforts were made to establish an official German court language
in place of the many existing dialects. All official documents and
proclamations were issued by the imperial chancery, the office of
the Emperor's chancellor, in the language of Middle Germany.
But this language was by no means common till the popularity
of Luther's works spread it broadcast through the land. Luther
wrote : " I have no certain, special, peculiar language in German ;
I use the common German tongue, that the people of both upper
Germany and lower Germany may understand me. I speak the
official Saxon language (i(^ rebe naci) bet fdrf)fifd)en cantjelet) [tanjlei])
which all princes and kings in Germany follow." See map, p. 282.
156. The phrase into German is usually rendered by
W ^CUtfd^C, while in German may be auf beutfc^ or tm
What is that in German ?
9Bic I)ct^t t>a§ anf bcittf^ (or tm ^cutfdictt) ?
Please put that into German.
Bittt, ilbcrfe^ctt @ic U§ in§ ^cutfd^c*
124
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
[§ 157.
In German ice lie when loe are polite.
^m ^ctttfd^cn (iigt man, wcttit man I)oflid) ift. — @ o c 1 1) e.
In German ^'' world'''' is a woman, in Latin she''s a man (bic
SBelt ; mundus, masc).
5(nf bctttf j^ ift SBcIt ctn SBcib, latcinifd) ift fie 'Mann. — ? o p a u.
29. The Outer Court at the Wartburg. — Luther's room was in the
building at the left centre.
157. English to think may have various German render-
ings. See § 41.
(1) ®(auben and meinen (both reg., aux. ^aben) are the
commonest. They translate think in the sense of to have a
belief (ber ®(aube) or an opinion (bie 3[J?einimg). yj?etnen
often implies not only having an opinion, but telling it. In
the expression, to think so, so is either omitted entirely in
German or is rendered by ba^ or e^.
Chap. 19.] COMMON PREFIXES. 125
Do you think it will rain ? I
(SJIaulictt ®ic (or tneinctt @te), ba^ c§ rcgnctt mirb ?
Tes, / i^i/iA; &o.
Sn, ba^ glaubc t(^, or ba§ ntcinc trfj, or simply : ^i^ gfaubc or id|
tneinc.
" Believing'''' and " thinking^'' deceive many a one.
©taubcn unb aWcittcn bcttritgt rnattttig etnctt, — @prici)tt)ort.
I donH think so. In the whole village they think that there'' s some-
thing up there that's uncanny. 1)a§ glttttb^ tti^ nidjt, Wlan ittcittt m
gttttsctt 2)orf, c§ f ei ba obcu ctttJOig nit^t gc^cuer, — ^au^tmattn.
iVbJ6. — (a) ©louben, io believe a person, regularly takes the dative
Kot one believes me, every one believes the blind man.
Sflidjt einer gtaubt mlr, jebcr gtaubt bem SSUnben, — @uberntann.
(6) In the sense of believing a thing, glauben always takes the ac-
cusative :
DonH believe everything you hear,
@laub' nic^t gleic^ oUeg, tt)a§ bu tjbrft. — 2B i e I a n b.
(c) ©lauben, «o believe in, takes an with the accusative. See
§ 119, 2.
Believe in the power of honor.
©taub' an bie ©eiralt ber @^re. — W. 2B, @ d) I e g e I.
(2) T)enfen (bac^te, gebarf)t, aux. ^ben) indicates ^nen^a?
action or concentration. See § 41.
Did you think of that ? ^abctt ®ic barait gcbadjt ?
/'ve never thought about thinking.
^j^ ^abc ttic ilbcr ba§ ^citfcn gcbadjt — @ o e 1 1) c,
(3) In the sense of to think of, to consider, usually with two
objects, German uses finbett or ^alten fitr. They must be
used only where the English j^nd or consider could be used.
I think him a dunce. ^(1) Ijattc iljtt filr cittCtt ^ummfo^f,
DonH you think that beautiful f f^ittbCtt Sie ba§ nid)t ft^Ott ?
I always thought myself a man of honor.
^d) Ijabc m\^ immcr fiir cincn Wann tion @^rc gc^altcn,
— gret)tag,
126 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§169;
I Exercises.
158. (a) 1. Which sentences in § 153 illustrate common
prefixes? 2. Write two sentences to show that the
separable use of the common prefixes is just like other
separable verbs. 3. Write two sentences to show that
the inseparable use of the common prefixes is like other
inseparable verbs.
(6) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. ^d) bin feft
itberjeugt, bag (Ste e^ Itberfe^en fonnen. 2. X)u bift ganj
bur^ndgt ; bu mugt bi(^ gleic^ umjie^en. 3. Qd) g(aube,
ba^ foKten wix nod) nid)t unterne^men. 4. Qa, ba^ meine
i(^ auc^, benn e^ tft t)ie( ju fc^irer. 5. Senn @ie e§ nic^t
in^ !Deutfd)e itberfe^en, fo fomnten @ie n)o!)( nic^t bnrcf).
6. 3<ci^ glaube, er ^dlt fic^ fiir Diet beffer, a(^ er ift ; meinen
(Ste ni(^t?
159. (a) 1. If he won't ferry us across, we shall have
to go around. 2. You can't get around it ; you must
translate these sentences. 3. I think he has carried out
what he has undertaken. 4. We don't think this book
very hard; we don't overwork. 5. When I undertake
something hard, I do not like to be interrupted. 6. Will
you please look through this exercise and see if I have
translated it right ?
(b) 1. He was thoroughly (feft) convinced that he could
carry out what he had undertaken. 2. I think you
translated the last sentence wrong (fa(fc^). 3. Shall we
ferry you across or are you going around? 4. I think
him a German professor; didn't you think so, too? 5. She
interrupted me to ask me to look through her exercise.
6. I don't think you'll overwork if you translate these
sentences.
Chap. 19.]
COMMON PREFIXES.
127
(c) Luther and the German Language. — 1. Many years
ago Emperor Maximilian undertook a unification of the
many German dialects
(SDIunbarten) into a
common language.
2. He was supported
by his Chancery,
which thought the
German dialects too
complicated. 3. The
work of the Emperor
was often interrupted
by the quarreling
nobles, who were not
interested in the Ger-
man language. 4. So
this work was carried
out only (erft) after
Luther translated the
Bible. 5. Luther's
works include (umf af -
fen) many other writ-
ings besides the trans-
lation of the Bible,
but people (§ 57) think
his translation of the Bible his best work. 6. And, more
than his other works, his Bible united the German dia-
lects.
30. Martin Luther. — From a portrait
painted by his friend, Lucas Cranach.
CHAPTER XX.
REVIEW.
160. The particle uber^aupt is used to strengthen general
statements. It is usually translated in English by at all or
anyway.
That isn't right at all. Xa§ tft iibcrljau^t ntdjt ridjtig.
Do you know him at all f ^crtttCtt @ic iljit bciitt uberl)att|Jt?
But who could think such a thing anyway ?
5(ber wcr fonntc fo ctttia^ ulicrl)att))t bcnfcn ? — SSitbenbruc^.
Exercises.
161. (a) 1. Give a list of the mseparaftZe prefixes ; of the
common prefixes. 2. What is the only difference between
inseparable verbs and simple verbs ? 3. In what three
ways do separable verbs differ from simple verbs ? 4. Do
verbs with common prefixes have the peculiarities of both
separable and inseparable verbs ? 6. When do simple
verbs resemble verbs with common or separable prefixes ?
(§ 154, 2, Note.)
(b) 1. From the illustrations in § 142, 6, choose the two
quotations which please you best, and learn them by heart.
2. Of the illustrations in § 151, b, learn by heart the two
which you like best.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. (5^ fottt tnir
gar nic^t ein, biefe^ §ote( ^u empfel)(en. 2. 3<d) glaube,
e§ tft iiberl)aupt !ein ^(a^ mel)r ba; tM^ meinen ^Sie?
3. 3[Ba^ benfen ®ie bauon iiberl)aupt? 4. 3i^eun 3ie nidjt
128
Chap. 20.] REVIEW. 129
itberfe^en f()nnen, fo fc^fagen (Ste boc^ tm SSbrterbuc^ nac^f
5. 3c^ ^alte e^ fiir unmogl^, btefe ^egel ju mtgt)erftel)ett.
6. T)a^ !ommt barauf an
162. (a) 1. The dog ran hither and thither, but he
didn't go around the little lake. 2. I do not think these
exercises hard at all, but I do not understand all the rules
in this book. 3. Did you misspeak, or did I misunder-
stand the question ? 4. I like my new place, but I do
not think it so good as the other. 5. Open your book,
stand up, and translate the next page. 6. I can't; I have
forgotten what the first word means.
(b) 1. That is not the right place; begin with the next
line. 2. Wait till he stops and sits down in (auf) his
seat. 3. I think we must wait for the teacher; don't
you think so too? 4. He claims there is no room on
that bench ; what do you think ? 5. Believe me, there
aren't any good places at all in that office. 6. I don't
think him as clever as he looks (au^fet)en) ; what do you
think ?
(c) 1. He paid too much for the suit he had made.
2. Come here and I will tell you how the prisoner
escaped from prison. 3. The poor child didn't know
where it came from or where it was going. 4. I think
there isn't any better place where we could spend the
summer. 5. I don't think that he misspoke when he
translated that sentence; he didn't understand what it
meant. 6. We began at quarter to nine; don't you
think it is almost time to stop ?
CHAPTER XXI.
^aBCtt AND ©citl AS AUXILIARIES.
Die UI?ren Katfer Karls bes ^iinften.
163. taifer ^art V. ^atte ^tDet U^ren, bie niemat^ gleicf)
gtngen. S^ tft t^m ntemal^ gelungen, bie beiben ^um gleidjen
ric^tigen @e{)en ^u bringen, obwo^I er ba^ peigig tjerfuc^te.
(Sbenfo ift e^ il)m mit feinem D^^eic^e ergangen, ba§ au^
!Deutfc^(anb unb ^panieti beftanb. (S^ h)ar fd)H)er, biefe
©taaten auf gteic^e Seife ^u regiereti- (5ine^ Xage^ be^'
gegnete i^m ein greunb, ber tDU^te, \>a^ bie U^ren nicf)t
gleic^ gittgen.
jDiefer ^^reunb fagte bem ^aifer: ,,Senn e^ bir nic^t
getungen ift, ^mei Heine Ul)rett in gteic^em @ange ^u erl)alten,
mie fannft bn I)offen, (gpanien nnb ^eutfd)(anb mit g(eicl)en
(^efe^en ^n regieren? Xrenne (ieber bie beiben!" „J^vl I)aft
recl)t," fagte ^axi, unb er ift bent '^att feine^ greunbe^ gefolgt.
Qn X)eutfcf|(anb ift nac^ i^nt fein ^ruber J^*evbinanb auf ben
Z^xon gefommen ; ben 9^eft feinem 9^eid)e«^ \)at er feinem
(Sot)ne 'ipiiilipp gegeben. dx felbft ^at fid) t)on ber ^egierung
jurlicfgeaogen.
Syntax.
164. .^aBcn and fctn as Auxiliaries. — As auxiliary,
^ben usually indicates verbal action, while fein is used
to indicate the condition following such action. This
general rule applies to most of the following morej
detailed statements.
130
Chap. 21.] ^ahtU AND ©citl AS AUXILIARIES. 131
31. Emperor Charles V. — From a painting by Titian.
132 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 166.
165. ^ahtn is used with (a) all transitives, (5) all
reflexives, (c) all modals, (^) all impersonals except
gelingen, gef(^e^en, and glucfen, and (e) many intransi-
tives. These last include especially those denoting no
change in position, like !f)angen, to hang^ (eben, to live^
liegen, to lie, ru^en, to rest, fc^(afen, to sleep, fi^en, to sit,
fte^en, to stand, iDo^nen, to dwell, ^raten, to roast, foc^en,
to boil, and raurfjen, to smoke, take ^aben whether used
with or without an object.
(a) I have seen him. ^(!^ Ijabc il)tt gcfcl^Ctt.
(6) Have you had a good time ? ^obeu @ic fid) gut amiificrt ?
(c) ITe hasn't been able to do it. @r Ijttt C§ nitl)t tun fiJUUCU.
(d) I was glad that it rained.
@§ ))<ki mid) gcfrcut, ba^ c§ flcrcfluct I)at.
(e) ffoio Zowfir have you slept 9 29Bie lougc !)ttbctt 8ic gcfi^lafen ?
She has stood there long enough.
<Bk I)at ian^t Qtnm ^^ geftanben.
Live as you will wish to have lived, when you die.
ficbc, ttJic bu, ttjcnu bu ftirbft, tt>iinfd)cn wtrft, gdcbt ju I)abe«.
— ©eUert.
166. Sein is used with (a) all intrattsitives that
denote change of position or condition, (^) fein, to he,
and bleiben, to remain, and (c) the impersonals gelingen,
to succeed, gefc^el^en, to happen, and glitcfen, to have good
luck, to succeed.
(«) She has gone home. (Sic ift nad^ ^^aM\c gcgnugcu.
He has become very angry. Gr ift fcl)r bijfc gouurbett*
{b) I have never been in Germany.
^d) bin no(^ uic in X>cutfd)(oub gcmcfen.
They have stayed a long time. Sic ftub (angc gcblicbcn.
(c) I have succeeded well. @§ ift mir gut gclungcu (gcgliirft).
It happened according to Wodan's command.
(B^ ift gcfd)cl)cn nad) aSobnn^ ^cbot. — SS a u m b a d).
Note. — Two common English transitives, to follow (folgen), and
to meet by chance, to happen upon (begcgncn), are intransitives in
Chap. 21.] ^aBctl AND ©ettl AS AUXILIARIES. 133
German and take fciti and the dative. German Bcfolgen and treffeii
correspond exactly to follow and meet, and take ^aben and the ac-
cusative.
Have you followed my advice ? ®inb ®ie tneinem ^aU gefotgt?
How often have I met him on my walks!
2Bic oft bin ic^ i^m auf mcinen ©pasicrgottgeit begcgnet !
— 2Bitbenbrud).
167. Some intransitives may take either ^ahtn or fetm
(1) When indicating the goal of the act, they take
fein.
/ traveled to Berlin. I^J*) ^itt nad) 83crUtt flcrcift.
He has ridden to town. @r ift ttt bic Stobt gctittcit.
We rowed to the shore. W\x fittb att§ Ufcr gcrubcrt.
In this he has gone too far. (£r tft ^icrbci ju ttictt gcgangcit.
— @d)iner.
(2) When indicating simply the verbal action^ not
the goal, they take ^ben.
7 have traveled for Allyn and Bacon.
^d) ^abc fitt 5(Ut)n ttnb S3acott gctrctft»
TTe Aas r«V/^e/i till he is tired. (£r Ijat gcrittctt, bt§ cr tttiibc ift.
We have rowed for two hours. 298ir Ijabett ^ttJct Stunbcn gcrubcrt
I never rode like that. <Bo l)ab^ tt^ ttic gertttctt, — @ o c t ^ e.
Note. — Of course when these verbs are used transitively, even
when they indicate the goal of the action, they take f)aben.
I rode my horse to town. 3cl) \)aht metn ^ferb in btc @tabt geritten.
He drove us to the station. (Sr l)at ung nad) bem S3o^nl)of gefaljren.
Notes.
168. Historical Note. — Charles V (1519-1556), grandson of
Maximilian I, inherited Austria from his father, and Spain and
the Netherlands from his mother. When he was chosen Emperor,
the former glories of the Empire seemed to be revived in his vast
domains. In 1547, a year after the death of Luther, Charles
emerged victorious from a religious war and stood for a brief
space at the very zenith of his power, the mightiest ruler in
134 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§170.
Christendom. But the religious struggles which he strove to stop,
kept on, and disturbances in various quarters of his wide realm
wearied him of worldly cares, so that in 1556 he withdrew, leaving
to his brother Ferdinand I Austria and the Habsburg possessions,
and to his son Philip the Netherlands, Spain, and the Spanish
possessions in the New World.
169. German U^r has two common English equivalents.
(1) It regularly means watch or dock. When confusion
between these two might arise, bie Xafc^enu^r is used for
wcUch,
Where is the clock? I donH see it.
SSoiftbicU^r? ^tl) fcljc ftc ittr^t
The clock, it tells the hour.
^ic U^r, ftc jcigt bic 8<unlic. — ©ritt^orjcr.
(2) U^r is used for English time or o'clock in telling time
(see § 50, 4).
What time is it ? SBtCtiict Ul)r tft t^ ?
At three o^clock we mounted our horses.
Urn brci Ul|r fc^tcit mir nn2 ju ^fcrbc. — ? i t i c n c r o n.
Note. — The hour is always bie @tunbe, which also means the
lesson. Never use U^r for hour.
We waited for him two hours.
SSir Ifahtn groct ©tiinben auf it)n geniartet.
/ will give you a lesson daily.
^d) njcrbc S^ncn tagticf) cine @tunbc geben. — SBlIbenbruc^.
170. German Bcibc has two peculiarities.
(1) When used with an article, a possessive, or a demon-
strative, it comes between this and its noun.
I have both books, ^d) Ijabc beibc S^tid^cr.
/ have both the (or my) books.
^(^ ^abc bie (or meine) bcibcn 93iic^cr.
Both the parents have gone out.
^ic bcibctt ©Item ftnb ^tnaudgegangen. — (J f) a m i f | o.
Chap. 21.] ^ahtU AND 8cttt AS AUXILIARIES, 135
(2) In referring to two actions or two things that are
thought of as belonging together, German uses beibe^ for
botJi. It can never be used for persons.
Did he sing or play f — Both I
^di cr gcfiutgctt obcr gcf^tcU ? — JBciticS !
Both are right. Sctbc^ tft rii^tig,
/ am pleased that both spring from your hands.
^(^ bitt tjcrgttugt, ba^ bcibc^ m^ bcinctt ^anbctt fftttUt, — 3R o r i f c.
Note. — (a) 2)ie beiben is usually used for the two in referring to a
definite pair.
The stepmother and the two sisters were frightened.
S)ie @tiefmutter unb bie beiben @(i)tt)eftern erfc^rofen. — ©rtmm.
(6) When in doubt as to which form (beibeS or beibe) to use, a
safe rule is to use atlc beibe, which is correct for persons, things, or
actions. It may be substituted for beibe6 or beibe in nearly all the
examples in (1) and (2).
Who possesses that does not need both.
SBer bag befi^t, braud)t atte beibe nic^t. — §cbbcl»
171. English tp meet has two common German renderings.
(1) The commoner is treffett (traf, getroffett, er trtfft, aux.
^aben), also as reflexive, fic^ treffen. It generally means to
meet by appointment, intentionally.
Did you meet him f ^abctt @ic tl)tt gcttoffctt ?
Where shall we meet each other ? 293o ttioUctt ttih tttt0 trcffctt ?
Pd meet many old friends and comrades there.
^d) ttiiirbc t>tc(c a(tc f^rcuttbc unb ^amcrabctt bort treffcn*
— ^retjtag.
(2) In the sense of to meet by chance, to run across, Ger-
man generally uses begegnen (reg. insep., aux. fein), with the
dative. See § 166, Note.
I just met your sister in Broad Street.
Sd) bitt cbeti ttt bcr Srcitcn ©tra^c ^^rcr (S(l|tticftcr bcgcgnct.
In the coiirt the coachman met him.
2(ttf bcm ^ofc bcgcgttctc i^nt bcr tutft^cr. — @tortn.
136 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§173.
Note. — To meet in the sense of to get acquainted with is fenncn
lernen. The regular remark in Germany when one is introduced is
Very agreeable, \el)V angenefjm. The common forms of introduction
are ;
Have you met Mr. Brown ? ^oben @ie §errn 33raun fennen gclernt?
May I present you to my sister ? or May I acquaint you ?
3)arf i(^ ®tc meiner @c^tt)efter tiorftcUen? or :5)Qrf id) bic §crren
(bic ^errfd)aften, when of different sexes) befannt madden ?
172. English right is rendered in German in two ways.
(1) dltd^t is used (a) for all cases of 7Hght as distinguished
from left and (b) for the expression to be right when refer-
ring to persons. In the latter case it is, used only with the
verb '^ahtn.
(a) I hurt my right foot, ^d^ l^obc mir ben rerfjtcn ?^u§ ticrlc^t.
Let not thy left hand know what thy right hand doeth.
®o (a^ bcittc Htifc ^anb ittdjt miffctt, mag bic rcd|tc iwi.
— 33iber, gjJatt. fi, 3.
(ft) ^771 / nV/i« ? ^nb^ ti^ rct^t ? (Never, S3in id) rcrf)t ?)
Yes, you are right, ^a, '^a ^rtft bit rcd|t. — .s) a u p t m a n n.
(2) 9?ic^ttg is used for right in the sense of correct. It is
used generally with fein and of things.
7s this sentence right f ^ft btcfcr 8rt^ rtd)tt(| ?
2%a« isw'« r?(7/i« {doesnH happen right).
^ag gcljt nirf)t ridjtig ju. — ? e f f i n g.
JVofe. — A common expression for that is right, especially in re-
ferring to number, paying bills, counting change, and so on, is : !5)a8
ftimmt (that is in tune).
173. English hard is variously rendered in German.
(1) As an adjective in the sense of hard to the touch, the
opposite of soft, hard is ^art.
This pencil is too hard, ^tcf cr S?Ictftift tft 511 l)art.
He is girt from top to toe in hard steel.
©r tft tiont Wivhel biS sur So^f in fatten Staljl flcfdjitaUt
— U^ranb.
Chap. 21.] ^ttBctt AND Scttl AS AUXILIABIES. 137
(2) As an adjective in the sense of difficult, hard is fc^lDer.
This exercise is not hard, '^icfc 3(ttfgttlie tft tttt^t ft^ttJCr»
7i( may have been hard for the old man,
@d|tt)cr mog e^ bcm grcif eu SWanitc gcmcfctt fcin* — 9fl o f e g g e r.
(3) As an adverb, in the sense of industriously, hard is
fleigig.
ro?« m?/s« study harder. Sic tttiiffctt ftci^igcr Icmctt*
But they worked all the harder.
%\>tx bcfto flcv^tgcr arbcttctcn fie, — better.
(4) As an adverb in the sense of vigorously, hard is ftarf.
It rained very hard. (g§ regttctc jc^r ftarf.
The old man smoked harder.
^cr 3l(tc raud)tc ftarfcr, — 2Bi(benbrui^.
Exercises.
174. (a) 1. Explain by the rules in § 164 to § 167 the
uses of !^aben and feiu in § 163. 2. Apply the general
rule in § 164 to the special cases in §§ 165, 166, and 167.
3. Give German sentences illustrating two common verbs
which take fein and the dative when their English equiva-
lents take have and a direct object.
(6) 1. Find examples of the auxiliary '^abetl in-§ 6, 1, § 28,
2, § 51, 2, § 68, 1 and 4, § 73, 1 and 2, § 81. 2. Find illus-
trations of the auxiliary fein in § 30, 2, § 68, 2, § 128, 1,
§ 140, 1, § 147, 3, § 150, 4. 3. Under what phase of the
rules in §§ 164-167 does each of the above examples belong?
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. ^^ moc^te fie
fennen (ernen. Sotten <Ste mic^ tjorfteden? — (Se^r ange=
ne^m! 2. Sa^ tft benn gefdje^en? ^c^ \)(\ht m6){^
ge^drt. 3. ^c^ bin ben beiben eine (Stnnbe lang gefolgt.
4. (gie ^aben rec^t; ber ®a^ tft nd)tig. 5. ^^c^ {)atte
bentfc^e ^tunben, aber ba^ 58nc^ tear ju fc^mer. 6. (gte
^cihtn tt)o^( nic^t flei^ig genug gearbeitet. — ^a, ba^ fttmmt!
138 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [5176.
175. (a) 1. It was very hard, but we succeeded in trans-
lating both the sentences right. 2. We had followed
them for two hours when it began to rain hard (§ 173, 4).
3. During all the lesson the two girls were right every
time they translated. 4. If you work hard, your exer-
cises will be right. 5. Have you decided at what time
we shall meet [each other]? 6. Have you met my
brother ? May I present him to you ?
(b) 1. I gave him both my pencils; he said one was
too hard, but the other was just (gerabe) right. 2. Two
hours ago we met them both in (auf bem) Harvard Square.
3. In the last lesson you weren't right a single time, but
both these sentences are right. 4. Is this exercise hard
or long? Both. 5. You have slept a long time; now
you must study ((emen) hard. 6. If you had followed
my advice, the work would not have been so hard.
(c) Charles the Fifth. — 1. Emperor Charles was right
when he followed his friend's advice. 2. He had not
succeeded in ruling both his kingdoms well. 3. He
worked hard, but it was too hard for him. 4. He had
lived a long time in Germany and in Spain. 5. Of the
two he liked Spain best, so he retired there (§,149, 1).
6. In history it has often happened that the ones who work
hardest succeed least.
CHAPTER XXTI.
ENGLISH VERBALS TRANSLATED BY GERMAN
INFINITIVES.
Der 6retgtgjdl?rtge livK<$.
176. %u6) na6) bent ^obe ^axU be^ giinften fe^en tvh bte
^eutfc^en iiber bte D^eOgtott ftrettett^ Qm Qa^xt 1618 hxad)
ettt geltjalttger Sitrgerfrieg au^. 1)tefer brei^tg ^'a^re
32. The Walls and Towers of Rothenburg. — This picturesque city
was taken by General Tilly in the Thirty Years' War, but the walls
were not demolished.
139
140 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 178.
bauerttbe ^ampf ift ber furrf)ter(ti^fte in ber c^an^en Seltc^e^
[c^tc^te. Um fic^ ^u er()a(ten, fingen bie §eere on, bie armen
:53auern au^gu^lunbern. !Dtefe fu^ren eine 3^^t^^^9 f<^^^
ba^ ^anb ju bebauen, aber nur, um e^ tt)ieber t)on ben §eeren
t)ern)uftet gu fe()en. !Da tDurben fie felber 9^duber.
!t)ie §a(fte ber ^et^olferung ^Tieutfc^Ianb^ ift bantat^ tjer^
nic^tet njorben, unb ein ganje^ (^efd)(ec^t ift derange marfif en,
o{)ne in- ^ir^e ober <Sc^u(e ^u ge{)en. T)k ein^ige ^efrf)afti^
gung lt)ar ber ^rieg. (Sin f)albe§ ^fi^^^w^^^^t ^itt !Deutfc^*
lanb unter biefem ^(enb, nnb e^ bauerte ^trei^unbert ^a^vt,
U^ e^ fid) t)on ben golgen biefe^ ^riegee er^olt ^at
Syntax.
177. Verbals in -ing. — English verbals in -ingi are
translated in German by a participle, by an infinitive,
or by a clause. The third use — clauses — will be
treated in the next chapter.
178. When the English verbal in -in(/ is a participial
modifier^ it is rendered in German by the present parti-
ciple. In English the verbal (participle) follows its
noun and is followed by its modifiers ; but in German
it precedes its noun and is preceded by its modifiers.
It is rare in conversation, but common in formal Ger-
man, especially in signs and newspapers.
The hook lying on the table is mine.
^a^ auf bcm Xifd| licflcnbc Surf) gcprt mir.
/ should be (as) sounding brass, or a tinMing cymbal.
<Bo ware id) tin tiJncttb(ci^) ©rj ober cine fHitdenbe ®rf)eUe.
— 33ibc(, 1 ^or. 13, 1.
Note. — (a) This same order is followed for past participles as well
as those in -ing.
A boat made by a little boy.
(5in t)on einem fleiuen ^^naben gcmadjtc* SBoot.
Chap. 22.] ENGLISH VEttBALS, 141
I Hew through the neighborhood to the owner of the house Mr. Al-
bret had once pointed out to me as for sale.
3d) flog in bie -TJarfibarfc^aft ijum ^efi^er beg miv einft t)on §errn
5llbret als tierfaufUd) angebeuteten §aujeg. — 3 f t^ o ^ e,
(6) The English progressive form in -ing is rendered in German by
the simple verb. See § 227, 1.
Are you coming 9 ^ommen @ie mit ?
I was walking along by myself in the wood.
3(i) ging tm SBalbe jo fur mic^ ^In. — ©oet^e.
179. When the English verbal in -ing is not a parti-
cipial modifier^ it is rendered in German by an infini-
tive or by a clause. For the translation by a clause,
see Chapter XXIII.
180. When the verbal in -ing is translated hy a Ger-
man infinitive^ gU is omitted after certain verbs ; after
others it is not omitted.
(1) ^Vi is omitted in translating an English verbal
in -ing when the infinitive follows bleiben, finben, \)'6xtxi,
fe()ett, and verbs of motion when used with fpajieren.
Hear and see take either infinitive or verbal in English :
/ heard him sing or singiyig. But in German they are
followed only by the infinitive without 311.
He remained sitting. @r blicb ft^Ctt»
Did you see them playing (or play) football f
^aft bit fie ^upaU f^tcten feljcn ?
I heard a brooklet babbling (or babble).
^rf) Ijorf citt a3ad)(citt rauf d)cn» — 9JJ ii U e r.
/ went riding when I should have preferred to go walking.
^r^ rttt f^ajicrcu, ba \^ bod^ licber f^joaicrcn gcgaugctt marc.
Note. — When used with come., in expressions like came running,
the verbal is translated in German by the past participle (fam gclaufen) .
A bird comes flying, ^ommt ein 35ogeI geflogen. — ^olfgUcb.
142 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [5182.
(2) 3^ is used in translating an English verbal in
■4nff after anfangen, to begin; fortfa^ren, to continue;
auf^Oren, to stop; gelingen, to succeed. The first two
may also be used with the infinitive in English, as well
as with the verbal in -ing : I began reading or to read.
But in German they are followed only by the infinitive
with gu.
She began singing (or to 8ing). Sic ftng an jtt ftttgcn»
He continues whispering (or to whisper). @r ftt^rt fort JU flttftcm.
Did you succeed in getting tickets f
Sft c§ ^^nctt flclungctt, Garten ju tief omtnen ?
Now when he had left speaking he said unto Simon.
Itnb aljg tx Ijrtttc auf gcl^brt ju vt^tn, ^pxad\ cr ^u Simon.
— 33ibet, $!uc. 5, 4.
181. Ol^nc, without, and anftatt, instead of, are fol-
lowed by the infinitive, when English without and
instead of are followed immediately by the verbal in
-ing. Cases where a modifier intervenes — as without
MY seeing — are treated in the next chapter.
I turned round without seeing him.
Sd| manbte tnid) urn, oljnc \\)\\ ju fc^ctt.
Instead of coming in, he walked calmly on.
^n^itttt ^eretnsufommcn, gtng er rut^ig lociter.
O, do not go without blessing me.
O gct)t nid)t, oljnc mt(^ $n f egnen. — 1 1 o p ft o cf .
Notes.
182. Historical Note. — The two immediate successors of
Charles V were more liberal and not inclined to wage religious
wars, and during their reigns Protestantism made great gains.
A hundred years after tlie beginning of the Reformation (1.517-
1618) Protestants and Catholics were about equally numerous and
equally zealous in Germany. Relations between them became
more and more strained till in 1618 the most horrible of all reli-
gious wars broke out. First Denmark, then Sweden, and finally
Chap. 22.]
ENGLISH VERBALS.
143
33. The Fortress at Coburg. — One of the strongholds that withstood
the sieges of the Thirty Years' War. A later Duke of Coburg
(Saxe-Coburg-Gotha) was the husband of Queen Victoria.
France entered Germany under pretence of helping the Protestants,
and army after army harried the land. The leaders adopted the
policy of supporting the army upon the country. The peasants
were outrageously plundered and their lands laid waste ; villages,
even cities and whole industries, were wiped out of existence.
But finally there came an Emperor — Ferdinand III (1637-1657),
the great-grandnephew of Charles V — who opposed the war,
and eleven years after his accession it came to a close (1648) in
the Peace of Westphalia. Not till the middle of the nineteenth
century did some parts of Germany again contain as many in-
habitants as before 1618.
183. English to take is generally nc^imen (tia^tu, ge^
nommen, aux. ^aben).
(1) To take time, in the sense of to last, is always German
bauern.(i'eg., aux. ^aben), never ne^men.
144 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 184.
How long does it take to get to town ?
SBte lange bauert cS, \>i^ man in bie Stabt fommt ?
It took quite awhile, before he came to the surface again.
&§ baucrtc cine 3cttlttng, c^c tt ttiicbcr ouf bic Dbcrf(ad|c fam.
— @torm.
(2) To take a train (street car, omnibus, or carriage) is
usually fasten tnit (fut)r, gefa^ren, aux. fein), though ne^men
is also used in this sense.
Did you take the omiiibus 9 Sittb @tc ttiit bcm Omnibus gcfa^rcn?
No, we took an auto. 9icitt, ttiir fittb tttit cincm 5(uto gcfttljrcu.
Take the train throiigh Germany.
f^a^r bod) mit bcr a3al)tt b«rd) 2)ctttfti^Iaub. — 2B o 1 3 o g c n.
(3) To ^aZce a ti'ip or a t'ja^A: is eine 9f^eife or einctt (Spatter-
gang mac^en (reg., aux. ^aben)»
We took a walk this morning.
^cutc tnorgcn ^abcn ttitr cincn S^jajicrgang gcmad^t.
PFe'Zi ?a^•e the trip together.
SBir mat^ctt bic S^cif c $uf ommctt, — ® c^ i U e r,
(4) To take a person for some one else or to consider as
is fallen fitr (^ielt, gel)a(ten, aux. ^aben). See § 157, 3.
§a(ten is also used for to lake a newspaper.
I took you for your brother.
^(^ ^flbc ®ic fiir S^rcit Srubcr gcl)o(tcn.
What paper do you take ?
9®ctd)c Bcitung (never ^a^icr) ^altcn ®ic ?
FoM «aA;e me for a child.
^tt l|dltft mid) f iir cin ^inb. — (£ I) a m i f U.
Note. — To take pains is fid) (dative) Spfiu^c gcbcn.
Jfr. Bolz, lUl take pains not to shoic you that.
§err Solj, id) tt)iU mtr aJ?ut)c gcbcn, 3t)ncn ba« nid)t ju jcigen.
— §rfi)tag.
184. English /ia//has two German equivalents.
(1) As a noun half is always bie §dlf te.
Chap. 22.] ENGLISH VERBALS. 145
ru only take half, ^d) ncl)me nur bic ^a(ftc»
aS'o AaZ/ of these purses are his.
(Bo ift bic ^ttlftc bief er S^ctttd f ciit* — $? e f j i n g.
(2) As an adjective or adverb, half is regularly '^a(b.
You have lost half a day. @tc ^abctt cittCtt l^aJbctt XaQ »cr(orctt»
/« is only half as far. @§ tft mir ^a(b fo Wcit*
/ did it with half a glance.
^r^ tttt c§ mit eittcm Ijatbcu Stirfc* — ^ e U e r.
185. English only is both adverb and adjective.
(1) As an adverb, only is (a) nur, except when it modifies
time-expressions in the sense oi for the first time, not until;
then it is (h) erft.
(a) TJiere are only two seats here, ^xtx fittb ttur 5tt>Ct ^Vi^t*
Love only^ love is life.
2)ic Sicbc mir, btc Sicb^ ift Scbcti, — ganer§leben.
(&) The hoy is only four years old.
^cr ^nabc ift crft uicr ^al)rc alt.
0/^?^/ lo^e/i he stood close before them, did they start up.
@rft a\2 cr bid)t tior itjitcn ftanb, fulireii fie in bic |>iJl)c*
— ^iUern.
(2) As an adjective, only is etttjtg.
I was the only man there, ^d^ mat* ba bcr cittsigc SJlantt*
The poet is the only true man, and the best philosopher is only a
caricature beside him. '^tv ^it^tcr ift bcr cittsigc toaf^rt 9Wcnf(^, ttttb
bcr bcf*c ^Ijitufo^I) ift nur cine ^arif atur gcgen il)tt. — @ d) i U e r»
Note. — ©injig also means single in the sense of sole, only : not a
single time, !eiit ein^ige^ Mat See § 9. It must not be confused
with etnjetn, single in the sense of separate, individual : a single
(odd) volume, ein eiuj^etner iBanb ; single (detached) houses, einjeinc
§aufer, A single man is ein unt)erl)eirateter 9}Zann.
Exercises.
186. (a) 1. State the differences between the English
and German uses of the present participle as a modifier.
2. Illustrate these differences by sentences in each Ian-
146 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§ 187.
guage. 3. Do these differences hold also for past parti-
ciples when used as modifiers ? Illustrate.
(b) 1. Name the commonest German verbs which are
followed by an infinitive without ju when translating an
English verbal in -ing. 2. Illustrate their use in two
German sentences. 3. Name the commonest German
verbs followed by an infinitive with ju to translate an
English verbal in -ing. 4. What four verbs (§ 180, 1 and
2) may have an English translation just like the German ?
5. Illustrate the uses of ot)ne and anftatt with gu and the
infinitive.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. SSo fittb tDtr
geftern fte^en geblieben? (the schoolroom phrase for stop).
2. 9^etn, I)oren @ie noc^ nic^t auf ju (efen! 3. 58itte,
troKen (Ste fortfa^ren gu iiberfe^en? 4. ^c^ I)bre jemanb
flUftern; 'ba^ muB fofort auf^oren. 5. S§ l)at nur eine
l^albe (Stunbe cjebauert. 6. "^xt erfte @d(fte ber 5lufgabe
^at er itberfe^t, of)ne fic^ 90^itt)e ju geben.
187. (a) 1. Please stop whispering and begin translat-
ing. 2. Instead of taking a carriage when you take a
long trip, you ought to take the train. 3. Otherwise
(fonft) it will take so long that you will not arrive till
(§ 185, 1, h) the next day. 4. Without waiting for help,
he succeeded in translating half a page. 5. If you con-
tinue working hard, it will take only half an hour. 6. He
didn't see me coming, so I found him lying on the ground.
(6) 1. We heard the teacher read the first half of the
exercise without translating. 2. That is the only mistake
you made. 3. If you continue whispering, we shall have
to stop reading. 4. If you cannot begin translating, you
need not stand. 5. She read half a page without making
a single mistake. 6. They looked for him a long time,
Chap. 22.] ENGLISH VERBALS. 147
and it took two hours before they found him sleeping under
a tree.
(c) Germany after the Thirty Yearn'' War. — 1. Only
after two centuries did Germany begin recovering from the
consequences of the Thirty Years' War. 2. Half the
country was devastated, and it took a long time before
we find Germany thriving. 3. Instead of despairing, the
Germans continued working and took pains to develop their
country. 4. That was the only way in which (trie) they
succeeded in recovering from the war. 5. They never
stopped working. 6. And to-day we see Germany thriv-
ing and developing extraordinarily.
CHAPTER XXIII.
ENGLISH VERBALS AND INFINITIVES TRANSLATED
BY GERMAN CLAUSES.
Der (Sro§e Kurfiirft.
188. Qm 3a^re 1640 njurbe griebric^ St(f)elm turfiirft
Don ^ranbenburg unb ©ergog Don ^reugen. ^a er batnat^
ganj !Deutfrf)(anb tjon bem grogen ^rieg uertriiftet fa^, fo
tDiinfc^te er, ba§ fein !(etne^ §eer fid) ftet^ frieg^bereit ^aUe.
3nt @egenfa^ gu anberen gitrften jener ^txt beftanb er
barauf, bag [ein ©eer nic^t pliinberte.
5I(^ feine geinbe im ^egrtff traren, in fein ^anb einp^
bringen, tierjagte er fie mit biefem fleinen §eere, ol)ne bag er
eine ein^ige (Bd)ia6)t t)er(or, (5r ^atte feinen ^euten gefagt,
fie fodten bebenfen, bag fie !Deutfi^e feien. Unb furj beoor
er feinem (So^ne bie 9tegiernng itbergab, empfa()( er biefem,
fUr ha^ So^( feine^ 3So(!e^ 3n forgen. !Da« tt)ar „ber groge
turfiirft" nnb bie T)eutfcf)en finb noc^ ftolj baranf, bag er
fiir ba« 3Sater(anb fo oiel getan ^at.
Syntax.
189. Verbals rendered by Clauses. — English verbals
in -ing are rendered by German clauses in two impor-
tant cases.
(1) When an English verbal in -ing is in a participial
phrase of time or cause^ it is rendered in German not
by a participle or by an infinitive, but by a clause.
This clause is generally introduced by a(^, when^ tpftl^*
148
Chap. 23.]
VERBALS AND INFINITIVES.
149
34. Statue of. the Great Elector in Berlin.
renb, while^ inbem, at the moment when, as, or ba, as, be-
cause. Thus these participial phrases must be mentally
changed to clauses before translating.
While reading I fell asleep.
SBa^rcnb (or a\2) id) (a^, fdjKcf ic^ tin.
150 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 191.
Coming around the corner she slipt.
^nbcm fie urn bic (Srfc fom, gtttt fic^u§.
Seeing her fall ^ he hurried to help iver
^a cr ftc faUctt fat), ciltc cr \\\x 511 |)t(fc.
'•'' But ichere are your strawberries? "" she asked finally, stopping
and taking a deep breath. ' ^e^..
„993o biciben bcnn abcr bcinc ©rbbccrcn?" fragtc ftoftbUd), tnbcm
fie ftcljCtt bltcb unb cincn ticf en Sltcmsug iai, — ©tor tu(
(2) When the English verbal in -ing is the object of
a preposition^ it is usually rendered in German by a
ba^'clause. The corresponding German preposition is
then combined with the particle "bd' and comes just
before ba§.
We insisted on his going. SStr bcftrtttbcn baraitf, "^d^^ cr ge^c.
She spoke of seeing him.
Sie f^radi babon, ba^ fie it)n gefet)cn Ijatte.
Were you proud of being there?
aSaren Sic ftol^ barawf, ^a^^ ®ie ^a toartn ?
0/(fe?i t<?e please most by giving others opportunity to please.
Wflan nefaUt oft am meiftcii baburrf), ba§ man anbern (Betcgctt^cit
ju gcf allctt bcrf d)afft. — @ e 1 1) e.
190. Dftnc ha^ and anftatt baft. — When a possessive
comes between without or instead of and the verbal in
-ing, — without MY seeing, — German renders this verbal
by a baft=clause. Compare § 181.
Instead of his doing it, you ought to.
5lnftatt ba^ cr c§ tut, foUtcu Bk'^,
Without his meaning to, without his knowing it, the critic empha-
sizes defects and or.erlooks beauties.
Otjnc baf? cr cc^ mill, ol)itc baf; cr ci< mcif;, Ijcbt bcr S^curtcirer
f^tcrfen !)crbor, ilbcrfic!)t cr ©rt)ijnl)citen. — 15 u n e U
191. Infinitives rendered by Clauses. — Some English
infinitives are translated into German by a bafe^clause,
Chap. 23.] VERBALS AND INFINITIVES. 151
usually when the English infinitives follow verbs like
to tell (fagen), to know (miffen), or to believe (g(auben).
He told me to wait. ($r fngtc ttttr, ba^ id) itiartctt foUtc*
I know him to be rny friend. ^(^ tuci^, tsd^ cr mettt f^rcttttb tft*
/?i ^/le end you too will believe me to be such a bad man. 5(m @ttbe
glaubft btt audi m^, bo^ trf| folrfi ciit ft^tej^tcr SKcnfr^ bin, — ^ i Hern.
(1) After to wish (tDiinf(^en), the English infinitive, if
it has a subject accusative, I wish him to go^ is rendered
by a ba^^clause. Otherwise German uses the infinitive
after trlinfc^en just as English does after to wish.
After to command (befe'^len), a short infinitive phrase
may be translated into German by the infinitive as well
as by a bag-clause. Longer English phrases after to
command are usually rendered in German by bag^clauses,
not by the infinitive.
/ wish to go. ^d) ttiunfd)C ju jjcljctt.
I wish him (subject accusative) to go.
^d) wunfdje, ba^ cr gc^c (or gcl|t).
She ordered me to stay. Sic bcfal)I mir, gtt bicibctt.
Then he commanded us all to fold our hands.
^ttiin bcfa^t cr, ^a^ ttiir aUc bic ^anbc falktciu — SSilbenbrud).
Notes.
192. Historical Note. — The electors were the seven — later
nine — German princes who chose the Emperor. The Great
Elector (who reigned 1640-1688) developed Brandenburg (Prus-
sia) in peace and extended it by war. He secured Eastern Pome-
rania, Prussia's first seacoast. The Elector's son (1688-1713)
raised his title from Elector of Brandenburg to " King in Prussia."
His son in turn (1713-1740), called the ,,@o(batenfonig/' developed
the mighty army which was to be used so magnificently by his son
Frederick the Great (1740-1786). All these Prussian rulers de-
sired to strengthen their country by promoting education, husband-
ing their resources, and developing the 9-rmy.
152 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§194.
193. English abo^it has several German meanings.
(1) As a preposition in the sense of around, about is
translated by um (§ 111, 1) ; in the sense of concerning, by
uber (§ 123, 2).
(2) As a limiting adverb about is rendered in German by
ttWa or ungefa^r* The latter is the more current.
About how far is it to the station ?
Wit tticit tft t^ uttfjcfriljr (ctttja) ttad) bcm S3aI)ttl)ofc ?
IV s ahout half a mile. @i§ tft nugcfol)r (ctwn) ciitc \)a\ht SSSltWt,
About as much as nothing. Uiigef al)r fo Die( wic nidjti^. — It I e i fl.
(3) To b^ about to do something is usually im -^egriff fein.
The two armies were ahout to fight.
^ic bcibcn ^ccre toavtn im IScflrtff %\x ffim^fcit.
I was often ahout to tell him so frankly.
^c^ mar oft im Scgriff, e§ t!)m offen su fageit. — Metier.
Note. — Other expressions for to he ahout to are: cbcn troUen,
gcrobc tuoUen, and auf bem ^unfte fte^cn, all of which may be
literally translated in English : I just wanted to^ was on the point of,
and so on.
194. English little has two German renderings.
(1) When little can be replaced in English by smallj
German uses !(ein.
What a little house ! SBcId) !fctttc§ ^m^ !
Who doesuH honor the little isn't worthy of the great.
2Bcr bai8 ^Ictnc md)t c\)vt ift bc§ ^rofecn titt^t mcrt. — ©pric^mort.
(2) When English little can be replaced by not much^
German uses tDetltg. It is usually indeclinable.
I have little money, ^d) Ijabc mciiig ©clb.
(^d) I|abc flctttc^ OJcIb or 5l(ctngclii means I have small change,)
Do you speak German? A little.
@^red)Ctt 8tc Ticutft^ ? ©in mcmg.
There is gay life there, and even if little money, still many Jcinds of
wares, ^a ift froI|cS £cbcn, uuD menu and) menig C^c(b, bod) oiclerlef
SBorc — 3 jd) off c.
Chap. 23.] VERBALS AND INFINITIVES. 153
195. English ready has two German renderings.
(1) In the general sense of preparedness or mental readi-
ness German generally uses bereit. It usually looks to the
future and is completed by an infinitive.
Are you ready to begin 9 @ittb @ic bereit, ansttfangeit ?
/ am ready to die. Sereit liitt i^ jtt fterbett. — g o u q u e.
(2) In the sense of physical readiness, ready is German
ferttg, which also means through, finished, generally looks to
the past, and is not completed by an infinitive.
He isn't ready {through) yet. ©r tft nod) ttt(i)t fcrttg.
Money., checks are prepared., ready as my nod commands.
(SJcJiicr, 228cd)fet \it\)\x bereit, fcrtig, ttiie meiu SBiitf ^tUni.
— ©rittparjer,
196. English self (himself, myself, themselves, yourself) has
two German renderings.
(1) As the reflexive, self is fi(^ for the third person of
both numbers and for the polite form of address. For the
first and second persons the personal pronoun (dative or ac-
cusative) is used.
Did you cut yourself? |>aft btt bir^ (|>aben 8te fid)) gefdjnitten ?
/ hurt myself, ^d) l)abe mir wel) getan.
Did I ever promise myself to you ?
^ah^ id) mid) bir je berf^jroi^en ? — § e t) j e.
(2) As the intensive, self is [elbft or felber (indeclinable).
Did you write that yourself f
^oben @ie \>^^ felbft (f etber) gefd^ricbeit ?
The servant would like to be a knight himself.
^er Stmd\t to'dv^ f clber eiti JRitter gem* — U t) I a n b.
Note. — @etb[t also means even. Never use cbcn, which is usually
the adverb just.
Mortal, even your thoughts are not your own.
©ctbft bie ©ebanfcn, @tcrbUd)cr, finb nid^t betn eigen. — Slrnbt.
154 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 198.
197. English to order has two German renderings.
(1) In ordering something at a store or restaurant, use
befteKen (reg. insep., aiix. ()aben).
Have you ordered ? ^abcil @ic ftt)Ott bcftcUt ?
Fes, dear Lottie, I will attend to and order everything.
Sa, (tcbc fiotte, id) wiU ^\U^ bcf orgcii unb bcftcUcn. — ® o c t f) e.
(2) In the sense of command, order is befe()(en (befat)I,
befo()(en, aux. !^aben) with the dative. It may be followed
by an infinitive or a clause. See § 191 , 1.
He ordered you to do it.
(£r bcfal)! ':^\)\mx, cgs p twn (or ba^ ®ic c^ tun).
dmimand therefore that the sepulchre he made sure.
^rtrum ticftcl)!, ba^ man ba§ Q^vah ticrwa^rc.
— «ibe(, "Matt 27, 64.
iVbie. — The phrase in order to is um 5U with an infinitive phrase,
or bamit with a clause whose verb is usually in the subjunctive.
We went early in order to get better seats.
5Bir finb fviil) gegannen, um beffere ^ldt5e 511 befommeii (or baniit
tDir beffere ^^(ci^^e betcimen).
Hans hurried to meet them, in order to hear lohat loas up.
§an8 cUtc i!)nen entgegen, um ju l)oreu, luaS e^ gab. — ipiHeru.
Exercises.
198. (a) 1. State the two cases where English verbals
in -ing are rendered in German by clauses. 2. Illustrate
each case by two German sentences. 3. Translate three
English sentences into German to illustrate English infin-
itives rendered by German clauses. 4. What is the dif-
ference between the use of o^ne and attftatt in this chapter
and in Chapter XXII ? Illustrate each with a sentence.
(6) 1. Which sentences in § 188 may have English ver-
bals in their translation ? 2. Which sentences in § 188
may have English infinitives to translate their clauses?
3. Give the rule (§§ 189, 190, or 191) covering each case.
Chap. 23.] VERBALS AND INFINITIVES. 155
(c) Cojiversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. 5lber ic^ ^abe
nocf) ntc^t befteKt. 2. (5r iDar tm ^egriff ab^uretfen, aber
feine @ac^en marett nod^ nt(^t fertig. 3. !Du foKft beinen
9^ad)ften Itebeti n^ie bic^ felbft (3 9}^o[e 19, 18). 4. @te
^aben nur ungefd^r erne @tunbe gearbeitet ; 'ta^ ift ^u tDenig.
5. 3fe^t bin tc^ berett, tnit ber Uberfe^ung fortaufa^ren.
6. (gr gtng nac^ §aitfe, o^ne 'tia^ ber ^e^rer e^ bemedte.
199. (a) 1. She told him to translate without anybody's
helping him. 2. Instead of her going, I was about to go
myself. 3. He ordered a little chicken (translate little two
ways), but it wasn't ready (§ 62). 4. Coming suddenly
into the room, the teacher found the pupils whispering.
5. He scolded the pupils for (baruttt) not being ready to
translate. 6. He ordered us to stop before we were ready.
(6) 1. I know him to be about sixty years old. 2. He
insists on our ordering everything that (it)a^) we like.
3. Having translated all the exercise without the teacher's
finding a single mistake, she was proud of knowing so much.
4. I was about to say that about half the class is ready to
translate this page. 5. Dewey ordered Gridley to begin
the fight when he was ready. 6. Seeing the little girl
whispering, the teacher ordered her to stop.
(c) The Development of Brandenhurg-Prussia. — 1. Two
hundred and fifty years ago Brandenburg was a little coun-
try about one-seventh as large as the Prussia of to-day.
2. But it was about to become a great power by (baburd))
having great rulers. 3. They ordered their people (ba^
3SoI!) to .work hard. 4. We know the Great Elector to
have been an extraordinary man. 5. He was always
ready to fight in order to help his people. 6. He wished
them to thrive, and Prussia is proud of having developed
so well during his life.
CHAPTER XXIV.
REVIEW.
200. The particle ja is used not only for the answer yes,
but in two other cases.
(1) 3^ ^^^y strengthen a command. It is then empha-
sized and may be translated by various emphatic words in
English, hy all means, he sure, and so on.
Come hy all means ! ^omittcn Sie ja !
Be sure not to forget it ! Scrgcffen Sic^§ ja m(t)t !
Let me hear it right soon.
Saffctt @ic mid) e^ ja balii ^orcit! — !i?eff ing.
(2) Qa may emphasize a well-known fact. It is then
unaccented and may often be translated by exclamatory
why, I tell you, you know, or by inverting the sentence.
Why, I told you so ! or Didn't I tell you so !
^a§ fagt^ id) Sljttcn ja !
Why, Ws nonsense ! or IV s nonsense, I tell you !
ei§iftjaUttfitttt! — SSilbenbrud).
Exercises.
201. (a) 1. What is the difference in general between ^aben
and fein as auxiliaries ? 2. Illustrate by two sentences
for each and explain. 3. Give two sentences illustrating
the use of !^aben and fein with the same verb. 4. When
are o'^tie and anftatt followed by a phrase, and when by a
clause ?
(6) 1. Make a table showing the different ways in which
German may translate an English verbal in -ing. 2. Illus-
trate with a German sentence each way shown in your t^ble»
156
Chap. 24.] REVIEW. 157
3. What are the commonest cases where an English infini-
tive is translated by a German clause ? 4. Illustrate.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize : 1. ^ergeffetl (^te
}a nid)t, 't>(x^ h)ir eine lange D^etfe mac^en! 2. ^d^ fage
3()nen ja, ba^ ^ud) ift nic^t fc^tDcr. 3. ^er Secret fanb
t^n flitftern unb befall t^m auf^u^i^reti- 4. :Der (Sc^liler
^brte auf ju ftiiftern. 5. (g^ ()at nur ungefa()r eine ^albe
(Stunbe gebauert. 6. Sir finb ja no(^ (ange ntc^t fertig.
202. (a) 1. Please stand up and begin translating.
2. When you have stopped reading, please remain seated
(sitting). 3. Work hard, and instead of its taking about
half a day, you can be ready in two hours. 4. His little
boy was only four years old; he was the only child.
5. We are in a hurry (^aben (Site) ; we ordered (§ 128, 1)
about twenty minutes ago and we take the next train.
6. In ordering, you should ask how long it will take.
(6) 1. It takes about an hour before everything is ready.
2. Seeing the two men following the lady, I was about to
speak to (anreben) them. 3. Finding half the class
whispering, the teacher ordered them to stop. 4. It took
about half a minute before they all stopped whispering.
5. Why, I tell you, his only child is about fifteen years old.
6. The teacher will soon begin taking you for a dunce if
you don't stop making mistakes all the time.
(c) 1. That is much too little ; it is only about half as
big as I wished. 2. I ordered him to be ready to take
the train at ten o'clock. 3. Instead of his being ready,
it took about half an hour before he caml. 4. Going
walking yesterday evening, we heard a nightingale singing.
5. Coming home late, the man found his only child playing
before the fire. 6. The teacher told us to take pains and
translate half a page without anybody's helping us.
CHAPTER XXV. '
THE PASSIVE VOICE.
^xkbvxd} ber ^rofe unb bic IPinbmul^Ie.
203. 9^eben bent (gc^loffe griebric^^ be^ ©rogen ^u ^ot^^
bam ftanb eine Stnbmuljle, tion wtldjtv bte folc^enbe (Skfcf)tc^te
eqa^It Wixh. T)er ^efi^er ber ai}?u()(e tuoKte fie nic^t uer--
faufen. ^er ^dnu], ber fie cjern faufen moKte, lie^ ben
Tlixikv fomnien, unb fagte : „Sa^ foil benn t>a^? 3S}enn bu
mir bie Wln^k, bie bort oben ftet)t, nic^t uerfaufft, fo luerbe
ic^ fie btr einf ad) ne^nten.''
„Senn Sie ba^ tun/' antmortete ber SO^ltKer, „fo tnenbe id)
mic^ ^n ba^ Berliner (Skrid)t. Ser fd)lei^t be()anbe(t mirb,
!ann bort immer ©erec^tigfeit finben." ^iefe 5Intmort gefiet
bem ^bnig fo fe^r, baft er bent 9Jlii((er feine Sinbntii^te (ieg.
Unb neben bem (gc^loffe in ^ot^bam ift fie noc^ l)eute gu fe^en.
Syntax.
204. The Passive Voice. — German uses the passive
voice in several ways not common in English. The
passive auxiliary is ttierben, not fcin, and the agent is
usually introduced by Don, hi/.
(1) The jt?er8o/ia/jt>a88iv« corresponds to the English.
Iioas hit by a ball, ^d) tpurbe \>on eincm SSaUc flctro^en.
Do you know the place where the treasure of the house icas con-
cealed by your husband f ilcuuft bu bctt Drt, ^^ bem ber 8d|a$ be^
^mife^ tiott beinem CiJattcii cinft ucrliotflcu niarb? — (Subermaun.
Note. — Germans are very fond of nsing man with the active where
English often has the passive. This is especially true of verbs that
take the dative.
158
Chap. 25.]
THE PASSIVE VOICE.
159
^^......^Jl .WIN,
.. . :i- ^ ■*^- ^
^^:.^ ,^ ^ «,..
" "^BfiH^"'''' •-■-^'-^■^^mtmmmmmmam^
35. The Famous Windmill at Potsdam.
/ was told. Man jagte mir.
She was helped. Man ^atf i^r.
Ifs true she was called only little Mariette.
Man naunte fie ^tuar luir bie tieine 9Jfariette.
•Bfc^offe,
160 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§205.
(2) The impersonal passive is very common in Ger-
man. It cannot be translated literally into English,
but must be rendered like man with the active. ^^ is
omitted in the inverted or transposed order.
There'' s a dance to-night.
eg ttJirb l|cutc abenb gctttn$t, or ^cutc obcnb toirb ^tian^t
What time do you dine f Um ttjictiicl U^r ttirb jtt SJJittag gcgcffcn ?
They were playing out there.
eg wurbc ba brau^ctt gcf^iclt, or ^a brau^cn ttiurbc gcf^iiclt.
J.n answer is requested {r.s.v.p., r^pondez s'il vous plait).
Um 3(tttttiort toirb gcbctcn (U»3l.tti.g.).
You canH have anything charged (chalked up) here.
Stngcfrcibct tuirb ^icr nit^t. - iB a u m b a d).
iVb^e. — The English passive infinitive after to be is translated into
German by the active.
This house is for sale (to be sold), ^icg ^ttug ift $u ticrlottfen.
She was nowhere to be seen. @tc War ntrgcilbg 5U fctjCll.
TAey looked everywhere ; the belt was not to be found.
UhevaU mivhc gcfuti^t ; ^a§ Moppet toav nid^t aufsufittiictt.
— SBitbcnbrud).
Notes.
205. Historical Note. — Frederick the Great (reigned 1740-1786)
is the most popular of all the Prussian kings. As a youth he was
abused by his crusty old father, who had no sympathy with the
poetic, musical boy. As king, Frederick not only developed the
army and won battles, but patronized music and literature as well.
In the later years of his life, after his wars were over, he was affec-
tionately called „2)cr altc ^vii^/' a name which still clings to him
throughout Germany. He traveled over Prussia, helping trade
and industry and seeing that justice was carried out in the courts
he had established. He called himself the first servant of the
state and is said to have remarked in regard to the courts : " The
rich have the means to defend themselves; the poor have only
me." Such was „bcr grofee ^bnlg/' who did more for Prussia than
any of his predecessors.
Chap. 25.] THE PASSIVE VOICE. 161
206. English to be is variously rendered in German owing
to German's being more exact than English. The common-
est German renderings of to be are (1) in cases of feeling
and health, and (2) in indicating place where.
(1) When to be applies to health German uses fi^ BcfittbCtt
or c^ gcl^t with the dative. To say / am cold, meaning
/ feel cold, German uses c^ tft with the dative : (S^ tft mir
fait. l!^ever say, Q6) bin tait In the transposed or in-
verted order e^ is omitted in this latter construction, but
not in the expression e^ ^e^t.
lam very well. SWtr gcl)t^§ fc^r gut. ^r^ bcftnbc ntit^ fc^r ttio^l.
He is (feels) cold ; are you warm f ^I)m ift !alt ; tft ^^ttCtt Warm ?
How is her ladyship ? 2Bic gc^t c§ bcm f^rdtttctn ? — gre^tag.
So Agathon was happy beyond all his hopes.
^gat^on befanb fi(^ atfo iiber alle feine ^offnung gfiitflit^.
— SBielanb.
(2) In indicating position (place where) German is much
more exact than English. Wherever in English a form of
to be is used to denote position, and could be replaced by
a more specific word, it is always best to use the specific
word in German.
The lamp is on the table. 2)ic Sattt^C ftcl)t Jiuf bcm Xi\(i)t*
His residence was in the suburbs.
Seine 338o^ttttttg (ag in ber iBorftabt. — SBilbenbruc^.
There was nothing bad in the letter.
©jg ftanb ttit^t^ St^tei^tc^ ttt iiem Srief . — ^ ^ o m a.
j^ote. — Two other common translations of to be are ange^en with
the accusative, and !oftcn.
Hoio much is that ? SieDiel foftct bag ?
What are my eyes to you 9
iEBaS ge^cn bic^ meine ^lugen on ? — @ t o r m.
207. English it, when translated into German, must take
the gender of the noun to which it refers.
162 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 210.
My watch is fast ; I must set it.
aWcittc U^r gc!)t ttor ; ic^ mu^ fie ftcttcn*
/S'o she awaited the evening. It came, but Mirtl did not.
80 crmartctc ftc ben 5lbcub, Gr fam, abcr aWirtl !am ntt^t.
— 31 j e g g cr.
iVb^e. — When a German neuter noun naming a person is referred
to by a pronoun, the pronoun is usually neuter, though the logical
gender often prevails. Note below lt)e(d)cS {neuter, to agree with \i(x^
^rdulein) i^rcn {her, to agree with the logical gender).
^Vhat a pretty girl ! Did you notice her ?
nt\^ I)ubfc^e§ a«dbcf)en! §aben @ie t% bcmerft?
Are you the lady who sent her secretary to me f
@inb @te bag grdiitein, ireldjeg i^rcn @c^reiber ju mlr gcjc^tdEt ^at?
— ^rctjtag.
208. English viho is both relative and interrogative. As
a relative it is translated in German by bcr or toetd^er; as
an interrogative by itJCt* The indefinite compound relative
{lie) who is also tticr* German never omits the relative.
Who is that 9 993cr tft bctttt t>a§ ?
That is the gentleman v^ho lives next door.
^a§ tft bcr ^txx, bcr (or mclt^cr, never wcr) ncbcttttit ttio^ttt.
He that hath ears to hear, let him hear.
SBcrD^rctt^t, Stt^orctt, bcr l)orc! — 33iber, a«att. 11,15.
209. English which corresponds exactly to German Xotliin
in being both relative and interrogative. But the English
relative ivhich may also be rendered in German by the
relative bcr, as well as by tpetc^cr. German never omits the
relative.
Which man is that ? !iB?cIrf)cr 9Waun ift bttS ?
Is this the hook {which) you wanted 9
Sft bic§ ba§ ^n^, ha^ (or nicldjcfii) Sic tnilttfdjtcn ?
Tliere are crimes over which no grass will grow.
@)g gibt Utttotcu, iibcr tticld)c fcin ©ro^ tt»od|ft. — a;-) e b b c I.
210. English what is usually German ttia^, both for the
interrogative and the indefinite compound relative (ivhaty
Chap. 25.]
THE PASSIVE VOICE,
163
36. Frederick's Palace at Potsdam.
that which). But when what modifies a noun, German must
use mi^, Wliat kind of is toa^ f iir (ein)*
WliaVs the matter f 295a§ ift bctttt Io§ ?
What books are these 9 SSctdjC SBitt^cr fint) ba§ ? (§211, 3, ?;, Note.)
TF/irt« Mwd of hooks are these ? ^a^ fiir 23uti^er jtnb ba^ ?
itfaw ts toTiai Ae eats, ^tx SpfJcnf c^ ift, ttiai§ er \^U — ^ e u e r b a d).
211. English, that is either a conjunction or a pronoun,
relative or demonstrative.
(1) As a conjunction, that is always German baj (with ^),
and is followed by the transposed order.
I tell you that it isn't true, ^ii) fdgc btr, ba^ c§ xii^t ttia^r ift.
T^,ai 1/0?^ have the rose, you notice only by the thorn.
^af Ml bic JRofc t)aft, ba^ mcrfft bti nur om ^oriu — Wilder t.
164 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§2ii.
(2) As a relative, that is the German relative ber (or
iDeli^er), German never omits the relative.
That isrCt the hook {that) I ordered.
^a§ ift ntr^t baig Sur^, bog (or m\^t^) \^ bcftcUt Ijabc.
He had taken to the city fish that that gentlewoman had ordered.
@r l)atte ^tfii^e in bte ^i^'bt gcbrai^t^ bie jcne tionte^me '^amt
bcftcttt W^c. — §ei)jc.
iVbre. — When referring to neuters like aViti, m6)\%, ettt)a«, and
so on, the relative that or which islva^.
That is all that I have. 2)ag ift alleS, traS id) l^abe.
Ybw are right; stick to that which is natural and that one can take
hold of. "^u ^aft re(^t ; t)altc bici^ an bag, n)o8 natiirtic^ ift unb h)a8
man grcifen !ann. — § i tl e r n.
(3) As a demonstrative, that (those) is the German demon-
strative ber or jener.
(a) !j)er is also often used for the personal pronoun he,
she, it.
There is the man that did it.
^a ift ber Wlann, ber (relative) tS flctan I|at,
There is the man ; he (that one) did it.
^a ift ber Waww ; ber (demonstrative) I)at c^ ^tian.
Let that one never he chosen hy you, that has never heen his own
friend, ^cr (demon.) tncrbc Jiie \i9n bir crlcfcn, ber (rel.) nic fein
cigener {^reunb gcmef en. — !i? e f f i n g.
(h) When that points a contrast with this or indicates
something definitely remote, German uses Jener,
This hook is easy, that one hard.
^ic§ '^MiS) ift itx^i, jenc§ fii^ttier.
Who will bring hack the heautiful days, those days of first love f
9Ber bringt bic fj^onen J^age, jeuc S^ogc ber erftcn Sicbe, jurilrf ?
— @OCtI)C.
Note. — With jein, \i(x^ is used indeclinably, referring to either
singular or plural nouns.
What men are those ? 3Bftd)c SDldnner finb benn ba8?
Those are heaven's terrihle judgments.
2)a8 finb be8 $lmmet« furditbare @eric^tc. — (S(i| tiler.
Chap. 25.] THE PASSIVE VOICE. 165
Exercises.
212. («) 1. Make a table, with illustrations, of all the
uses of ber, bie, 'tia^, 2. Of all the equivalents for Eng-
lish that; for which. 3. Write sentences illustrating the
use of the German for our English indefinite compound
relative (who, he who; what, that which).
(h) 1. Explain all the ba^'s in T)ag tft \i(i^ ^U(^, ha^ id)
lag, and :Da^ tft bag ^uc^ ; \>a^ (a^ tc^. 2. What word
order follows the relatives ? Give examples. 3. Trans-
late : Those are the books I lost, and Those were the only ones
he had. 4. Contrast the German and English uses of the
passive.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. $Bte ge'^t eg
Qljutn ? (Se^r gut ; tc^ befittbe tnic^ fe^r tt)oI)(. 2. SKag
ge^t bag (gie an? 3. Siet)te( foftet ber §ut? (Sr tft ^u
flettt. 4. 3ft 3f)Ttett fait? ^tr ift fur^tbar mxm,
5. (S^eftern abettb hjurbe gefutigett uttb gef^jtelt. 6. ;i)ag
fittb bie ^taffett, tro atn fleiBigfteti geferttt lt)irb.
213. (a) 1. He asked her how she was, and she replied :
What's that to you? 2. Those sentences were written
by that little boy. 3. Those are the girls who believe
everything I tell them. 4. I do not know who wrote
this sentence, but I know a pupil who can correct it.
5. It is said that those are the largest birds that have ever
been caught alive. 6. I was told that those were the
rooms where they danced (§ 204, 2).
(6) 1. I do not know whether those are ray books ; what
is it to you? 2. How much is that picture which is on
the wall, and this one which is on the table ? 3. What
is the matter? Are you cold? 4. He said that those
were the best translations that had been made by this class.
5. When do you sup, and do you ever dance (§ 204, 2) after
166 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 213.
supper ? 6. They looked for my hat everywhere, but it
was nowhere to be found.
(c) Frederick the Great. — 1. Frederick the Great lived
mostly in Potsdam, a city which is on the Havel, west of
Berlin. 2. There was built for him there a beautiful
castle, which was called " Sans Souci," by the king.
3. Frederick was often to be seen in Potsdam, when he
went walking with his dogs. " 4. He was so simple and
friendly that he was called " the old Fritz '' by the people.
5. Those were the qualities that made him popular among
the Germans. 6. When he died, his death was lamented
by all Germany.
CHAPTER XXVI.
ADJECTIVES.
^rtebrid? ber ^ro^e unb lDafl?tngton.
214. griebrit^ ber (Bxo^t ben^unberte (George SBaf^ington
fe^r. (Seiner 9J?etnung nad) ftattb SKaf^ington an ber <Bpxi^t
aller @enerd(e feine^ ^dtaittv^, -3e me^r griebric^ l3on
Saf^ington ^drte, befto ^o^er ftedte er i^n. 5lber bte (Sng*
(dnber fonnte er uber()aupt md)t (eiben, benn a(^ -^unbe^^
genoffen fatten fie i^n einma( im (Btxd) gelaffen unb in bie
grdgte 33er(egen^eit gebrad^t.
!De^^a(6 intereffierte er fic^ befonber^ fiir ben ^rieg ;^rt)ifc^en
ben 5lmeri!anern unb ben ©nglcinbern. 3^m erfd^ienen
5Baf^ington^ ^ampfe hd 3;:renton tjon ber groj^ten ^ebeut-
nng, unb er nannte fie „ben gtcin^enbften J^elbjug be^J 3^a^r*
^unbert^." %U Saf()ington bie gngldnber feeing, ^at grieb^
ric^ feine trieg^funft auf^ pc^fte getobt unb fpater ^at er
Saf^ington ein (Sc^n^ert gefc^enft, ba^ t>k 3<nfc^rift trug :
„!Der ditefte general bem beften."
Syntax.
215. The Use of Adjectives. — German adjectives differ
from English in their (1) inflection^ (2) capitalization^
(3) comparison^ and (4) use.
216. Predicate adjectives are uninflected. As modi-
fiers, adjectives take a weak ending when preceded by
an inflected form of a „ber" word or of an „ein" word.
When not so preceded they take a strong ending.
167
168 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [J 218.
7%6 spirit is willing, but the flesh is weak.
— 33 i b.e r,2« at t. 26, 41.
-4 wo6Ze man attracts noble men.
©in cbtcr 9Hcttf t^ sicljt cble ^Kcnfc^ctt on. — @ o e t () e.
Shared joy is doubled joy, shared sorrow is halved sorrow.
@etei(te f^reube ift bo^^eUe f^reube, 0etct(ter 8(^mer$ ift l|a(tier
6(^mcr5. — 2; i c b g c.
217. German adjectives are written with a capital
when they are used as nouns. After citoa^ and nid^t^
adjectives are also written with a capital, except anbere^,
else. But in cases where English would use one after
the adjective — the new one, a good one — German uses
simply an adjective written with a small letter.
This is the best one. 'I)tc§ ift ba§ bcftc.
I hear nothing good of him. ^rff I)Ore ttt^t^ ^tttc§ Hon t^m.
The neio in it isnH good and the good isn't new.
^aS 9{eue baran ift nit^t ^ni, unb ha§ Q^nit baran ift nidit neu.
He maketh his sun to rise on the evil and on the good and sendeth
rain on the just and on the unjust.
@r (a^t fctttc Sonne nnfflcljcn iibcr bic 83i)fcn unb iibcr bic (IJutcn,
unb Ift^t regnen iiber 6Jcrcd|tc nnb Ungcrcd^tc. — ^ibet, 3)iatt. 5,45.
218. German comparatives and superlatives correspond
to English, except the adverbial superlative with om,
the absolute superlative with auf, and the comparison
of long words.
(1) German adjectives may be used as adverbs
except in the superlative, where the adverb has the
form am — en; am beften, am (iebften. This adverbial
form is used for a predicate adjective, singular or
plural.
The strong man is mightiest alone.
^er Starle tft om mail^tigftcn aUcin. — @d) lller.
Chap. 26.]
ADJECTIVES.
169
37. Statue of Frederick the Great in Berlin.
170 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§219.
It is noble to distress no one, nobler always to practise charity, but
noblest to love even enemies.
@bcl ift^^, tticmanb betriibcit, cblcr ift^g, im 2Bol)imtt ftcts^ fic^ iibcn,
bot^ om cbclftctt, aut^ ^ctnbc Hcbcn. — .^ e r b e r.
And the oldest one, whom he had always loved most, hung on his
lips. Hub bcr ciltcftc, ben cr immcr om mciftcn flcUcbt, Ijiug an fciitcn
St^^JCtt. — @ e t ^ e.
(2) The absolute superlative auf^ — -e, auf^ befte, auf^
()b(^fte, is always adverbial and means m the -est
possible way.
He gave you the highest possible praise. @r lobtc ®ic auf^ ^dt^fte.
They leaped about and caroused and sang their very best.
<Bk f^raugctt fret un'o Ijieltcu ©t^mait^, unb fanjicn auf t>a§ bcfte.
— U I) 1 11 b.
(3) Long words are regularly compared in German.
Never use me'^r and meift to form the comparative and
superlative. SJie^r is used only for rather when two
adjectives are being compared with each other ; tneift
for mostly in the sense of usually.
She has the most wonderful voice !
@ic \)ai bic wuitbcrboUftc Stimmc !
He could easily take me for more {rather) vain than virtuous.
&x fouute tni(^ Ui^i fur mel^r eitel aW tugenb^aft I)a(ten.
-eeffing.
219! The principal cases where the use of German
adjectives differs from English are with personal pro-
nouns, and in a few special expressions.
(1) The use (usually substantive) of an adjective
after a personal pronoun is much commoner in German
than in English. German usage is far from uniform,
but an adjective following a personal pronoun is gen-
erally strong in the nominative singular and accusative
plural, weak in the other cases.
Chap. 26.] ADJECTIVES. 171
Yuu lucky dog! @ic ^liirftit^cr ! (man) , ^indii^t I (woman).
Woe to me most wretched ! SBelje mir ^Irmftett !
I see you both. ^^ fcl)e @tc bcibc.
We Germans fear God, nothing else in the world.
993ir ^ctttfc^ctt fur^ten &oit, f ottft m^t§ in bcr SBcIt — 53 i g m o r cf.
(2) There are several cases where an English ad-
jective must be rendered in German by a paraphrase.
The commonest of these is the case of f^jdt, which is
rarely used with fettl except when eg is the subject.
It is late, e^ ift jpdt
He is late, ©r fommt \pdt
The train is twenty minutes late.
^cr 3«fJ l)«it Sttian^tg aWimttcit 2?erf^atttttg, or tft urn ^ttJatt^tg
aJiittutcn bcrf^atct.
Your watch is fast (slow). ^I)rc ttl)r geljt tior (nadj).
You'll be too late. '2)tt lotttmft 511 f^at» — @ 1 r m.
Notes.
220. Historical Note. — Frederick the Great was the greatest
military genius of his age. He won Silesia (<Srf)teficn) from
Austria, thus carrying forward the expansion of Prussia, which
his great-grandfather, the Great Elector, had begun by annexing
Pomerania (^^ommcrn). Austria tried to avenge herself and, in
the Seven Years' War (1756-1763), — the French and Indian War
in America, — Russia, Sweden, and France all joined Austria
against Prussia. But Frederick's genius saved the country in
spite of the desertion of his one ally, England, and in 1772 he was
strong enough to annex part of Poland. Great as Frederick was
in war, he was, like the Great Elector, greater in peace. See
§§ 188, 192, and 205.
221. English to stand has two common German ren-
derings.
(1) Literally it is fte^en (ftanb, geftattben, aux. ^ben).
How long did you stand there f 993te taitgc I)aft bu ba flcftttitbCtt?
They now stood right under the window.
@ic ftottben jc^t gerabe uittcr bcm f^cnftcr. — SB il b e n b r u rf).
172 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§222.
(2) For to stand, endure, suffer, German uses leibetl {Wii,
gelitten, aux. ^aben).
IcanH stand him. ^d^ fotttt t^tt ntt^t Icibctt*
The professor couldnH stand me.
%tx ^rofcffor Uxmit mx^ nid^t Icibcn. — Xtjoma.
222. English to put has various German equivalents,
usually more specific than the English. Compare to he,
§206.
(1) To put in an upright position is German fteflett (reg.,
aux. ]^aben). Use it vrhenever English could use stand in
an active sense.
He put (stood) the pitcher on the floor.
Q:t ftcMtc ben ^rug auf htn Sobcn*
Put the light on the table.
©tcUctt @tc bo§ 2i^t ouf ben ^^ifd^. — @torm.
Note. — @te((en is used for to put questions (^ragcn ftcflcn, see
§ 16, 2, 6, Note b) and also for to set clocks or watches.
(2) To put in a reclining position is (egett (reg., aux. ^abeit).
Use it whenever English could use lay, laid, laid for to put.
Put the book on the desk, ficgctt (3ic bflS 23ud^ auf ba§ ^nlt.
Put every man^s money in his sack''s mouth.
Sege jeoUt^em fein ^etb oben in fetnen Sad.
— $5ibct, 1 mo\t 44,1.
(3) Less definite than ftetten and legen is fe^en (reg., aux.
\)(ihtn). Use it whenever English could substitute to set for
to put.
He put his grip behind the door.
@r fc^tc fcittc Dficifctofi^c Ijtntcr btc Xilr.
Let us put Germany in the saddle^ so to speak.
Se^en mir ^cntfc^Ionb, fo ju fagcn, in ben BatttU — 35 i s m a r cf.
(4) German uses ftedett (reg., aux. I^aben) for to put (com-
pare to stick) when the object of the verb is to be concealed
Chap. 26.] ADJECTIVES. 173
in or surrounded by the object of the preposition. Do not
confuse fted en with ftec^en, to prick, to sting.
Put the sword in the sheath.
©tcrfcit Sic tsa^ ©t^nicrt in bic (S(^cibc,
Hans put the key in his pocket.
|>tttt)g ftctftc iictt Srffluffct ill bic Xafri^c, — ^tnern.
(5) German uses tutt (tat, getatt, aux. ^aben) in a loose
sense for many uses of to put, especially with liquids.
Please put in some more milk.
^ittt, tun ®ie itoi^ etiua^ Wilti) Ijinein !
So put it (the bud) in a glass of water.
®o ttt^ t§ in citta93offcrg(a)§, — ^cud^tcrsleben.
223. English the is not always the definite article hct, hit,
bai^» With comparatives — the more, the merrier — the first
the is German je, the second befto.
Hie farther we went, the hotter it got.
^c ttjcitcr ttjir giiigcit, bcfto Ijci^cr ttJUttic c§.
The more the body is hidden, the more the soul is disclosed.
^c mc^r Her ^J&vptv ncrpltt (ift), bcfto mtl^v cntput fir^ bic Sccfc.
— 9fiid)ter.
Exercises.
224. (a) 1. Make an outline table, showing the uses of
adjectives treated in this chapter. 2. Illustrate each
use by a German sentence. 3. Translate, He put it on
the table, in as many ways as you can. 4. Explain in
what position the object represented by e0 will be in each
case.
(6) 1. Classify according to your outline table the uses of
adjectives in the last illustration in § 4, § 9, § 16, 1, § 23, 1,
§ 29, 2, § 30, 1, Note, § 41, 1. 2. Also in § 85, 2, Note,
§ 100, 4, Note, § 110, 1, § 111, 1, § 112, § 113, 1, § 119, 3.
3. Also in § 120, 3, § 173, 1 and 2, § 211, 3, 6. 4. Memo-
rize the last illustrations in § 216 and § 217.
174 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§225.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. ^c^ fann bie
^naben nic^t (etben, bie bie ^dttbe immer in bie §ofentafd)en
ftecfen. 2. (gie Srmfter, <Sie fommen ^u fpiit. 3. Qd}
^abe nid)t^ gatfc^e^ (wrong) im (Sa^e gefe^en. 4. Qt
langer tt)ir arbeiten, befto beffer luerben unfere 5(ufgaben.
5. ^teden (Sie bie ^(umen in eine 35afe, fe^en @ie bie 33afe
anf ben ^ifc^, nnb tnn (Sie etma^ Saffer ^inein ! 6. !l)a«^
SJiabrfien iiberfe^t am beften, ob\vo\}i fein ^ruber anf^ ffeipigfte
arbeitet.
225. (a) 1. The good do not always live the longest.
2. I can't stand that man ; he always puts (§ 222, 3) his
hat on (auf), before he leaves the house. 3. The longer
we wait for him, the later we shall be. 4. Please put
the little table where it will stand most firmly. 5. The
teacher asked the boy to put on the table the letter which
he had just put in his pocket. 6. This is the most
beautiful place I ever saw; there can't be anything more
wonderful.
(b) 1. Hard work makes good pupils, or in other words,
the harder one works, the better one learns. 2. We
can't stand the coffee when they put hot milk in it.
3. He stood there as if he didn't understand, although the
teacher spoke most distinctly (§ 218, 2). 4. Please put
your cane in the corner and [put] your things on this chair.
5. The man put his satchel on the floor, opened it most
carefully, took out something black, and put it in his pocket.
6. You poor thing {write for both boy and girl), you are late,
and the best seats are already occupied.
(c) The Great King, — 1. Frederick the Great stands at
the head ((^pi^e) of Prussian rulers, the greatest Hohen-
zollern. 2. In his youth he had to stand all kinds of
severity from his father. 3. But as king he showed
Chap. 26.] ADJECTIVES. 175
himself the most extraordinary general of his age. 4. He
was always doing something good for his people (^o(!).
5. And of course (natiirUc^) the harder he worked for them,
the more they honored and loved him. 6. In [the year]
1912 the whole German people celebrated with great enthu-
siasm the two hundredth birthday of the " Great King."
CHAPTER XXVII.
USE OF TENSES.
©oetl^e unb Sd^tUer.
226. ^^ fommt nur felten t)or, \>a^ bie beiben grbgten
^ic^ter eine^ i^anbe^ fo gut TUtteinanber ubereinfttmmen iDie
©oet^e unb (Schiller e§ taten. !^ie greunbfd^aft gttJtfc^en
ben beiben begann, nac^bem (Scolder fd^on einige ^dt in 3ena
gelebt ^atte. (gif 3o^re lang (1794-1805) ^aben fie aKe^,
ira^ fie fd^rieben, gufantmen bef^roc^en. Senn bem einen
ein guter ^ebanfe einfiel, fo teitte er i^n bem anbern mit.
(So fe^ten fie eine greunbfc^aft fort, in ber man feine
(giferfuc^t bemerft. (Sinmal I)at man ©oet^e gefragt, ob er
nic^t gugebe, bag er grciger fei aU (Schiller. „9lun," ant-
mortete er, „anftatt ^u fragen, mer ber grdgte ift, fodte man
@ott banfen, bag e^ ^mi fo groge !iDirf)ter gibt."
Syntax.
227. The Use of Tenses. — In general the use of tenses
in German corresponds to that in English. But there
are several exceptions.
(1) German has no progressive or emphatic forms.
These are rendered by simple tenses. Never use a
form of tun for the English emphatic do in do come and
so on. See § 178, Note h.
Do you like tea ? Xnufctt Sic gcrtt Xcc ?
res, Ida. ^a, ir^ trinfc i^n gem.
He doesnH see the rocky reefs.
@r fd^ottt ttid^t bic ^clf cnriffc. — $ e I n e.
170
USE OF TENSES.
38. The Statue to Goethe and Schiller at Weimar. — Note
the inscription.
228. The German present is used not only for the
simple English present and for the progressive and
emphatic forms of the English present, but also for the
Englisli future and with fd^on for the English perfect.
178 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§229.
(1) When the English future is used with an ad-
verbial expression referring to the future, it is rendered
in German by the present. German considers the
adverb sufficient to indicate the tense. When the
adverbial expression is omitted, the future is used.
Avoid fodetl and tt)oI(en as future auxiliaries, except in
the question shall we? tt)o((en intr? See § 69, 3.
I shall go to town. ^^ ttJerbc ttt bic 'BicC^i gc^cn.
This afternoon I shall go to town.
^cutc nati^mittag gc^c it^ in bic BiatsU
He will do that. (Sr ttitrb "isa^ iMn*
He will do that to-morrow, ^a^ twi cr morgen»
Only wait, soon thou too shalt rest.
SSartc ttur, balbc trul^cft bit ami^» — @ o c t ^ e.
(2) The English perfect has two distinct meanings.
When we say, I have been there^ the verbal action is
ended. But when we say, I have been here two hours,
the verbal action is still going on. For this English
perfect denoting past verbal action continuing into the
present, German uses the present with f(f)on.
How long have you studied German?
9!Sic langc Icrttcn (trctBen) ®ic fdioit ^ctttfrf) ?
He has been sick a long time. @r ift ft^oit loitflC fraitf.
For many days I have noticed it in silence.
8t^ott titclc Xagc fc^ tt^^§ fd^hicigenb an. — @ (f) i U c r.
Note. — Similarly for the English pluperfect denoting verbal
action continuing into the past, German uses the past with fdjon.
How long had you studied German f
SSle tanqe ferntcn (trieben) @ie fd)on !I)eiitfc^?
Hans Liefrink had been in the church since daybreak.
^an8 Sicfrtnt n)or fd^on felt XageSanbruc^ in bcr ^irdjc — bittern.
229. For the English past (imperfect, preterit),
German uses the past or the perfect.
Chap. 27.] USE OF TENSES. 179
(1) The G-erman past (imperfect) is the tense for
connected narrative. It is the regular tense for all
novels, stories, and histories.
Once upon a time there was a man. (I§ tt)ar ctnmct citt 9Wantt»
/ came., saw, and conquered. ^^ tam, f a^, ttttb ficgtc*
She stopped and trembled in every limb with fright.
@ic Uxtb ftc^en mx^ gittcrtc tjor St^rccf an aUcn ^(tcbcrtt»
-3lci)of!e,
(2) The G-erman perfect is the tense for stating facts
or reporting particular, unconnected events. Usually
where in English a form of the verb with did is or can
be used, German uses the perfect.
This morning I bought two books.
^cutc tttorgctt i^aht i^ awci Slither gc!aiift»
Did you see the airship f ^abctt ®ic ba§ Sttftfd^tff gcfe!^cn ?
Whom did you drink to last f
SBcm \^aSsX %\i jutc^t sugctrmifcn ? — @ e r ft a cf e r.
Note. — (a) As soon as an isolated fact or event becomes connected
with other events so as to make a narrative, German uses the past
instead of tlie perfect. If in the first example above, instead of re-
porting a particular act, I were to narrate what I did this morning,
I should use the past. This morning I got up early, went to town and
bought two books. §eute ntorgen ftanb id) friil) auf, ging in bie @tobt
unb faufte mir jtcei S3ii(^er.
(6) On the other hand, if in the midst of a narrative in the past
tense a particular event is to be emphasized, it is put into the perfect.
For example, in the above sentence if I wanted to add with emphasis,
And then I dropped them in the mud, I should say, Utib bie \\aht ic^
bann in ben @cf)mu^ fatten taffen.
Notes.
230. Historical iVoie. — Johann Wolfgang Goethe (1749-1832)
was born twenty years after Gotthold Ephraim Lessing (1729-
1781) and ten years before Friedrich Christoph Schiller (1759-
1805). These three, especially the two friends Goethe and
Schiller, are the lions of German literature, the best known, the
180 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [J 231.
most admired, the oftenest quoted. Though German literature
reached its highest perfection in Goethe and Schiller, it by no
means ended there. The following brief summary is meant only
for reference. It contains the names and dates of Germany's lead-
ing literary men since the time of Goethe and Schiller, especially
those most often quoted in this book.
With the new nineteenth century began the so-called Romantic
School in German Literature. Its greatest names are : the brothers
August Wilhelm Schlegel (1767-1845) and Friedrich Schlegel
(1772-1829), Ludwig Tieck (1773-1853), Heinrich von Kleist
(1777-1811), Joseph von EichendorfE (1788-1857), and Heinrich
Heine (1797-1856). The poets of the wars of liberation (bie
53efretung8fricge), Korner (1791-1813), Arndt (1769-1860), and
Ruckert (1788-1866), were followed by Uhland (1787-1862),
Kerner (1786-1862), Hauff (1802-1827), Moricke (1804-1875),
Wilhelm Muller (1794-1827), Hoffmann von Fallersleben (1798-
1874), Geibel (1815-1884), and SchefEel (1826-1886). Baumbach
(1841-1905) is best known in America for his SJiordjen. Freytag
(1816-1895), Heyse (1830- ), Keller (1815-1890), and Storm
(1817-1888) represent the nineteenth century in Story; Hebbel
(1813-1863) and Wildenbruch (1845-1909) in the Drama;
Hauptmann (1862- ) and Sudermann (1857- ), the so-
called Naturalistic Movement.
231. English to occur is usually tiorfommcn or cinfottcn*
(1) 33or!ommen (!am Dor, tjorgefommen, aux. fetn) is
used in 1;he sense of to happen.
That often occurs. ^a§ fommt puftg tjor.
It wouldn't have occurred again.
@iS laarc ntt^t niicbcr tjorgcfommcn. — JiltHencron.
(2) @infa((en (fiel ein, etngefatlen, aux. fetn) is used with
the dative for to occur to some one. See § 41, 1, Note.
It occurred to him that he ought to go.
@d ift i^m etngefatten, bn^ er ge^en foKte.
It all only occurred to me on the way.
@i^ fid mir attcS crft uutcmcoi^ ctii. — ^ c t) f c.
Chap. 27.]
USE OF TENSES.
181
39. Goethe's " Garden House" at Weimar. — Here the poet often
withdrew from his city house, to work in quiet surroundings.
232. English to agree has two German equivalents.
(1) To agree with somebody is iibereinftimmetl (reg. sep.,
aux. ^aben), tnit.
/ agree with you perfectly.
^d) ftimmc mtt S^»ctt oofifommctt ttbcrcin.
Their icitness (testimony) agreed not together.
S^r 3cttgttt§ fttmmtc ntr^t iibcrcin* — 33 i b e I, 90^ a r c u 3 14, 56.
(2) To agree to something in the sense of admit is jugebett
(gab ^u, gugegeben, aux. f)aben) with a direct object.
Yes, I agree to that (admit it), ^a, bag gcbe td^ Jtt.
/ agree that you are a better newspaper man.
^d) gcbc 5tt, tta^ ®ic ctn bcffcrcr Sourttatift ftttb. — ^retjtag.
182 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§234.
233. English to continue has two common German ren-
derings.
(1) When used intransitively or with an infinitive, to
continue is fortfa^reti (fu^r fort, fortgefaftren, aux. i)aben).
See § 180, 2.
She continued to cry. ®tc ftt^r fort ju ttictnctt.
'■'• Now that was noteworthy^'''' he continued.
„9itttt mar basS mcrfttmrbig," fu^r cr fort. — SSilbenbrurf).
(2) When used with an object, to continue is usually fort-
fe^en (reg. sep., aux. ^bett).
He continued his work, ©r fc^tc fcinc Strbcit fort.
The ship continues on its way with oars.
^a§ S^iff f c^t feittCtt SScfl tnit Dlubcrn fort. — 2B i e I a n b.
234. English well has three common German renderings.
(1) As an adverb modifying a verb, well is gut.
You did that well. ^a§ Ijobctt @tc ^vd gemai^t.
That was well given. ^ttsS War ^\xi gcgcbett. — ^ r c t) t a g.
(2) As an adverbial interjection, well is ttutt. It comes
first in the sentence and is set off by a comma.
Well, whafs up f 9?tttt, ttia§ gibt^S ?
So ! Well., good-by, Mr. Landlord !
^a f ! 9?tttt, abictt, ^crr 2Strt ! — ? e f f i n g.
Note. — When not set off by a comma, nun means now^ the same
as jetjt.
Now everything must change.
Sf^un ntu^ ftdi alU9, alleS ttjcnbcn. — Ul)tanb.
(3) As predicate adjective referring to health, well is Ger-
man h)ol)I. See § 88, Note, and § 206, 1.
Now I am well again. ^c<?t bin irf| (ift mir) toicber tuo^I.
But are you well^ father ?
Stbcr ift (Jttc^ aur^ too^t, SJater ? ~ e d) I H c r.
Chap. 27.] USE OF TENSES. 183
Exercises.
235. (a) 1. Make an outline table showing the cases
where the use of tenses in German differs from the English
use. 2. Illustrate each use in your table by a sentence.
3. What is the difference between ^^c^ treibe fc^otl ^tt)et
3a^re T)eutfc^, and ^c^ ^abe fdjon jlDei ^(i^xt ^Deutfc^ ge*
trieben.
(h) 1. Classify according to your table the use of tenses
in the last examples in § 5, § 6, 1, § 15, 1, a, § 29, 3, § 62,
§ 68, 1, § 73, 2, § 98, 2. 2. Also in the last examples in
§ 111, 2, § 147, 3, § 157, 3, § 167, 2, § 185, 1, h. 3. Find
in § 231, 2 an example of § 185, 1, h.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize : 1. SBie (atige tret*
ben (Ste \6)oxi !l)eutfc^? 2. "^a^ gebe ic^ p, aber e^ tft
mir nod) nte eingefaden. 3. 9^un, fa^ren @te fort!
!l)ag n^ar fel)r gut Uberfe^t. 4. (g§ fiet tntr ntc^t etn,
bag ba^ ^ter oorfommen fbnnte. 5. Sir finb fdjon (ange
^ter, unb eg gefaKt un^ [e^r gut, aber morgen miiffen voxx
unfere 9?etfe fortfe^en. 6. 9^un, geben @te 3U, bag bag
ntd)t t)orfomTnen foKte?
236. (a) 1. Well, how are you to-day ? Did you continue
to sleep well ? 2. No, I must agree that I'm not very
well, though I have been at home three weeks. 3. We
don't agree with you that you should continue your work
here. 4. It did not occur to him to agree, so they con-
tinued quarreling. 5. How long have you been in Ger-
many, and how do you like it ? 6. We have been here
two months, and we agree with you that it is a beautiful
country.
(6) 1. We shall continue our work to-morrow as if noth-
ing disagreeable had occurred. 2. It only (§ 185, 1, h)
184
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
[§ 236.
occurred to me yesterday how long I have been here.
3. If you agree with us that we have been here long
enough, we shall con-
tinue our journey day
after to-morrow.
4. Well, you read that
page so well, please
continue reading.
5. Yes, I agree that it
often occurs that he is
too late. 6. Well, I
have studied German
for twenty years ; when
do you think I shall
know it ?
(c) Tlie Oerman Clas-
sics. — 1. It does not
often occur that a people
knows its classics as
well as the Germans.
2. On the German
stage, as in the Ger-
man schools, we con-
stantly hear the works
of Goethe and Schiller. 3. It never occurs to the Ger-
mans to bring up their children without teaching them
the classics. 4. Even if we do not agree with the
Germans, we must agree that they have very good schools.
5. That has been for years a well-known fact. 6. And
Germany will continue to have good schools as long as it
continues this work.
40. Schiller, — The bust by Daneker
in the Library at Weimar.
CHAPTER XXYIIL
REVIEW.
237. The particle hO(i), besides its regular adversative
meaning of after all, yet, has other uses. But in all of them
there is an adversative idea.
(1) In giving an affirmative answer to a negative question
or statement, German uses boc^ for yes, instead of ja. It
contains a suggestion of contradiction, Oh, yes, but — .
Can''t you see 9 — Oh, yes, I can. ^omten @ie nit^t f c^cn ? — ^OJ^,
/ donH think he'' II come. — Oh, yes, he will.
^^ gtaubc tttj^t, bfl^ cr tommt — ^ot^.
You wouldnH have recognized your father again, would you? — Oh,
yes, I would. ^VL pttcft bcittcn 3?atcr nti^t tuicbcr crfannt ? — ^ot^,
— @ c^ i n e r.
(2) ^q6) may be used to add emphasis to a sentence. It
is then unaccented, and may be translated in many ways.
Do come in ! ^ontmcn @ic J>ot^ herein !
Well, iVsfine that you are coming !
^a§ ift boc^ nett, tsa^ 8tc fommcn.
Do calm yourself. Scru^igc bir^ bo(^ ! — 25i(benbru(^.
Note. — The English repetition of the auxiliary — isnHitf donH
they f has he 9 and so on — is rendered in German by nid)t or nid)t
ft)af)r for the negative, by bod^ for the affirmative.
Ifs warm, isnH it f (Ss ift tDorm, nid^t? (or nic^t iDa'^r?)
It isn't warm, is it f @g ift bod) ntd)t rt)arm ?
You arenH going to start out again to-day, are you?
®ie toerben ^eute bod) nid)t trteber oufbrec^eti? — i^ejjing.
186
186 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§239.
Exercises.
238. (a) 1. Explain and illustrate with sentences the
chief differences between the use of the passive in German
and English. 2. Explain, with examples, the uses of
the German equivalents for that, well, who, to put, which.
3. In what respects does the use of adjectives in German
differ from English use ? Illustrate with sentences.
(h) 1. What is the difference between auf^ befte and am
beften? 2, What English tenses may be represented by
the German present? 3. Illustrate each use with a sen-
tence. 4. Explain fully, with illustrations, the difference
between the use of the German past (imperfect, preterit)
and perfect tenses.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. ^a§ '^at er
iDO^I noc^ ntc^t itberfe^t. — X)oc^. 2. ^te luoden boc^ ntc^t
jugcben, \iCi% @te t^n ni(^t leiben fontien? 3. 2S?a^ fdtlt
3^nen ein (§ 41, 1, Note)? ga^ren ®ie bod) fort gu (efen!
4. (Sie @Ut(l(td)er! @eftern abetib hjurbe getanjt, unb (Sie
famen nid)t ^u fpcit. 5. ^a^ gel)t t()n bod) ntd)t^ an.
6. (gtecfen ®ie ee bod) in bte 3:a[d)e; e^ foftet njenig, nid)t
(rt)a^r)?
239. (a) 1. They don't agree with each other yet, do
they ? — Oh, yes. 2. Oh, don't put any sugar in my tea ;
I can't stand anything (not anything = ?) sweet. 3. After
he had put his hat on a chair, it occurred to him that he
should leave it outside. 4. You'll be late, and you know
there's going to be a dance to-night (§ 204, 2). 5. We
like it so well here that we shall not continue our journey
till (§ 185, 1, h) next week. 6. She continued looking
for her hat, but it was nowhere to be found.
(6) 1. I asked her how much the watch was, and she told
me it was a hundred marks. 2. I asked her to set it, and
Chap. 28.] REVIEW. 187
said, " I will put it in my pocket.*' 3. Which watch is the
one that you put on the table ? 4. You aren't going to
town with that man, are you? — Why, yes. 5. They are
going to sing this evening (§ 204, 2) ; I know I shall be late,
but my other glove is nowhere to be found. 6. Those are
the girls who didn't know the difference between this sen-
tence and that one.
(c) 1. When I asked how much the hat was, I was told
it was not to be sold. 2. They couldn't agree with each
other which suit looked (au^fe^ett) the best. 3. In school
they were singing, outside they were playing ; nowhere was
a quiet place to be found. 4. Well, shall we look at
something else ? Those are the cheapest things over there.
5. I can't stand this store ; I've been standing here since
quarter to three ; I shall be late home. 6. Well, if it
takes so long, why don't you take something expensive
and put it in your pocket ? Then they'll wait on you !
CHAPTER XXIX.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
Bcetl?ot?en unb ^oetl^e.
240. SBa^renb ^oet^e einigc ^txt in SKien toerbrac^te, gtng
er etne^ Xageg mtt ^eet^ot)en fpagteren. ^ir t)dren oon
^ttt1)oun felbft, iDte etn=
mat bte gon^e faiferltc^e
gamilie ba^ergefomtnen
tDcire, a(^ bte beiben burd)
ben ^att gingen. ^ogletc^,
fc^retbt ber ^omponift, f)abe
@oet^e ben §ut abgenom*
men unb fei auS bem 5Sege
gegangen.
(5r felbft aber, ber bie
^aiferlic^en ©of)etten fc^on
frnl)er gefe^en ^atte, ^abe
ben |)ut bt« Uber bte D{)ren
f)ernnterge^^ogen, bte §dnbe
in bte Xafdjen geftecft, unb
fei an ben gitrftlic^teiten
tjorbeigegangen. X)a l^abc
i^m er3^er3og 9^ubo(f fc^er*
genb ben §ut abgenommen. ^eet^oDen woUtt ®oet^c
tttt^t uxitx^tn, bag er t)or ben gUrften pritcfgetreten tt)ar.
„^5nige/' fagte er, Jbnnen Zxtd unb (5l)ren t>erleit)en, aber
groge ^Hanner luie un^ fbnnen fie nid)t madjen."
188
41. LuDwiG VAN Beethoven.
Chap. 29.] THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 189
Syntax.
241. The German Subjunctive. — In general, the sub-
junctive is the mode of possibility and uncertainty,
while the indicative denotes reality and certainty.
The German subjunctive may be divided into two chief
classes : (1) the indirect discourse (or dependent) sub-
junctive, and (2) the unreal (or contrary to fact) sub-
junctive. The latter is treated in the next chapter.
The border line between indicative and subjunctive
is often so uncertain that either use is correct. But
there is always a difference in meaning, which should
be thoroughly understood.
242. The indirect discourse (or dependent) subjunc-
tive is used in subordinate clauses after verbs of telling,
thinking, saving, and the like. Of course such reported
statements cannot be so real or certain as the original ;
hence the subjunctive.
I thought that I had the right book.
Grandmother says you are a wise man.
(^vo^muittx f agt, bu f cift cin ttictf cr Wlann, — ^au^tmatiti.
243. In indirect discourse English changes the present
tense to past, if the verb of the main clause is past.
German may do the same, but usually it does not ; in-
stead it keeps the tense of the direct discourse. To
determine what tense a German would use, ask your-
self, " what were the speaker's exact words ? "
He said, ''lam ilV @r frtfltc: „^^ 5in tvanV
He said that he was ill. @r fagtc, ba^ tv trant feu
She said, " / have a new hat.''"'
(Bic fagte : „S(^ ^abc cincn ncucn ^mV
190
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
245.
She said that she had a new hat.
'Bit fagtc, ba^ fie cincn ncttcn ^nt f}aht.
He asked one of the bystanders if it was the body of his friend.
6'r fragtc ctitcit bcr Umftc^cnbcn, oh c§ bcr ^iir^cr fcinc^ f^rcunbe^
f ci, — ® c^ i n e r.
244. The indicative is used when the speaker wishes
to emphasize his belief in the truth of what he reports.
He said that he didn't do it. ($r fagtc, btt^ cr c§ nit^t Qctttn \)at
I told that I was riding on a narrow Alpine path.
^^ er^af^Uc, ba| id) auf etuem fdjmaleu ^l^eu|)fab xitt.
— S3i8mar(f.
Notes.
42. Richard Wagner.
245. Historical Note.
— Ludw'ig van Beetho-
ven (1770-1827) marks
a turning point in the
history of instrumental
music. He is best known
for his symphonies,
though he composed
over two hundred songs.
During his lifetime he
was admired chiefly for
his improvisations.
Germany has always
been famous for its
music. Its best-known
composers are Bach
(1685-1750), who com-
posed especially for the
organ; Handel (1685-
1759) and Haydn (1732-
1809), famous for their
oratorios; Mozart
(1756-1791), active in
Chap. 29.] THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 191
all fields; von Weber (1786-1826), best known for his operas;
Schubert (1797-1828), the most poetic of all musicians, renowned
for his songs; Mendelssohn (1809-1847), a romantic creator of
symphonies and songs; Schumann (1810-1856), writer of songs,
ballads, and symphonies; the famous pianist, Liszt (1811-1886);
and last and greatest, Liszt's son-in-law, Richard Wagner (1813-
1883), who perfected the music-drama.
246. English to pass is variously rendered in German.
(1) In the sense of to hand to, it is reicf)en (I'eg., aux.
l^aben), not to be confused with ried)en, to smell.
Will you please pass the bread ?
SBottcn ®ic tttir, hittt, tta^ SBrot rctr^cit ?
Without asking further for permission he jmssed the glass to him,
too. O^wc iacttcr nm (^vlanhni^ gu fraflcit, reit^tc cr an^ i^in ba^
OJta^. — SSilbeubrud).
(2) As a neuter verb, in speaking of time — as, the time
passes — to pass is tjerge^en (merging, tiergangen, aux. fein).
The time passes slowly, ^tc ^t\i tiergc^t langfam.
The night has now passed, '^ic 9?ac^t ift tttttt tJergattgcit* — 3( r n b t.
(3) As an active verb, in speaking of time — as, he passed
the time — to pass is usually ferbntigen (tjerbrac^te, tjerbrac^t,
aux. ^aben).
How shall loe pass the time? 298tc tjcrfirtugen tutr bic S^it ?
He looked for a protecting tree, to pass the night there.
(£r fttt^tc cinctt ft^it^cnbcit S3aum, i»ic '^a6)i bort p tjcrfinttflcn,
— @ e r ft a d e r.
(4) In the sense of to go hy, to pass is usually an etlDa^
(dative) t)orbeige^en (gtng Dorbei, Dorbetgegangen, aux. fein).
33orbet (t)oritber) here means past, and is used with different
verbs of action, walk, ride, drive. English uses to pass for
all these meanings ; German must be more specific and use
ge^en, reiten, or fasten, according as the subject walks,
rides, or drives. Compare § 206, 2 and § 222.
192 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§248.
Yesterday loe passed your house {on foot^ on horseback^ in a car-
riage:), ©cftcrufinb toxx an ^^rcm ^aufc tiorbciflcgangcn, toorbcige^
x'xiitw, tJorbcigcfa^rctt,
He shook hands with everybody who passed him.
©r ft^iittcttc jcbcm bic ^a\\t>, bcr an i^m tiorbcifam, — X ^ o m a.
//e looks past others.
3ttt auberen ft^ttut cr tiorbct. — ®ubermonn.
iVb^e. — To pass in the sense of to he promoted is Derfc^t ttJcrbcn.
Did you pass ? @inb @ie berfet3t trorben?
The juniors, who in time passed into the senior class.
2)ie ©cfunbaner, bie nun in ber 3«it noc^ ^rima oerfc^t hjurben.
— SBilbenbrud).
247. English along has two different German meanings.
(1) In the sense of along the street, it is etlttattg, or balder
(^er), following the accusative.
We went along the street.
993ir giitgctt bic ®tra^e cntlaitg (or ba^cr or l^cr).
Bush, river, along the valley.
maufd^c, %ln^, t>a§ %al cttttang. — @ o c 1 1) c.
(2) In the sense of along with some one, to denote accom-
paniment, German uses tnit (for mttge()en).
May I go along f ^arf tji^ ittit (gc^ctt)?
ril go along to India, ^d) ^^tW j<» Wt* «<tf^ ^ttbtcu» — ©tor m.
248. English before has three common German ren-
derings.
(1) As a conjunction, before is usually el)e.
Before I could speak to him, he icas gone.
(£!)e id) xi)n anrcben tonntc, mar cr fort.
Before she could prevent it, Antonino had taken her in his arms.
e^c ftc c§ ttic^rcn fonittc, f^aitt Antonino ftc in bic 5trmc 0cnom=
men. — C^ e t) f e.
(2) As an adverb, before is (a) nod) or (6) frii^er or
tjor^er.
Chap. 29.] THE SUBJUNCTIVE, 193
(a) When the adverb before follows a negative, German
uses tiod^. Here it is generally indefinite, and means up to
the present time.
He hasn't read that before. 1)a§ ^ai tx ttOt^ tttl^t gclefctt*
/ never saw her before. ^^ ^afic ftc ttOJ^ tttc gcf C^Ctt*
That was so splendid and brilliant as she {Cinderella') had never
had before. ^a§ ttiar fo ^rftj^ttg unb fjIJittSCttb, ttJtc c§ (5lft^en|juttcl)
ttod^ !cttt§ gc^Bt ^attc* — @ r i m m.
(5) In affirmative clauses, the adverb before is usually
German t)or'^er or fritter* These words usually refer to a
more or less definite period in the past.
You ought to have done that before.
^a§ ^rittcft bit fritter (or uor^cr) tun fottctt.
She no longer looked as rosy as before.
Sic fa^ ttit^t mc^r fo roftg an^ ttitc f rii^er* — 2B e r b e r.
(3) As a preposition, before is usually t)or, either with
the dative of place where or with the accusative of place
whither. See § 125, 1.
249. English way is usually bcr 2Beg or bte SScifc*
(1) !^er 3Beg is used only concretely of way in the sense
of a path or road.
Is this the nearest way? Sft bic§ bcr nat^fte 993cg ?
/S'a/e ^■s the narrow way of duty.
Silver tft bcr f t^matc 9Bcg bcr ^^iii)t — @ d) i It c r.
(2) !^te SBeife is used only abstractly of the way or man-
ner in which something is done.
I don'' t like the way he writes.
Wlxv gcfattt nit^t btc 2Bcifc, ttJtc cr f(^rcibt.
-E^very one in his own way. ^cbcr auf fcittC SSctfC. — ®pri(^tt)ort.
iVb^e. — SSeife unites with adjectives to form adverbs : g(ucfti(^er=
tt)cife, fortunately; mogUd)ertDeife, possibly; naturUd)erit)eife, natu-
rally ; and 8Q on.
194 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 251.
Exercises.
250. (a) 1. What are the chief differences between Ger-
man and English indirect discourse ? 2. What is the
difference between (Sr \ac^tt, bag tc^ red^t ^atte, and (5r fagte,
bag ic^ red^t ^atte? 3. Is either sentence wrong? Ex-
plain (§ 244).
(b) 1. Make an outline table illustrating all the German
equivalents of to pass which are treated in this chapter.
2. Illustrate each use with a sentence. 3. Translate
in two ways, That isnH the right ivay, and explain both
meanings.
(c) Coyiversational Idioms. Memorize : 1. 2Bie fc^ttett t)er=
ge^t bte ^t\i\ {How time flies!) 2. $Bo((en tSte mir,
bttte, bie :53utter reid)en? 3. Sir ge()en morgen in bte
(Stabt; iDtllft bu mtt? 4. SO^^it ^ergnltgen, aber roelc^en
SBeg ge^t t^r? 5. 25>ir gel)ett an ber <Sc^u(e Dorbet nnb
bann htxi SalbtDeg entlang bic^ in bte Stabt. 6. Da^ tft
ber befte 2Beg nac^ ber (Stabt, unb bad tft bie befte Seife,
einen geiertag ^u Derbringen.
251. (a) 1. He said he passed three very pleasant
hours there, before he continued his way along the valley.
2. We told our friends how we had passed the little
huts and had gone along the narrow way into the wood.
3. Will you please pass me the sugar ? I haven't had any
before (§ 248, 2, a). 4. That is not the way in which
(n)ie) you ought to ask if you may go along. 5. I told
you before that the time would pass faster than you ex-
pected. 6. They said that they had never passed such
a pleasant day before.
(h) 1. That boy thinks the only way to pass is to
study (lernen) hard before the examinations. 2. Time
Chap. 29.]
THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
195
passed swiftly before we reached this narrow way. 3. He
said that they would pass a beautiful waterfall, so we went
along. 4. The way
led along the river,
past the little village
where we had passed
last (t»orig) summer.
5. The girl's father
thought that she
(§ 207, Note) had eaten
enough, and would not
pass her the bread.
6. Before I met (§ 171,
2, Note) the girl, I was
sure that I had seen
her before.
(c) Ludwig van Bee-
tlioven. — 1. Before
Beethoven became fa-
mous he passed much
time in Bonn. 2. But
after some time he went
to Vienna. 3. There
we hear that he lived
more pleasantly than before. 4. They say that Vienna
had never before known such a distinguished artist.
5. There are many stories which tell how he behaved
([ic^ benei)men) when he passed his friends on the street.
6. We know him to have been a great musician, but many
people think he was not a polite man.
43. Goethe. — From the bust by Trippel
in the Library at Weimar.
CHAPTER XXX.
SUBJUNCTIVE AND CONDITIONAL.
Konigin £utfe.
252. 9^a(f)bem t>k fd)one f dnigtn ^uife ^ad}x\d)t t)on bem
franco fifc^en (Siege bei It^onig^berg erl^ielt, flo^ fie mit
i()ren (S5()nen au^ ber (gtabt. 2l(^ fie fic^ nad) einer
Seile au^rul)en tt)o((ten, fa^ ^uife einett ^rupp (BoU
baten fomtnen. „®ott ^elfe nn^/' rief fie aue, ,,tt)enn
e'g gran^ofen finb.^' (Seined entfdjiog fic^ bie fonigin; fie
iDarf ein Znd) iiber ben ^op\, aU njiire fie etne ^auerfrau,
itnb fitf)rte bie ^ringen iM ^ornfelb, „Sad aud) fomme/'
fagte fie ben ^inbern, ,,feib rnl)ig, biicft end) nieber, unb
pfludet bie l^ornblnnten."
!Den grangofen fiel eg natiirlic^ gar nid)t ein, biefe
gran mit ben tinbern fiir J^iirftlidifeiten gu ^alten unb
au§ biefem @runbe gingen fie rul)ig meiter, of)ne 3Serbad)t
3U fc^l3|3fen. SBer ^iitte je benfen fdnnen, t>a^ ber junge
3Si(f)e(m, ber auf fo !(uge $3eife t)on feiner SJ^utter ge-
rettet tuurbe, fec^jig 3^a^re fpater granfreid) erobern unb
bag neue beutfd^e 9?eid) griinben iDiirbe! Unb wer ()atte
geg(aubt, baj eben bie ^ornblume — feine i^ieblinggblume
— bie 9^ationa(b(ume !Deutfd^(anbg tuerben miirbe!
Syntax.
253. The Unreal Subjunctive. — The unreal subjunc-
tive (including the subjunctive contrary to fact) cor-
responds exactly to the English. It is used when no
196
44. Queen Luise. — From the painting by Richter in the Gallery at
Cologne.
197
198 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§254.
statement of fact is made, and is sometimes divided into
four classes: («) the hortative subjunctive (of command),
(5) the optative subjunctive (of wish), (c) the potential
subjunctive (of possibility/'), and (c?) the subjunctive
contrary to fact.
(a) Let us go ; let him come.
©c^ctt wir ; fommc cr, or cr mooc fommcit.
God help me ! OJott Ijclf c tttir ! — $? u 1 1) c r.
(6) Were I only there ! SBSrc tt^ ttUr bfl !
Would that he would write ! ®c()nctiC cr bod^ ! — ? e f j i n g.
(c) It would hardly he possible. (^§ mfirc !attm m6g(i(j^»
Far away Fd like to go I
^tt btc ^critc mot^t^ i6) jic^eit* — @d)cnfenborf.
(d!) If she had time, she would be glad to do it.
SSJctttt fie Bctt f^dtitf tote fie e^ gerit.
Had I pinions, had I wings, I would to the hills away.
^UV tt^ St^ttitttgeit, \)M' iH) f^titocf, miS) bem ^iigeCtt jog*
id^ ittt» — (g c^ i I ( e r.
254. The conditional mode in German is formed by
prefixing forms of Itiiirbc, would (past subjunctive of
tDerben), to the present infinitive. It is merely another
form of the potential (§ 253, <?), and is used chiefly in
the conclusions of conditional sentences.
It would hardly be possible.
@)S uiiirbe !aum mdgU(^ fein. (($S marc !aum mbgltd^.)
No one would speak in company, if he realized how often he mis-
understands the others. 9'itemaitb ttJitrbe tit OJcfcHftfjaft fprcd^eit, toeitn
cr fid^ bcttJtt^t ttJfirc, Wic oft cr bic rtitbcru mi jjocrftc^t. — @ o e 1 1) e.
How happy many a man would live, if he bothered as little about
others'' affairs as about his own.
993ic flnirfltdj ttiilrbc tttnurfjcr (cbeit, nicitit cr fttf) ttm aitbcrcr ficutc
©at^ctt fo ttJctttg bcfiintmcrtc a\i^ urn fctitc ciflcncit. — ?id)teubf rg.
Note. — The past subjunctive may be used for the conditional,
except with weak verbs where the past subjunctive and indicative have
Chap. 30] THE CONDITIONAL. 199
the same form. In such cases the conditional should be used. In the
last two examples above, Goethe could have used fpra(i)e for tt)iirbc
fpred^cn, but it would have been bad usage for Lichtenberg to use kbte
for ttJiirbc leben. Why ?
255. German conditional sentences take the same mood
and tense as the English. In fact, they are just like
the English, except in their inversion of the conclu-
sion when the condition precedes (§ 2, 2), and in the
two cases below where the condition may be inverted.
Remember that when the condition precedes, German
usually begins the conclusion with the adverb fo. This
has no English equivalent, though it may sometimes be
rendered by then.
(1) German can invert a present condition, while
English cannot.
If he comes, I shall go. ^otttmt cr, fo gc^c it^»
If it rains to-morrow, we shall stay at home.
JRcgnct c§ ntorgctt, fo fitctbcit ttitr p ^a«fc»
And ifyou^re not willing, I shall use force.
Uttb fitft btt ttit^t ttiaig, fo braitd^^ tr^ ^cttiatt — ® o e t ^e.
(2) In comparative conditions^ introduced by as if., as
though., and so on, German may omit trentl or ob (in a(^
lt)enn, a(^ ob) and invert the sentence. English of
course cannot do this.
You look as if you had been sick.
%\x fic^ft axi^f a(^ o6 bu !rant gctticfctt toarcft (or al^ warcft bu
franf gcttJcfcu),
Pray as though no work would help ; work as if no prayer would
help. S3ctc, ai§ ptfc (past subj. of ^etfctt) fcitt 3trbcttctt ; arbcitc,
aiS l^illf c f cttt Sctett, — ©pric^mort.
The wood rustles mysteriously, as if it ivould like to confide some-
thing to me. ©§ raufi^t bcr 933a(b gc^cimnt^ooll, a(§ m'6ti}f cr ttttr
toa^ atttJcrtrrittCtt. — ? e n o u.
200 GEBMAN COMPOSITION. [§258.
Notes.
256. Historical Note. — Frederick the Great was succeeded by
his nephew, Frederick William II (1786-1797), an unimportant
monarch. His son, Frederick William III (1797-1840), was a
patron of art and learning — he founded the University of Berlin
and built the Royal Theatre and the Old Museum — rather than
a statesman and soldier. His wife Luise had much more firmness
of purpose than he, but she died in 1810, the idol of her people
then and now. It is an interesting fact that the German Empire,
which Napoleon abolished during the reign of Queen Luise, was to
be reestablished some sixb^ years later by her son. And it was
the irony of fate that the J)roclamation of the New Empire should
be made in the Royal French palace at Versailles while the victo-
rious German army was besieging Paris.
257. English ever is variously rendered in German.
(1) When referring to indefinite time, past or future,
ever is usually }e.
Will he ever come ? SSSirb cr |c !ommen ?
Have you ever been in Germany f SBarcil ©ic jc ttt ^eutf^Iaitb ?
And wilder than ever began the dance.
Uttb ttJilbcr a\^ jc ficgamt bcr Xanj. — @ e r ft d cf c r.
Note. — For ever is (auf) ctt>ig, less often auf immer.
Zeus'' s decision stands for ever.
(5tt)ig ftet)t ber BdjU^ bcS 3eu«. — @(f) liter.
(2) In expressions like wherever, whatever, and so on, ever
is usually German aud^. It follows the subject. For wheti-
ever, see § 84, 2, b.
Wherever you go, you meet friends.
So man au(f| Qcf^t, ha tnfft man ^reitnbe.
Then I shall hunt up the Emperor, wherever he may he.
%am. ftti^c irf| belt ^aifcr auf, mo cr a\x&\ fci. — >> i 1 1 e r n.
258. English to decide is used with or without a direct
object.
Chap. 30.] THE CONDITIONAL, 201
(1) When Englisli uses to decide with a direct object,
German uses entfc^eibeti (entfd)teb, entf(f)teben, aux. ^aben).
Will you decide this case f SSottctt @ic bicfctt f^'fttt Ctttfti^cibCtt?
You come at just the right time, major, to decide our controversy.
®ic fommcit thtn rci^t, ^crr SJlajor, unfcrcu ©trcit 5tt cutft^ctbctt.
— @oetl)e.
(2) When English uses to decide for to reach a decision^
especially when followed by a prepositional phrase, German
uses \\d} entfd^Ite^en (entfc^tog fi(^, \id) entfd)(offen, aux.
^abeti), or befd)(iegen (befc^(o§, befc^loffen, aux. f)aben).
They may be used interchangeably, but entfd)(ie§en is
always reflexive.
/ have decided to go abroad next year.
^ti) f^aht m\^ eutft^loffcn (or f^ahc ficfdjloffcn), nai^fte^ ^a^r nuf
9Jctfcn 5U oc^cn.
I have determined there to winter.
^afctbft f^aht td| bcft^loffcn, bctt SBrntcr ju btcibcn.
— 33ibel, 2:itug 3, 12.
259. English after has two German renderings.
(1) As a conjunction, after is German nad)bem with the
transposed order.
We arrived at the station after the train had left.
9Bir famcn am SBa^n^ofc an, uoj^bcm bcr 3tt9 nbgcfa^rcn mar.
After the child is drowned, the well is covered.
9la^^tm ba^ ^inb crtrunfett ift, tttdt man ben Srunncn ju.
— @^ric^lDort.
(2) As a preposition, q/i'er is German na6), (See § 97, 2.)
The adverb afterward is nac^^er.
260. English ?-eason is bcr ©runb (bic ©riittbc), which
rarely means ground except in a figurative sense.
Those are my reasons {grounds), '^a^ ftttb tttetttc ©ritttbe.
Well, haven'' t Treason enough to be angry !
Silti, i(^ ^ttbc ^ruttb gcmig, orgcrtit^ jtt f citt ! — ^^ r e t) t a g.
202 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§263.
Note. — English ground is usually bcr S3obcn, which also means
floor, bottom, and attic.
The richer the ground (soil), the thicker the weeds.
3e fetter ber S3oben, je fetter ba8 Unfraut. — @^rtc^tt)ort.
261. English to receive has commonly two German render-
ings : cr^altcn and cm^fangcn*
(1) When the object is a thing, to receive is nsually er-
i)a(ten (erl)ie(t, erl)a(ten, aux. ^aben).
I haven't received any answer, ^ttf f^aht fcittC ^llttwort cr^altCtt,
lieinhardt had received no further letter from her.
JHein^arbt ^ttttc tion i^r feiucn JBricf mc^r er^altcn. — @ t o r m.
(2) When the object is a person, to receive is em|)fangen
(empfing, empfangen, aux. ^aben). It may be used of things,
but in a more formal sense than er()alten.
How did she receive you 9 933tc ^at fie bit^ em^fanflcii ?
The cousin looks after the house, receives the guests.
2)cr SBcttcr bcforgt bosg ^ou^mcfctt, cm^jfottgt bic (iJaftc.
— 33 e n e b i ;:.
262. English of course is usually natitrltc^.
Of course PR go. 'UaiViXlx^ fiC^C tJ^.
Of course the affair could now no longer remain concealed.
9{un fonnte bie ^cfi^ti^tc natilrlit^ ntt^t linger tierborgcn blei^en.
— SBilbenbruct).
Exercises.
263. (a) 1. Make an outline table showing the different
classes of unreal subjunctives in German. 2. Illustrate
each class by a sentence. 3. Are there any cases where
German use differs from English ? If so, name them. (In
answering these questions remember that the same form
often serves as indicative or subjunctive, both in English
and German.) 4. How is the German conditional formed,
and how does its use differ from that of the past subjunctive ?
Chap. 30.] THE CONDITIONAL. 203
(h) 1. In what cases do German conditional sentences
differ from English? 2. Illustrate each case by a sen-
tence. 3. Classify and explain the subjunctives and con-
ditionals in § 252 and in the last example in § 49, 2, § 69, 3,
§ 113, 2, § 150, 3, § 222, 3.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. ^ettt fet, tDte
t^m tt)o((e ! {Be that as it may!) 2. ^diit x6) \i(x^ getDU^t,
fo mare tc^ fritter fertig gemorben. 3. 9^atitr(icf) ^aben
<Sie guten @runb, \>a^ ju fagen. 4. §aben ^ie je etnen
fotc^en ^rtef er^alten? 5. 9^ac^bem er 'ba^ fagte, \)ai fie
ftc^ entfd)(oBen, i^n nte iDieber ju em)3fangen. 6. (5^ gibt
90^enfd)en, bte ^bfltc^ empfangen merben, ido fie auc^ ^tn*
ge^en.
264. (a) 1. Were he more polite, he would of course be
better received. 2. After they had decided to stay, we
had no reason to go. 3. If you ever receive such a let-
ter from him, you must decide not to receive him again.
4. It would be decidedly easier to write these exercises, if
you worked harder. 5. If he ever had to decide anything,
of course he would do it in the easiest way. 6. Whatever
we decide, you will have no reason to complain (fid) beflagett).
(&) 1. Of course, if I had ever received a letter from
you, I should have been glad to answer it. 2. She
couldn't decide to receive him after he had been so impo-
lite. 3. After this outing the pupils will decide if they
are ever going to have another. 4. Had I only worked
harder, I should have passed. 5. He wouldn't do such a
thing (fo etttia^) without having a good reason. 6. Were
she able to decide, of course she would receive him.
(c) Queen Luise. — 1. If you asked who was the most pop-
ular queen that Prussia had ever had, you would of course
receive the answer : Queen Luise. 2. And the Prussians
204 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§264.
have good reason to say so (ba^). 3. Had everybody
decided to work as much for Prussia as Queen Luise did
[it], Prussia would have been decidedly stronger after the
wars against Napoleon. 4. She went to Napoleon and
he received her, but he decided not to let himself be influ-
enced by her. 5. If he had done so, it would have been
better for Prussia. 6. But Napoleon did not care about
Prussia, and of course he did as he pleased.
CHAPTER XXXI.
SPECIAL SUBJUNCTIVES.
Pas ^ranffurter Parlament.
265. Qm Sa^re 1848 tagte in granffurt ba^ erfte t)om
SDeutfc^en 55o(! ern)a{)(te ^ortament, um bte beutfc^en (Staaten
gu etnem 9^eic^e p
tieremigen. !Da^
•parlament beftanb
au^ t)te(ett gele^r-
ten SJ^dnnern, be-
nen pra!tifd)e (5r=
fa^rung fe()(te.
(Sie rebeten ju
t)te(. @te l^citten
etttja^ (eiften !dn==
nen, iDenn fie ge^
I)anbe(t Ijatten,
anftatt fo t)ie( ju
fpred^en. (Sie be^
ftanben itnmer auf
i^ren 3^^^^r ^^^^
renb fie pireifen
ptten nad)geben
foffen. ^^ war ein
feltfame^ parla-
ment, mie man noc^ !ein§ in :Deutf{^(anb gefe^en ^atte.
(5nb(id), um T)eutfii)(anb ju einigen, hot man bem ^5nig
t)on ^reugen bie ^aiferlrone an. 5lber er tuagte nid)t, fie an*
205
45. St. Paul's Church at Frankfort, where
the famous Frankfort Parliament met.
206 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§266.
junef)Tnen, wdi er auf tie ^uftimtnung ber beutfc^en giirften
nic^t rec^nen fonnte. „(S:mt folc^e ^rone moc()te ic^ nidjt
tragen/' fagte er. Unb fo ift ber Dom beutfrf)en ^olf gemad)te
33erfuc^, ein neue^ Dfleid) gu griinben, j^uerft cjefc^eitert. ^Man
mu^te auf einen ftarfen git^rer it)arten.
Syntax.
266. Special Subjunctives. — Two kinds of expressions
which usually make trouble for Americans are should
(or would) like, and ought to have, might have, coutd have,
and so on.
(1) The expression should or would like is always
mbc^te, the past subjunctive of mogen, with or without
(jern. See § 76, 1.
Would you like to hear " Lohengrin " ?
9Jloj^tcn @ie (gcrit) ^iio^cugnn" Iiijrcu?
He would like to very much, ^n^ mbd)te cr \t\)t gcm.
I should like to go to Nuremberg to Barer.
'^aii) 9'iiirttbcrg jum ^ilrcr mod^t^ ic^ fc^ou. — § i U e r n.
(2) The expressions could have, might have, ought to
have, and so on are rendered in German by the pluper-
fect subjunctive. The expression begins with a form
of I)atten, then comes the main verb in the infinitive,
and finally the infinitive of the modal. This order
should be practised so thoroughly that the student
loses all tendency to use the English order when put-
ting his thoughts into German.
(Soden and fbnnen are commonest in this construc-
tion ; burfen is sometimes used ; mbc|en, miiffen, and
U)o((en are rare. For the position of l)atte in dependent
clauses, see § 73, 2.
Chap. 31.]
SPECIAL SUBJUNCTIVES.
207
I could not have done it. ^6) pttc C§ Jtic^t ttttt fottttCtt,
You ought to have seen us ! @ic ptteit tttti^ fc^Ctt fottctt !
/ ought not to have accepted so quickly.
^^ 'i)Uit bo(^ nit^t fo fd^itctt anne^mcu fottcn* — ^r e tj t a g.
I could not have been horn here.
^^ ptf ^icr m^t gcfiorctt tucrbcn fottttCtt» — § e b b e I.
Notes.
267. Historical Note. — Frederick William III reigned thirty
years after the death of his queen, Luise, and was succeeded in
1840 by his son, Frederick
William IV. During all the
first half of the nineteenth
century, national feeling had
been gi- owing stronger
throughout the many German
states. But when the Frank-
fort Parliament met, the great
question was, who should lead
the new Empire, Austria or
Prussia. Austria had the most
prestige, but refused to join the
new Empire without bringing
in Hungary as well, and this
the other German states did
not want. They desired only
Austria proper — the German
part of the Austrian Empire.
As Austria remained firm, the
Parliament finally decided to
leave her out entirely. So it
was not only distrust of this
parliament, but fear of a war
with Austria, that led Fred-
erick William IV to refuse the imperial crown. He also wished to
consider the princes of Germany, and they were not represented
at the Frankfort Parliament.
46. Ernst Moritz Arndt. — Poet
and patriot, one of the members
of the Frankfort Parliament.
208 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [5 269.
268. English Jirst is usually rendered in German by crft
or 5ucrft»
(1) As an adjective^ Jirst is generally erft. For erft as an
adverb see § 185, 1, b.
Did you guess it the Jirst time ?
^afictt @ic c§ ba^ crftc Wlai crrotcit ?
But many that are first shall be last, and the last shall be first.
5(bcr Hide, bic ha finb bic crftctt, ttierben bic Ic^tcn, unb bic tc^tctt
ttcrbctt bic crftcn f cin. — 33 i b e I, 2Jiatt. 19, 30.
(2) As an adverb, Jirst (at Jirst) is guerft.
I saw it first, ^d) f^aht c§ jucrft gcfc^cn.
They thought first of the old caretaker.
Wan bat^tc sucrft an bcit alttn ^lufwartcr. — 2B i I b e n b r u d).
269. German Bcftcf|cn (beftatib, beftanbett, aux. ^aben) has
two very different meanings, depending upon the preposi-
tion with which it is used.
(1) When followed by au^ with the dative, befte^en means
to consist of.
The German Empire consists of twenty-six states.
^a§ ^cutfc^c 9?ctt^ bcftc^t an^ fcti^^uttbjWttnjig Staatcn.
This {crowd) consists of people of all ranks.
^tcfc (2Jlctt0c) bcftc^t an^ 9Kcttf(^cu boit attcn Statibcn. — §f inc.
(2) When followed by auf with the dative, befte^en means
to iyisist upon.
linsist upon my rights. ^6) Bcflc^c auf tncinctt JWcdjtcii.
But he insisted on seeing the Colonel. (§ 270, 1, Note.)
5lbcr cr bcftanb barauf, bcit ^crrii Obcrftcit ju f^ircr^ctt.
— grcqtag.
Note. — When followed by a direct object bcftel^cn means to with-
stand; of examinations, to pass.
He couldn't pass the examination.
(Sr l)at bic ^riifimg nidjt bcftc{)en fbnnen.
I am still alive and icill withstand him.
3c^ kbc nod) unb luiU tljn bcftdjcn. — Slrnbt.
Chap. 31.] SPECIAL SUBJUNCTIVES. 209
270. English to speak, to talk, is usually f^red^Ctl or rebctl*
They are generally interchangeable, except as shown below.
(1) The common word for to speak is fprec^en (fprac^,
gefproc^en, aux. !^aBett). It refers usually to short talks or
to the power of speech. So it could be used of babies or
parrots, where rebett could not.
At the age of one year the child began to talk.
^m %\itx t»ott einem ^a^rc ftttg btt§ ^iitb an gu f^jrct^ctt.
The mother speaks : To-morrow'' s a holiday.
^tc Wuittx f^rtj^t : Wlox^txx ift^§ l^ciertag.— @ d) to a b.
Note. — ®^rcd)cn is always used (followed by the accusative) where
English uses to see in the sense of visit with or speak to. Where Eng-
lish says : Is Mr. Brown at home? May I see him a moment? Ger-
man always says : 2)arf id) i^n etnen Slugenblicf fprec^en?
(2) Usually reben (reg., aux. ^aben) refers to the content
of a more extended talk or speech. It is a trifle more for-
mal than fiprec^en and often contains a suggestion of speechi-
fying.
He spoke {talked) for a whole hour. @r rcbctc cinc onnje (Stttttbc*
You speak with much deliberation.
®tc rcbctt mit utclcr Uftcrlcgung* — $? e f f i n g.
I cannot speak as I should like to.
^^ Itum nit^t rcbctt, njtc tj^ mo(i^tc» — ^thhtt
Note. — To make a speech is eine 9tebe fatten ; to speak to, in the
sense of address, is anrebeit with the accusative.
He made a Jine speech. @r ^at elite fc^bne 9?ebe gel^atten.
It is they ; I will speak to them.
@ie fmb'g ; ic^ WiU fie onreben. — @ (^ 1 H e r.
271. English strange is generally fcltfam or frcttlb*
(1) (Settfam means strange in the sense of odd, queer.
That's a strange bird. ^a§ tft citt fcttfaittcr BoQti.
How strangely this sign affects me !
235te fcltfam mirft btc§ 3^^c« <i»f w*^ cin ! — @ o e 1 1) e .
210 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§273.
(2) f^retnb means strange in the sense of foreign, unac-
quainted, a total stranger.
Excuse we, / am a stranger here.
SBcrsci^ctt @ic, x^ hm \)xtx frcmb.
How do you feel in the strange woods ?
aSic tt»iri)^)8 ctt(^ vx ben frcmbcit SBalbcrit ? — greiltgrat^.
Exercises.
272. (a) 1. In translating into German an English ex-
pression like could have, slioidd have, and so on, with what
kind of a form must we always start? 2. What is the
order of the other verb forms? 3. How is shoidd or
would iike always rendered in German ?
(b) 1. Explain the different uses of strange in German.
2. Write three sentences illustrating three uses of befte^ett.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. iBer juerft
fommt, ma^It ^Uerft. (First come, first served; i.e. his corn
is first ground.) 2. Qii) m5d)te i^n gem etnen ^lugenblicf
fprecf)ett. 3. (Bit fatten barauf befte^en foden. 4. SBir
ptten un6 nic^t beffer amltfieren fdnnen. 5. (5g ift bo(^
fettfam, ha^ (Sie bte[e^ (S^'amen tttdjt beftel)en !onnten.
6. !^er erfte ®(f)ii(er, ber ferttg ift, barf fprerf^en.
273. (a) 1. That is a strange way to pronounce that
word. 2. She insists upon it that you ought to have
spoken louder. 3. I should like to pronounce that word
so, but it is quite strange to me. 4. Then I insist
upon it that you couldn't have pronounced it right at first.
5. You ought to have punished the first one who spoke.
6. He talked a whole hour without saying anything; all
his speech was only flattery.
(b) 1. I should like to see Mr. Brown ; is he here
(§ 17, 2) ? 2. She insists [upon it] that we couldn't have
Chap. 31.]
SPECIAL SUBJUNCTIVES.
211
passed an examination that consisted of ten questions.
3. That is a strange sentence ; would you like to translate
it? 4. At first he insisted that he wouldn't like to
speak ; then he made a long
speech. 5. If you would
like to speak German well,
you ought to talk as much
as you can. 6. You ought
to have had a book that
consisted of [a great]
many exercises.
(c) The First German
Parliament. — 1. It seems
strange to us that the first
German Parliament took
place only about sixty years
ago. 2. It consisted of
many learned men, who
ought not to have talked
so much. 3. They
couldn't have accomplished
(teiften) anything without
first winning [over] the
princes. 4. But they
insisted on holding firmly
to (an) their ideas and continued making speeches.
5. It is not strange that Bismarck, who would have liked
to see a united Germany, afterward made his famous re-
mark. 6. He said the unification of Germany was not
a question which could be solved with speeches, but with
blood and iron.
47. LuDwiG Uhland. — One of Ger-
many's best-known and most
loved poets, a member of the
Frankfort Parliament.
CHAPTER XXXII.
REVIEW.
Stoat. 5(ttcrbm0i§*
274. The English concessive phrases it is true, to be sure,
may be rendered in German by ^toat, or atterbing^« These
are usually interchangeable, but as an independent word,
answering a question or statement, only attetbtngS can be
used for to be sure. StOClt is never used alone.
Why, to he sure I 9?nit, aflcrbttig^ !
IVs true he was sick, hut still he came.
@r mar jttiar (attcrbitioiS) fraitf, o6cr cr ift borfi gctommen.
To he S2ire I know her. 5tttcrbing^ fcitif it^ fie. — ^ r e I) t a g.
Ifs true I know much, hut I should like to know everything.
Stottv ttJcij? id) titcJ, bor^ m'6d)V \^ aUc^ wiffcn. — @ o c t ^ c.
Exercises.
275. (rt) 1. Make an outline table of the subjunctives
treated in the last three chapters. 2. Show by transla-
tions that the use of the subjunctive is similar in both
languages, except in indirect discourse. 3. Give the
order of the parts of the verb in the German translation of
He could have done it. 4. What is the order when the
sentence is put into a subordinate clause ?
(b) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. 5?un, allcr*
bings! 2. 3tDar \)(xttt id) e§ tun fotten, aber id) fonntc
nicl)t. 3. 9^?atUrUc() tuiirbe id) nirf)t barauf beftel)en, menn
id) ntc^t red)t l)dtte. 4. gmar iDeig id) tiel, bod) m5c^t' id)
a((e§ miffen. 5. (g^ njilrbe ent|d)ieben beffer fitngen, menu
212
Chap. 32.] REVIEW, 213
(Ste lauter f^jrac^en. 6. §aben @ie je etnen fo fett[amen
^rtef er^alten?
276. (a) 1. If you had spoken like that (fo) before, we
should have thought that it was decidedly impolite. 2. I
should like to see the [Mr.] professor, if he will receive
me before he goes out. 3. It's true he had no reason to
speak, yet he insisted on talking a whole hour. 4. After
the teacher had showed us how we could have translated
the sentence, we were of course ready to try the next one.
5. Wherever Mary went, the lamb went along. 6. I should
like to see those newspapers you just received ; please pass
them to me.
(h) 1. After they had decided to pass the summer in
Europe, they ought not to have talked about it so much.
2. I should like to follow this way along the river past the
wood. 3. After he had been so well received, he ought
not to have insisted on speaking first. 4; It's true the
examination which we could not pass could not have con-
sisted of harder questions. 5. He would like to hear the
first way you ever pronounced that word. 6. She said
that the days passed very slowly before she met those
interesting strangers.
(c) 1. It's true she spoke as if the time passed slowly,
but she had no reason to say so ():i(x^). 2. I could have
passed the examination, if the teacher had not asked so
many hard questions. 3. Did you ever see an exercise
that consisted of such hard sentences ? 4. We should
like to see Miss Smith, but she may decide not to receive
us till (§ 185, 1, h) after supper. 5. The time passed so
slowly that it seemed as if he would speak forever.
6. The boy said that he hadn't translated the sentence
before, because so many words were strange to him.
CHAPTER XXXIII.
REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I-VIII.
3\smavd unb bas Deutfd?e Ketd?.
277. ^i^marcf, her in feinen D^eben bie :Deutf(fien gem aU
:53eifpiet anfii^rte, fagte eitimat: „^ir T)eutfi^en finb mie
^ .JBKS;'
-iJaLte^ '"^<]V^HBHk^
J
F ^i^:*-.fi
bj
r
■-^0-
'
tnM
*^
<,S«IMW«»>'
'xMKd
J
^n
^^^^^^pppijiiiy™^*^
48. Statue of Young Bismarck at the Rudelsburg.
ein (5^e)3aar. Senn a(te« ru^ig unb ftitt ift, janft man fic^
n)o^( ein ttjentg ; n)enn aber ein 3'?arf)bar fid) einmifdjt, fatten
aJiann unb grau Dereint iiber i()n l)er." ^Jlod) Dor ber 4Be*
214
Chap. 33.] REVIEW. 215
gritttbuncj be^ je^tgen T)eut[(^en 9f^et(^§ tuar ^i^mar(f !(ug
genug, btefe Xatfac^e ^u erfennett unb gu benu^en, um bie
beutfc^en (Staaten ^u t)ereintgen.
T)ie gro^e 3}?acf)t, bie t^m ^ontg Sil^elm gegeben ^tte,
gebraud^te er, um ba^ ipreu^ifdje §eer ju ftdrfen, !l)ann bet'-
brangte er Sfterreid) au^ bem beutfc^en :Q3unbe (1866) unb im
Qa^xt 18*10 — al^ bie !l)eutfcf)en genitgenb geritftet Waxen —
txat er t)or ben !Dro^uugeu ber grau^ofen ui^t ^uritcf, fo ha^
granfreic^ ben ^rieg erftiirte. 9^orbbeutf(^e unb (Sitbbeutfc^e
tjereinten fic^ gegen htn gemeinfanten geinb, unb, nac^bem fie
bie grau^ofen befiegt i)atttn, Dereinigten fie fid) pm neuen
!l)eutfc^en D^eid).
Notes.
278. Historical Note. — In 1861 Fredeiick William IV died
and was succeeded by his brother William. The new king tried
to increase the strength and efficiency of the army, but his reforms
were unpopular, the Prussian House of Representatives voting
against them 308 to 11. William then made Otto von Bismarck
prime minister, and together they worked grimly for the unifica-
tion of Germany under Prussia's leadership. After strengthening
the army — against the determined opposition of a people who
hated him — Bismarck put it to excellent use against Denmark,
Austria, and finally France. Bismarck came out of these success-
ful wars the idol of the German people, the man of blood and iron
who had welded Germany into an Empire, after the people them-
selves had failed.
Exercises.
279. (a) 1. Apply the General Principle for Order (§ 37,
Note) to the cases of word order treated in Chapters I, II,
and III. 2. Do the same for Chapters V, VI, and VII.
3. Find in § 277 illustrations of inverted order, transposed
order, position of nic^t, and position of objects.
216 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§280.
(b) 1. Put the sentence, I told my little sister a long story
several hours ago, into the inverted order, writing it in three
ways. 2. Write the same sentence twice in the normal
order: (1) to emphasize what was told to the sister, and
(2) to emphasize to whom the story was told. 3. Trans-
late the sentence, You arenH working very hard to-day, and
then put it into the proper order following. It seems to me that.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. (Stuttbettfang
l^abe \6) auf bid^ getmrtet! 2. ^ein SO^enfc^ t)erftel)t, \oa^
(Ste ba fragen. 3. ^a, eben; ba^ f)ab' id) ^i)ntn ge[agt.
4. (g^ fd((t mir gar nic^t ein, ba^ 4Buc^ gu ^o(en. 5. SSte
nennen @te bie^S auf beutfd)? 6. 5lber h)ie laxm man ba«
toiffen?
280. (a) 1. Three weeks ago she wasn't married, so far
as I know. 2. At any rate they said that her name was
still Schmidt, and we all called her Miss then. 3. For
years we looked for a comfortable house in which we could
live in peace. 4. I asked for a gray hat, but the man
didn't get me the one I wished, but a brown one. 5. Then
I told him that I could not wait for him any longer, but
would get the hat another time. 6. And then (§ 17, 1)
the man got angry and said he couldn't help it.
(6) 1. What are you thinking of (§ 41, 1, Note) to ask
such a question, when you ought to get a dictionary and
look it up yourself! 2. One never knows how one
should call people who have been married several times.
3. Sometimes I can't help wishing that we lived in a
bigger house. 4. As you had such a good time, don't
you want to sit down and tell us about it? 5. He can
ask such strange questions that no human being can
answer them. 6. That was a long time ago, and since
that time 1 have never thought of those days.
Chap. 33.]
REVIEW,
217
49. Bismarck, the Iron Chancellor.
(c) A Visit. — '* Come in and sit down ; I am glad that
you are here again."
" Thank you ! May I ask you about Mr. Miiller, who
lives with you ? "
" Certainly, ask as many questions as you want to."
" Some time ago that man who lives here with you
218 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§280.
asked me for my German grammar. Now I wish it again.
I have asked him three times why I have to wait so long
for it. Will you please look for it in his room ? ''
" No, it is not there. Pm very sorry.''
" Thank you very much."
" You're very welcome."
" May I ask you what time it is ? "
" Certainly, it is quarter to five. Don't you want to wait
for your friend ? "
^' No, thank you ! I shouldn't think of (§ 41, 1, Note)
waiting longer for him. I can get the grammar another
time."
CHAPTER XXXIV.
REVIEW OF CHAPTERS IX-XVI.
Katfer IDtll^elm ber ^rof e» .
281. m^ ^aifer mi^dm ber (grfte tm ^a^xt 1871 au«
bem fran^ofif^en ^>iege ^uru(f!ef)rte, ftanb er fc^on in fetnem
50. Monument to Emperor William I at Coblentz. — On the point
where the Moselle flows into the Rhine.
t)terunbftebjtgften ^eben^ja^re. !Da erfanb fitr t^n ba§ 3SoI!
ben 9^amen „§e(bengreig." ^en ritfttgen, frdftigen ^aifer
cirgerte bie^; er ^t nie ^ugeben tDoIIen, ha^ er alt fet.
219
220 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§283.
„3Ba§ ^abe irf) \)a er^d^ten fjUvtn? Sa« woikn benn btc
Seute mtt i^rem §elbengreife ?" f ragte er. „Um ©elbengrei^
^u fein, mu§ man boc^ t)or alien ^Dingen etn @reig fein, unb
ba« bin tc^ noc^ (ange nic^t." Unb \>a^ er n)ir!ad) nidjt ait
toav getgt fic^ barin, ha^ er noc^ fiebae^n .ga^re itUt unb
regterte.
Notes.
282. Historical Note. — William I, though unpopular early in
his reign, was, as founder of the new German Empire, much
admired and loved. Memorials to him are found all over Ger-
many, usually flanked by statues of Bismarck and Moltke. Each
of these three, the king, the statesman, and the general, was indis-
pensable in building the new empire. Later, the old Emperor
used to appear every day about one o'clock at the corner window
of the old palace, when the guard, tie 2[Ba(J)e, marched by. People
came in crowds to see him. When he became feeble his family
tried to persuade him not to stand at the window, but he insisted
with characteristic energy and wit : " I must do it ; it says in
Baedeker [a well-known guide book] that I am to be seen here."
He died March 9, in 1888, and was succeeded by his son. Kaiser
Friedrich III [so called because he was King Friedrich III of
Prussia, not because he was the third Emperor Friedrich.] After
a brief reign of ninety-nine days, the popular Friedrich III, known
to the people as „Unfcr %xii}/' died, and the present Kaiser, Wil-
helm II, came to the throne.
Exercises.
283. (a) 1. The auxiliary always precedes "two infini-
tives." Then what is the difference between the position
of the auxiliary with " two infinitives " in independent sen-
tences and in subordinate clauses ? 2. Apply the General
Principle for Order (§ 37, Note) to the position of prepo-
sitional phrases. Do they differ in position from adverbs ?
3. Find in § 281 illustrations of modals in simple and
compound tenses, of " two infinitives " with other verbs, of
Chap. 34.] REVIEW. 221
prepositions with the dative, with the accusative, and with
dative or accusative.
(6) 1. Translate the sentence, He JiasnH been able to do
it to-day, and then put it into the proper order after / know
that. 2. What is the difference between ^a^ ^'inb lief
in ba« 3ttttmer, and !t)a^ ^inb lief in bem ^tmmer.
3. What is the difference between ®e^en ^k in hit @C^u(e?
and @e^en <Bxt gnr @rf)n(e ? (§ 121, Note). 4. Between
SoUen k>it ba fein ? and SBerben (Sie ba fein ?
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. Sa§ \>a^ fein;
i^a^ barfft bu nic^t tun. 2. 3<m (Sommer ge^e ic^ gem
o()ne ^od aber mit btden (Sttefeln f^ajieren. 3. SBoIten
iDir fe^en, n)a§ e^ tm anbern 3^^^^^ 9^^^? '^- ^^^
ganjen 3)2orgen l)abe i^ fe()en tuollen, ob id^ mol^t unter
biefen ^(umen ein 3$ei(d)en finben !onnte. 5. Serben xvxx
in fo !urj;er ^tit eine fo (ange 5lufgabe fc^retben ntiiffen?
6. Qti^t ^abe id) miv einen ^Injug au^ (Seibe mad)en laffen.
284. (a) 1. Haven't you had that new suit made yet?
2. Yes, I had it made (§ 128, 1) several weeks ago.
3. Have you met my brother? I am sure you will like
him. 4. After supper we shall have to look for all the
balls we lost while (§ 95, 2) playing. 5. There are more
mistakes in this exercise than you have ever made before.
6. In summer when I can go to school through the wood,
I like it better than in winter, when the ways are cov-
ered with snow.
(b) 1. May I ask you when you can do this for me?
2. When I saw him sitting by the window, I ought to have
gone across the street to speak with him. 3. Beside an
old tree in the valley there is a beautiful little house with
many windows which look toward the east. 4. When
you saw the pupils going home, why didn't you go home,
222
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
[§284.
51. Count von Moltke. — The military genius who guided Emperor
William's campaigns.
too ? 5. There is no place where I should like to live so
well as in that pretty house by the lake. 6. I am really
more interested in such things than my sister, but she raves
(fcf)tparmen) about them more than I.
Chap. 34.] BE VIEW. 223
(c) In the Garden. — " Good morning ! May I come into
your garden and sit down on this bench under your shady
oak tree ? "
" Yes, please [do]. There is njothing that I should like
better than to talk with you."
"Were you able to get everything you wished at the
market in the city?"
" In this weather I did not want to go to town. I didn't
like all those clouds. What did you see in town ? "
"I had to stay at home, too. Two days ago my uncle
came with my little cousin whom I haven't been able to
visit since last summer."
" Is that the one I met (§ 171, 2, Note) two years ago,
the little one with brown hair ? "
" Yes, when I have nothing else to do, I am teaching him
to play ball. We have a fine time together."
" I should like to see him again. Won't you bring him
along next time you come ? "
" Gladly ! But I fear I shall have to be going now. I
ought to have gone home before, but it looked so pleasant
here in the garden."
"Good-by. Give your cousin my regards (gritgen @ie
3^ren SSetter t)on mir). And come again soon."
" Thank you. 5luf Steberfef)en !"
CHAPTER XXXV.
REVIEW OF CHAPTERS XVII-XXIV.
Deutfd}e IPiffenfd^aft.
285. 3luf ben beutfc^en UniDerfitciten gtbt e^ feinen 3^^^9'
5tnftatt bag man bte 3$or(efungen regelmdgtg befu(f)en mu§,
ftnbiert man fo Diet
ober fo tt)enig, n^ie
man will (5^ murbe
einmat bariiber ge*
tia^t, bag bie galfte
ber 'Stnbenten nic^t^
tange; ba l)at :^i^=
marcf ftolj an^geru-
fen : „Qa, aber e^ ift
ber anbern ^dlfte ge^
hmgen, bte SBelt ju
be^errfdjen."
9^atur(id) barf man
bte« ntd)t 3U trdrtlid)
nel)men, aber and)
ol)ne e« gan;; njdrttic^
3U faffen, mng man
bod) jugeben, bag et-
xoa^ 35}al)re^ barin
liegt, benn in ber
SBiffenfd)aft finb bte
T)tnt\^tn ben meiften anberen 335(!ern iiberlegen. 'Der
^rei^ ber berii()mten beutfc^en ®e(el)rten umfagt 9^amen
224
52. Roentgen. — The discoverer of the
X-ray.
Chap. 35.] REVIEW. 225
H)te ^ant, ?^tc^te, ©egef, ®^o)3en^auer, SJiotnmfett, (^ritnttt;
^eltn^ol^, tod), unb Df^dntgen.
Notes.
286. Historical Note. — German scholars and scientists have
long been famous, and — since the establishment of the Empire,
and especially since the accession of the present Emperor — schol-
arship and science have been applied to the industrial world with
astounding results. In the realm of theoretical and applied science
the Germans have become the teachers of the world, drawing to
their universities students from every land.
Exercises.
287. (a) 1. Give full synopses of the verbs in the fol-
lowing sentences : ^d) uberfe^e ba^ ^uc^, 3rf) fe^e metnen
greunb iiber, and ^^ fe^e metnen greunb iiber ben g(ug.
2. Make an outline table by moods and tenses, showing all
the differences between simple verbs and verbs w4th com-
mon prefixes. 3. Make an outline table showing the
commonest German renderings of the English verbal in ing.
4. Find in § 285 examples of the use of separable verbs,
inseparable verbs, common prefixes, ^aben and fetn as a.ix-
iliaries, English verbals translated by infinitives and by
clauses.
(6) 1. Translate : He has driven to toivn, and He has
driven badly. Explain. 2. Translate @r fa^ mtc^ !om=
men, two ways in English. Do both ways mean the
same thing? 3. Translate, He came without seeing me,
and He came without my seeing him. Explain the transla-
tions of the verbals.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. (Sie fagen, e§
mac^t nid)tg au^ ! ^^la, ba^ fommt barauf an! 2. (gobalb
ic^ eingefrf)tafen mar, niac^te ic^ gtetc^ H)ieber auf. 3. ^c^
bin ben beiben iiberad gefolgt. 4. (^(auben (Ste, ba^ ber
226
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
[§ 288.
(Ba^ rid^ttg tft? 5. 5lnftatt fortgufa^ren ju uberfe^en,
{)brte er auf, 6. (5^ tft mir gelungen, ungefd^r eine f|albe
(Seite 3U iiberfe^en, o^ne einen getter gu mac^en.
288. (a) 1. You might have translated the whole exer-
cise right, if you hadn't misunderstood. 2. He looked
hither and thither for his
watch, but it was (§ 206,
2) under a newspaper on
the table. 3. How long
will it take if we take a
carriage ? 4. I haven't
seen the boys playing
football; they may have
stopped playing before
we arrived. 5. If you
wished me to go and or-
der dinner, instead of con-
tinuing to play [the]
piano, why didn't you tell
me so (e^)? 6. Find-
ing the children playing
in the garden, I succeeded
in making them stop with-
out their getting angry.
(6) 1. I have followed
you hither and thither for
a whole hour, without being able to speak a word with you.
2. I think there is more (§ 30, 2) room here; you can
sit down without disturbing us. 3. Seeing the boys
sitting at the desk without doing anything, I told them to
begin writing their exercises. 4. They continued writ-
ing for half an hour ; I thought it would take longer before
they were ready. 5. When we met the two brothers,
53. MoMMSEN. — One of Germany's
greatest historians.
Chap. 35.] :REVIEW, 227
they entertained us a long time by telling all kinds of (alter*
lei) funny stories. 6. Hearing the children making such
a noise, instead of continuing to work without their noticing
you, you ought to have ordered them to stop.
(c) In the Parlor. — " Do you know those two men I met
at [the] Mtillers' yesterday ? Well, I think I see them com-
ing. Will you help me entertain them ? "
"Instead of receiving them like this (fo), we ought to
stop sewing and change our clothes. Don't you think so ?
We can let them wait for us."
"Oh, no! Then they will hear us running hither and
thither trying to get ready. I think we shall succeed in
entertaining them very well."
" May I keep on (continue) sewing ? Vm about to finish
this pattern, and it won't take long. Of course, if you order
me to stop, I will (fo in' i^'^)" ^
"Oh, no, only I wish you'd make a little room on the
sofa. I don't like to see your things lying there, for you
know it is the seat of honor."
"Of course not. You are right, as always. Well, now
everything is in order, and we are ready to receive the
gentlemen.''
CHAPTER XXXVI.
REVIEW OF CHAPTERS XXV-XXXII.
Deutfd?er ^anbeL
289. (geit ber ^egritnbung beg !Deutfd)eti D^etc^eg ^aben
bie ^Deutfc^en ©rogeg geletftet. @te mdc^ten ben §anbe(
unb 3Ser!e^r ber Sett be^errfc^en. (Sie glauben, bag i^nen
54. The Docks at Hamburg.
bieg gelingen tann, njenn fie in ber ^^^iiftt'ic Dertuerten, \va^
fie auf ber Unit)erfitot lernen. Unb fie fdnnten in ber Zat
nid)t§ ^effereg tun; mon fie^t in faft jebem Sanbe bie be*
fannte 3J?ar!e " made in Germany."
228
Chap. 36.] REVIEW, 229
!iDer ^alaft be^ (Suttan^ p ^onftantmopel njtrb burc^
beutfc^e (Sleftri^itat erleut^tet, unb ^riiden unb ^ifenba^nen
in ^(einafien unb @ubameri!a n)erben t)on beutfc^en ®efe((*
f(^aften erbaut. T)te @cf|tffe be^ 9^orbbeutfc^en !2(ot)b§, unb
ber @amburg*3lmerifa=Sinte, ber beiben grCgten ^antpfer-
linten ber Sett, tragen beutfc^e gabnfate in alle Seltteile,
Unb ba^ a((eg gef(f)ie^t erft, feit bie beutfc^en <Btaattn \id) ^um
beutfc^en ^tid) jufammengefc^foffen ^aben.
Notes.
290. Historical Note. — The development of German industry
and commerce is little short of marvelous. The capital, Berlin,
has become the leading industrial center of Europe, while in
foreign commerce — imports and exports — Germany excels the
United States. The latest available figures show Germany's com-
merce to be worth four billions ($4,000,000,000) a year, while that
of the United States is worth about three and a quarter billions
($3,250,000,000).
Exercises.
291. (a) 1. Write short sentences illustrating all the
German equivalents for English that. 2. What impresses
you as the most difficult peculiarity of German adjectives ?
Illustrate it in a sentence. 3. Outline the chief dif-
ferences between German and English in their use of
(1) moods and (2) tenses. 4. Find in § 289 illustrations
of (1) both kinds of conjunctions, (2) different adjective
peculiarities, and (3) uses of the subjunctive.
(6) 1. Translate, The boy I mean is not the one you know,
and comment on the insertion of German words not needed
in English. 2. Write three German sentences, seeing
how many infinitive forms you can put at the end, like
(Bit ptten i^n nic^t fingen lernen faff en f often. 3. After
which, of the two sentences, §eute giug ic^ in bie Btaht and
230
GERMAN COMPOSITION,
[§ 292.
geute bin ic^ in bie (Stabt gegangen, do you expect me to go
on and tell what I did in the city ? Explain.
(c) Conversational Idioms. Memorize: 1. ^a^ finb bie
fc^bnften ^(umen, bie id) je gefe^en ^be. 2. ^^e fleigiger
tDir arbeiten, befto nte^r (ernen n)ir ; ba^ mitffen <Bk ^ugeben.
3. (Bit fjahtn tttoa^ SBei^e^ in bie Za\(i}t geftedt; reic^en
55. The Suspended Tramway at Barmen-Elberfeld. — One of
Germany's engineering triumphs.
(^ie'S ntir. 4. ^r ^attt onf a((ent befte!)en fotten, rra^ er
befc^Ioffen t)atte. 5. 1)er ^e^rer ^ag^tc, er ^)abe perft ge*
bac^t, bag ber (Safe ric^tig fei. 6. 9^un, ba^ l^atten Bit
frii^er tun fdnnen.
292. (a) 1. After he had decided to pass the summer in
Berlin, he ought to have insisted on going there (§ 149, 1).
Chap. 36.]
REVIEW.
231
2. Did it ever occur to you that you might not pass the
examination? 3. We have been here all summer; but
next year we shall pass in Germany. 4. Did you ever
see a girl who could speak so fast ? 5. She insisted that
there was no reason why she should receive her oldest friends
first. 6. Well, isn't that the best way to decide it ?
56. A German Warship in the Kiel Canal. — This canal connects the
North Sea and the Baltic, making it unnecessary for German ships
to sail around Denmark.
(&) 1. Those are not the handkerchiefs I ordered ; mine
were not so large as these. 2. There was something
strange in the speech he made, but of course we had to
agree that it was good. 3. You ought to have put your
book on the table where the lamp was ; then you could have
continued your story. 4. He spoke as if he didn't know
232 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§292.
a shorter way through, the wood. 5. After we had all
decided that there was no reason why he should speak, he
insisted on making a speech. 6. It is true he was a good
speaker, but his speech consisted of nothing but philosophy
and we did not like it very well.
(c) Before the Tennis. — " What's the matter ? I've been
standing here a whole hour. Why didn't you come before ? "
" I should think it would have occurred to you that I
might be late. Did you ever come the long way past the
old school ? "
" It's true I never came that way, but that is no reason
why I should have to wait for you forever. Nej^t time I
won't wait."
" Oh, yes, you will (§ 237, 1) ! It seems strange to me
that you should be so angry at me the first time I am late.
You speak as if you had never done anything bad yourself."
" Well, I agree that I did not speak courteously at first,
but I was tired, and I didn't like the way you kept me
waiting (let me wait)."
" I agree with you that I ought to have come a shorter
way, but half an hour pS-ssed before I noticed how late it
was. Excuse me this time and I'll never do it again."
*' All right ! Shall we begin our game ? "
PART IL
PART II.
CHAPTER I.
COMPOSITION OF LETTERS.
293. Introduction. — As to content^ German letters are
like English : one writes what one wishes to say. As
to form^ the Germans, like the Americans, break all
rules for date, address, and ending, in letters to inti-
mate friends. But when writing to acquaintances, and
especially to strangers, one should follow the rules.
Below are given the commonest forms of dating,
addressing, and closing. They range from the most
intimate to the most formal. Illustrations of these
styles may be seen in the German letters on pages 236,
238, and 241. The one on page 236 is intimate ; on
page 238, friendly ; on page 241, business. Germans
usually write the German script, although they can
all read English script.
Note. — Many American students have found pleasure and profit
in corresponding with German students. Those who wish to exchange
letters in this way (each writing in the language of the other, or each
using his native tongue) can make arrangements by having their
teachers write to Professor Dr. Martin Hartmann, Fechnerstr. 6,
Leipzig, Germany. The conditions under which the correspondence
is arranged are contained in the " Rules for Scholars' International
Correspondence," copies of which may be had gratis from AUyn and
Bacon, Boston, New York, or Chicago.
294. The Date. — German dates always follow the
order: day, month, year. §attnot)er, 14. 2. 1912; ^txlxn,
13. IV. 1918; :Dre^ben, b. 18. SJlai 1914; (E^icago, ben It.
235
236 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§294.
/
^l^A^.
/^^&^€^ -^^^^f^***^^-;
>,^>4»'*i*-f&^t^^*-r^i^^<^*v^ ua^^^^^.^'P^^^^^^
Chap. 1.] LETTER WBITING. 237
3an. 1915; ^o^ton, ben 23ften S^otJ. 1916, Germans very
rarely write the day of the week, nor do they usually
spell the name of the month in full.
295. The Address. — The common address between
friends is: li^ieber ^axi, ^iebe 5tnna, more rarely, Wtxxi
Ueber or 3J?eine (tebe. Then follow, increasing in for-
mality : i^teber §err :53raun ! Steber §err ^oftor! (always
address a German by his title); @e^r geel)rter §err
(Scf)mibt (gee^rter alone is bad form); (Se^r gee^rte gna*
btge grau! @e^r gee^rte grau ^rofeffor! (to the wife of
a professor); (Se^r gee^rter §err! (the commonest form
of address); 33ere^rter §err !Direftor! S^ere^rter ^err!
(very respectful).
In business letters it is sufficient to write the name of
the person or firm, followed on the same line by in and
the name of the city. Then comes the body of the
letter without the equivalent of our Dear Sir:
mm^tn, 15. 6. 1914.
§errn 51. SS^ertf)eim in Berlin!
Qn :^eanttt)ortung Q^xt^ tperten @c^retben^ t)oni 12. b. Wl*
(§ 365) teile id) 3*^nen ergebenft mit, ba§, etc.
goc^ac^tung^tioK
296. The Close. — There are many wai/s of closing a
letter. For intimate friends, '^etn or !Deine suffices;
for less intimate friends, -3^r or 3^re; for acquain-
tances, §orf)ac^tung^t)o((, ^oi^ac^tung^tJoK unb ergebenft,
and Wlit tjorjuglidjer goc^ac^tung form a series ranging
from respectful to very respectful. No comma or other
238 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§296.
AaM^^ oi,/9zuc. JU^y^/i
J^\^^i^t.^-^e.^e^ '
..t^ ^,.C^l.u,,^^^€^<c..^ U-t^ JjfLoijLP ^^tZ^^a. ^^^^^^
Chap. 1.] LETTER WRITING. 239
punctuation follows these words, even though the name
is written on the line below.
Note. — Germans rarely send love ; instead they prefer greetings,
@rii^e. In signing a letter Your loving son, the participle in German
must have an object : 2)etn 2)icf) tiebenber @oI)n. In a letter the
singular 2)u, 2)ettt, S)i(f), and the plural 3^r, @uer, and @U(i), must
always be written with a capital, as well as the formal @ie and 3^r,
297. Summary. — In writing to intimate friends the
form makes little difference, except that all pronouns
of the second person must be capitalized. With ac-
quaintances and strangers, when in doubt about the
form, use the following :
^etD^or!, b. 10. Oft, 1917.
@e^r gee^rter §err!
§oc^ad)tung^t)o(l
298. The Envelope. — - On the envelope the word (5ln)
§erm, grau, or grciutein is usually written above and a
bit to the '3ft of the name. Always give titles, but
they may be abbreviated with the exception of §errn,
grau, and grciulein: Qtxxn ^xol ^r. griebric^ ^(uge,
§errn ©e^eimrat *^rof. ^r. (grtc^ ©c^mtbt. Germans
usually underscore the name of the city, and write the
street followed by the number on the line below,
instead of using the opposite English arrangement.
»gerrn ©e^eimrat
^erttn SS. 30.
3(ug^burger ®tr. 39".
240 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§299.
In the upper left-hand corner, or on the back of the
envelope, may be put the writer's name and address
preceded by the letters 5(bf. for ber 2lbfenber (sender}.
In large cities the name of the subdivision and sub-
station are usually given. Thus the address above
means that Dr. Lenz lives near Substation " 30 " of
Subdivision " West," in Berlin. Sometimes the num-
ber of the story is added as a little Roman exponent
to the street number, 45" and 68"^ meaning up two
and three flights respectively ("second" or "third
flat").
299. The Street. — German street names deserve special
attention, although German use is far from uniform. ^
At the corners of Liitzow and Potsdamer streets in
Berlin are four signs ; two read Sii^ott) ®tr. and two
read )^ti^ott)ftr. This same condition is true on count-
less corners in nearly all large German cities, as the Ger-
mans seldom follow the rules consistently. The rules
are as follows : (1) When the name of a street is a single
noun, the word (Strafe or ^(a^ is united with it without
a hyphen : griebrid)ftra5e, 3[Bin)e(tnp(afe. (2) When the
name is a compound noun, its different parts are joined
by hyphens and it is also joined by a hyphen to the
word (Strafe or ^(a^, which is then written with a capi-
tal : a«artin=gut()er-@tra6e, S^tftoria^Suife^'ipia^. (S) When
the name is an adjective, the word (Strafe or "^iai^ is writ-
ten separate : J^eipjiger (Strage, ^otSbamer '^iai^. (4) But
when the adjective modifies a noun, the adjective is writ-
1 For discussions of street names, see Duden's " Orthographisches
Worterbuch," p. xi ; Wustmann's " Allerhand Sprachduinmheiten,"
pp. 176-182.
Chap. 1.] LETTER WRITING. 241
^..CC^C^^J^ ,
/
^^«^^ x^t>^ ^i^x^T^r^ yt^yt^ec^^t-e^?^ i^t<^^
''^^^'^'C^^i<Z<^A/OC€'^'t^^^
'^^
^. t^*^^jez^.<^^Ccc^ - i^^y^'4*.
ten separate, while noun and street are written as in
(1); 9^eue S^iinterfetbftraf^e. The approved abbreviation
for (Strafe is (Str., not @t., and for '^\^%, ^L
CHAPTER 11.
COMPOSITION OF WORDS.
300. Introduction. — German is the richest of all lan-
guages in compound words. Not only does it compound
many words which in English are written separate, as
bit §auptfarf)e, the main thing^ bie !^uftf(^tfffa^rt^afttenge*
o,^feIIfci^aft, the airship passage stock company^ and so on,
but it is particularly varied in its roots, prefixes, and
suffixes.
Germans are also fond of coining words for new ideas
out of German roots, prefixes, and suffixes, where Eng-
lish Anglicizes a foreign word. Sometimes this new
coinage is accepted by the people : ber gernf^red)er is as
common as ba^ ^l^elep^on, bte ga^rfarte is as common as
ba^ billet, ticket. Sometimes it is rejected: efforts to
introduce bit Xutife for bte (Sauce, sauce, and ba« SO^unb*
tuc^ for bie @ert)tette, napkin, seem to have failed. When
a foreign word insists on keeping its individuality, it
is often Germanized by force : ber 3^'^'^^^/ circus, bte
^e!«, cakes.
Roots.
301. Ablaut. — German roots often vary their vowel
sounds so that it is hard to identify the original root :
fcfiltegett, ba§ ^^U^, ber (Sc^tug; ber :53uttb, bte ^ittbe, ba«
^anb. This altering of the root vowel, called Ablaut,
is the most important change that can take place in a
root. English has it too ; sing, sang, sung ; swim, swam^
swum,
242
Chap. 2.] COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 243
Note. — Besides der Umlaut and der Ablaut, German has three
other convenient words, relating to the position of a vowel in a word
or syllable : der Anlaut, the beginning sound, der Inlaut, the middle
sound, and der Auslaut, the end sound, referring respectively to the
beginning, middle, and end of a word or a syllable. It is much shorter
to say that certain things are true of vowels "im Anlaut, im Inlaut,
or im Auslaut,^^ than " at the beginning of a word or syllable,'''' and
so on.
302. Derivation of Nouns from Verb Roots. — Nouns de-
rived from verb roots are usually of one of three kinds :
(1) an active object^ performing the action of the verb ;
(2) a passive object^ on which the action of the verb is
performed ; or (3) an abstract noun^ denoting the con-
dition or action of the verb.
(1) ^(x^ ^anb (binben), something that binds.
^er ^ogen (btegen), something that bends.
>Der g(u§ (fitejen), something that flows.
(2) !Der ^ruc^ (brec^en), something that is broken.
!Der ^unb (binben), something that is bound.
T)er ^ran! (trinfen), something that is drunk.
(3) !Der g(ug (fliegen), action or condition of flying.
!l)er ®ang (ge^en), action or condition of coino.
^tx Xrun! (trinfen), action or condition of drink-
303. Below are given the commonest verbal roots
from which nouns are derived by root changes (3(blaut) .
^tegen, to bend ; ber ^ogen, bow^ arch; bte ^u^t, bay.
53inbett, to bind; ber iBattb, bound volume; ba^ ^anb,
ribbon ; bte -53tnbe, bandage ; ber :^unb, bond^ union.
^rec^en, to break ; ber :^ru(^, breach.
244 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§303.
ginben, to find ; ber ^Viw!^, find, cache.
gUegen, to fly; ber ^inq, flight; ber gliigel, wing,
glie^en, to flow ; ber glug, river ; \ia^ glo^, ra/if.
(^thtn, to give ; bie @abe, ^^/i(; (ba^ @tft, poz807i).
©e^ett, to go ; ber ®ang, ^ai^, «^'a?A:.
©iegen, to pour ; ber (^^^ casting (of metal}.
@raben, to dig; ba^ @rab, grave; bie @rube, grotto; bie
®ruft, r;aM?^ ; ber ©raben, c?i^(?A.
@reifen, to grasp ; ber ®riff, handle.
.^Ungen, to sound; ber ^(ang, sound; bie £(ingel, bell.
Siegen, to lie; bie ^age, situation, the wag a thing lies.
OJ^effen, to measure ; bai5 Wa^, measure ; bie 9}?a§, (quart)
measure.
(Sc^iegen, ^o s^oof ; ber ^i^ug, s^o^; ber (Scf)o§, shoot, twig.
@d)(ageu, ^o stWA^e ; ber (2d)(ag, stroke ; bie (^c^tad^t, 5af?/6j.
(Sd)Iie§en, ^o shut; ^a^ (S^Io§, Zoc^; cas^/e; ber ^d)lu^,
end ; ber (Scl)Iitffe(, key.
©c^neiben, to cut ; ber (Sd)nitt, c^wf; ber ^d)ni^, slice.
(Set)en, ^o see ; bie @id)t, sight.
<Se^en, to set ; ber ^(x%f sentence.
©ingen, to sing ; ber (Sang, ber @efang, song.
iSi^en, to sit; ber (B\^, seat.
S^rec^en, to speak; bie (gprat^e, language; ber (Sprud),
saying ; ba^ @efprdd), conversation.
(Springen, <o spring ; ber (S^jrung, Zea/?.
(Ste()en, ^o s^aric? ; ber @tanb, standing ; bie (^tunbe, Aowr.
Xreiben, to drive ; ber !Xrieb, impulse.
Slrinfen, ^o c?Wn^; ber Xran! and ber Xrunf, (^Ww^.
SSerfen, to throw; ber Surf, the throw(ing').
SBiegen, (1-) to weigh, (2) to rock; (1) bie !ifi}age, scaZe;
ba« ®emid)t, weight; (2) bie Siege, cradle; bie
SBoge, ?^ai;e.
Chap. 2.] COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 245
3te^en, to draw; ber 3^9r train; feature; bte Qnd)t,
hreed(^ing^.
3tt»tngen, to compel ; ber 3^^^^9r compulsion.
Prefixes.
304. German prefixes may be divided into two classes,
verbal and general. The verbal prefixes may also be
classed as inseparable prefixes, which were treated in
Lesson XVII (p. 106), and separable, which were
treated in Lesson XVIII (p. 114). Of the general
prefixes the most important are : erj^, ge-, tnt^-, un-, ur-.
They are used chiefly with nouns.
(1) (5r3= (English arch-^ means leader^ chief; ber (Sr^-
bifc^of, archbishop ; ber (gr^^erjog, archduke ; ber ^r^litgner,
arch-liar ; ber ^r^f c^ettn, arrant hnave.
(2) @e= (no English equivalent) forms (a) collectives
out of noun stems, or (6) verbal nouns from verb stems.
(a) T)a^ (^ebirge, mountain chain (ber ^erg); bie @e*
•Britber, brothers (ber iBruber) ; ba^ @efteber, plumage (bie
geber) ; 'iia^ (^ejubel, jubilation (ber 3:ube() ; ba^ (^emauer,
t^aZ/s (bte ^Jlauer); bie @ef(f)tt)ifter, pi., brothers and sisters
(bie (Srf)tt)efter).
(5) Da§ @ebel(, barking (belteti); ba^ (Bthti, prayer
(beten); ber @eban!e, thought (benfen); "^a^ (^t\>\d)i, poem
(btcf)ten) ; ba^ ©e^eul, howling (f)eulen) ; ba^ ®e(dute, rm^-
m^ (tauten); ba^ @ef^en!, present (fc^enfen).
(8) Wl\\\(ty (English mis- or dis-) means wrong. It
has been treated with verbs in § 139. It is also used
regularly with nouns from which, together with their
verbal roots, adjectives are sometimes formed. Thus
we see also adjectives with the prefix tni^.
246 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§306.
!Dte SJitffetat, misdeed (bte Xat); bie 20^t§c\unft, envi/
(hit @unft, favor) ; miBQiinfttg, envious ; ba§ ajJigtrauen,
distrust (ba^ 23ertrauen); migtrautfc^, distrustful; bie
SO^ipanblung, 27^ usage; bag SJitgtjergniigen, displeasure
(bag ^ergniigen) ; Tni§t)ergnugt, displeased.
(4) Utt' (English zm- or m-, sometimes mis-') usually
reverses the meaning of a word : unanftdnbig, improper
(anftanbig) ; unarttg, naughty (arttg); unbequem, uncom-
fortable (bequem); unbeftimmt, indefinite (beftimmt); ber
Unban!, ingratitude (ber ^an!); unenblic^, infinite (enb*
Itc§); ber \Xn\\xin, nonsense (ber (Sinn); ber Unfriebe, dis-
cord (ber griebe); bie Ungebulb, impatience (bie ©ebulb);
ha^ Ungliid, misfortune (bag ©(lief),
(5) Ur- (no English equivalent) comes from the
Gothic us^ ur^ meaning out, and denotes origin or source.
It may also intensify the meaning of a word : Uralt, very
old (alt); bie Ural^ne, great-grandmother (bie 5l^ne); ur*
fomifrf), very funny (fontifc^) ; urplij^lic^, all of a sudden
(plo^(ic^); ber Urfprung, source (ber (Sprung); ha^ l\xm%
original or primitive people (bag 3SoIf) ; ber Uriualb, pri-
meval forest (ber ^a(b).
Suffixes.
305. A great many German words are formed by
adding suffixes to various roots. The most important
groups of wowds formed in this way are : (1) nouns,
(2) adjectives, and (3) verbs.
Derivation of Nouns by Suffix. — Nouns formed by suffix
may be divided into two classes : concrete and abstract.
306. The commonest suffixes by which concrete
nouns are formed are : c^en, (ein, er, in, and ting.
Chap. 2.] COMPOSITION OF WORDS, 247
(1) a^tn and Itin form neuter diminutives out of
other nouns : ba^ ^cium^en, little tree (ber ^aum) ; \>a^
(So'^nc^en, little son (ber (So^n); ba^ 3}?ab(i)en, Zz^j^Z^ ^zW
(bte SJ^agb); ba§ ^ac^tein, ^rooHe^ (ber ^a(^); t>a^ grau*
letn, Mss, Z^f^/g woman (bte grau); ba^ ^iic^tein, little
book (ba^ ^u^).
Note that the root vowel takes Umlaut when possible.
(2) (Ex forms masculine agents from
(«) Nouns : ber gletft^er, butcher (\>a^ S^^ifc^) ; bet
(partner, gardener (ber ©arten) ; ber 2:bpf er, potter (ber
(5) Verbs : ber gu'^rer, guide (fii^ren) ; ber Sefer,
reader (lefen); ber (g^reiber, clerk (fc^reiben).
Note that the root vowel usually takes Umlaut.
(3) ^n forms feminines from masculines : bte ^otttgtn,
queen (ber ^iitttg) ; bte Se^rerin, ladg teacher (ber !Oe!^rer) ;
bte SotDitt, lioness (ber ^ott)e).
(4) Sittg forms masculines with varying meaning from
(a) Nouns: ber (Blittftttttg, favorite (bie (SJuttft); ber
(gprogltttg, scion (ber 8pro6, sprout) ; ber !l)dutttlittg, hop-
o'-my-thumb (ber ^autrtett, thumb).
(5) Adjectives : ber gremblittg, stranger (fremb) ; ber
grit^Uttg, spring (fritJ)); ber ^iittgUttg, youth (iuttg).
(c) Verbs : ber ginbttttg, foundling (fttibett) ; ber Se^r-
littg, apprentice (le^reti): ber @auglittg, suckling (faugett).
((?) Numerals: ber (grftUttg, first fruits (erft); ber
3tt)i(ItTtg, twin (^ttJet); ber !5)ri((tttg, triplet (bret)»
Note that the root vowel takes Umlaut when possible.
248 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§307.
307. The commonest suffixes by which abstract nouns
are formed are : e, ei, \)txt, !ett, f(f)aft, and ung.
(1) a forms abstract feminines from
(a) Adjectives : bte §arte, hardness, cruelty (^art) ;
bie @rd§e, size (grog); bie Sixnge, Zer^^^A (lang).
(h) Verb Roots : bie ^xiit, request (bitten); bie Siebe,
love (lieben); bie Sitge, lie (liigen).
Note that the root vowel takes Umlaut when possible.
(2) (St forms feminines of various meanings — many
have become concrete — from
(a) Nouns: bie :53dcferei, bakery (ber Q3acfer); bie
gifdjerei, fishery (ber gifc^er); \ixt (gflaoerei, slavery (ber
e!Iat)e).
(5) Verbs : bie 9^e(f erei, chaffing (neden, to tease') ; bie
^(auberei, chattering (p(aubern) ; bie (S(^meid)elei, flattery
(fc^meic^etn).
(3) §eit forms abstract feminines from
{a) Nouns : bie ®ottI)eit, godhead (ber @ott) ; bie ^inb*
^eit, childhood (ba^ ^inb); bie 3JZenfcf)^eit, humanity (ber
mtxx\^).
(b) Adjectives : bie ^Dumm^eit, stupidity (bumm) ; bie
^in^eit, unity (ein); bie SKei^^eit, wisdom (iveife).
(4) ^eit forms abstract feminines from adjectives
which have endings like ig, lid), fant, bar, etc. : bie ^Dan!*
barfeit, gratitude (banfbar); bie greunblid)!eit, kindness
(freunblic^); bie '^Vi{'b\(xmit\i, patience (bulbfam).
(5) @d)aft forms abstract feminines, chiefly from
nouns denoting persons : bie :59iirgerf^aft, citizens (ber
Chap. 2.] COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 249
^itrger) ; bie ^Dienerfc^aft, servants (ber !l)iener) ; bie ^nec^t*
fd)aft, serfdom (ber ^nec^t).
(6) Ung forms abstract feminines, chiefly from verbs :
bie (gr^ci^Iung, stori/ (erja^ten) ; bie ^(eibung, clothing
(!(eiben); bie Qtidjuun^, drawing (jeic^nen).
308. Derivation of Adjectives by Suffix. — The com-
monest sufifixes by which adjectives are formed are :
bar, en, l^aft, ig, x\ii), (ic^, and fam.
(1) ^ar forms adjectives from
(a) Nouns : battfbar, grateful (ber X)an!) ; e^rbar, hon-
orable (hit (S^re); furc^tbar, terrible (hk gurc^t).
(5) Verbs: 'bxand)haY, usable (hxand)en); t^hav, eatable
(effen); (e^bar, legible (lefen).
(2) (Sn forms adjectives, usually of material, from
nouns: ei(J)en, oaken (bie (Sid^e); golben, golden (ba^
®oIb); iroKen, woolen (bie Sol(e).
(3) §aft forms adjectives from
(a) Nouns: ddl)a^t, disgusting (hex (iM^; meifter^aft,
masterful (ber 30^eifter); fiinb^aft, sinful (bie (giinbe),
(5) Adjectives : bo^^aft, malicious (bdfe, bad) ; tvanh
l^aft, sicklg (!ran!); tua^r^aft, real (iDa^r, true).
(4) 3^g forms adjectives, chiefly from nouns : gunftig,
favorable (bie ®unft) ; mutig, courageous (ber 3}?ut) ; f on-
nig, sunny (bie @onne),
(5) 3^f(i) forms adjectives, chiefly from proper nouns:
omerifanifc^, J.meWm/i (ber 5lmeri!aner) ; ^xanio\i^ii}, French
(ber granjofe); ^onterifc^, Homeric (ber §omer>
250 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§309.
(6) 2x6) forms adjectives from
(a) Nouns: gliidHc^, happt/ (\>a^ ®(u(f); menfrf)(ic^,
human (ber Tltn\d}'); taglicf), daili/ (ber Xag)*
(5) Adjectives: ^xo^ixd), joi/ous (^xof)}; VdnQlid},lengtht/
(lang); rat(i(^, reddish (rot).
((?) Verbs : begretfltc^, comprehensible (begretfen) : frag*
Itc^, questionable (fragen); Ij'd^iiii), hateful, ugli/ (^affen).
(7) (Sam forms adjectives from
(a) Nouns: furc^tfam, timid (bie gurc^t); getualtfam,
violent (bie ^eiDalt); fittfatn, modest (bie (Sitte, usage^.
(5) Verbs : btegfam, pliable (biegen) ; gef)orfam, obedi-
ent (ge^ord)en); ftrebfam, assiduous (ftreben, to strive^,
309. Derivation of Verbs by Suffix. — The commonest
suffixes by which verbs are formed are : en, em, ieren,
and igen.
(1) (5n forms verbs from
(a) Nouns: biirften, to brush (bie :53iirfte); fifc^en, to
fish (ber gifrf)); fiiffen, to kiss (ber ^ug).
(6) Adjectives: f)arten, to harden (^art); flatten, to
iron flat (piatt, flat} ; ftarfen, to strengthen (ftarf).
((?) Roots of other verbs: brdngen, trans., to crowd
(bringen, intrans., to force one's way); fatten, to fell
(fallen); XxdxiXtXi, to water (trinfen).
(2) (5rn forms verbs chiefly from adjectives. With
comparatives it may be considered as simply ?n added
to the comparative root. A prefix — commonly Der* —
often precedes the root : Derbeffern, to correct (beffer) ;
Chap. 2] COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 251
berlangern, to prolong (tcinger); t)ergrogern, to enlarge
(9t:og).
(3) ^eretl forms verbs, chiefly from foreign words :
amufiereti, to entertain (French, amuser) ; beflinteren, to
decline a word (French, dediner) ; regieren, to rule (Latin
regere).
(4) ^o^tn forms verbs from
(a) Nouns : ^ulbigen, to do homage (bie §u(b, grace) ;
freu^tgen, to crucify (ba^ ^reu^); ftetntgen, to stone (ber
(Stein).
(5) Adjectives (when an adjective has the ending
tg, this class of verbs is not to be distinguished from
that in 1) : Befeftigett, to fasten (feft) ; befc^bnigen, to beau-
tify (fc^btt); fattigen, to satisfy (fatt).
Compound Words.
310. German compounds always consist of two main
parts : (1) the modifying element and (2) the basic
word. The basic word comes last : blaugriin, bluish
green; griinbtau, greenish blue. Either element may
belong to almost any part of speech : ^au^l^altett, to keep
house; ber 9^immerf att, glutton. And both elements
may themselves be compounds : bie SBagenbautDerfftatt,
workshop for building wagons.
Compounds may be any part of speech ; (nouns
take their gender from the last element) : ba^ S^ifc^bettt
(noun), table leg ; ba^felbe (pronoun), the same ; ^edblau
(adjective), light blue; tt)a^rfagen (verb), to prophesy ;
bergan (adverb), uphill; anftatt (preposition), instead
of; na(f)bem (conjunction), after; |30^taufenb (interjec-
252 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 312.
tion) Great Scott! While there are compounds in all
parts of speech, the most important are (1) Nouns,
(2) Adjectives, and (3) Verbs.
311. Nouns. — A noun may be compounded with
(1) Nouns: ba^ i^tbtvhttt, feather bed ; ber J^inger^ut,
thimble; ha^ (^olb^tM, gold piece ; bie ^auptiiaht, capital
city,
(2) Pronouns, usually felbft : ber (Selbfttnorb, «mW(fe;
ber <Se(bft(aut, vowel; bie (gelbftfuc^t, selfishness.
(3) Adjectives : ber :53Ibbfinn^ nonsense; t>a^ ;Deutfd)=
lanb, Germany ; bie ^ro^mutter, grandmother.
(4) Verbs: ha^ J^a^rrab, bicycle; bie i^M^thtv, foun-
tain pen; bie SBanberluft, love of travel.
(5) Adverbs: bie 2luf^enfeite, outside; ha^ (5benbilb,
image; bie 3^e^t^eit, the present time.
(6) Prepositions: ba^ TOtleib, jt?^Y^/; hk ^ladjUvtit, pos-
terity ; ber Umtueg, roundabout way.
312. Adjectives. — An adjective may be compounded
with
(1) Nouns : bi(bfrf)bn, pretty as a picture; feefrattf, sea-
sick; \iihtx^tUf clear as crystal.
(2) Adjectives: Utttx\n^, bitter sweet ; c^utmntxc^, good-
natured; griinblau, greenish blue.
(3) Verbs: bemerfen^tuert, worthy of note; (ernbe=
gierig, eager to learn ; merfttJilrbig, remarkable.
(4) Prepositions : aufred)t, upright; au^erorbentlid),
extraordinary ; t)or(aut, forward, pert.
Chap. 2.] COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 253
313. Verbs. — A verb may be compounded with
(1) Nouns: ^U^^alten, to keep house; ftattfinben, to
take place ; tettne'^men, to take part.
(2) Adjectives: grogtmt, to swagger; liebaugetn, to
ogle ; tioKenbett, to finish.
(3) Adverbs : ^tnge()en, to go away ; wieberfommen, to
come again; guriidfe'^ren, to turn hack.
(4) Prepositions: anjte^eti, to put on; mttge^en, to go
along with; nac^fi^en, to stay after school.
Derivations through the Latin.
314. Students of Latin may be interested in compar-
ing certain English words, derived from Latin, with
their German synonyms. For many English words
derived directly, prefix and root, from the Latin, the
German equivalent may be found by translating the
Latin word, part by part, into German. A few illus-
trations are given below ; students should be on the
watch for others.
(1) Nouns :
Attraction, bie 5ln^ie{)un9 (ad, an -f- trahere, ^tefieti).
Benefit, bie SBo^Uat (bene, tr)o!)( + facere, tun).
Eruption, ber ^lu^brui^ (e, au^ H- rumpere, bre(f)en)/
Pretence, ber 3Sorit)anb (prae, t)or -f- tendere, tt)enben).
Resonance, ber SBtber^tt (re, iriber -f sonare, fatten).
Note. — Examples from the Greek are rare. The best one is sym-
pathy, \ia% 2)lit(eib {abv, tnit + Trd^os, bag i?eib).
(2) Adjectives:
Accessible, ^ugciuglicf) (ad, 3U 4- cedere, gel^en).
Illicit, unerlaubt (in, un + licere, eriaubt fein).
254. GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§ 314.
Immortal, unfterbltc^ (in, un + mori, fterben).
Retrograde, riidgangig (retro, luxM + gradi, ge^en).
Subsequent, nac^fotgenb (sub, nac^ + sequi, fo(gen).
(3) Verbs:
Compose, pfammenfe^en (con, gufammen + ponere,
fe^en).
Contract, jufammenjte^en (con, jufamtnen + trahere,
gie^en).
Exclude, aMfrfiUe^en (ex, au6 + claudere, fd^Uegen).
Expel, aMtreiben (ex, aM + pellere, tretben).
Extract, au^jie^en (ex, aM + trahere, gte^en).
Import, einfii^ren (in, ein + portare, fii^ren).
Prescribe, t)or('c^rteben (prae, tior + scribere, fc^retben).
Remit, jurlicff^tcfen (re, ^uriicf + mittere, fc^icfen).
Retract, guriicfjte^ett (re, guriid + trahere, gie^en).
Survive, iiberleben (super, uber + vivere, leben).
CHAPTER III.
COMPOSITION OF SOUNDS. PRONUNCIATION AND
PHONETICS.
Introduction.
315. A German Accent. — When we hear newly arrived
Germans speaking English, we are often amused at
what we call their " broken " speech. Do we ever stop
to think that our German is just as broken and amusing
to them? When we speak German readily or recite
a poem glibly, it rarely occurs to us that a German
would probably have difficulty in understanding us.
To acquire a correct German accent, we must study and
imitate the very peculiarities of enunciation which make
a German's broken English sound so quaint to us.
The simplest way to approach a good German accent
is to make believe we are telling a German dialect story,
and to do this when we read or speak German, We must
also get rid of all false modesty, for trying to mimic
German sounds is not half so ridiculous as giving Ger-
man letters their American sounds.
Several years ago an American student in Germany
tried one day to make fun of the speech of his German
fellow-students, rolling his r's, hissing his «'s, and jerk-
ing out the separate words, instead of speaking in his
former careful, easy, American way. He threw himself
into the German with might and main, just to show
them how queer it sounded to him. To his surprise he
255
256 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§ 317.
was complimented upon his progress in pronunciation.
The Germans had noticed, not that he was exaggerating,
but that he was approaching a good German accent.
316. The Best German. — There is as much difference
in the speech of natives of Berlin, Hanover, Dresden,
and Munich, as in that of natives of New York, Boston,
Chicago, and New Orleans. It is not desirable to imi-
tate any one too closely. In German, as in English,
those who speak best are those whose speech cannot be
identified with any particular city or province. The
following hints are based upon observation of various
accents — especially those of North Germany. They are
meant for conversational German, not for declamation.
These hints treat German "as she is spoke" by cultivated Ger-
mans to-day, not as one hears it in formal declamation. For formal
German, see Benedix^ 2)er ntunb(id)e 33ortrag, published by Weber,
Leipzig, and Siehs^ !^cutfci)c S3iil)nenaucfprad)c, published by Ahn,
Cologne. As a matter of fact, the language of the stage, even in
heroic pieces, is much nearer colloquial German than Siebs' book indi-
cates. Teachers wanting a more detailed discussion of pronunciation
than that given here are referred to : ViUor's ^{)oncttf and '!pi)onetifd)c
©tubien, Sievers' ^t)onetif, Hoffmann'^s ^autlx)iffenfd)aft, Bremer's %\)q>
netif, KlinghardV s 2{rtifuIatton§ilbungen, and the similar works of
Trautmann and Beyer. Not only are these books too detailed for
pupils, but they were written for Germans, not for Americans.
317. The Chief Difficulties. — As a rule, German sounds
for which English lias nothing to correspond — like 6)f
d, and tt — are well mastered by American pupils. The
chief difficulties are with sounds like (, r, and long C,
because we wrongly assume that these letters represent
English sounds. Pupils prepare themselves for the
difficulties offered by such words as \iCi^ ^ud), bie 9Jilt^e,
or fd^iJn, and take pains in pronouncing them. The
Chap. 3.1 PRONUNCIATION. 257
result is that they are pronounced much nearer the
true German way than words which are thought to offer
no difficulty, like ade, (e^reti, or bie @eele.
The things that are most distinctively German —
neglect of which marks an American most clearly when
he speaks with a German — are : (1) pure vowel sounds^
especially D and c, §§ 318 ff. ; (2) the diphthongs, §§ 323-
324 ; (3) the glottal catch, §§ 326 ff. ; (4) the consonants
i and X, §§ 336-337; (5) syllable stress, §§ 338 ff.;
and (6) the ending Ctt in certain special cases, § 343.
Note. — Read § 344, Conclusion. It is not intended that teachers
shall present this whole chapter to their pupils. It is best to treat
only such parts as teachers feel will be most readily grasped.
Vowels.
318. Quality of Sound. — German vowels are simple,
pure ; American vowels are usually slurred. There is
almost always an i^A-sound after an American vowel.
This is caused by the moving of the tongue or the
lower jaw. We pronounce 6 as o-oo, while a German
keeps tongue, lips, and lower jaw in exactly the same
position throughout the entire sound. We pronounce
art, school, rose, a-ert, sehoo-ul, ro-ooze, where a German
makes pure, simple sounds of bie 5lrt, bie @c^u(e, 'tixt 9f^o[e,
The English sounds are of course exaggerated here, the
better to illustrate the tendency.
319. Position of Tongue and Lips. — In order to learn
to keep tongue, lips, and lower jaw rigid during the
sound of German vowels, it is important to know the
exact position of these parts for the making of the vari-
ous vowel sounds. Articulate carefully the vowels in
258
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
[§ 319.
Fig. 1. — The Tongue-position for u
Fig. 2. — The Tongue-position for a.
feed, far, food. For
the vowel sound in
feed the lips are
drawn back as in a
smile; in far they
are in their normal
position of rest ; in
food they are (or
should be) thrust
forward as in a pout.
And the tongue is
raised and thrown
forward in feed, is
normal in far, and is
d rawn back in food.
These positions are
illustrated in Fig-
ures 1, 2, and 3.
The German vowel
sounds form a se-
quence t, tf a, 0, Uf
beginning with a
sound in the front
of the mouth and
running to the back.
Notice the position
of the tongue for the
series as graphically
shown in Figure 4,
and remember that
it must not change
position during eacli
Chap. 3.]
PBON UNCI A TION,
259
sound. A good way to keep the tongue steady is to
rest its tip consciously against the base of the lower
teeth. A good way
to keep the lower
jaw steady is to hold
a lead pencil be-
tween the teeth.
320. Length of
Sound. — Unlike
English vowels, each
German vowel has
only one kind of
sound. This sound
varies in length.
The five German
vowels may be long
or short. (1) They
are usually short
when followed by two or more consonants or a double
consonant : ^a^ Staffer, ba^ ^ttt, ber gif^, bie ^olk, ber
§unb. (2) Otherwise they are lon^^ especially when
doubled or followed
by fj : ber SSater, ha^
^eet, i^nen, h)o^(, tun.
(3) Some monosyl-
lables, mostly inde-
clinable, have a short
vowel before a single
consonant: an, ab, man, in, e^, ob, ber, be^.
The chief difference between the pronunciation of
long and short vowels in German is that long ones are
The Tongue-position for tt.
Diagram of the Tongue-positions
for German vowels.
260 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§32l.
pronounced less vigorously than the short. The short
vowels are uttered with a tenseness — they are almost
coughed — which clips them short and carries the sound
immediately to the following consonant. This will
be more thoroughly treated under "syllable stress,"
§§ 338-340.
321. Pronunciation. — If we remember not to move
tongue or lower jaw during vowel sounds, German
vowels offer little difficulty, except in the case of long e*
(1) The two sounds of a are like the English a's in aha
(never as in fat or fate}; (2) the two t sounds like i in
pin and machine (never as in fine}; (3) the two u sounds
like u in put and trul^/ (never as in mule or fun}; (4) the
two sounds like the two o's in oho.
Note. — In the best German schools pupils learning to pronounce
English long o are made to give a long oo-sound after the o-souud.
They are made to say ho-oom (^home), wo-oo (woe), and so on, be-
cause they naturally make a pure o*sound with no motion of tongue
or jaw.
(5) German e has three sounds : short, obscure, and
long. When short it is like e in met^ when obscure
like e in golden. But long c makes trouble, as it has
no English equivalent. It is between a in mate and ee
in meet. It is made with the teeth almost together, the
lips drawn back as in a smile, and the tongue almost as
high as in the i position (Fig. 1). It is a pure sound
and has not the slur usually following English long a,
as when we pronounce name., nd-im. Pronounce (^ffXt
(not S^re), (Seele (not (Sa(e), me^ren (not 9}2d{)ren), fe^e
(not fdl)e).
Note. — For the sound of e in the unaccented syllable er, see r,
§ 3S7, Note.
Chap. 3.] PBONUNCIATION. 261
Vowels with Umlaut.
322. Umlaut. — When in Old and Middle High Ger-
man (see §§ 354-355) a stem whose vowel was a, o, n,
or an was followed by a suffix containing the vowel i
(later c) the sound of the stem vowel ^ was modified,
becoming more like the vowel in the ending ; thus
a, 0, Uf or au came to be spoken a, '6, % or an (O.H.G.
fallu, fellis, fellit ; M.H.G. valle, vellest, vellet ;
N.H.G. fafle, fdKft, fcillt). This change of sound was
called Umlaut by Klopstock, and the great German
philologist, Jakob Grimm, made this term current.
Below are given the sounds of these Umlaut vowels :
(1) Short a is like e in met; long a is properly the
same quality of sound, only longer. It is a pure sound,
not like a in late, but more like the first e in there, or
ai iu faith when spoken with Irish brogue. In North
Germany, however, it is coming to be spoken more and
more like long e except to distinguish similar forms
(see § 321, 5). Pronounce: bte Wdnntv, bte Sa(ber;
ga^nen, tpa^ten. Distinguish carefully : t^re, ^^re ; fti^e,
fe^e.
(2) Short has the lips rounded as in short o and the
tongue in the position for short e (g in met}; long ii has
the lips rounded in the position for long o (whistling
position) and the tongue in the position for long c
(SJ^e^l). Pronounce : bte §dl(e, bffnen, bte §i5^(e, bte
Ofett. Distinguish carefully : §o((e, ^e((e ; fdtttten, fett-
ttett; §d^teti, ^el^Ien.
1 The best English illustration of Umlaut is the difference we make
in pronouncing the o in wovian, when we speak the plural form, women.
The change in the last vowel affects the sound of the first.
262 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§323.
(3) Short it has the lips rounded as in short u and
the tongue in the position for short i (i in pin); long
ii has the lips rounded as in long u (whistling position)
and the tongue in the position for long i (i in machine).
Pronounce: bie giitte, fiitten, bte §iite, fit^ten. Distin-
guish carefully : tUffen, .^iffen ; tUfte, tifte ; tniiffen,
miffen.
(^4) The diphthong (iu is pronounced just like cu»
See § 323, 3.
(5) Notice that in every case an Umlaut- vowel has
the same lip position as the corresponding non-umlauted
vowel, but the tongue is raised nearer the position for t
(Fig. 1). As this t was originally the sound of the
following syllable, we may say that the tongue began to
prepare for the ending while pronouncing the vowel of
the stem. Thus Umlaut may be called an assimilation
of the stem vowel to the vowel of the ending.
Diphthongs.
323. Nature of the Diphthongs. — A diphthong is —
properly speaking — a double sound. But we often
speak of two vowels, when written together, as a diph-
thong, even when they are spoken as a single sound:
each^ hearty heard. Below are treated the three genuine
diphthong sounds : at (ci), dVif and cu (hx),
German diphthongs differ from English chiefly in
having the main emphasis on the second sound where
English has it on the first. But there are also differ-
ences in the quality of the sounds.
(1) The diphthongs d and at are historically the
same sound and are pronounced exactly alike in Ger-
Chap. 3.] PRONUNCIATION. 263
man. Their sound is nearly like that of English i in
mine^ but English long i is a long a^-sound followed by
a short ee-sound (a'-ee), while German at (ci) is a short
a-sound followed by a longer c-sound (a=cc')* In Ger-
man, after the short a-sound, the tongue does not bother
to climb clear to the imposition (Fig. 1), but stays for
the longer part of the diphthong in the e-position
(Fig. 4) : T)a^ di, tnetn, ber ©ain, bte (Satte.
(2) The diphthong an is nearly like English ow in
how^ but English ow is a long a^-sound followed by a
short i^-sound (a'-ob^^ while German au is a short a=sound
followed by a longer (J=sound (a=ot)')* In German,
after the short a=sound, the tongue does not bother to
go way back into the u=position (Fig. 3), but stays for
the longer part of the diphthong in the opposition
(Fig. 4) : !t)a^ ©aug, ber $Raub, 'tia^ ^aut, au§.
(3) The diphthongs CU and au are historically the
same sound and are pronounced exactly alike in German.
Their sound is nearly like that of English oy in hoy^ but
English oy is a short a^^'-sound followed by a shorter
2-sound (aw-i^. German CU (du) is a short o-sound fol-
lowed by a longer ii-sound (o=iiiJ')* In German, after
the short 0-sound, the lips keep the same rounded
position and the tongue does not bother to climb clear
to the imposition (Fig. 1), but stays for the longer part
of the diphthong in the exposition (Fig. 4) : !Dte Seute,
^eute, bte §aute, bte @au(e.
324. Summary of the Differences. — Thus we see not
only that German diphthong-sounds have the emphasis
on the second part, where English emphasizes the first
element, but that the second (longer) element of the
264 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§326.
German diphthong is not so different from the first
(short) element as in English. In other words, both
the lip- and the tongue-positions for the second element
of the German diphthong are nearer those of the first
element, than in English. German diphthongs are also
of shorter duration than English. They are not so long
as a long vowel.
If we want to emphasize a claim to something we
say : " That's mine " (^madda'een), where a German
says : „T)a0 tft mein" (maeen'). When we are hurt, we
say: " Ow " (dddd'ob)^ but a German says : „5lu" (aoo')«
.We also call : " Ship ahoy " {aw'i)^ but a German in
calling out the word for Aay, says : „ba^ ©eu" (o5B').
The best way to say this right is to think mainly of the
second sound ; the first will take care of itself.
Digraphs.
325. In English we have many double vowels for
single sounds, as in the words, each^ hearty heard^ believe^
receive^ and so on. German has but few of these di-
graphs. They are te, pronounced like long i ; oa, pro-
nounced like long a; ce, pronounced like long e; oo,
pronounced like long 0* All these digraphs are used
merely to show by the spelling that a sound is long.
They are employed usually where a simple vowel would
naturally be short. (Bit, t)ie(, bie <Baat, ber (Baal, ba^
^ctt, bag Wlttv, bag ^oot.
The Glottal Catch.
326. The " Catch " Proper. — Most Germans speak
with the muscles of the chest and diaphragm tense.
They seem to be holding their breath, as it were ; there
Chap. 3.] PRONUNCIATION, 265
is always pressure upon the bellows which furnishes the
motive -power for speech. This tenseness or pressure
accounts not only for the staccato effect and the impres-
sion of vigor and speed given by most spoken German,
but also for the greater explosiveness of many German
sounds. It is also the foundation of what is called the
glottal catch.
When we say, " pooh! " the breath bursts through our
lips in a little explosion. If we close our vocal chords,
as we do our lips in "pooh," and then let the breath
pop through them, we have what is known as a " glottal
catch." There is nothing like it in English ; the near-
est approach is when we whisper " uh-uh " for "no."
It is a little, jerky cough.
327. After a Consonant. — When we hear a German
learning English the most striking thing about it is the
choppy way he bites off the various syllables, especially
those beginning with a vowel. In English conversation
we carry over a consonant to a following vowel, even
when they are in separate words : not at all, odd or even.
A German comes to a full stop — closing his vocal
chords — before words or syllables beginning with a
vowel. The sound of the vowel is then preceded by
the little jerky cough — the " glottal catch " — caused
by the sudden bursting open of the vocal chords : odd \
or I even, not \ at \ all.
Pronounce the following w^ords, making a complete
closure of the vocal chords after the prefix, and begin-
ning the basic word with a glottal catch : ent|e'^ren,
er|innern, mi^lac^ten, t)er|einen, ur|att. Also: d^ \ ift |
ein I augerjorbenttic^ I un|artige^ tinb.
266 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§329.
328. After a Vowel. — When in English a vowel sound
precedes an initial vowel — whether this begins a word
or a syllable — we join the two by the sound of w (after
or u) or of ?/ (after e or i). In rapid speech, through-
out^ see it^ I am are pronounced through-wout^ see yit^ I
yam. But a German comes to a full stop before the
initial vowel sound, which he pronounces with a glottal
catch: throughout, see\it, I\am,
Pronounce the following words, making a complete
closure of the vocal chords after the prefix and begin-
ning the basic word with a glottal catch: be|ob|ac^ten,
belac^ten, ge|enbet, gelarbettet. Also : ^6) \)aht \ eine | un|*
angene^me | 5lnttDort | er()a(ten.
329. Rule for the Glottal Catch. — It is hard to lay
down an absolute rule for the glottal catch, as much
depends upon individuals. In very rapid speech, espe-
cially in unaccented words and syllables, the glottal
catch is sometimes omitted. But as such fluency is not
acquired till after years of practice, it is best to follow
the rule. Except after the particles mentioned below, a
glottal catch should precede every word or root syllable be-
ginning with a voweL
When a German speaks English with a glottal catch
it sounds queer to us, but no queerer than it sounds to
a German when we say: be-yo-bachten, be-yachten, ge-
yendet, and ge-yarbeitet instead of be|ob|oc^ten, be|ac^ten,
0e|enbet, and ge|arbettet. Much of the difficulty Germans
have in understanding our pronunciation of their lan-
guage is due to our omission of the glottal catch. An
illustration of this is the fact that an American was
once obliged to pronounce the word „erinttern" five
Chap. 3.] PRONUNCIATION. 267
times before her German teacher could tell what word
she was trying to say. The difficulty lay partly in the
drawling of the American r, partly in the omission of
the glottal catch after the first cr* The American said
e-rinnurn instead of er|tnnertt.
330. Omission of the Glottal Catch. — In the case of
words compounded with the particles ^ter, ^tn, '^er, bar,
XoaXf trior, t)or, irieber, and after % there is no glottal catch.
Thus ^inaM, herein, barunter, tuarum, inoran, boriiber, tt)ie=
berum, t)o((enben, are easy for Americans, as they are
pronounced without the glottal catch.
Consonants.
331. Identical Consonants. — The German consonants
f, \)f t, m, u, and 5 are pronounced as in English.
(1) German f, ^ has three pronunciations just like
tlie three of English s. When at the end or next to
tlie end of a syllable it is like s in see : e§, lt)a^, bift, ^aft.
When at the beginning of a syllable it is like s in rose :
fe^en, ber (Saa(, bie 9^ofe, ber Unfinn. When f begins an
accented syllable whose second letter is t or ^, it is
like s in sugar: fte(}en, fprerfien are pronounced as if
spelled fc^te^eti, fd)prec^en.
Note. — It is almost as hard for Americans to give initial f a 5;-sound
as for Germans to give our final s a ;2-sound. We think it sounds funny
to hear a German say, " It iss hiss turn," but it sounds just as funny
to a North German when we say, „<Bie. iiberfe^te feeing @eiten/' giving
the initial f s the sound of s in hiss, as it is our natural tendency to do.
(2) The consonants p, t, h, b are uttered with greater
explosiveness than in English, owing to the greater
lung-pressure in German (§ 326). In b and t the tip
268 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§334.
of the tongue should be against the upper teeth at the
beginning of the sound. At the end of a syllable h
and b are pronounced like p and t : Xoh like tot, ^Ibfic^t
like 5l|)ftrf)t, fiibltc^ like flttUt^, ob like op.
332. Equivalent Consonants. — The consonants c, j, q, t>,
to, 5, have equivalent sounds in English, but these are
not represented by the corresponding English letters.^
^ occurs mostly in rf, pronounced like f, and in df
(§ 334). 3 is like y in ^ear (in North Germany it
tends towards rff, § 334, 2) ; qu like kv; t) like/; to like
V ; 5 like tz.
333. Dissimilar Consonants. — The consonants which
have sounds not found in English are d^, Q, (, and r»
Naturally they make the most trouble for Americans.
334. The Sound c^. — (1) In pronouncing ci^ after a, o,
Uf or OU, the back of the tongue is raised and drawn
back toward the soft palate so that a scraping sound is
made as the breath is forced through. It is like the
Scotch ch in loch. The nearest equivalent English
sound is the rasping we sometimes make at the end
of a long yawn or the sound some people utter when
breathing on their eye-glasses before cleaning them.
Pronounce : ad), ba« ^uc^, i>a^ ^od), and).
(2) After all other sounds — that is, after consonants
or tf if tUf or the umlauted vowels — d^ has a sound re-
sembling the noise made by a spitting cat. Raise the
1 For foreign words a pronouncing dictionary must be consulted.
Some French words are pronounced as in French, as ""^enfion, 3ourna«
lift; some are half Germanized: (gaucc, pronounced @o§e.
Chap. 3.] PRONUNCIATION. 269
tongue to the position for long i (Fig. 1) and holding
it there, stop the vowel sound and breathe out. Pro-
nounce : 'txi^ ^t6), ha^ ^\6)i, tyx6), W Z'^6)itx, bte ©iic^er,
bie Z\i6:)tx, bte (Sc^lciuc^e, \m\6), manc^.
It is plain that the guttural d^=sound, made in the
back of the mouth, goes naturally with the vowels a, 0,
and VLf which are formed in the middle or back of the
mouth (see Fig. 4). The palatal (i^=sound, made against
the front part of the palate, goes naturally with the
vowels formed in the front of the mouth (Fig. 4) or
with \ or n, both of which are articulated with the
tongue against the front of the palate (Fig. 5).
(3) At the beginning of a syllable, ^ is pronounced
as in (2) before e and i : (S^emte, (S^ttia. Before other
vowels or consonants it is pronounced like ( : (S^or, Shrift,
(^^arafter, guc^2i, trac^fen.
335. The Sounds of g. — (1) German g at the begin-
ning of a word or syllable is like English g in go.
(2) At the end of a syllable it is like k except (3) in
the ending tg, when it is like 6) in irf).
Thus d^ and g in rti^ttg are pronounced alike. But as
soon as inflectional endings are added to final g, so that
g becomes the first letter in the following syllable, g is
pronounced like g in go. Pronounce: (1) gut, griin;
(2) ber Xag, ber @teg ; (3) ru^ig, rid^ttg ; but (1) bie Xage,
bie ®tege, ru^iger, ric^tiger.
Note. — There is less uniformity in Germany for the pronunciation
of g than for any other letter. Probably half the people in Germany
pronounce final g like final 6), as in § 334, 1 or 2. But the best author-
ities are now agreed upon the pronunciation as given .above. See Vie-
tor's S)ie 2(u§fprad)e beg @(^riftbeiitjd)en, 7th edition, O. R. Riesland,
Leipzig ; also Siehs'* 2)eutf(i)e iBu^nenau§f|3rad^e, Ahn, Koln. See §316.
270
GERMAN COMPOSITION,
[8 337.
336. The Sound of L — German ( is pronounced with
the tongue pressed against the front of the palate, like
III in million (Fig. 5). The sound of ^ in i/ear seems
interwoven with the I, which is made in the very front
of the mouth, not at the back as English I. One might
say that German l has an ee-shade (Fig. 1), while Eng-
lish I has an oo-shade
(Fig. 3). Pronounce:
Mi^e^mann,aire^AH!.
337. The German r*
— There are two dis-
tinct German r's ; the
tongue-tip (trilled) r,
and the uvula (rolled)
r» Both differ from
the American slurred
r of the East and
South, and from the
drawled r of the
West.
(1) In the trilled
t (Fig. 6), the tongue-
tip is vibrated against the palate just behind the front
teeth. This is not only the easier of the two, but it is
the one approved on the stage.
(2) The uvula or throat t (Fig. 7) is made by the
vibrations of the uvula upon the back of the tongue.
It is more distinctively German, but is usually difficult
for Americans to acquire. In a way it resembles a
gargle and it may best be developed from the guttural
Fig. 5. — The Tongue-position for U
Chap. 3.]
PRONUNCIA TION,
271
6), § 334, 1. In fact,
many Germans pro-
nounce r as d^ when
speaking rapidly ;
they give SJiart^a and
3}^agba almost the
same sound. The
physiological expla-
nation of this is that
in very rapid speech
the uvula fails to
vibrate when the
breath is forced out,
thus making only the
scraping sound of 6)f
§ 334, 1. For this
uvula r the front of
the tongue must
never be raised as in
the drawled r of the
West. The back of
the tongue is raised
so that the uvula is
forced to vibrate
when we breathe out
(see Fig. 7).
Note. — In conversation
the r in the unaccented
syllable er is not rolled.
The uvula touches the
tongue just once, but does
not vibrate. This makes a
very short ato-sound, akin
Fig. 6, — The Tongue-position for trilled r.
Fig. 7. — The Tongue-position for uvula X*
272 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§339.
to in short. Thus 3)er SSatcr \)at e8 ocrgeffen is spoken almost like
Daw fahtaw hat es fawgessen. The sound here represented by aw is
as short as it can possibly be. It is not at all like the aw in " See^ saw,
Marjorie Daw,''^ but on the contrary so brief as to be practically only
a grace note.
Syllable Stress.
338. Syllable Bearers. — In English the vowels are
the important parts of the syllables. They may be
called the "syllable-bearers." A short vowel like a in
hand may receive as much emphasis as long a in tame.
In German this is strikingly different. Long vowels
are longer than in English, and short ones shorter.
After a short vowel in German the following consonant
bears a large part of the burden of the syllable. A
consonant following a short vowel in German is much
longer than the same consonant when following a long
vowel.
339. Long and Short Consonants. — Thus German has
long and short consonants as well as long and short
vowels. A short vowel is so short that it is almost
coughed out ; the sound springs from it immediately to
the following consonant, which is held much longer
than the vowel. Graphically the difference between
the English and German way of saying hand may be
represented : -•
M^ bie ©a|^^^
A long vowel followed by a short consonant offers no
difficulty, as that is a frequent combination in English.
But care must be taken to prolong a consonant follow-
ing a short vowel. Remember to hold tongue and jaw
still during a German vowel-sound, and to jump without
Chap. 3.] PRONUNCIATION. 2,1 B
any slur from a vowel to the following consonant, espe-
cially when the vowel is short. Compare ber ^fcintg and
fdttnen. Pronounce ^o o ij 5 nig and !5n n n n nen. In
the same way pronounce hit @(f)ule and t>k (S^ulb
((Sc^uuuule and @^u(nib). Also ber Dfen and offen
(O fen and offfffen). Be careful always to jump
without any slur from the vowel to the consonant. Do
not say ^'6\uh\n\qf !d|wA|nnen, (Bd)n\uh\it, (Bd)n\uh\it),
£)\uh\^tn, o|wA|ffen.
340. Practice Pairs. — This is one of the most char-
acteristic features of German and one of the easiest to
learn. Just remember to put on extra lung-pressure
for short vowels and then to hold the following conso-
nant. If we admire something very much, we say it is
'-'• wo nderfuV ; a German says „tDunnnbert)ot(." The
best English illustration of this is the way ng is pro-
longed in the American slang expression: "Stung!"
This length of consonants is especially easy to get with
If vXf and tt. Try these first.
A few good pairs with which to practise these short
vowels followed by long consonants and to compare
them with similar long vowels followed by short con-
sonants are : 'btvx (So'^ne, bte (Sonne ; fii^ten, flillen ; !o*
mifc^, fontmen ; ber (Sta'^t, ber (Stall ; tuo^ltDotten ; ber
^allfaal ; §a(Ie an ber (gaale ; ben (S^afen, fc^affen ; fam,
ber f amm ; Iat)nt, 'aa^ Samm.
341. Change of Pitch. — In English words the vowel
carries the changes in pitch. When we say " Oh, come
on " in a pleading tone, the o in on slides several notes
down the scale, If German were to use the same ex-
274 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§343.
pression „^omm an" in the same tone, the n in an would
carry this change in pitch. Graphically this may be rep-
resented by English " Come o^j^" ; German „^omnt anj^ •"
In German any change in pitch is carried by the long
element in the syllable, whether vowel or consonant.
Of course, to carry change in pitch a consonant must
be voiced^ that is, the vocal chords must vibrate when
it is pronounced. Thus change of pitch cannot be car-
ried by fnutes like p, h, t
342. Sentence Accent. — In general, German sentence
accent follows the same rules as the English, but it is
more emphatic. The two may be compared to German
and English script; the one goes straight and is sharp;
the other glides and curves ; one is angular, the other
round. And so with the sentence accent : in English
it slurs, in German it jumps. The extent of this
change (greater than in English), coupled with the
greater lung-pressure in German and the glottal catch
(§ 326), give spoken German a much more vigorous
and staccato effect than English.
Aside from these considerations the chief difference
between English and German sentence accent is in com-
plex sentences. In German complex sentences — those
with a main and a subordinate clause — the tone begins
at normal and rises till it comes to the junction of the
two clauses ; then it declines. This is the case whether
the main clause or the subordinate comes first.
Assimilation.
343. The Ending en. — The Germans speak not only
with more vigor than we Americans, but with more
Chap. 3.1 PKONUNCIATtON, 276
speed. Much of this speed is due to their clipping the
ending en. An enormous number of German words end
in en, the sound of which is shortened in various ways.
In conversation the c in en is always silent. The n then
undergoes various changes, called assimilation^ depend-
ing upon the preceding or following consonant. Chief
of these are : (1) next to 16 or |J ; (2) after g ; and (3)
after n or ng.
(1) When the ending en comes just after or just be-
fore a B or a ^) sound, it is pronounced like nt* The sen-
tence Sir 1;)ahtn thtn fieben ^naben gefe^en is pronounced,
3Ktr ^abm ebm fiebm ^nabm gefe^n. ^fc^enbac^ and Sol-
fenbitttet are pronounced (5f(J)mbad) and Solfmbitttet.^
1 This stg,tement and several of the following are at variance with
Siehs and with German pronunciation as formally taught, but they
are consistent with the practice, even of teachers. The author once
heard a professor in the University of Berlin — a man well known in
America — say in a lecture: 3)ie (Snbung ,en' nm^ immer t^oHn %ou
I)abm! Advocates of stage German insist that en should have its
regular sound, but even on the stage b and ^ usually attract n to m.
For instance, ^iepenbrint (in Freytag's „3ournQ(tften") is never pro-
nounced according to the stage rules. Actors always say ^tepmbrinf.
This is a practically universal law, which the Greeks and Romans
embodied in their written language: iv -\- ^dWcj — i/jL^dWu (en +
ballo — emballo) ; con + prehendo — comprehendo. In speaking hur-
riedly we say " 0pm the door," for "Open the door."
Professor Victor of Marburg, who has written more extensively on
Phonetics than any one else, does not assimilate the ending en after
h, p, and so on, and he combats such assimilation in his writings. But
in conversation with the author he admitted the tendency (which he
said came from Prussia) and confessed that his youngest son assimi-
lated en, while the other members of the family did not. On the other
hand, the most able and scholarly phoneticist in Germany, Professor
Sievers of Leipsic, advocates the teaching of assimilation from the
beginning. He told the author not only that en should be assimilated
276 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§343.
If we notice carefully how h and p come to attract n
to m, we shall see that it is all done by the soft palate.
For the sounds h and p the lips are closed and the soft
palate cuts off the nasal passage. For the following
n=sound it is much easier to keep the lips closed and
simply to let the soft palate down, thus opening the
nasal passage, than it is to open the lips and raise the
tongue to the n=position. This opening of the nasal
passage gives a nasal sound, and the only nasal sound
possible with the lips closed is m*
(2) A similar process to that just described takes
place when en follows fi* In the sound of g in ge^en
(§ 335, 1) the nasal passage is closed by the soft palate
and it is easier to lower the soft palate than to raise the
tongue to the tt=position. The result is that the follow-
ing ti'sound becomes nasal (like ng in sing}. SBtr tragen
l^o^e tragen is pronounced 2Bir tragng l^o^e ^ragng.
(3) When the ending cn follows n or ng it is indicated
simply by a change of pitch. The change may be up
or down. In other words the tongue remains in the
n^position while the vocal cords alter the pitch. This
may be graphically indicated thus : 5Btr fonnen etnen
fc^bnen (S^agiergang madden — trir fbnn"^ ein^ fc^bn'JJ\ (Spa*
giergang mat^n, or iDir f5nn5etn]}/fc^i3n5'(2pa^iergang mac^n.
(Sie fingen an, p fingen — fie fing^ an, 3U fing^or fie
fing^^^an, au fing^;^.
in the cases mentioned in the text, but that in a sentence like SSlr
fommen nid^t, the m attracts the cn to m even when the next word
begins with n. It is not the aim of this book to go into so much de-
tail, but this statement is interesting, coming from Germany's leading
authority.
Chap. 3.] PRONUNCIATION. 217
Conclusion.
344. The previous rules and suggestions are meant
to explain in some measure the greatest difficulties that
confront an American trying to speak German. Teach-
ing pronunciation from a book is a thankless job, but
even from a book some hints may be gleaned. If
teacher or pupil can get from this chapter some helpful
hint or inspiration, it will have amply served its purpose.
CHAPTER IV.
COMPOSITION OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE.
An Outline Sketch.
345. Introduction. Indo-European. — The English word
night is in German bie 9^arf|t, in Latin, nox^ noetis^ and
in Greek wf, vvkto^ (nux, nuktos). In studying the
roots of these words {nighty Naoht, nokt, nuhf) and oth-
ers, scholars were long ago struck by their similarity.
They seemed to be in some way related, probably to
have a common origiil.
Indo-European is the name generally given to those
languages of Europe and Western Asia which have
certain roots in common. They are supposed to come
from a parent language, which is also called Indo-Euro-
pean. The original form of this language is unknown,
as is the home of the people who spoke it. But we
suppose they spread throughout Europe and Asia, and
as they scattered, the parent language changed. Out
of it developed most of the languages of Europe.
Note. — The Indo-European languages may be classified roughly as
follows :
I. Asiatic Languages.
1. Indic^ including (a) the language of the Vedas, (6) Sanskrit,
(c) Modern Indian, and (d) the language of the Gypsies.
2. Iranic, including (a) Old Persian, (6) Modem Persian, (c) Old
Baktrian, and {d) Afghan.
3. TochariCj a language in Central Asia, recently discovered to be
Indo-European.
4. Phrygian- Armenian.
278
Chap. 4.1
THE GERMAN LANGUAGE.
279
Fig. 8. — Diagram illustrating the Development of the Indo-European
Languages.
280 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§348.
II. European Languages.
1. Albanic, including the languages of the Balkan States.
2. Balto- Slavic^ including («) Russian, (6) Polish, (c) Bohemian, and
(d) Bulgarian.
3. Germanic, including (a) Gothic, (b) Anglo-Saxon, (c) German,
(d) English, (e) Dutch, and (/) the Scandinavian tongues.
4. Celtic^ including (a) Gaelic, (6) Gallic, and (c) Welsh.
6. Bomanic, including (a) Latin, (6) Italian, (c) French, (d) Span-
ish, and (e) Portuguese.
6. Hellenic, including (a) Ancient and (6) Modem Greek.
No two classifications of the Indo-European languages agree. See
the Encyclopaedia Britannica or Schrader's " Die Indo-Germanen. "
346. The First Sound-Shift. Grimm's Law. — These
languages all branched off or grew out of the original
Indo-European by the changing or shifting of certain
sounds. In the case of the Germanic languages, this
is called the first sound-shift Qik erfte ii^autoerfcftiebung).
The change took place during a long period of years
and according to certain fixed principles. These prin-
ciples were first worked out by the great philologist
Jakob Grrimm^ and are known as Grimm's Law.
347. Greek and Latin as illustrating Indo-European. —
As the parent language has disappeared, we can illus-
trate Grimm's Law only by comparing the Germanic
languages with Indo-European languages which did not
take part in the first sound-shift. Of these, Latin and
Greek are the best known, just as Gothic is the best
known early Germanic language. So we usually com-
pare Latin or Greek words with Gothic to illustrate
Grimm's Law of the First Sound-Shift.
348. Statement and Illustration of the Law. — In its
simplest form the law of the first sound-shift is that:
Chap. 4.]
THE GERMAN LANGUAGE,
281
(1) 5, d, g, become respectively p, t, Jc; (2) p, t, Jc, be-
come respectively /, th^ h ; and (3) /, th, A, become
respectively b, c?, g.
(1) d-^t
C^}l>^f
(3)/->5
Greek
DeJca (8e/ca)
Pous (ttoi)?)
Prater (^cjypaTrjp)
Latin
Decern
Pes
Prater
Gothic
Taihun
Fotus
Brothar
English
Ten
Foot
Brother
Thus approximately the same sounds continued in
the language in spite of
the shifting. For while
5, (?, and g were shifting
to JO, f, and Ar, these three
were shifting to/, th^ and
A, which in turn were [ / \P.
shifting to 5, c?, and g.
This may be shown
graphically in Figure 9.
Fig. 9. — Illustration of the way the
same sounds continued in the
language in spite of the sound-
shifts shown in Grimm's Law.
Note. — The details of
Grimm's Law, many of which
have been worked out since his
death (1863), are much too
complex for any but advanced
students. The present treat-
ment touches only a few phases
which may help students to understand the history of the German
language and the relation of many English words to the German.
349. Gothic. — As Germanic branched off from Indo-
European through the first sound-shift, this shift may
be said to have made the various Germanic languages.
Of these the oldest that is known is the Gothic, which
282 GERMAN COMPOSITION. t§ 350.
died out about the seventh century a.d. It has been
preserved for us chiefly through the Gothic Bible of
Ulfilas^ a bishop of the West Goths (Visigoths) in
the fourth century a.d. On page 287 will be found
the Lord's Prayer in Gothic, so that those who are^
interested can compare it with later German.
350. The Second Sound-Shift. — Just as the Germanic
languages branched off from the Indo-European through
the first sound-shift, so High German branched off from
the other Germanic tongues (Low German, English,
and so on) through the second sound-shift. This shift-
ing took place in Southern Germany from the sixth to
the eighth centuries. It worked its way gradually
northward, stopping short of the low, northern part of
Germany. Thus, because it took place in Upper Ger-
many (see Map), the second sound-shift is also called
the High- German Sound-Shift,
Note. — High German is so called because it developed in the high
land of Upper Germany. There is a common misapprehension that it
was spoken by the upper classes, while Low German was spoken by
the lower classes. This is not the case. High German was spoken by
all classes in Upper Germany, Low German by all classes in Lower
Germany. (See Map. )
Low German, commonly called ^lQtt*!I)cutf(i) (from ptatt, flat^ re-
ferring to the nature of the country where it is spoken), did not
take part in the High-German Sound-Shift, and so has remained in
some regards nearer than High German to the original Germanic.
English (Anglo-Saxon) was also unaffected by the High-German
Sound-Shift, so in many respects Low German resembles English more
than it does High German. Below are a few illustrations :
High German ots Ift ticf ^er.j ba^ l)attc .^^imntcl stuanjlg
Low German a8 i« bee)) ^art bat l)abb ipeben tiucntig
English as is deep heart that had heaven twenty
Longitude 10
East 1
Chap. 4.] THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 283
351. Gothic, English, and High German. — The changes
made by the second sound-shift are best illustrated by
comparing Gothic, English, and High German. Thus
we see in the Gothic the condition of certain consonants
in an old Germanic language before the second sound-
shift. In the English we see these consonants in a new
Germanic language, but in one not affected by the second
sound-shift. And finally in High German we see these
consonants in a new Germanic language which has been
affected by the second sound-shift.
352. Statement and Illustration of the Law. — The law
for the second sound-shift, also worked out by Jakob
Grimm, is less regular than the first (see § 348, Note).
In general its simplest form is: p becomes/ or pf; t
becomes a, 2, or «8 ; d becomes t.
Gothic
Fund
Taihun
Bags
English
Pound
Ten
Day
High German
^funb
3et)tt
^ag
353. High German. — Ever since the second sound-
shift. High German has been the literary language of
Germany. From the second sound-shift till about
1100 A.D. it is called Old High Grerman^ from 1100
till about 1350 Middle High Q-erman. Then came a
period of transition till the Reformation (1517), when
the spread of Luther's writings made his language (that
of the Saxon Chancery) the standard for Germany.
This is called New High German. When we speak of
G-erman^ we usually refer to New High German, as that
is the language written and spoken by most Germans
to-day. The next paragraphs trace its development.
284 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§354.
354. Old High German. — The period of Old High
German extends roughly from 750 to 1100.^ This was
the time of the Carolingian (768-911), Saxon (919-
1024), and Frankish (1024-1125) Emperors. Latin
was in the main the written language ; the people spoke
Old High German. The chief Manuscripts that have
come down to us are the Hildebrandtalied^ the WeBSo-
hrunner Q-eheU the Evangelienhuch of Otfrid von Wets-
senburg^ the ffeliand, and the MuspiUi (End of the
World). On page 287 is the Lord's Prayer in Old
High German as it was written at the end of the eighth
century a.d. and again as at the end of the tenth. It
is interesting to compare these with the Gothic.
It was during this period (in the reign of Charle-
magne) that the word came into existence from which
the present word beutf(!^ was derived. The Old High
German word diot means people. To this was added
the ending {so (German ifc^, English ish}. The word
then developed : diutisc, diutsk^ tiutsch^ teutsch. This
latter form was current in High German as late as the
eighteenth century. At first it was used only of the
language spoken by the people, but later it came to be
applied to the people themselves.
1 Dates referring to general language changes, just as the boun-
dary lines between different dialects (see Map, p. 282), must not be
interpreted too exactly. The Germans did not go to bed New Year's
Eve, 1100, speaking Old High German, and wake up the next morning
speaking Middle High German, any more than a High German who
moved across the line into Lower Germany would immediately begin
to speak Low German. So, too, during the different periods changes
were constantly going on, just as they are in the language to-day.
Dates and boundary lines are necessary for a clear understanding, but
in the case of linguistic movements they are flexible and must bQ
understood as such.
Chap. 4.] THE GEBMAN LANGUAGE. 286
355. Middle High German. — Gradually Old High
German changed into what we call Middle High Ger-
man. An idea of the amount of the change can be had
by looking at the Middle High German Lord's Prayer,
page 288, and by comparing it with the Old High
German. Middle High German coincides with the
rule of the Hohenstaufen Emperors (1138-1254) and
the next hundred years, when the Emperors were
chosen from various families (till 1350).
The first well-known works in Middle High German
were Heroic Poems by unknown writers, the 9fitbe(ungen=
Iteb, ®ubrun, the poems of the !Dietrt(^fage, and others.
The Court Epics, D^olanb^Iteb and 3ltepnber(ieb, were both
written by priests. The (Sneit (^neid) was written
by Reinrich von Veldehe^ ^ar^ttial, by Wolfram von
Uschenbach, ^riftan unb 3foIt, by Gottfried von Strass-
hurg, !Der virtue §etnrt(^, by Hartmann von Aue, Most
of these Minnesingers also wrote lyrics, though the chief
lyric poet was Walther von der Vogelweide.
Middle High German was at its best about 1200.
For the next century and a half it declined, and then
for nearly two centuries (1350-1534) till the completion
of Luther's translation of the Bible came the period of
transition to New High German. This transition is
shown in the official documents of the different govern-
ments (chanceries) in Germany, those of the cities, of
the bishops, of the Emperor.
As long ago as in the time of Rudolph of Hahshurg
(1273-1291) official decrees began to be made in Ger-
man rather than in Latin. These decrees were issued
by the chancellors^ hence we hear of the language of the
chancery (^atijleifprac^e). The different chanceries
286 GEBMAN COMPOSITION, [§356.
wished to be understood as widely as possible, so they
adopted the language of the people. Out 'of the decrees
of the different chanceries — those of the cities, dukes,
bishops, and so on — developed an official language
which was understood by all. But it was not as yet
widespread among the common people. This was to be
accomplished by Martin Luther.
356. New High German. — Long before Luther, there
existed the language he used, just as there were Ger-
man translations of the Bible before his. Luther's
great service to the German language lies not in his
invention of something new, but in his spreading and
popularizing what was already at hand. (See § 155.)
An idea of the impetus which he gave to reading may be
secured from the following figures. For the ten years
preceding the Reformation (1517), the yearly output of
German books had averaged about 110. The numbers
for the next six years were roughly : 1518 — 150 ; 1519
— 260; 1520—570; 1521 — 620; 1522 — 935.
Luther's language is shown in the Lord's Prayer
given bn page 288, which it is interesting to compare
with those of other periods. Since Luther's time Ger-
man has been constantly developing. Goethe and Schil-
ler wrote Tnei)n, fe^n, and so on, as well as inein and fein.
This absence of uniformity has caused a certain official
orthography to be adopted in the schools of Germany.
But many learned men, including some college profes-
sors, are out of sympathy with the new rules, which
are, it must be confessed, peculiar and inconsistent.
The leading authority on this subject is the Drt^ogra*
p^ifc^e^ SBdrterbud) of Konrad Duden, Leipzig.
Chap. 4.] THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 287
The Lord^s Prayer.
357. Gothic, from the Bible of TJlfilas (fourth century
A.D.). — The character p is pronounced like English th;
jah means and.
Atta unsar pn in himinam, weihnai namo fein ; qui-
mai fiudinassus peins ; wairjjai wilja feins, swe in
himina jah ana airfai ; hlaif unsarana fana sinteinan
gif uns himma daga; jah aflet uns ]?atei skulans si-
jaima, swaswe jah weis afletam faim skulam unsaraim
jah ni briggais uns in fraistubnjai, ak lausei uns af
famma ubilin ; (unte J)eina ist fiudangardi jah mahts
jah wulfus in aiwins). amen.
358. Old High German (eighth century). — Notice the
double u for w.
Fater unser, thu in himilom bist, giuuihit si namo
thin, queme richi thin, uuerdhe uuilleo thin, sama
so in himile endi in erthu. Broot unseraz emezzigaz
gib uns hiutu. endi farlaz uns sculdhi unsero, sama so
uuir farlazzem scolom unserem. endi ni gileidi unsih
in costunga. auh arlosi unsih fona ubile.
359. Old High German (tenth century). —
Fater unser du in himele bist. Din namo uu6rde
geheilig6t. Din riche chome. Din uuillo gesc^he in
erdo, also in himele. Unser tagelicha brot kib uns
hiuto. Unde unsere sculde belaz lins, also ouh uuir
belazen unseren sculdigen. Unde in chorunga ne lei-
test du tinsih. Nube lose unsih fone tibele.
288 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [5 362.
360. Middle High German (thirteenth century). —
Vatir unsir der da bist in den himelen. Geheiliget
werde din name. Zu kume dtn riche. Din wille der
werde alse in dem himele und in der erden. Unsir
tegeliche brot gip uns hute. Und vorgip nns unsir
schulde, alse ouch wir vorgebin unseren schuldigeren.
Und in leite uns nicht in bekorunge. Sundern lose
uns von ubele. amen.
361. New High German. Luther's Translation (1522).—
Unfer t)ater tjun bem ^i)tneL T)t\)n name fel) ^etjlig.
!t)et)n rei)(^ !ome, !Det)n tvxik gef(i)e^e auff erben it)ie tjtn
IjtjvxtL Unfer teglic^ brob gib nn§ ^ent, nnb Dergtb nn^
nnfere fc^nlbe, rvk n)tr unfern fc^ulbigern toergeben, nnb fnre
nn^ ntc^t t)nn tjerfnc^nng, fonbern erldfe nn^ Don bent nbet.
(^enn bei)n ift ba^ rei)d), nnb bie frafft, nnb bie t)erU(fei)t
^n en)ig!ei)t.) Slmen.
362. New High German. Modern Version. —
33ater nnfer, ber bn bift in bent gintntel! ®e]^ei(iget
n)erbe bein ^^^ante ; bein 9?eirf) fontnte ; bein SBiHe gefcfte()e,
n)ie int gintntel, alfo and) anf (Srben; nnfer tdglic^ :^rot
gib un^ l)ente ; nnb t^ergib nn^ nnfere (Sc^ulben, n?ie tt)ir
tjergeben nnfern (Sc^nlbigern ; nnb fii^re nn^ nid)t in 33er*
fnd)nng ; fonbern eridfe nn§ Don bent Ubel ; benn bein ift
ba^ 9^eic^ nnb bie ^'raft nnb bie $err(id)teit in @tt)igteit.
5lnten.
CHAPTER V.
MISCELLANEOUS.
363. There are three things, not usually treated in
textbooks, which often make trouble for Americans.
They are (1) words whose form is almost the same in
both languages, but whose meanings differ ; (2) abbre-
viations, of which the Germans are very fond; and
(3) expressions not found in the best literature, but
common in everyday speech.
364. Similar Words. — Many of these similar words
have been treated in Part I. A few of the commonest
not there treated are given below.
Sllfo (therefore) does not mean aho (aud^).
"^Da^ S&tti (floiverhecT) does not mean heet (bte ^iibe).
!5)a^ ^oot (boat) does not mean boot (ber (Sttefet).
^rat) (good^ well-behaved) does not mean brave (tapfer).
:Q3e!ommen (get) does not mean become (tDerben).
gaft (almost) does not mean/as^ (fi^tiett).
T)a^ @i)mnaftum (high school) does not mean gymnasium
(bte ^urnt)a((e).
§a(tett (hold) does not mean halt (ati^Iten).
!Der ^0^1 (cabbage) does not mean coal (bie ^o^Ie).
!l)er SO^tmfter (minister of war) does not mean minister
(preacher, ber '^rebtger).
jDte §0(f)fc^ule (college) does not mean high school (^a^
©ijmnafium),
289
290 GERMAN COMPOSITION. [§366.
!Der ^^otograp^ (^photographer^ does not mean photograph
(bie "ip^otograp^ie).
T)tx ^la^ (seat) does not mean place (ber Crt).
!iDer 9^e!tor (principal) does not mean rector (ber '^farrer).
!r)er (Sinn (sense) does not mean «m (bie Siinbe).
(Ste'^en (stand) does not mean s^a?/ (bleiben).
T)tx (Stu^l (chair) does not mean 8^ooZ (ber S^entel).
33or (in front of) does not mean /or (fiir).
365. Abbreviations. — Germans are very partial to
abbreviations. We find them not only on signs and
notices, but in books as well. And they always obscure
the sense unless we know what words they stand for.
Except in the case of weights and measurements, a Ger-
man abbreviation should always be followed by a period.
Some abbreviations are common to both languages :
p.p.c. (pour prendre conge, to take leave), cf. (confer,
compare), etc. (et csetera, and so forth), i.e. (id est,
that is), N.B. (nota bene, note carefully), sc. (scilicet,
namely), and so on. But in most cases German prefers
abbreviations of its own words, and uses for the first
four above : U.l.j.n. (Um ^Ibfd^teb ju ne^men), tjgl. (t)er=
^\t\6)t), uftt). (nnb fo treiter), b.^. (bag ^eigt). Below are
given some of the commonest abbreviations with their
full meaning in German and in English.
^b., ^anb, volume, vol,
b^h)., bejtet)unggn)eife, or (literally, respectively),
bgL, bergleic^en, of the same hind.
b.^., ba« ^eigt, that is, i.e.
b. ^., biefe« 3at)re«, of this year.
b. a??., biefe« aJ^^onat^, of this month, inst.
(Stt). (iu., (5uer (S^gellenj, your excellency.
Chap. 5.] MISCELLANEOUS, 291
geb., geboren, born^ (*).
geft., geftorben, died, (f).
@. m» b. §., (^efellfc^aft mtt bef^riinfter gaftung, Company
with limited liability, Ltd.
9)^, 3J^ar!, quarter, about twenty-four cents.
m, Tltttv, meter, a measure of length,
n. (St)r. ®., nad) ^^riftt ©eburt, a/ifer ^^e birth of Christ, A.D.
^ap., ^apttel, chapter. Chap.
t. ^v tdntgltc^ taiferlic^, Eoi/al Imperial; ^qL, ^dnigUc^,
Royal.
refp. (ref))ectit)e), beguglic^ertDeife, m^A regard or r^/er-
f., fie^e, see, vid.
fog., fogenannt, so- called.
u., unb, a9^c?, &.
U. 51. ti). g., Um 3lTith)ort tt)trb gebeten, a?2 answer is requested,
please reply, r.s.v.p. (repondez s'il vous plait).
uftP., 2C., unb fo ireiter, and so forth, etc.
t). ^^r. ®., Dor (^^rifti ©eburt, 5g/org the birth of Christ,
B.C.
tjgL, t)erg(et(^e, compare, cf.
0. 3., tjerfloffenen 3^a^re^, Zasf ?/ear.
t). 3J^., oergangenen 3}Zonat^, Zas^ month, ult.
3. ^., ^um ^t\\)^xt{,for instance, e.g. (exempli gratia).
366. Colloquial German. — There are many expres-
sions in German which seldom find their way into books,
but which are very common in everyday speech. Some
of them are perfectly good German, while others border
on slang. They need not be learned, but people who
visit Germany will hear them often and will feel more
at home for having seen them in print.
292 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§366.
Below are given about a hundred of the commonest
of these expressions. It is impossible to translate most
of them, but an effort has been made to give as nearly
as possible their American equivalent, even when they
are slang.
^IbtDCirt^! Going down! (of an elevator).
Q^ ^abe fetne b(affe 5l^nung, fetnen (Scf)imtner. I haven't
the dimmest idea, not an inkling.
T)ie 2^inte tft aik. The ink is gone (used up}.
T)ie 5lngftrt)^re, stove-pipe hat Q'tiW).
m\6)\ (or etfc^!) I told you so! What did I tell you!
Serves you right !
5luf tDcirt^ ! Going up! (of an elevator).
!Der :53a(ffifrf), young girl.
^iiffeln, o^fen, to grind, to ''hone'' (of students),
^ocf ig, pigheaded.
^ummeln, to loaf., to gad about.
!l)a§ T)ing^, what- do- you- call-it (used when one cannot
think of the name of something),
gatno^'! fine Q' great").
gibeC, freugftbet, cheerful, a '^ good fellow."
gijr unb fertig, all ready ; fitn!, quick.
glbten ge^en, to disappear, get lost.
gron! unb fret, free as air.
^tx %Vi^i, freshman (student).
Jutfd), gone, disappeared.
©ang unb gcibe, customary, the regular thing.
X)te ®efd)icf)te, thing, business. 3e^t ift bie ganje ©e-
fd)ic^te laput'! Now the whole thing (business) is
busted!
X)a^ ©igerl, fop, dude.
Chap. 5.] MISCELLANEOUS, 293
T)er ®(tmmftenge(, cigar ("weed''}.
jDer (^rof rf)en, rdckel (a ten Pfennig piece} .
§a(t, just. 30^an nennt fie ^a(t nur (Sc^tt)abenftret(^e. We
just call them ^^ Swahian strokes.'' —Vi^Xau'a,
§anbel unb Sanbet, ^r«c?e.
(Sr ^at ®e(b tuie §eu (hay}. He's got money to hum.
§mfe|en! Down in front! (in a grandstand).
3n giille unb giiKe, m abundance.
3^, iDo! (eittja^!) TFeZZ, 2^'e^Z/ or What do you think of
that! Also, Not by a long shot! The meaning
varies with the intonation.
^a« ift jammerfc^abe ! That's a burning shame !
Sir trotten i^n !a(t ftellen. TTe'ZZ ^t^^ Am on the shelf.
(5r ift etn ^ameeC ! He's an ass !
^apnt', smashed ("-busted").
^te! 'mat or gucf' mal! e7ws« ?oo^/ ("pipe ").
3J^it ^inb unb ^egel, with bag and baggage.
Mxpp unb flar, clear as day.
^natt unb gad, suddenly^ slam-bang !
^te ^nei:pe, co/^^ or meeting place., or meeting "joint"
(student),
^nipfen, to photography to " snap."
^oloffaC or riefig, huge, "great." Un^etmlic^ is used
mostly with t)te(, an awful lot.
^(Jnnen oor i^ad^en! Yes, if — / Like ducks!
(gr ^at etnen ^orb (basket:) befommen! He got the mitten!
®er ^ijter, dog, cur.
^riegen, to get. SBarte nur, tc^ !rteg' i^n fc^on ! Just wait,
I'll get him / — @ o c t ^ e.
iDte ^anbratte, landlubber; bte SSafferratte, sailor, "tar."
Cebern, dry, wooden (of stories),
geiber ®otte^ ! More's the pity !
294 GERMAN COMPOSITION, [§366.
•
S'^un, man log ! Well, go ahead !
'^SRxtlt, Wlklt ! Kitty, kitty !
:Dag ift ja 9}^umpi^! or Quatfc^! also, ^apperlapapp!
Stuff and nonsense ! Tommy rot! 9f?ebe fein ^(ed^ !
BonH talk nonsense !
S^lanu'! Well, what' s up !
^ee, no Q'nit''}. '^i^ (for nt^t^), nothing.
T)er ^ec^oogel, jooor tZmZ/ (Ste armer "iped^tjoget, Aarc?
?2^cAr, oZcZ man! The opposite of ber ©(ud^pilg,
lucky dog.
T)er ^l^iUfter, any one not a student.
•iPumpen, to borrow or Zew(7. ^utnp' mir 'ne SJiarf ! Zewc?
me a mark!
jDer 9?abau', racket, noise.
9^ouf, raug, rein, rum, runter (for ^erauf, etc.), up, out, in,
around, under,
'^k alte (Sc^acf)te(, old maid.
@cf)(ecl)t unb rec^t, simple and straightforward.
Sie ein (Sc^Io^unb ^eulen, to yell like fury.
©alt ben@c^nabe(! galt'^ay^auU Shut up!
(S(i)neiben, to cut (^an acquaintance').
(Sc^tDcinjen, to cut (a lecture or lesson).
T)a^ ift mir gan^ ©c^nuppe! Idont care a hang!
T)tx (S^tDipS, jag.
SSoKen iDir h)a§ fteigen laffen? iS'AaZ? we start something?
Uber (Stod unb Stein, off the beaten path, up hill and
down dale.
T)er UI!, joke ; ulfig, funny ; Oerulfen, to make ridiculous.
Unl^eimlirf), uncomfortable, gloomy, used chiefly with t)ie(,
an awful lot.
Un'folib, sporty, fast, leading a gay life. jDer St^ttjipg,
jag.
Chap. 5.] MISCELLANEOUS, 295
3SerbummeIn, to blow in, to squander.
^Serbuften, to sneak off^ disappear.
(5r ift in fie oernarrt! lies dippy about (in love with')
her.
3Serfo^(en, to thrash, ''lick.'" Also buri^^auen, buri^=
priigein, and burc^^o(3en.
T)tv So(!en!ra^er, skyscraper.
Surft tt)iber Surft! Tit for tat. '^a^ ift mir Surft!
That's all the same to me ! I dont care a rap !
!Da^ ^tVi^, stuff (contemptuous); bummed 3^^9^ Stuff
and nonsense !
^\t ^Xoxt^ti, watch Q' turnip''). ^Vox^^'dUf to plague,
bother.
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
AND INDEX.
%aii)tn, bag, Aachen, Aix-la-Cha-
pelle, the capital of Charle-
magne's Empire.
tt&bringctt, brocf)tc ab, abgebrac^t
(^aben), to dissuade.
Stbcnb, ber, bie -e, evening ; writ-
ten without a capital with ad-
verbs : geftcrn abenb.
abcr, but, § 43, 1.
ttlbgcnommcn, see abne^men.
$[b(aut, ber, bic -e, ablaut, change
in the root vowel of a word.
alitte^mett, na^m ah, abgenommen
(^aben), er nimmt ah, to take
off.
afircifctt, reg., sep. (fein), to go
away, depart.
a6fc^Ctt,fa^ ab, abgefel)en (l^aben),
er fie^t ab, to look aside ; abge-
f e^eti t)on, aside from .
ah^kf\in, jog ab, abgejogen
(tiaben), to go off or away.
alisubringen, see abbringeii.
ttb3«rcifcn, see abreifen.
tt(^, oh, ah.
a^tf eight ; niorgen iiber— Sage, a
week from to-morrow.
3tgcnf , ber, beg -en, bie -en, agent.
^Ihvt^tf ber, Albert; Albrecht
Durer, Germany''s great artist,
§ 116 and § 144.
aU, all, § 113, 2 ; alle beibe, both,
§ 170, 2, Note b.
aUtin', alone.
aUtvt^iUQ^', to be sure ; it is true,
§274.
al», when, § 84, 1 ; as, § 83, 2 ;
correlative, than, as, § 83, 1.
al^Of so, then, § 26, 2 ; sometimes
omitted in translating.
ali, otter, otteft, old, older, oldest.
wxif see an betn; with superl.,
§ 119, 3, Note, and § 218, 1.
5(merifa, ba^, America.
Stmcrifa'ttcr, ber, bie — , Ameri-
can.
amufic'rctt fic^, amiifierte, amu=
fiert' (^aben), to have a good
time, § 50, 5.
ttn, prep., at, to, in, on, § 119, 1 ;
of (benfeit an), to (gett)o^nt an),
§ 119, 2 ; with adjs., § 119, 3 ;
special uses, § 119, 3, Note ; —
etn)ag oorbei, past ; sep. prefix,
as in anbieten, angretfen, h\
onbictctt, bot an, angeboten (^a=
ben), to offer.
anbcr, other, § 30, 1.
ttttfangctt, fing an, angefangen
(t)aben), er fdngt an, to begin,
§ 180, 2.
anfii^rcn, reg., sep. (^aben), to
bring in, use as an illustration.
ange^en, ging an, angegangen (^a*
297
angelai^t
298
an^
ben), with ace, to be to, § 206,
2, Note.
angclat^t (anlac^cn), smiled at.
aitgcttc^m, agreeable, § 171, 2,
Note.
angcfc^cn (anfc^en), respected.
tttigretfcn, griff an, angegriffen
(^aben), to attack.
antommtn, tarn an, angefommcn
(fein), to arrive ; ha^ fommt
barauf an, that depends.
anla^tn, reg., sep. (^aben), to
smile at.
3tttlattt, ber, tie -e, anlaut, the be-
ginning sound of a word or
syllable.
ttnncl^mcn, nal^m an, angenom*
men (^aben), er nimmt an, to
accept.
Stnrcbc, bie, bie -en, address.
ttnfc^Ctt, \a\) an, angefe^en (t)aben),
er fiet)t an, to look at ; angeje*
l^en, looked up to, respected.
an^aitf instead of; with gu, § 181 ;
with ta% § 190.
5(ttton, ber, Anton, Antony.
^nttoovif bte, bie -en, answer,
reply.
antwortcn, reg. (tjabcn), to an-
swer, reply, to, anf with ace.
anjubictcn, see anbieten.
anjufangcn, see anfangen.
5(n5Mfl, ber, bie 3lnjiige, suit.
ntt-^ttttcljmcii, see annel)men.
on5ufcl)cn, see anjel)en.
5(rbcit, bie, bie -en, work, la-
bor.
otbcitcn, reg. (Ijaben), to work.
rivgcru, reg. (t)aben), to anger,
irritate.
arm, poor; ®ie ^rnifte(r), you
poor thing !
3(rmtttiu§, ber, Armin or Her-
mann, the German leader (chief
of the Cherusker) who won the
battle of the Teutoburg Forest,
§1.
ttttl^, also, too, § 100, 4, Note ;
ever, 257, 2.
anf, prep., on, upon, § 120, 1 ; at,
to, § 120, 3, Note a ; for, § 8 ;
with verbs, § 120, 2 ; toith adjs.,
§ 120, 3 ; in idioms, § 120, 3,
Note b ; — bem 2Jior!te, in the
market (place) ; — beutfd), —
engUfd), in German, in Eng-
lish ; — bem ^ogelfang, fowling
("bird-shooting"); — biefe
SSeife, in this way; aufS -ftc
(superl.), in the -est way,
§ 218, 2 ; sep. prefix, as in auf=
boren, anfmac^fen, etc.
3(ufgabc, bie, bie -n, exercise.
aufge^ijrt, see aufl)oren.
oufgcnommen, see aufne^mcn.
auf^iircit, reg., sep. (^abcn), to
stop, § 180, 2.
aufnc^men, nal)m anf, aufgenom«
men (l)aben), er nimmt auf, to
take up, receive.
auftreten^ trat auf, oufgctreten
(jein), er tritt auf, to step up,
appear (on the stage).
aufwad)cn, reg., sep. (jein), to
wake up.
auf^u^iircn, see aufl)i3ren.
^luflCttblirf, ber, bte -e, moment.
5(ii0ttftuc(, ber, Augustus, Roman
Emperor.
Ott^, prep., out of, from, § 94, 1 ;
duSbred^en
299
Scgriff
of, § 94, 2 ; — btefem@runbp, for
this reason ; oon iro aug, (from)
where, § 46 ; sep. prefix^ as in
ougbre(i)en, augrufen, etc.
au^brcj^cn, brac^ au«, oitgge=
bro(i)en (fetn), er bri(^t au§, to
break out.
iltt^gerufctt, see augrufen.
auggcjeic^ttct (ougjeic^nen), dis-
tinguished.
9(tt!§Iattt, ber, bie -e, auslaut, «/ie
end sound of a word or syllable.
Ott^mai^Ctt, reg., sep. (^aben), to
make a difference.
au^^tuttbcrtt, reg.^ sep. (^abcit),
to rob, pillage.
au^riifcn, rief ou8, au§gerufen
(f)aben), to call out, cry out.
ttU^ru^Ctt fit^, re/?., res'., «e/). (I)a^
ben), to rest.
tttt^fc^Ctt, fa^ au8, auggefel)en
(l^abcn), to look, appear,
au^ttiattbcrii, reg., sep. (fetn), to
emigrate, go to.
tttt§5Ct(^ttCtt ft(^, re^., regr., sep.
(^aben), to distinguish one-
self; anggej^eid^net, distin-
guished.
ttu^Stt^tttttbent, see augplunbern.
Baben, reg. (^aben), to bathe.
6alb, soon.
S3anb, bag, bie '^er, ribbon, band.
\s(ii, see bitten.
bauctt, reg. (t)abcn).
JBaucr, ber, beg -g or -n, bie -n,
peasant.
Saucrfratt, bie, bie -en, peasant
woman.
23autc, bie, bie -n, building.
SBcantttJortUttg, bie, bie -en, an-
swer (to), reply (to).
ficbaucn, reg., insep. (tjaben), to
till (the soil).
Bebcttfctt, beboc^te,beboc^t(f)aben),
to consider ; to remember.
bcbCtttCtt, reg,, insep. (^aben), to
mean ; bebeutenb, important,
prominent.
S3cbctttttng, bie, bie -en, impor-
tance ; meaning.
S3cbtCttttttg, bie, bie -en, service.
^CCt^otJCtt, ber, Beethoven, one
of Germany''s greatest musi-
cians, § 240 and § 245.
bcfttttb, see befinben.
bcfc^tctt, befal)(, befol)ten (tjaben),
er befie^It, with dat., to com-
mand, order, § 197, 2.
Bcftnbctt ft(^, refl., befanb, be=
fnnben (l)aben), to find oneself,
to be, to do, § 206, 1 ; 2Bie be-
finben 3te fid)? How do you
do?
befrcictt, reg., insep. C^aben), to
free, set free.
ftcganit, see beginnen.
fiegC0ttCtt, reg., insep. (jein), with
dat., to meet, come upon, § 166,
Note, and § 171, 2.
BcotttttCtt, begann, bcgonnen (^a=
ben), to begin, § 146.
bcgniigctt, reg., insep. (f)aben), to
satisfy ; fid) — , reflex., to con-
tent oneself, to be content.
Bcgralbctt, begrnb, begraben (l)o-
ben), er begrcibt, to bury, inter.
SBcgrtff, ber, bie -e, idea; int —
fein, to be about to, § 193, 3.
Scjjrftnbung
300
bcjfcr
Scgriittbttttjj, tie, bic -en, estab-
lishing, establishment.
begrit^en^ reg., insep. (Ijaben), to
greet.
bc^aJtctt, bcl)ielt, bc^altcn (^aben),
cr bel^cilt, to keep, retain ; to
remember.
Be^anbeln, regr., insep. (^abcn),
to treat, to use.
hcf^auptttlf reg., insep. (^aben),
to maintain ; ftd^ — , reflex. , to
maintain oneself.
Bc^crrfl^Ctt, reg., insep. (^abeit),
to rule, be ruler of.
bci, prep.^ near, by, beside, § 96,
1 ; with, § 95, 3 ; to denote cir-
cumstances^ § 95, 2 ; sep. prefix
as in beifiigen.
Bctbe, both, 170, 1 ; neuter, § 170,
2; bie -n, the two, § 170, 2,
Note a; aiie —, § 170, 2,
Note 6.
bcifitgctt, regr., sep. (tjaben), to
include in, add to.
bcim, see bet bem.
bcitttt^C, almost.
SBctf^icI, bag, bie -e, example;
jum — , for instance.
bcipfilflCtt, see betfiigen.
befannt, well-known.
befanntHi!^, adv.^ as is well known,
you know.
befommen, betom, bcfommcn (l^a=
ben), to get, secure, procure,
§ 42, 1.
bcraflcrn, reg.^ insep. (^aben), to
besiege.
Sclaflenmg, bic, bie -en, siege.
beltebt, beliebteft, popular, most
populfvr {not beloved, gcUcbt).
bcmcrfctt, reg.^ insep. (^aben), to
notice.
^trmi^tn or benii^cn, reg., insep.
(^abcn), to use, make use of.
bcrcti^crn, reg., insep. (^abcn),
to enrich.
bcreit, ready, § 195, 1.
Scrg, ber, bie -c, mountain.
Scrlittcr, adj. (of) Berlin.
Sern, ba«, Verona {when used
icith Dietrich, not modern
Bern) .
Scruf, ber, bie -e, calling, trade.
bcrii^mt, famous,
befa^, see beftl^en.
befd^aftigen, reg., insep. (I)aben),
to employ; ftd^ — tnit, reflex.,
to busy oneself with.
S3cfi^oftigutt{|, bte, bic -en, busi-
ness, occupation.
bcfd^Hc^ctt, befrf)Ioft, befrf)Ioffen
(^aben), to decide, § 268, 2.
bcfi^loffctt, see bef(^Uc^en.
bcficgctt, reg., insep. (^aben), to
conquer, loith obj., § 135, 3;
ber S3efiegte, be§ -n, bte -n, the
conquered one, the vanquished.
befi^cn, befog, befeffen (ijahen),
to possess.
S3cfi^cr, ber, bie — , owner, pos-
sessor.
befonber, adj., especial, particu-
lar.
befonberiS^ adv., especially.
befpred^en, befpradj, befproci)en
(^aben), cr befpridjt, to talk
over.
befprof^en, see bcfprecl)cn.
beffcr, better, compar. of gut,
good.
deft
301
bmgen
Beft, best, am beften, superl. of
gut, good.
bcftanb, see befte^en.
bcftc^ett, beftanb, beftanbcn (^a*
ben), to consist, of, au8, § 269,
1 ; to insist, on, auf, § 269, 2 ;
to pass {an examination), § 269,
2, Note.
ficftcltctt, regr., insep. (I^aben), to
order, § 197, 1.
defttt^en, regr., iwsep. (^aben), to
visit ; to attend.
htiomn, reg., insep. (^aben), to
emphasize.
23cdi)Ifcrttttg, bte, bie -en, popula-
tion.
IbctJor, con;., before.
ficwunbcrn, regr., insep. (^aben),
to admire.
ht^at^httf reg., insep. (^aben), to
pay.
mM, bie, bie -n, Bible.
bictcn, bot, geboten (^aben), to
offer, see also anbteten.
bin, am, see fein.
S^ittbe, bie, bie -n, bandage.
hi§, conj., till, until ; prep., till,
§ 107, 1 ; as far as, § 107, 2.
U^cv', previously, up- till now,
or then.
Si^marrf, ber, Bismarck, the
^^ Iron Chancellor'^ of Wil-
liam 7, §§ 277 and 278.
hiiit, please; you're welcome,
§ 15, 1, Note, see bitten.
bitten, bat, gebeten (t)aben), to
ask, § 15, 1.
blciben, btieb, geblieben (jein), to
stay, remain, § 180, 1.
hlo^i adv., just, only.
blii^cn, reg. (t)aben), to bloom,
blossom.
Stttmc, bie, bie -n, flower.
Soben, ber, bte — and "■, bottom ;
floor ; ground, § 260, Note.
S3ogen, ber, bte — , sheet {of pa-
per) ; arch {of building) ; bow
{in archery).
bijfc, angry, at, auf with ace.
J8o^ton, bag, Boston.
bot, see bieten.
S3otc, ber, be8 -n, bie -n, mes-
senger.
Sotfd^aft, bte, W -en, message;
embassy.
brad^, see breci)en.
brar^te, see bringen.
S3ranbcttbnrg, ba«, Brandenburg,
the province from which the
modern kingdom of Prussia
has developed.
S3ratttittrftgIorfIcin, t>a^, the Brat-
wurstglocklein, a famous little
eating place in Nuremberg, lit.,
roast sausage little bell.
brant^cn, reg. (^aben), to need.
braun, brown.
Sraut, bte, bie 53rdute, fiancee
{not bride).
brc(^en, brac^, gebrod)en (^aben),
er bri(i)t, to break, see also
augbred^en, to break out.
S5rcmcn, bag, Bremen, a North
German city.
23rief, ber, bte -e, letter.
S3neff(^rciben, "iia^, beg -g, letter
writing, correspondence.
bringen, hxa^^it, gebract)t (^aben),
to bring, see also un'ter=
bringen, to shelter.
^tntS^
302
benett
^vntS)f ber, bic H, breach.
a3rurfc, bie, btc -n, bridge.
S3rttbcr, ber, ble ", brother.
S3rttft, bie, bic H, breast.
2Jui^, bag, bie Hx, book.
S3ut^bnirfcr, ber, bie — , printer.
S3ut^brucfcrfttttft, bie, ber — , art
of printing.
S3ttci^^attbc(, ber, beg -8, book
business, book trade.
Sut^ftafic, ber, beg -n, or -ng, bie
-n, letter (of the alphabet).
Bilrfctt, reg. (^abett), to bend, bow.
S3ttnb, ber, bie H, alliance.
93ttniic§genoffc, ber, bie -n, ally.
83nrg, bie, bie -en, fortress, strong-
hold, castle.
SBitrgcr, ber, bie — , citizen,
burgher.
S3ttrgcr!rtcg, ber, bie -e, civil war.
S3iir0crf(i^u(e, bie, bie -n, public
school.
(S^araftcr, ber, bie dljorafte're,
character.
6l)nftctt^cit, bie, ber — , (the peo-
ple of) Christianity.
e^rifttt^, ber, (beg) ei)rtftl, Christ.
ba, conj., as, § 17, 8 ; adv., there,
§ 16, 2 ; and then, § 17, 1 and
§69,3; here, §17,2.
barfjtc, see benfen.
bdfiir, for it; in it (with to be
interested); help it, § 39, 2.
banCfiCtt, against it ; etluag —
I)Qben, to have any objections.
bo^cr, along, § 247, 1.
baljcrgcfommcn, see ba^erfommen,
ba^erfommctt, fam ba^er, bat)cr»
gefommeu (fein), to come
along.
ba^tn, along, thither,
ba^ittflie^cn, f(o^ ba^in, bo^ingc^
ftoffen (fetn), to flow along.
bamal^, at that time, then, § 59, 2.
^am^fcrli'nic, bie, bie -n, steam-
ship line.
^ttttfbarfctt, bie, ber — , grati-
tude.
ban!en, reg. (^aben), with dat., to
thank.
bttttlt, then, next, § 59, 1.
baran', of it.
barauf, upon it ; of it (ftolj); to
it (antraorten) ; bag fommt —
on, that depends.
hatavL^', out of that, from that,
or it.
barf, barfft, may, see biirfen.
bargcftcttt, see barftellen.
barill', therein, in the fact that.
barftcttctt, reg., sep. (t)aben), to
represent.
bariibcr, about it.
t^aSf the, that, which, see ber.
bafe, conj., that, § 211, 1.
bottcrn, reg. (^aben), to take, to
last, § 183, 1.
bation', of it, from it, from there ;
away.
batiottfommen, fam baton, bat)on<
gcfommen (fein), to get away,
escape.
bcttt, your (bu).
bcm, dat., see ber.
ben, ace, see ber.
benett, dat. pi., see ber.
bcttfctt
303
burc^naffctt
beitleti, bod)te, geba(i)t (^aben), to
think, of, an, § 41, 1, Don, § 41,
2.
'^tnlmaif i^a^, ble ''er and -t,
monument.
benn, conj.^ for with the normal
order ; particle to be omitted in
translating, § 33 ; 7ioi then,
§59.
bcr, bie, bo8, article, the, § 223 ;
demonstrative, that, gen., beffen,
beren, beffen, § 211, 3 a ; relative,
who, which, that, gen., beffen,
beren, beffen, § 208.
bcs*, gen., see ber.
be^^atb, therefore, for that rea-
son.
beffen, gen. of ber, or n^etrfier,
whose, of which.
befto, correl. of\e, the, § 223.
beutetn, reg. (^aben), to explain
away, quibble over.
beutft^, German ; auf — , in Ger-
man ; ber ®eutfc!^e, be8 -n, bie
-n, the German (citizen) ; ta^
S)entfc^(e), be§-n, German (lan-
guage) ; cr fprid^t 2)eutfc^, he
speaks German ; in8 2)eutfd^e,
into German ; tnt ®eutfd)en, in
German, § 156 ; origin, § 354.
^eutfd^tattb, ta^, Germany.
bicfj, you, yourself (familiar), see
bu.
^iti^ter, ber, bie — , poet.
^tt^tfuttft, bie, bie "e, poetry, art
of making verse.
bitf, thick.
bie, see ber.
btefer, biefe, btefeg, or bie«, this ;
pi., these. •
'J)tetri«^, ber, Dietrich, Theodoric.
^xnQ, bag, bie -e, thing ; Dor alien
-en, above all.
btr, you, to you, dat., see bn.
^ivtt'ioVf ber, bie S)ire!tor'en,
director, principal.
bod^, yet, but, after all ; yes,
§ 237, 1 ; pray, with the impera-
tive, § 237, 2 ; is it, etc., § 237,
2, Note.
^ohnetfr^er, ber, bie — , inter-
preter.
bort, there, yonder, over there,
§ 16, 1.
'^V,f abhrev. for S)o!tor, Dr.
^rat^e, ber, be^ -n, bie -n, dragon.
^rnt^enblut, ba§, beg -eg, dragon's
blood.
^rang, ber, beg -eg, impulse.
brc^eit, reg. (^aben), to twist.
brct, three.
brei^tg, thirty.
bret^igja^rtg, lasting 30 years ;
ber -e ^rieg, the Thirty Years'
War.
britt, third.
^ro^ttttg, bie, bie -en, threat.
bnirfcn, reg. (^aben), to print.
^rurferet, bie, bie -en, printing,
printing office.
bit, you, thou ; used with intimate
friends.
burt^, through, § 108 ; by.
burt^'fit^ren, reg., sep. (^aben),
to put through, carry out.
burc^'fommen, tarn bnrd), burc^ge-
fommen (fein), to come through,
get through, pass.
burd^ttaffett, reg.,insep. (l)aben),
to soak through, wet through.
burt^reifctt
804
tmpot
burc^rci'fcn, reg.^ insep. (Ijaben),
to travel through, to "do."
^iircr, bcr, Albrecht Diirer, Ger-
many'^s leading artist in the
sixteenth century^ § 116 and
§144.
biirfctt, burfte, geburft (I)abcn), cr
barf, may, to be permitted,
§ 75, 1.
burfte, see biirfen.
cbcn, so, § 26, 2, Note; just,
§ 196, 2, Note.
cficnfo, just so.
cbcl, ebter, noble, nobler.
t\)t, before, § 248, 1.
@^c^aar, bag, bie -e, married
couple.
6^rc, bie, bic -tt, honor.
e^ren, reg'. (l)aben), to honor.
(Sid^ftr. /or (Sidjftra^c, Oak St.
^tfcrfttd^t, bic, ber — , jealousy.
cifrifl, eager(Iy).
cigcn, (one's) own.
ciflCtttlit^, really, § 33.
citcii, reg. (^aben), to hasten.
cin, a, an ; one ; ber eine, the one,
§ 29, 2 ; sep. prefix as in ein=
fatten, etc.
Ctnanber, each other, one another ;
combines loith prepositions as
one word : tniteinanbcr, etc,
einbriugctt, braiij] cin, einge-
brungen (^abcn), to press into ;
to invade.
cinfrtd^, simple, simply.
©infttit, ber, bie ''e, idea.
cittfattctt, fiel ein, eingefatten
(jeln), to occur to, loith dat.,
§ 231, 2 ; I shouldn't think of,
e8 fottt ntlr nid^t ein, § 41, 1,
Note.
cittftcl, see einfatten.
eingefalten, see cinfaUen.
cittgcfd^tafctt, see einfdjtafen.
ctttig, pron., some ; toor einiger
3eit, some time ago j ad;.,
united.
etuigen, reg.^ (i^aben), to make
one, unite.
einnta(, once, once upon a time.
eitt'mifd^cn, reg.^ sep. (^aben), to
mix in ; fid) — , reflex.., to " butt
in."
ctnfd^Iafctt, fd^tief ein, eingefd)fafen
(fein), er fc^Idft cin, to go to
sleep, fall asleep.
Ctnft, once (upon a time).
cintraf, see cintreffen.
ciittrcffctt, traf ein, eingetroffen
(fein), to arrive.
Ctttjtg, single, § 9 ; only, § 185, 2.
ciitjubringcn, see einbrtngen.
©ifcttba^tt, bie, bie -en, railroad.
©Icftrijitat', bie, bic -en, elec-
tricity.
^Icttb, ba8, beS -S, misery,
c(f, eleven.
cmpftt^r, see empfet)(en.
cm^fnnb, see empfinben.
empfriugcit, enipfing, cmpfangen
(Ijaben), cr cmpfdngt, to re-
ceive, § 261, 2.
empfe^fen, empfal)t, cmpfo^fen
(Ijaben), ev empfie^tt, to recom-
mend.
cmpfittbctt, cmpfanb, empfunben
(^aben), to feel, experience.
empor, up, aloft.
cmportttgctt
305
crtrtttfctt
tmpov'vaQtn, reg., sep. (^abcn),
to loom up, to jut out.
©ttbc, bog, bie -n, end.
Cttblid^, finally.
©ttgtanbcr, ber, bie — , English-
man.
englif^, English ; auf — , in Eng-
lish.
tnttv'hcn, reg., insep. (^abcn), to
disinherit.
Ctttrattg', along, § 247, 1.
cntfj^ctbctt, cntfd)ieb, entfc^ieben
(^aben), to decide, § 258, 1 ;
entf(i)ieben, adv., decidedly.
Ctttfli^Kc^Ctt ft(i^, rejl., tw\.\6)\Q%
entf(i)toffen (^aben), to decide,
§ 258, 2.
Ctttft^Io^, see cntf(^Iie§cn.
Ctttftanb, see entftel)en.
Ctttftc^en, cntftanb, cntftanben
(feiii), to arise, have its start ;
to begin.
cr, \\t, c8, he, she, it, § 207,
Note.
crbottCtt, reg., insep. (f)aben), to
erect, build.
crfilcffcn, reg., insep. (fein), to
grow pale,^^., to die.
©rfa^rung, bie, bie -en, experi-
ence.
crfattb, see erfinben.
crftttbctt, erfanb, erfunben (^aben),
to invent.
etgangen, see crgef)en.
crgcBctt m, refl., ergab, ergeben
(f)aben), er ergibt fid), to sur-
render; adj., respectful; erg 6="
benft, very respectfully.
crgc^cn, ergiiig, ergangen (fein),
impers. with daL, to go, to
fare ; ebenfo ift es if)m mit
feinem 9ietc^e ergongcn, just so
he fared in regard to his realm,
cr^ttftctt, er^ielt, ert)alten (Ijabeti),
er ert)dlt, to keep ; to receive,
§ 261, 1; ft(^ — , reflex., to
maintain oneself.
er^telt, see erl^alten.
cr^olctt fi(^, reflex., reg., insep.
(i)oben), to recover.
crittttcrit, reg., insep. (^aben), to
remind ; fid) — , reflex., with gen.
or an and ace, to remember.
crfcttttCtt, erfonnte, erfannt
(baben), to recognize.
crflarctt, reg., insep. (J^ahtn), to
explain; .frieg — , to declare
war. •
crlaubctt, reg., insep. (baben),
with dat., to allow.
crtcttJ^tctt, reg., insep. (f)abeit), to
light, illumine.
croficrit, reg., insep. (I)obeii), to
conquer.
crri^tctt, reg., insep. (t)aben), to
erect, put up.
crf^cittCtt, erf rf) ten, erfd^ienen
(fein), to appear.
crf(^icn, see erf(^einen.
crft^tagctt, erf(f)tug, erfc^tagen
(^aben), er erfd)tagt, to kill.
erf(i^(u0, see erfd)tagen.
crftcr -C -C§, adj., first, § 268, 1 ;
adv., for the first time ; only,
just, not till, § 185, 1, 6.
crfttt^Ctt, reg., insep. (^aben), to
request, beg.
tvivanlf see ertrinfen.
ertnn!ctt, ertranf, ertrunfen (fein),
to drown, be drowned.
crttiaj^ctt
806
fid
crttJa^cn, regr., insep. (fcltt), to
awake.
erWtt^tcn, reg., insep. (^aBcn), to
choose.
tr^afjhn, reg.^ insep. (f)aben), to
tell, relate, § 28, 1.
©rs'^crjog, ber, bie -e and '^e,
archduke.
tS, it ; there (or omit), § 85, 1, 2
and Note ; loi^A feitt aiid plural
attribute, they, those, § 211, 3,
6, Note.
tttoa, about, § 193, 2.
ettttaS, something, anything; a
following adjective is written
with a capital: ettt)a8 @uteg,
§217.
tn(lf)f dat. and ace. of U)x, you.
ttttv, your.
(^nvopa, ba«, Europe.
©jarncn, ba«, bic (Sjamina, ex-
amination.
Q^trnplav', bag, bic -e, copy, sam-
ple.
f^ttftrifat', ba8, bic -c, manufac-
ture.
fa^rcn, fu^r, gefa^ren (fein or
ijahtn, § 167), er fd^rt, to drive,
ride, go (by train) ; see also
fortfa^ren, to continue.
^aU, htx, bic "c, case ; auf fctncn
— , by no means, under no cir-
cumstances ; Quf allc ^aUe, at
any rate, anyway.
faHctt, fict, flefallen (fein), cr faEt,
to fall ; see also ciufollcn, ^cr*
fatten, jufammcnfatten.
falls, conjunc, in case.
fattt, see fallen.
falfd^, wrong ; false.
^amilic, bie, bie -n (four sylla-
bles), family.
^ang, ber, bie H, catch.
fangcn, fing, gefangen (l^aBen), er
fangt, to catch ; see also an*
fangcn, to begin.
faffctt, reg. (^aben), to take; to
interpret.
faft, almost.
^cd^tCtt, baS, be8 -8, fencing,
sword play.
IJcbcr, bie, bie -n, pen.
fc^tcn, reg. (^aben), with dat, to
lack; benen prattijd)e ©rfal^*
rung fel)tte, who lacked prac-
tical experience.
%t\)Ux, ber, bie — , mistake.
f^ctcrtag, ber, bie -c, holiday.
fcttt, delicate, fine.
f^Ctttb, ber, bic -c, enemy, foe.
I^ctb^crr, ber, bes -n, bic -en,
general.
i^clbsujj, ber, bie H, campaign.
f^crbittoub, ber, Ferdinand.
§crufprc(^cr, ber, bic — , tele-
phone.
fertiji, ready ; through, finished,
§ 196, 2.
fcft, firm(ly), thoroughly.
^cft, bag, bic -c, celebration, fes-
tival.
^cftuitflSflraficn, ber, bie gcftuno^'
grnben, moat.
S^cftttUfl^maucr, bic, bic -n, forti-
fied wall.
^\ii)it, ber, Fichte, the great
German philosopher,
fid, see fallen.
ftnbett
307
Prfttt(^fcit
ftttbcn, tonb, gefunben (l^aben), to
find, § 180, 1.
ftngcn, see fangen.
%\tdf ber, bie -e, spot {of ink or
dirt, etc.).
ffet^ig, industrious (ly); hard,
§ 173, 3 ; am -[ten, 218, 1 ; aufg
-fte, § 218, 2.
fltcl^en, f(o!), gefloljen (jein), to flee.
fltc^Ctt, f(oB, gefloffen (jein), to
flow.
flo!^, see ftic^en.
I^Ittg, hex, bie "c, flying, flight.
f^(u§, ber, bie ^e, river.
flitftcrn, reg. (^aben), to whisper.
f^otgc, bie, bie -n, consequence.
folgcn, re^. (fein), with dat., to
follow, § 166, Note; fotgenb,
following,
fjorm, bie, bie -en, form.
fort, adv. and sep. prefix, away.
fort'ftt^rcn, futir fort, fortgefal)ren
(^aben), to continue, § 233, 1
and § 180, 2.
fort'ge^cn, ging fort, fortgegangen
(fein), to go away.
fort'fc^Ctt, reg., sep. (l^aben), to
continue, § 233, 2.
fortjttfa^rctt, see fortfa!)ren.
^ragc, bie, bie -n, question.
fragctt, reg. (tjaben), to ask, § 15,
2.
f^ranffurt, bo8, Frankfort (on the
Main) .
%xani^ilvitVf prop. adj. (of)
Frankfort.
^vantvdiS), ba^, beg -8, France.
fjransofe, ber, beg -n, bie -n,
Frenchman.
fransiifift^, French.
i^vaUf bie, bie -en, woman ; wife ;
Mrs.
^xtinltin, bag, bie — , lady ; Miss.
^rct^cit, bie, bie -en, freedom.
frcmb, strange, § 271, 2; ber
^rembe, beg -ti, bie -it, stranger.
f^rcttttb, ber, bie -e, friend.
^rcunbitt, bie, bie -nen, friend
(woman).
frcilttbltt^, friendly; kind.
^reuttbft^aft, bie, bie -en, friend-
ship.
^riebrtt^, ber, Frederick.
^rifi^c, bie, ber — , freshness,
vigor.
frii^, early, soon ; fritter, sooner,
before, § 248, 2, b.
^vni)UnQ§Unmt, bie, bie -n, spring
flower.
fit^rctt, see fai)ren.
fiil^rcn, reg. (^aben), to lead ; of
arms (3Saffen), to bear, wield ;
of war (^rieg), to wage ; see
also burc^fiitjren, to put through,
carry out.
^ii^trcr, ber, bie — , leader.
fiinf, five ; fiinft, fifth,
fiir, for, §109, 1; hj, etc.. §109,
2.
furt^tfiar, fearful (ly), terribly.
fiirj^tcn, reg. (^aben), to fear ; fic^
— , refl,ex., to be afraid, of, ttor
with dat.
fitrd^tcrtiti^ft, mos^- terrible.
^iirft, ber, beg -en, bie -en, prince
(appointive, as distinguished
from ber ^rinj, the son of a
king) .
f^ilrftlit^feit, bit*, bie -en, prince,
royalty.
3ftt«
308
gelungen
^tti ber, bic "e, foot ; gu —
foot, afoot.
ga6, see gebcn.
(^atcric', bie, bie -n, gallery.
^ang, ber, bie "e, gait, pace, rate.
gattj, all, whole, entire, § 113, 1.
qaVf at all ; in fact.
^avtcn, ber, bic % garden.
^aftfrci^cit, bie, ber — , hospi-
tality.
Qtathtittt, see arbeiten.
gcbttbct, see Baben.
©cftiittbc, bog, bie — , building.
gcficn, Qah, gegeben (^aben), er
gibt, to give ; eg glbt, there is,
§ 85, 1 ; njog gtbt'g, what's up ;
see also gugeben.
Qthxaii)t, see brlngen,
gcfirauc^Ctt, reg., insep. (l)aben),
to use, make use of.
(SJeBuft^, ha^f bie -e, bushes.
gcbat^t, see benfen,
©cbanfc, ber, beg -tig, bie -n,
thought, idea.
gebaucrt, see bauern,
(^t^l^t, bog, bie -e, poem.
gcbrurft, see brudfeti.
gccl^rt, honored, see e^ren.
gcfatten, gefiel, gefaUen (I)aben),
eg gefaUt, iciY^ dat., to please ;
to like, § 76, 3.
gcftcl, see gcfaUcn.
gcfolgt, see folgen.
gcfrttgt, see fragen,
gcgaugctt, see ge^etx,
gcgcficu, see geben.
gcgcn, against, § 110, 1; to,
toward, § 110, 2.
©cgcttfa^, ber, bie "e, contrast.
gcgtaubt, see glauben.
gegritnbet, see griinben.
gc^anbclt, see ^anbeln,
©c^ctmrat, ber, bie '^e, secret
councillor, a common German
title.
gc^Ctt, ging, gegangen (fein), to
go ; eg gef)t, to be, § 206, 1 ; see
also angel)en, § 206, 2, Note and
Oorbeige^en, § 246, 4 ; bag ®e=
^en, going, gait; gum gleid^en
rid)tigen ©e^en gu bringen, to
get them to keep together cor-
rectly.
gc^ijrctt, reg., insep. (i)aben),
loith dat., to belong to.
gcPrt, see \)'6xen and gepren.
gcHagt, see flagen.
gcfommctt, see fommen.
Qttomii, see fonnen.
gctangcn, reg., insep. (fein), to
arrive, come.
gclaffctt, see taffeii.
^clb, bag, bie -er, money.
gcfcfit, see leben.
QtU^vtf learned, see le^rett ; ber
®tU\)xtt, beg -n, bie -n, learned
man.
gelciftct, see letften.
gclcrnt, see lerncn.
QtVicht, see Ucben.
gclingctt, gctang, gelungen (fein),
impers. with dat., to succeed,
§ 180, 2.
Qtlohtf see loben.
gcltcn, gait, gegolten (tjoben), e«
gilt, usually impers. , to be a
question of.
gelungcu, see gcUngen.
^tmaifit
309
fitctt^
^tmati)t, see mad)en.
©cmalbe, bag, bie — , painting.
gemcinfain, common.
gcttttttttt, see nettnen.
(DcttcraC, ber, bie -e, or "e, gen-
eral.
gcttttg, enough.
fiCttttgCtt, reg'., ms^ip. (^aben), to
suffice ; geniigenb, sufficient(ly).
dJcorgc, ber, George (in German
usually @eorg')«
gcrabc, afZj., straight; adv.,]\ist,
exactly.
gcraten, gertet, geraten (feiu), to
get ; ill 3orn — , to get angry.
©crei^tig^cit, bie, ber — , justice.
gcrcttct, see retten»
(^tvi^tf ba«, bie -e, court (of
judgment).
gcrirfjtct, see rirf)ten, to direct.
gcrict, see geraten.
gcrit, Ueber, am liebften, gladly,
to like to, § 76, 2 and 1.
gcriiftct, see riiften.
gcfagt, see fagen.
OJcfattbtc, ber, beg -n, bie -it,
envoy, ambassador.
gcft^affctt, see fd^affen.
gcft^c^ctt, gefcf)a^, gefc^e^eu (fein),
eg geidjie^t, im'th dat., to hap-
pen ; eg gef(i)ie^t il)m rec^t, it
serves him right.
gcfd^citcrt, see jc!)eitern.
gcft^Cttft; see fc^enfen.
©cfc^ic^tc, bie, bie -n, story ; his-
tory.
gcfd^Iagcn, see f(i)tagen.
©cfi^tci^t, bag, bie -er, race, gen-
eration. .
gcfc^Ctt, see je^en.
^cfcttc, ber, beg -n, bie -n, jour.
neyman, companion.
@cfcMf(^aft, bie, bie -en, company.
C^cfc^, bag, bie -e, law.
gcficgt, see ftegen.
gef^Jtelt, see fpielen.
geftcrft,see ftecfen.
gcftcrit, yesterday ; a following
noun is written as an adverb
without a capital : geftern abenb,
geftern nac^mittag.
gcftorbctt, see fterben.
gcMt, see jndjen.
gcfwttgett, see fingen.
getan, see tun.
gctricbctt, see treiben.
gemalttg, mighty.
gcttiartet, see n^arten.
gettiijl)nctt ftd^, reflex., reg., insep.
(Ijaben), to get used, to, an with
ace; getro^nt, accustomed, to,
an with ace.
gcttJO^ttt, see njo^nen.
gcttJorbctt, see n)erben.
gettiu|t, see rt)iffen.
gift, M sing, imperative, see
geben.
Qlhtf eg — , there is, § 85, 1 ; see
geben.
gilt, see gelten.
gtttg, gingen, see ge^en.
gtangcttb, gldnjenbft, brilliant,
most brilliant.
gJaufictt, reg. (^aben), to believe,
think, § 157, 1 and Note ; to
believe in, an with ace, § 157,
1, Note c.
gleic^, adj., alike, equal, the same ;
^u -er 3^itf ^* o"® ^^^ ^^^
same time ; adv., at once.
gletfi^en
310
^au9
with dat., to resemble, § 76, 3,
Note.
glttrfltd^, happy, fortunate.
gnabtg, gracious ; common term
of address to ladies : gnabigc
grau, gnobigeg i^raulein.
&ottt\C, ber, Goethe, Germany's
greatest genius.
gotbCtt, golden.
(^ott, ber, bie ^er, God, god.
^vamma'titf bie, bie -en, gram-
mar.
^xan, gray.
grcifctt, griff, gegriffen (^abett),
to grasp ; see also angreifen, to
attack.
@rcti§, ber, be« -eg or -en, bie -e
or -en, the old man, gray-
beard.
@ric(^if(i^(c), bag, beg -en, Greek.
griff, see g re if en.
©rimm, ber, prop, name, Jakob
Grimm, probably the greatest
philologist Germany ever pro-
duced.
gro^, grij^er, grftfet/ large, big,
great, greater, greatest; as
noun, @ro§eg, great things.
(SJruft, bie, bie H (burial) vault.
^runb, ber, bie H, reason, § 260.
grilttbctt, reg. (^aben), to estab-
lish, found.
^vn% ber, bie "c, greeting.
grii^Ctt, reg. (^aben), to greet,
send regards to, with ace.
&nt, bag, bie "er, property ;
estate.
gut, adj., good ; adv., well, § 234,
1.
Gutenberg, ber, Gutenberg, the
inventor of printing, § 131.
gut'tnittig, good-natured.
ffahen, ^atte, gel)abt (^abcn), er
^at, to have ; often translated
by English past when used as
auxiliary; see §§ 164, 165, and
167.
^aI6, half, § 184, 2.
^atftc, bie, bie -n, half, § 184, 1.
Ijaltcn, ^ielt, ge^alten (l^aben), er
i)alt, to hold, to keep ; fic^ — ,
reflex. , to keep oneself ; — fiir,
to consider, take for, § 157, 3
and § 183, 4 ; to take (a news-
paper), § 183, 4.
Hamburg, bag, Hamburg, the
second largest city in Germany.
^0ttttittrg=5tmcrifa=fiinic, bie, the
Hamburg-America Line, the
world's largest steamship com-
pany.
^anb, bie, bie "e, hand.
^anbcl, ber, U^^ -g, trade.
^anbcltt, reg. (I)aben), to act.
^anS, ber, John ; Hans Sachs,
Germany's greatest master-
singer, § 116.
^art, hard, § 173, 1.
I^artttotfig, obstinate.
^offcn, reg. (^abcn), to hate.
\)(ii, see fjaben.
^ttttc, I^Qtten, see ^abcn (past
subj.).
^auftg, frequent(ly).
^tkxx^, bag, bie ^ciufer, house ; ju
-e, at home ; nad^ -c, (to)
home.
^ebttiig
311
l^itt
^cbttJtg, bic, Hedwig.
^ccr, ta^, bie -e, army.
^ccrfii^rcr, hex, bie — , leader,
general.
^Cftig, severe (ly), heavy.
^cgel, ber, Hegel, one of Ger-
mcmy^s greatest philosophers,
^CtKg, holy.
^timatf bie, bie -en, home.
l^cimKi^, secret(ly).
^cittfiri^, ber, Henry.
^ciratctt, reg. (i)ahen), to marry,
§ 51, 2.
l^ci^Ctt, ^ie^, ge!^ei^en C^aben), to
be called, § 49, 2 ; to be (trans-
lated), § 49, 2, Note.
l^ettcr, cheerful (ly).
^clb, ber, bc8 -en, bie -en, hero.
^c(bcttgrei§, ber, beg -eg or -en,
bie -e or -en, heroic old man,
old hero.
^clfcn, ^alf, gel^otfen (^aben), er
I)itft, with dat., to help, § 39, 1.
^clm^ol^, ber, Helmholtz, one of
Germany'' s great physicists.
l^er, hither ; denoting motion
toward the speaker, not trans-
lated, § 149, 1 and § 149, 2,
Note ; following an ace, ago,
§ 4, Note ; ^in unb — , hither and
thither, to and fro ; see also
^erfaUen.
^erangcttiod^fctt, see !^eranit)a(^fen.
^cranttJat^fctt, njud^S Ijeran, I^eran^
geh)ac{)fen (fein), er n)d(i)ft
l)eran, to grow up.
l^crattiSgcbctt, gab l^erong, l)eraug=
gegeben (l)oben), er gibt ^eroug,
to publish.
^crau^gcgeficn, see ^erauggeben.
l^eretn, in {toward the speaker) ;
— ! come in ! {in answer to a
knock at the door).
l|crcitt!ommctt, font tjerein, ^erein^
gefomnten (fein), to come in.
^crfattctt, fiet §er, ^ergefaffen
(fein), er foEt l^er, to fall ; iiber
jentanb ^erfaEen, to come down
hard upon, to attack severely.
^ermatttt, ber, Hermann, Ar-
minius.
^crmann§fd^(ad^t, bie, Hermann's
Battle, name given to the fight
in the Teutohurg Forest, where
Hermann defeated the Eomans
in 9 A.D.
^txv, ber, beS -n, bie -en, gentle-
man ; sir ; Mr. ; — @ott. Lord
God, the Lord.
^errfi^Ctt, reg. (^oben), to rule,
reign.
^crtttttcrgcjogctt, see ^ernnter*
jie^en.
^cruntcrstc^cn, ^og ^erunter, f)er^
untergegogen (^aben), to pull
down.
^crjog, ber, bie -e and "e, duke.
^tMitf to-day ; a following noun
is written as an adverb without
a capital: ^ente abenb, ^ente
morgen.
^tclt, see ^alten.
^icr, here ; compare ha, § 16, 2.
^tc^, see ^ei^en.
^itbcguttb, bie, Hildegund.
^t(f, pi'es. imperative from \:)tU
fen.
I^itt, denoting motion away from
the speaker, § 149, 1 and § 149,
2, Note, usually not translated ^
!^tttabf(f)auen
312
^taKett
— unb l^er, to and fro, hither
and thither, § 149, 2.
^tnab'ft^aucn, reg., sep. (l)abcn),
to look down.
Ijina^'ftciflCtt, fticg ^inab, I)inab=
gefticgcn (fcin), to go down, de-
scend.
^tnettt, in.
^incinttttt, tat l^inein, ^iticingctati
(I)abeu), to put in.
^tngc^ctt, gtng I/in, t)ingegangcn
(fcln), to go (away) from the
speaker.
^tttf^d^cn, reg., sep. (^abcn or
fcin), to spatter.
l^inten, at the back or rear, be-
hind.
Winter, prep, with dat. or ace, be-
hind.
l)ttttttt'tcrfiU(fctt, reg., .sep. (t)a-
ben), to look down.
,^iftori!cr, ber, bie— , historian.
l\oti), {declined, ^o^er), \)'t\)tx, am
t)Oci)[tcn, high, higher, highest.
^or^a^tung, bie, bcr — , esteem.
I)od)a(l^tuttg§t)ott, with great es-
teem.
^offctt, reg. (^aben), to hope, for,
auf with ace.
Pfltrf), l)bflid^ft, polite(ly), most
politely.
^of)cit, btc, ber — , highness;
^aifcrlic^e — , Imperial High-
ness.
l^olctt, reg. (t)abcn), to get, fetch,
§ 42, 2 ; see also nod)l)olcn, to
make up.
^oljfc^mtt, bcr, bie -e, wood-
cut.
Pren, reg. (^aben), to hear,
§ 180, 1 ; see also Quf^orcn, to
stop.
^ofcntafrfjc, bie, bie — , trousers
pocket.
^ottV, ba8, bie -%, hotel.
^unbert, hundred.
^nt, ber, bie H, hat.
^bcc, bie, bie -n, idea.
t^m, to him or it, dat. of er or
eg.
t^tt, him, it (9'iamen), ace. of ex.
^f^ntn, you, dat. of (Sic.
i^nen, to them, dat. of jie.
S^r, your.
t!^r, her, their ; to her, dat. of fie,
she ; you, pron. of2dpers. plu.
tm, see in bem.
tmmcr, always.
in, in, into, to, § 121.
tnbem^ while ; for English verbal,
§ 189, 1.
^nbttfhric', bie, bie -n, industry.
^n(aut, bcr, bie -e, inlaut, the
middle sound, that is, not at
either end, of a word or syl-
lable.
xn^, see in ba8.
^nfrfirift, bie, bie -en, inscription.
tutcrcffnut', interesting.
Siitcrcf fc, ba«, bie -n, interest,
in, fiir with ace.
itttcrcffic'rcit S^^t reflex., interef=
fiev'te, intercjfiert' (l)aben), to be
interested, in, fiir with ace.
intim', intimate, friendly.
tft, see jein.
^talien, bas, Italy.
i«
313
mnxq
fa, yes ; by all means, § 200, 1 ;
why, you know, § 200, 2.
Stt^r, bag, bie -e, year.
3>tt^r!^Utt'bcrt, ta^, bie -e, century.
|c, ever, § 257, 1 ; correl., jc —
befto, the — the.
jcbcr, jebe, itht^, every, each.
jebod^, yet, but, nevertheless.
^tna, ha^, Jena.
jcncr, jene, jeneg, that, § 211, 3, b.
jc^ig, adj., of now, of to-day,
present.
ft^tf now.
^o^amt, ber, John.
Sugenb, bie, ber — , youth.
inm, young.
Sungling, ber, bie -e, young man,
youth.
^atfcr, ber, bie — , emperor,
kaiser.
^aiferfro«c, bie, bie -it, imperial
crown.
faifcrlid^, imperial.
tali, cold.
tam, fomen, see fomnten.
^am^f, ber, bie H, combat, fight.
fam^fcn, reg. (I)aben), to fight.
^am^ff^tcl, ta^, bie -e, combat,
gladiatorial games.
tanxif can, see tonnen.
tannttf see fennen.
^atlt, ber, Kant, one of Ger-
many'' s greatest philosophers.
^avi, ber, Charles ; — ber Oro^e,
Charlemagne.
^arlftra^c, bie, ber — , Charles
St.
fttttfctt, reg. (^aben), to buy.
tanm, hardly.
fc^rtc, see juriicffeljren.
feitt, not a, not any, no, none,
§9.
fcttttcn, !annte, gefannt (^aben),
to be acquainted with, know,
§ 58, 2 ; to get acquainted
with, meet, § 171, 2, Note.
^ittb, ba^, bie -er, child.
^irt^c, bie, bie -n, church.
tiaQtn, reg. (l)aben), to complain.
Piaffe, bie, bie -n, class.
^latt, prop, name, Klatt.
tkixtf small, little, § 194, 1.
^(ctttafictt, ha^, beg -g, Asia
Minor.
ftittgctt, Hang, geflungen (tjaben),
to sound.
^loftcr, t>a^, bie ", convent.
tiUQ, clever.
^nahc, ber, beg -n, bie -n, boy.
^Obcrgcr, bft:, Anton Koberger,
a printer of Nuremberg .
^Od^, ber, Koch, the great German
scientist.
^oltc'gin, bie, bie -nen, colleague
(lady).
^otoffcum, ta^f beg -g, colosseum,
the huge amphitheatre in Borne,
where the games and gladiato-
rial combats were held.
fomtncn, tam, gefommen (fein),
imperative, fomni, to come ; to
be (fpcit, late), § 219, 2; see
also anfommen, to arrive, tjor*
fomnteiT, to occur.
^otn^ottift', ber, beg -en, bie -en,
composer (of music).
^oniQ, ber, bie -e, king.
^iJnigitt
314
laffeit
^iltttgttt, ble, blc -nen, queen.
^Ottig^&crg, bag, Konigsberg, a
city in northeast Germany.
fiittttcn, fonntc, gefonnt (I)oben), er
fann, to be able, can, § 76, 2 ;
to know (how to do), § 58, 3.
fonntc, fonute, could, see tJ5n=
neit.
^onrab, ber, Konrad or Conrad,
name of (1) the Franconian,
the predecessor of Henry the
Fowler, § 54, and (2) of the
Hohenstaufen king who took
Weinsberg, § 91.
^Ottftantino'licl, ba^, Constantino-
ple.
^oMcxiation^'hnti), ba^, bie "er,
conversational manual.
^opl ber, bie^e, head.
^ornbtnme, ber, bie -n, corn-
flower, the national flower of
Germany; a conventionalized
form of it is the' cover design
of this hook.
^ornfclb, bag, bie -er, cornfield,
field of grain. ( Corn, that is,
Indian corn, is little known in
Germany.)
foften, reg. C^aben), to cost; to
be, § 206, 2, Note.
fraftig, strong.
^tti^f ber, bie -e, circle.
^reuj, bag, bie -e, cross.
^rcujjng, ber, bie ^reujjiige, cru-
sade.
^ricg, ber, ble -e, war ; — fat)ren,
to wage war ; — erfldren, to de-
clare war.
fricg^bcrcit, ready for war.
^ricgiifuttft, bie, ble H, strategy.
^rtcgSfd^au^ta^, ber, ble H, scene
of war.
^ricm^tlbc, bie, Kriemhilde.
^ronc, bie, bie -n, crown.
fiimmcm, reg. (^aben), to bother ;
fid^ — , reflex., to care, about,
um with ace. ; 3Bag fiimmert
mid) ble 9lul)e ber Soten? What
do I care about the peace of
the dead ?
^tnft, ble, ble "e, art.
Mnfttcr, ber, bie — , artist.
fiinfttcrifd^, artistic.
^nnftfinn, ber, beg -g, artistic
sense.
^n^fcrftii^, ber, ble -e, etching.
^nrfttrft, ber, beg -en, bie -en,
elector, § 192.
fnrj, short (ly).
^Ijff^ttttfer, ber, KyfEhauser,
m,ountain in Thuringia, where
Barharossa is said to he sleep-
ing and where Germany has
erected a huge monument to
Emperor William I, who re-
stored the German Empire.
labctt, lub, getaben (l)aben), er
labet or Icibt, to load.
Snnb, bag, bie "er, land, country ;
anf bem -e, in the country.
Sanbgraf, ber, beg -en, ble -en,
count.
lang, adj., longer, long, longer ;
for, § 6 ; long ere ^tit, rather
long, quite a while.
lauge, adv., a long time, long,
§ 60, 2, Note.
laffctt, Ile^, gelafjen (^aben), er
(aufett
315
mam
la^t, imperative^ ta^, to let ; to
have (made or done), § 68, 4.
laufcti, Uef, gelaufen (jein), er
Iduft, to ran.
(ttttt, lautcr, loud, louder.
tcfictt, reg. (!^aben), to live, exist,
§ 6, 2.
ficbcn, t>a^, bic — , life.
2tbtn§iaf\t, bag, bic -c, year of
(his) age.
Icb^aft, lively.
Icgcn, reg. (^aben), to lay ; to
put, § 222, 2.
ficgiott', bic, bic -en, legion, a
Boman regiment.
Scorer, ber, bie — , teacher.
ficid^c, bie, bic -n, corpse, (dead)
body.
IctJ^t, light, easy.
letb, c8 tut tnir tcib, I am sorry ;
tat' mtr leibc, I should be sorry
for.
(cibctt, litt, gctittcti (^abcn), to
suffer; to stand, § 221, 2.
(ciftctt, reg. (^abcn), to accom-
plish ; SBibcrftanb — , to offer
resistance.
(crnctt, reg. (l^abcn), to learn,
§ 81 ; to study {except in ad-
vanced work, when ftubicren is
used) .
Icfcn, to8, gclcfcn (^abcn), cr Ucft,
to read.
Ic^t, last.
2cittc, bic (pi), people.
Keb, dear.
Itcbctt, reg. C^abctt), to love.
iithtx, rather, see gent.
fiicbnitg^bfume, bic, bie -it, favor-
ite flower.
Itcbtctt, see Uebctt.
fiicb, ha^, bic -er, song.
lief, see laufeit.
Itcgctt, lag, gctcgcit (^abeit), to lie ;
to be, § 206, 2.
lic^, see laffeit.
Jitubcn, ta^f Linden, a city near
Hannover.
Sinie, bic (three syllables), line.
Sift, bic, bie -en, trick, subter-
fuge.
litt, see Iciben.
Slot)b, ber, Lloyd, North German
Lloyd, name of a large German
steamship company with head-
quarters in Bremen.
lobctt, reg. (^abcn), to praise.
lubett, see laben.
Sttifc, bie, Luise, Louise.
Sutler, ber, Luther, pronounced
with short u in German.
m
tnar^Ctt, reg. (^aben), to make ;
to do, § 77, 1 ; to take, § 183,
3 ; see also auSntac^en.
9Wtt(^t, bie, bie H, power.
SWabt^clt, bag, bic — , girl.
mag, see mogen.
ma^lctt, ma^lte, gema'^len (t)aben),
to grind {of corn).
WaX, ha^, bie -c, (point of) time,
§ 50, 3.
ntalctt, reg. (f)aben), to paint.
SJlalcr, ber, bic — , painter.
9Jlalcm', bie, bic -en, (the art of)
painting.
man, one, they, you, we, § 57.
'Maww, ber, bie "er, man, husband,
§ 19, 2.
^atcnS
316
9Kitttcr
9Jlorcu§, ber, Mark.
Wlavte, bie, bic -n, sign, trade-
mark.
Warttf ber, bic "e, market (place) .
mavitpla^, ber, bie aJiarftpm^e,
marketplace.
aJlartitt, ber, Martin.
2)lfl^, bag, bie -e, measure.
9Watt*, for 3Rott^au«, ber, beg
SRatt^cii, Matthew.
SlflagiinUiatt, ber, Maximilian.
mcl^r, more ; rather, § 218, 3.
mcitt, my, mine ; — §err, sir.
mcittCtt, reg. (I)aben), to mean
(of persons) ; to think, § 157, 1.
^Jlctttttttfl, bie, bie -en, opinion ;
mciner — nad), in my opin-
ion.
mcift, mo8t(ly) ; am mciften,
most(ly).
mciften^, mostly, usually.
SKciftcrfaitflcr, ber, bie — , master-
singer.
5Jlcttfji^, ber, be8 -en, bie -en,
man, § 19, 1.
mxtt\, me, see id).
SJltnncfdttncr, ber, bie — , minne-
singer, troubador.
9Jltnutc, bie, bie -n, minute.
mir, to me, see id).
tttt^tjcrftaitbctt, see mi{3t)erfte^en.
ttti^ucvftc^cn, migDcrftanb, mtB=
oerftanben (l)aben), to misun-
derstand .
tnit, prep., with, § 96; adv.,
along ; § 247, 2 ; sep. prefix as
in mitgeT)en, mittcilcn.
mitctttan'bcr, with one another or
each other.
mttgc^cii, fling mil, nutgegangen
(fein), to go, to go along or
with.
mttnc^mcn, na^m mit, tnitgenom^
men (l)aben), er nimmt mit, to
take along.
mtttetlen, reg., sep. (^abcn), imth
dat. , to inform ; to share with.
dMttiaUcv, bag, beg -g, the Mid-
dle Ages,
tnittCtt, adv., in the middle; right
(into, etc.).
mttjunc^mctt, see mitnef)men.
m'6ii)tt, should or would like,
§ 266, 1, see mogen.
monctt, moc^te, gemod)t (t)aben),
er mag, may, § 76, 2 ; to like,
§76,1.
ntogltf^, possible.
^ommfen, ber, Mommsen, one
of Germany's greatest histo-
rians.
Wlonat, ber, bie -e, month.
9)Zorgcn, ber, bie — , morning ;
written as adverb tcithout a
capital after geftern, I)eute, etc.
morgen^ adv., to-morrow ; auf — ,
for to-morrow.
3Wofc, ber, Moses ; 1 3D^ofe, Gene-
sis ; 2 Tto]e, Exodus; 3 3Wofe,
Leviticus ; 4 SSflok, Numbers ;
5 9)lofe, Deuteronomy.
9)l3fcr, ber, prop, name, Moser.
^OHl)(c, bie, bic -n, mill.
aWiiUcr, ber, bic — , miller ; prop.
name, Miller.
miiffen, mujjte, gcmuf?t (I)aben),
cr mu§, to have to, must, § 68,
3.
mu^te, see milffcn.
SRutter, bic, bic ", mother.
na
317
of^nt
n
tttt, excL, well.
nari^, prep., after, § 97, 2 and
§ 259, 2 ; to (of places), § 97, 1 ;
according to, by, § 97, 8 ; sep.
prefix, Ttaci)^o(en, to make up.
^la^hav, ber, bc8 -§ ancZ -n, bie -n,
neighbor.
nat^bem, co/y., after, § 259, 1.
itttd^gcficn, gab ttad), nadjocgeben
(^aben), er gibt noc^, to give in,
yield.
na^^oUttf reg., sep. (t)aben), to
make up (work, etc.).
Ma(i)xx^t, bie, bie -en, news, re-
port.
9?ot^ftc, ber, be8 -n, bie -n, neigh-
bor, superl. of na^, near.
tta(^'ff^(agcn, fci)Uig narf), na(f)ge^
jd^lagen (^aben), er f(f)tagt nad),
to look up (zn a book, etc.).
^a^t, bie, bie "e, niglit.
9?ac^ttgatt, bie, bie -en, nightin-
gale.
9lnrijtticft, bie, ber — , posterity.
nad)5U^oIcn, see Tiocl)t)oten.
ttd^crn fit^, reflex., reg. (^oben),
with dat., to approach.
9iamc, ber, beg -ng, bie -n, name.
^^attott', bie, bie -en, nation.
^Jationat'fittttttC, bie, bie -n, na-
tional flower.
natiir'ttji^, of course.
'UaiMX'txtvit, bie, ber — , natural-
ness ; exactness.
ncfictt, by, beside, § 122.
9?cffc, ber, be8 -n, bie -n, nephew.
ncl^mctt, na^m, genommen (^aben),
er nimmt, to take, § 183 and 2,
from, dat.
new, no.
ttcnnctt, nannte, genannt (l^aben),
to call, to name, § 49, 1.
ItCtt, new, anew.
tttJ^t, not; position of, § 37.
ntd^tS, nothing ; a following ad-
jective is written with a capital :
nid)tg @d)Ie(f)teg, § 217.
nic, never.
tticbcr, adv. and sep. prefix, down.
tlic'bcrbiirfctt fit^, reflex., reg. sep.
(i)ahtn), to bend down.
ttic'bcrJnictt, reg., sep. (jein), to
kneel down,
ntcbcrfanf, see nieberfinfen.
nicbcrfittfctt, fan! nieber, nieber=
gefnnfen (jein), to sink down.
tticmatig, never.
no^f yet, still, as yet ; more,
another, § 30, 2 ; — t»or, even
before ; sometimes not trans-
lated, § 62 ; before, § 248, 2, a.
^onnc, bie, bie -n, nun.
norbbcutft^, adj., North German ;
ber 9^orbbentfd}e, be§ -n, bie -n.
North German (man).
mitt, well, § 234, 2 ; now, § 234, 2,
Note.
ttttt, only, § 185, 1, a.
'^ttvnhcvQ, ta^, Nuremberg.
ohf if, whether.
obcn, above ; upstairs.
o^ttJOj)!, although.
obcr, or.
iJffttCtt, reg. (Ijaben), tb open.
oft, often.
O^ttC, without ; with infin. , § 181 ;
with clause, § 190.
o^ntnSd^tig
318
rcifctt
ol^n'mad^ttg, fainting, uncon-
scious.
Ofjv, bag, bie -en, ear.
Ovt, ber, bie -e or Hx, place, § 150,
1.
Dftcrrct(^, bag, Austria.
Otto, hex, Otto. /
*
^aia^t', ber, bie ^alcifte, palace.
^-Pa^Jtcr', bag, bie -e, paper.
^avf, ber, bie -e, park.
^orlamcttt', ba^, bie -e, parlia-
ment, congress.
^ani, ber, Paul.
^JjSegni^, bie, Pegnitz, the river on
which Nuremberg lies.
^ctriftr., ^:petriftra^e, bie, Petri St.
))flilrfctt, reg. (^aben), to pluck,
pick.
^^itipp', ber, Philip.
^ia\t, ber, bie H, plan.
^la^, ber, bie ^ square, § 160, 2,
a ; room, § 150, 2, b ; seat,
§ 160, 2, c.
^Iftnbcrn, reg. (I^aben), to plun-
der, pillage.
^JOli'tifrfi, political.
^^oftnat^na^mc, unter — , to be
collected by the post office,
"C. O. D."
^ot^bam, baS, Potsdam.
pva^tt>oUf splendid(ly), magnifi-
cent(ly).
prnftifc^, practical.
^-Prcbiflcr, ber, bie — , preacher;
— @aIomoni8, (Bible), Ecclesi-
astes.
^rcti8, ber, bie -e, price ; prize.
^rcffc, bie, bie -n (printing) press.
^rcu^cn, bag, Prussia.
^Jrcu^ift^, Prussian.
^rinj, ber, beg -en, bie -en, prince,
^rofcf'for, ber, beg -g, bie ^ro-
feffo'ren, professor.
a
CueUe, bie, bie -n, spring (of
water).
?fiat, ber, bie "e, advice.
JHat^au^, bag, bie "er, city hall.
O*ioubcr, ber, bie — , robber.
rct^nctt, reg. (^aben), to count,
on, auf with ace.
fUtiiftf bag, bie -e, right, privilege.
Vt^t, right (morally), § 172, 1 ;
red^t I)aben, to be right, § 172,
1, b.
D^lcbc, bie, bie -n, speech; 9Jebe
baften, to make a speech. .
rcbcn, reg. (I)aben), to talk,
speak, § 270, 2.
Dlcgcl, bie, bie -n, rule.
rcgdma^ig, regular.
rcgic'rctt, regier'te, regiert' (^a»
ben), to rule, reign.
9{egterung, bie, bie -en, govern-
ment.
dtcxtf^, bag, bie -e, empire.
rei(^en^ reg. (l^aben), to pass, to
hand to, § 246, 1.
9{ei(^tum, ber, bie "ex, wealth,
richness.
^tif^t, bie, bie -n, row ; line ;
turn; an tnern ift bie 9Jeil)e,
whose turn is it ?
JRcifc, bie, bte -n, trip, journey.
rei^en, ri^, geriffen (^aben), to
snatch, tear.
dttittn
319
Sj^ittcr
^IcitCtt, bag, be§ -§, riding.
ditliQion', bie, bie -en, religion.
Otcft, ber, bie -e, rest, remainder.
rcttCtt, reg. (^aben), to rescue,
save.
rtc^tcn, reg. (()aben), to direct.
rid^tig, riglit, correct, § 172, 2.
ricf, see rufen.
Sfiicfc, ber, be^ -n, giant.
CiiefcttftonbBttb, bie -er, gigantic
or colossal statue.
I^tefig, gigantic.
dtltttVf ber, bie — , knight.
dlod, ber, bie "e, coat.
91o(anb^ ber, Roland, nephew of
Charlemagne ; Roland column,
emblem of civic liberty, § 72.
Ofiolttttbfatttc, bie, bie -n, Roland
column, § 72.
9?o(attb§6o8cn, ber, be6 -8, Ro-
land's arch, a ruin on the
Bhine.
Siom, ha^, Rome.
OfJiimcr, ber, bie — , Roman.
riimifrfl, Roman.
JKontgctt, ber, Rontgen, one of
Germany'' s great scientists^ dis-
coverer of the X-ray.
voi, red.
O^iotbart, ber, Redbeard, Barba-
rossa.
dtMcn, ber, bie — , back.
dtMhllV, bie, ber — , return.
D^lubotf, ber, Rudolph.
riifctt, rief, gerufen (^aben), to
call, cry out ; see also ougnifen,
to cry out, call out.
JRttljC, bie, ber — , rest, peace.
ru^en, reg. (f)aben), to rest.
xn\}XQ, calm(ly), quiet(ly).
ruftCtt, reg. (^aben), to prepare
for war.
riifttg, hearty, hale.
<B
®a(^C, bie, bie -n, affair; pi.
things.
(Ba^^, ber, Hans Sachs.
©at^fett, bag. Saxony.
Sage, bie, bie -n, saga, saying,
myth, tale.
fagctt, reg. (^aben), to say ; to
tell.
fa^, jal)en, see fe!)ett.
®ttIomo, ber, Solomon ; ^rebiger
-nig, Ecclesiastes.
fanbtc, see fenben.
fangctt, see fingen.
©anger, ber, bie — , singer.
SangcrJrieg, ber, bie -e, singer's
contest.
©attltcmann, prop, name, Sanne-
mann.
fa^, faffen, see fi^en.
<Ba^f ber, bie "e, sentence.
ft^affctt, jrf)nf, gefd)affen (^aben),
to accomplish ; to create.
©d^attctt, ber, bie — , shadow.
f(^a^Ctt, reg. (!)aben), to esteem,
to rate.
fri^ettcrtt, reg. (!)aben and fein),to
shipwreck, to founder.
fj^Ctt!ctt, reg. (^aben), to give, to
present.
ft^cr^cn, reg. (!)aben), to joke ;
fci)er;5enb, joking(ly).
ft^Cttd^cn, reg. (^aben), to frighten
away, scare.
@t^iff, bag, bie -e, ship.
©J^ittcr, ber, Schiller, 07ie of Ger-
<B^latiit
320
feniH
many'^s greatest poets and
dramatists.
©c^tat^t, bie, tie -en, battle.
©d^taf, ber, beg -e8, sleep.
ft^tafcn, fci)Ucf, gcjdjiafen (^abcn),
er fc})(dft, pas« sm6j., jd^ticfe, to
sleep.
fe^lagctt, fcf)tug, gefdilagen (t)abcn),
er f(J)(agt, to beat, defeat ; to
strike, hit ; see also iiad)fd^ta=
gen, to look up {in a book).
f(^Iattf, slender.
f(^tcr^t, bad(ly).
fj^Kcfe, see jd)Iafen.
fti^lic^cn, f^to^, gejd)(offen (l)a=
ben), to shut.
ft^ttcf?at^, finally.
©t^tofe, t)a^, bie "er, castle ; lock.
f(^(ug, see fci)Iagen.
©i^Iu^, ber, bie "e, end, close.
ft^mad)tCtt, reg. (^aben),'to pine,
for, nad) with dat.
fc^ncH, fast, swift(ly), quick (ly).
f(^iJn, fc^bnft, beautiful, most
beautiful.
f(i^on, already ; all right, never
fear, § 128, 2; sign of con-
tinued action, § 228, 2 and
Note ; sometimes omitted in
translation, § 128, 1.
©(^O^JCn^ttttcr, ber, Schopenhauer,
one of Germany'' s great philoso-
phers.
fr^iJpfCH, reg. (l)aben), to drink,
quaff ; i^erbac^t fd)opfen, to en-
tertain suspicion.
ft^rcibcn, fd)rieb, gefd)riebcn (l)a--
ben), to write ; ba^ @d)reiben,
be8 -«, writing (of a letter,
etc.).
^ttjvkh, see f(^retben.
©thrift, bie, bie -en, (hand)writ-
ing, script.
Sti^ttl^, ber, bie -e, shoe.
St^ulc, bie, bie -n, school.
©(filler, ber, bie — , pupil.
fr^Wrirmen, reg. (t)aben), to be
enthusiastic, to be wild, about,
fiir.
fc^ttiars, black.
^djWtv, heavy ; of work, hai'd,
§ 173, 2.
(Sd^tticrt, bag, bie -er, sword.
ft^ttior, see jc^rtJoren.
fr^ttiijrcn, jd)tt)or, gefc^moren (t)a-
ben), to swear, to take oath.
fcd)5ig, sixty.
fe^en, fa^, gejetjen (^aben), er jte^t,
to see, § 180, 1 ; gn fe^en, to be
seen, § 204, 2, Note.
fe^nen fic^, reflex., reg. (l)aben),
to long, for, nad^ with dat.
fcl^r, very, much; jo je^r, so
much.
fci, feien, pres. subj. of feln ; jeib,
imperative second plural of fein.
(Scibc, bie, bie -n, silk.
jcin, wax, gewefen (jein), id) bin,
to be ; as aux., to have, §§ 164,
166, and 167; eS ift, there is,
§ 85, 2.
fcitt, his, its.
fcit, prep., since, § 98, 1 ; for, in,
§ 98, 2 ; conj., since.
fcttbem, adv., since (then).
Scitc, bie, bie -n, side ; jur @eite,
by, at one's side, aside ; page
{of a book).
fclbcr, self, selves, § 196, 2.
fclbft, intensive pron..,&Q\i, selves,
fcftctt
321
ftanb
§ 196, 2 ; adv., even, § 196, 2,
Note.
fdtCtt, seldom.
fettfam, strange, § 271, 1.
Scna'tor, ber, bie ©enato'rcn, sen-
ator.
fcttbctt, fanbtc, gcfanbt (^aben), to
send; it is a bit more formal
than fdjicfen.
fc^Ctt, reg. (^aben), to set; to
put, § 222, 3 ; fid) — , reflex., to
sit down, § 18, 2 ; see also fort=
fe^en, to continue, § 233, 2.
fcttfjctt, reg. (^aben), to sigh.
fid), reflex, pron. dat. or ace,
self, selves, § 196, 1 ; sometimes
omitted in translation, § 12,
line 4.
ftc, she ; they.
<Bk, you.
ftcbctt, seven.
ficbjC^^tt, seventeen.
®icg, ber, bie -e, victory.
fiegen^ reg. (^aben), to conquer,
intrans.
Stcgfricb, ber, Siegfried, the
young hero of German myth.
ficgrcij!^, rich in victories, victo-
rious.
fic^t, see fc^en.
fittb, see fein.
fingcit, jong, gejungen (^aben), to
sing.
(Sitttt, ber, bie -e, sense ; thought,
idea.
SinnbUb, ta^, bie -er, emblem,
token.
fi^Ctt, \a%, gefeffen (l)oben), to sit,
§ 18, 1.
fo, so, then, § 26, 1 ; omitted in
translation ichen at the begin-
nitig of a conclusion, § 255.
fobalb', conj., as soon as.
<Bo(ttif ber, bie — , base, pedestal.
fogar', in fact.
fuglci^', at once.
@o^tt, ber, bie -e, son.
fold^, such ; so.
©otbat', ber, be« -en, bie -en, sol-
dier.
foHctt, reg. (^oben), ic^ foil, ought
to; shall, should, § 69, 2 ; to
be (about) to ; Sag foil benn
ta^-? What do you mean by
that ?
<Sotnmcr, ber, bie — , summer.
fonbcrtt, but (rather), § 43, 2.
fonft, else, besides, § 30, 1, Note.
forgcn, reg. (^aben), to care, for,
fiir.
S^anictt, bag, Spain.
f^arfamcr, more saving.
\pdt, fpdter, late, later, § 219, 2.
fpOJtcrctt gc^Ctt, to go walking;
f^oj^ieren fal^ren, to go driving,
§ 180, 1.
Bpitlf bag, bie -e, play.
f^tclcn, reg. (t)oben), to play ; to
play the part of.
@pi^c, bie, bie -n, point ; an ber
— , at the head,
Bpva^Cf bie, bie -n, language.
f^jrat^ctt, past subj. of fprecl)en.
f^rct^ctt, fprac^, gefprod)en (^a-
ben), er fpric!^t, to speak, talk,
§ 270, 1 ; to see, § 270, 1, Note.
Biaat, ber, bie -en, state.
<Btaht, bie, bie H, city ; in bie — ,
to town.
ftanb, see fte^en.
<Stonb6i(b
322
tattnioS
Stanbbtib, bag, bie -cr, statue.
ftaxhf see fterben.
ftarf, adj., strong; adv., hard,
§ 173, 4.
ftarfctt, reg. (^abeit), to
strengthen.
©tattc, bie, bic -it, locality.
ftcrfctt, reg. (t)abcn), to put, stick,
§ 222, 4.
fte^ctt, ftattb, gcflonben (t)abcn),to
stand, § 221, 1 ; to be, § 206, 2.
©tcHe, bie, bie -n, place, passage,
§ 150, 3.
ftcHcn, reg. (^aben), to put (up-
right), stand, § 222, 1 ; to ask
(questions), § 15, 2, Note ; to
set (clocks), § 222, 1, Note ; to
place, rank, § 214, line 4.
Stcttung, bie, bie -en, place, posi-
tion, § 150, 4.
ftcrbctt, ftarb, geftorben (fein), er
ftirbt, to die.
ftctig, always.
<Btiii), ber, bie -e, sting, prick ; im
@ti(i)(e) laffcn, Ue^, gelaffen
(^aben), er Id|3t, to leave in the
lurch.
Sttcf e(, ber, bie — , boot ; shoe.
fttW, still, quiet.
ftimmen, reg. (l)aben), to be in
tune ; ba« ftimmt, that's right,
§ 172, 2, Note.
ftotj, proud, of, auf with ace.
(Stra^c, bie, bie -n, street; see
§ 299.
ftrcitctt, [tritt, geftritteu (l)aben),
to quarrel.
Stro^mitwc, bie, bie -n, grass
widow.
Stttbent', ber, be« -en, bie -en,
student, at a college or univer-
sity.
flttbic'ren, ftubter'te, ftubicrt' (t)a^
ben), to be a student, to study
(advanced work); compare
ternen.
Stuttbc, bie, bic -n, hour ; lesson,
§ 109, 2, Note.
ftunbenlang, for hours.
fttt^cn, reg. (^oben), to seek, to
look for, § 7 ; to try.
Subomcrifa, ba§. South America.
fiibbctttf(^, South German ; ber
©iibbeutfd^e, beg -n, bie -n, the
South German (citizen).
©ttlttttt, ber, bie -e (both syllables
accented equally), sultan.
^actttt§, ber, Tacitus, a Boman
historian, who wrote a work^
Germania, on the Germans of
his time.
Xag, ber, bie-e, day ; iiber a(f)t -e,
a week from.
tagctt, reg. ({)abcn), to meet in
council ; compare ber ^ieic^ftog,
meeting of the council of the
realm, parliament, congress.
Xannpufer, ber, Tannhauser, an
opera by Wagner.
ta^fcr, brave, bold.
Xnfc^c, bie, bie -n, pocket.
Xnt, bie, bic -en, deed ; in ber — ,
in fact.
totcn, tcite, past ind. and subj. of
tun.
taitnio&f without deeds, imprac-
tical ; ber latcntofe, visionary,
dreamer.
tatcttretd^
323
ii^ercmftimittcn
tattnvd^, rich in deeds; ber
2:atenrei(!)e, be§ -u, bic -n^ man
who has accomplished much.
Satfa(^c, bie, bie -n, fact.
taugCtt, reg. (^oben), to amount
to.
icitcn, see mittcilen.
tctlna^m, see teilne^mcn.
tcitttc^mctt, nal)m teit, tei(genom=
men (Ijaben), er nimmt teit, to
take part, in, an with dat.
^cle^^Ott, bag, bie -e, telephone.
%t\iamtni, 'ba^, bte -e ; bag yjene
— , the New Testament.
tcttcr, tencrfte, precious, valuable ;
most precious.
%t\x\z\, ber, bie — , devil.
^^cutofiurgcr, adj., (of) Teuto-
burg.
%y)*f abbreviation for Thomas or
Theodor.
%\)taitx, t>a^, bie — , theater.
%ii)vn}X, ber, bte -e, throne.
^^iirtttgctt, \iCi^, Thuringia, a
group of small states in the
most picturesque part of cen-
tral Germany.
ticfficttJCgt, deeply moved.
%\\xit, bte, bte -n, ink.
S^ttttcnfa^, ^a^, bte ''er, inkstand,
inkwell.
%\\^, ber, bte -e, table.
Xitel, ber, bte — , title.
%9'^, ber, bte -e or jlobegfoEe,
death.
ioi, dead ; bte jToten, the dead.
tiitcn, reg. (^aben), to kill.
tragctt, trug, getragen (^aben), er
trcigt, to bear, carry ; to wear.
%xa\\l, tix, bte H, potion, drink.
txdi, see treten.
iX(iMX\% sad(ly).
ttreffctt, traf, getroffen (^aben), er
trtfft, to meet, § 171, 1 ; to hit.
trcifiett, trteb, getrteben (^aben),
to drive ; to work at, study.
trcnncn, reg. (l)aben), to separate,
divide.
2^rcttt0tt, ha%, Trenton.
treten, trat, getreten (jetn), er
trttt, to go ; to step ; see also
anftreten, to step up, to appear
{on the stage) ; juructtreten,
to step back.
treu, faithful.
Xrcue, bte, fidelity.
trotfcil, dry.
trug, see tragen.
Xrugbtlb, ^^a^, bte -er, illusion,
phantasy.
%x\xni, ber, bte H, drinking.
Xrup^, ber, bie -g, troop {of sol-
diers).
%\x6)f )ia^, bte "er, cloth.
ttttt, tat, getan (^aben), to do,
§ 77, 2; to put, §222, 5; Uxh
tun, with dat., to hurt ; tdt'
mtr tetbe, I'd be sorry for.
U
iiben, reg. (^aben), to practise.
iifeer, over, above, § 123, 1 ; about,
§ 123, 2 and § 193, 1 ; by way
of, § 123, 2, Note; from {to-
day, etc.), § 123, 2, Note.
ttbcraH', everywhere, all over.
iificrar'bcitett fid), reg., insep. (^o^
ben), to overwork.
ilberftringcr, ber, bie — , bearer.
iifiercitt'ftimmeit, reg., sep. (^a=
ikhtvqab
324
tierbrai^te
ben), to agree, with, mit,
§ 232, 1.
iibcrgab', see iibergeben.
U'ficrgafic, bie, bie -ti, surrender.
itbcrgc'ftcn, iibergab', iiberge'ben
(^aben), er iibcrgibt', to give
over, intrust.
&htv\}anpt'f at all, anyv^^ay, § 160.
iibcrlc'gctt, adj., superior, to, dat.
iibcrfct'jcn, reg., insep. (t)aben),
to translate, § 154, 2, Note.
ii'bcrfc^cn, re^., scp. (^aben), to
ferry over, put across, § 164, 2,
Note.
flficrfct'Sttttg, bie, bie -en, transla-
tion.
il6crtrcf'fcn, iibertraf, iibertrof':=
fen (Ijaben), er iibertrifft', to
surpass, excel.
iificrtrifft', see iibertref'fen.
iiBcrsctt'gcn, reg., insep. (^aben),
to convince.
Ufcr, bag, bie — , shore.
U^r, bie, bie -en, watch, clock,
§ 169, 1; time, § 50, 4 and
§ 169, 2 ; o'clock, § 50, 4 and
§ 169, 2.
ttW, around, about, § 111, 1 and
§193, 1; for, §111, 2; at, §111,
3 ; with infin. and gu, in order
to, § 197, 2, Note.
umfttf feu, reg., insep. (i)aben), to
include.
umgc'ben, umgab', umge'ben (^o-
ben), er umgibt, to surround.
ttmftrirf'Ctt, reg., insep. (l)aben),
to insnare.
Umlaut, ber, bie -c, umlaut, as-
similation of a vowel to i,
§ 322 ; usually represented by ".
uut'sic^cn fic^, gog fid) nm, ftd) um»
gegogen (^aberi), to change one's
clothes.
uubcficgt, unconquered.
uub, and.
uugcfa!l)r, about, § 193, 2.
uugcftraft, unpunished.
Ituiwcrfitiit', bie, bie -en, univer-
sity ; auf ber — , at, of students ;
an ber — , at, of professors.
ttumijg'ltj^, impossible.
uui^, us, see njir.
uufcr, our.
UUtcr, under, among, § 124.
uu'tcrbriugcu, bracf)te unter, un-
tergebrac^t (^aben), to shelter,
protect.
nnitvntf)'mtn, unternat)m', nnter-
nom'men (t)aben), er unter=
nlmmt, to undertake.
uutcrftiit'jcu, reg., insep. (^aben),
to support, help.
uuterttJcr'fcu, nntermarf, unter»
iuor'fen (l)aben), er unterhjirft',
to subjugate, subdue, conquer.
UUtJCrttJUUb'bttr, invulnerable.
Uttiuibcrftc^'Iit^, irresistible.
S^ttru^, ber. Varus, a Boman gen-
eral binder Augustus.
i<afc, bie, bie -n, vase.
SJtttcrlaub, ba<^, bie iiJaterlonber,
fatherland, native land.
^cili^cu, ta^, bie — , violet.
tjcrau'ftnltcu, reg., insep. (1)0^
ben), to get up, plan, arrange,
§ 103.
Ucrbiublit^, obliging, courteous.
ucrlirad)te, see uerbringen.
ticrBrcttcn
32e5
uerjct^ctt
tJerBrciten fiti^, reflex., reg., insep.
(^aben), to spread.
ticrfiritt'gctt, tjcrbrodj'te, t)erbracf)t'
(^aben), to pass (time), § 246,
3.
S^erbat^t, ber, beg -S, suspicion ;
— ^ fi^opfen, to entertain suspi-
cion.
tierbcrbctt, oerbarb, oerborben (f)a>
ben), cr uerbtrbt, to spoil.
tjerbrangctt, re^., msep. (^aben),
to crowd out.
tJcrc^rctt, reg., insep. (^oben), to
honor exceedingly ; tiere^rt,
most honored, revered.
tJCrcittCtt fi(^, reg., insep. (fjabcn),
to unite ; bereint, united.
ticrcintgcn, reg., insep. (^aben),
to unite, join together ; fid) — ,
reflex., to join hands, unite.
ttcrfolgctt, reg., insep. (t)aben), to
persecute.
ticrgaffc, past subj. of ocrgeffen.
ttcrgcBcn^, in vain^
tie^cfctt, Derging, tjergangcn
(fein), to pass (of time), § 246,
2 ; fief) — , reflex. , to go astray ;
ftd^ — gcgcn, to insult.
ticrgcffcn, tjerga^, oergcffen (^a*
ben), er t)ergi^t, to forget.
titVQitiQf see t)erge^en.
SJcrgnitgctt, ha^, bic — , pleasure.
tjcr^eiratctt, reg., insep. (^aben),
to marry, give in marriage,
§ 51, 1 ; firf) — , to get married.
tierjagen, reg., insep. (I)aben), to
drive out, expel, repel.
ticr!attfctt, reg., insep. ({)aben),to
sell.
25cr!c^r, ber^ bc8 -8^ traific.
tJcrfaffen, berlie^, tocrloffen C^a*
ben), er bertci^t, to leave (ac-
tive); fid) — , reflex., to rely,
upon, auf with ace.
^erlcgcttl^eit, bte, ber — , embar-
rassment.
ticrtet^ctt, dertie^, berlieljen (^a=
ben), to bestow.
S^crlcumbcr, ber, bie — , calumni-
ator.
tjerltc'rett, bertor', t)erlo'ren (^a--
ben), to lose.
SBcrloBtc, ber, beg -n, bie -n,
fianc6.
ticrlorfcnb, enticing.
ticrlor, see tjertieren.
ticrtttt^tctt, reg., insep. (^aben),
to destroy, wipe out.
tJcrft^trfctt, reg., insep. (^aben),
to send (away).
Dcrfd^ttiattb, see oerfi^rtiinben.
Ucrfd^ttJtttbctt, oerjc^rt)anb, ber-
fd^njnnben (fein), to disappear. '
ticrfcl)Ctt, berfat), t)erfe^en (^aben),
er berftel)t, to supply.
Derfpreri^en, Derjprad^, berjprodien
C^aben), er oerf|)rirf)t, to prom-
ise ; ftd) — , reflex. , to misspeak.
t>crftcI)Ctt, Derftanb, berftanben (^a^
ben), to understand.
Serftti!^', ber, bie -e, attempt.
ticrMctt, reg., insep. (^aben), to
try, attempt.
tJCrtticrtcn, reg., insep. (baben),
to apply, put to use.
ticrttittftctt, reg., insep. (^aben),
to lay waste, devastate.
dcrjct^Ctt, tjerjie'^, tterjiel^en (l)a:=
ben), with dat., to pardon, for-
give.
tjcrsmctfclt
326
aSartburg
dcr^hJCifctt, in despair, desper-
ate(ly).
titer, much ; pl.^ many.
tJtcttcid^t', perhaps ; may, § 75, 3.
SJtcrtct, hCL^, bie — , quarter; brct
33ierte( etn8, quarter to one.
titcrttttbftcfisigft, seventy-fourth.
tiicruttbjrtianstg, twenty-four.
^OflCl, bcr, bie '^, bird.
Sogclfnttg, ber, bie SSogelfcinge,
bird snaring ; auf bent — , fowl-
ing.
S^ogclttictbc, bie, prop, noun, Vo-
gelweide, Walter von der.
^ofltcr, ber, bie — , fowler ; §ein=
rid) ber — , Henry the Fowler.
SoH, bag, bie ''er, folk, people,
nation.
tjom, see t)on bem.
tJOn, from, § 99, 1 ; of, § 99, 3 ;
by, with passive^ § 99, 2 ; omit-
ted, § 99, 3, Note a.
t)or, before, in front of, § 125, 1 ;
§ 248, 3 ; ago, § 4 ; of, § 25 ;
with states of mind, § 125, 2.
tiorbet, adv. and sep. prefix, past,
§ 246, 4.
tJorbctgcgattgctt, see borbeigetjen.
t»orlict'flcl)Ctt, ging oorbei, t)orbei=
gegangen (fein), with an and
dat., to go past, to pass, § 246, 4.
Iior^cr, adv., before, § 248, 2, 6.
tjorfommcn, fam uor, Dorgefom-
men (fein), to occur, § 231, 1.
SPorlcfnufl, bie, bie -en, lecture.
8?urHctJC, bie, ber — , preference,
fondness.
HorftcUcn, reg., sep. (I)abcn), to
introduce, present' ; fid) — ,
rejlex., to imagine.
tJor^iiglid^, excellent ; especial
(§ocl^ad)tnng).
tuat^cn, reg. (f)aben), to watch,
lie awake ; see also aufmad^en,
to wake up.
^affc, bie, bie -n, weapon, arm.
ttiaffttCtt, reg. (^aben), to arm;
fid) — , reflex., to arm oneself,
take up arms.
luagen, reg. (^aben), to dare.
^al)l, bie, bie -en, choice, election.
ttia^r, true; nic^t — ? isn't that
so?
ma^ren, reg. (^aben), to observe,
keep.
tualjrenb, con}., while ; prep, with
gen., during.
993alb, ber, bie "er, forest, wood.
SBoIbttiefi, ber, blc -c, wood path,
forest path.
njattctt, reg. (fein), to journey (as
a pilp-im).
gSalt^cr, ber, Walter.
aSttnb, bie, bie "e, wall (of a
room); compare bie iDJauer,
wall of a garden or city.
toanbcrtt, reg. (fein), to wander;
see also anSmanbern, to emi-
grate, go to.
ttjann, when, § 84, 3.
t«flr, ttiftrc, see fein.
STl^arc, bie, bie -n, ware.
ttJarf, see twerfen.
Warm, waim.
SS^artburfl, bie, Wartburg, the
most interesting castle in Ger-
many, situated at Eisenach in
Thuringia.
toavitn
327
toitt>itl
ttmrtctt, reg. (tjoben), to wait,
for, ouf loith ace. , § 8.
toa^, interrog. and compound rel.,
what, § 210 ; rel. after neuter,
which, § 211, 2, Note.
SSaf^tttgtOtt, ber, George Wash-
ington.
SScg, ber, bie -e, way, path,
§ 249, 1.
tticg, adv. and sep. prefix, away.
toegen^ prep, with gen., because
of, on account of.
ttlcgfj^Ctt^Ctt, reg., sep. (^abeit), to
scare, frighten away.
SBcifi, ta^, bie -er, woman
(poetic).
SBci^crtrcitc, bie, fidelity of
women ; Weibertreu, name
given the fortress near Weins-
berg.
mctl, because.
2Bci(c, bie, bie -n, while, time.
ttictlcn, reg. (t)aben), to stay,
while away time.
833cin§berg, ta&, Weinsberg, a
city in Wurttemherg, § 91.
SScife, bie, bie -n, way, manner,
§ 249, 2; auf biefe — , in this
way.
\0t\% white ; also pres. of tt)i[[en.
ttJCtt, far {not wide, breit).
tOCttcr, sep. prefix and adv., fur-
ther.
ttJCttcrgcl^ett, ging njeiter, rt)eiter=
gegangen (jein), to go on, pass
along, move on.
toietd^, rel. and interrog., which,
§ 209; what, § 210; that,
§211,2.
SBeCc, bie, bie -u, wave.
99Sc(t, bie, bie -ett, world.
2!6eltgcfc^t(^tc, bie, ber — , world's
history.
SBclttcit, ber, bie -e, part of the
world, quarter of the globe.
tticm, dat. of roer, to whom.
iDCttbett, tuattbte, getuanbt or reg.
(I)oben), to turn ; fic^ — , refiex.,
to turn, appeal, to, an with ace.
mctttg, little, § 194, 2; pi., few.
nienn, if ; when, § 84, 2, a ; when-
ever, § 84, 2, h.
tucr, who, he who, § 208.
mcrbcn, raurbe, gettjorben and
itiorben (fein), er trirb, to be-
come, get, § 42, 3 ; as future
auxiliary with infin., shall, will,
§ 69, 1 ; as passive auxiliary
icith perfect participle, am, are,
is, § 204.
ttJcrfett, ttjarf, gemorfen (Ijabett),
er trirft, to throw, cast.
SBcrf, t)a^, bie -e, work (books,
etc.).
mcrt, valued, valuable; worth.
SBcttcr, ba^, bie — , weather.
ttJibcr, against, § 112.
SSStbcvftrtttb, ber, beg -eg, resist-
ance ; — teiften, to offer resist-
ance.
ttJtc, as ; how ; trie tfti^t, what is
(the name of).
ttitcbcr, adv. and sep. prefix,
again.
ttJicbcrfotttntett, font tDieber, tt)ie=
bergefommeit (fein), to come
again, return.
SSiCtt, ha^, Vienna.
ttiictitcJ, how much ; — U^r, what
time.
ttiUb
328
Stterfit
totib, wild.
aSil^cIm, ber, William.
ttiitt, ttJiEft, see irollen.
9BinbmuI)(e^ tie, bic -n, wind-
mill.
ttitr, we.
ttiirb, see trerbcn.
ttltrfHl^, real(ly).
ttiiffcn, tru^te, geitjufet (^aben), cr
trci^, to know, § 58, 1.
9Biffcttf(^aft, btc, bie -eit, science.
2Bittcn6cr0, ba«, Wittenberg.
ttJO, where.
ttio^t, perhaps, probably, I think,
§ 88 ; well {of health), § 88,
Note, §206, 1, § 234, 3.
SBol^I, "tiCi^, bc§ -e, welfare.
mo^ttClt, reg. (^aben), to live,
dwell, reside, § 6, 1.
moCctt, re</. (l)aben), cr h)tll, jpres.
sM&j., iDoUe, to want to, § 40, 1 ;
will, § 69, 3.
ttJoKtc, see h)otIen.
ttJorfluf, for what.
ttiorbcii, see iDcrben ; sign of pas-
sive.
933ort, bo8, word ; pL, ble SBortc,
words, in connected discourse;
btc 2Bbrtcr, separate words, as
in a dictionary.
2B3rtcrbtt(^, bag, bic ''cr, diction-
ary.
iDdrtltt^, literal (ly).
tuorum, for which.
motion, of which.
munbcrOoO, wonderful.
miinff^cn, reg. (tjaben), to wish,
§ 40, 2 ; with phrase or clause,
§ 101, 1.
ttiurbe, wttrbc, see trerbcn.
9Biirttettt6crg, ba^, Wurttemberg.
Wttfetc, see it) iff en.
^antttt, reg. (tiaben), to quarrel ;
fid) — , reflex., to quarrel with
one another.
jc^n, ten.
^eii^nen, reg. (boben), to draw;
to sign {a letter) ; see also au«=
jetdf)neti, to distinguish.
Seigett, reg. (babcn), to show;
fid) — , reflex., to show oneself.
3eit, bic, bic -en, time, '§ 60, 1 ;
pi., times, all time.
Stiialttv, ba§, bie — , age, period,
epoch.
3cit(tttt0, cine, for a time, § 50, 2.
jcugctt, reg. (^abcn), to bear wit-
5tc^cn, 3og, gcjogen (!)aben), to
draw; (jetn), to go (of troops,
etc.).
^intmcr, ba§, bic — , room.
5og, see jietien.
3ortt, ber, be8 -S, anger ; in —
geraten, to get angry ; tjor — ,
with anger.
5tt, prep., to, § 100, 1 ; at, § 100,
2 ; for, § 100, 3 ; too, § 100, 4,
Note ; in idioms, § 100, 4 ; as
sign of infin., to ; — fet)en, to
be seen, § 204, 2, Note ; omitted
in English translation with
verbs of choosing, etc. ; sep.
prefix, in jufel^en, to look on,
jugeben, to admit, etc.
■^tt'erfcnncn, erfanntc gu, jucr*
!annt (I)aben), to award.
jucrft; at first, § 268, 2.
5uge(en
329
SWiirft
Stt'gcaen, gab git, jugegeben (l)a=
ben), er gibt 311, to agree, con-
cede, § 232, 2.
Sttriirf'gctrctcn, see jurucftreteti.
gururf'gcsogcn, see jurucfjie^en.
^nvM'hf^vtrtf reg., sep. (fciti), to
return.
guriirf'trctctt, trat ^mud, jurud^
getreten (jein), er tritt suriicf,
to step back; to yield, give
in.
3urii(f'5te!^cn, gog guriicf, ^urucf=
gejogen (^abeit), to draw back ;
fid) — , reflex., to retire.
Sufam'mctt, adv. and sep. prefix,
together.
§ttfam'mcnfattcn, fiet ijujammen,
jufatnmengefoUen (fetn), er fftllt
gujammeiT, to fall down (to-
gether).
Sufaw'mcttgefd^loffcn, see gufatti^
inenf(^(ie§en,
Sufarn'mcttft^lic^cn fid), fd)to6 fid)
gujammen, fid) jufammetigc-
fc^Ioffen (^aben), to join them-
selves together.
Stt'fcl)en, fo^ 5U, 3iigejel)en (Ijaben),
er fiel)t gu, to look on at, with
dat.
Bu'fttmttttttig, bie, bie -en, consent,
indorsement.
SttttJCt'Ieit, sometimes, § 50, 3,
Note.
Stt'fcttbctt, fanbte ju, ^ugefanbi
(I)aben), to send to.
5tt'5itfcnbctt, see gufenben.
3tt»ang, ber, be§ -e§, compulsion.
jttiang, see gtoingen,
jttiar, it is true, to be sure, § 274.
Sttict, two.
^Weifcl, ber, btc — , doubt.
JttJCi^Uttbcrt, two hundred.
jttJingen, jtuatig, geshjungen {\)a-
ben), to compel.
5tt)if^cn, prep, with dat. or ace,
between, § 117.
jttJOlf, twelve.
5ttJ0(ft, twelfth.
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY
AND INDEX.
a, ein ; not a, fein, § 9.
Aachen, bo§ 5tad)en, the capital of
Charlemagne'' s Empire.
able, to be — , fiinnen, § 58, 3 and
§ 75, 2, Note.
about, urn, § 111, 1 and § 193, 1 ;
iiber, § 123, 2 and § 193, 1 ;
ungefciljr, dwa, § 193, 2; im
iBegriff, § 193, 3 ; round — , urn
— ^erum ; what — , iDoriiber,
§ 127, a, 3 ; other expressions,
§ 193, 3, Note.
above, ilber, § 123, 1 ; — all
things, oor alien 2)ingen or
t)or aUem.
accomplish, teiften, reg. (^aben) ;
OoUbrtngen, DoUbraci^te, DoU^
bracl)t (Ijaben).
according to, nac^, § 97, 3.
acquainted, to get — with, fenneu
lerticn, reg. {\)Q.\)in) , with ace,
§ 171, 2, Note.
across, iiber, § 123, 1 ; ferry — ,
ii'berfe^en, reg., sep. (^aben),
§ 154, 2, Note.
advice, bcr 3?at, bic 9?dte or 9Jat»
jd)lage.
afoot, gu ^VL% § 100, 4.
afraid, to be — , [id) filrc^ten,
reg. (l)abeu), § 25, of, nor icith
dat.
after, prep, wad), § 97, 2 and
§ 259, 2 ; C071J. naci)bem, § 259, 1 ;
day — to-morrow, iibermorgeiu
afterward, nac^^er, § 259, 2.
again, mieber.
against, gegen with ace, § 110, 1 ;
irtber with ace, § 112.
age, of people, baS Stltcr, bic — ;
period, baS ^eitaltex, bic — ;
the Middle Ages, ba& 2)Uttcl=
alter.
ago, tior zoiY^ dat., § 4 ; tjer fol-
lowing ace, § 4, Note.
agree, iiberein'ftimmen, reg., sep.,
§ 232, 1 ; gu'geben, irreg., sep.,
§ 232, 2.
all, ganj, § 113, 1; aU, ^ 113,2;
— right, f(f)on, § 128, 2, gut,
fci)ou; — kinds of, allerlei, in-
decl.
almost, bcinal^e.
along, entlang, bal)er, § 247, 1 ;
mit, § 247, 2, as sep. prefix in
mitgel)Vii, mitbringen, etc.
already, fd)on, § 128; not trans-
lated, § 228, 2.
although, obmo^l, with transposed
order.
always, inimer.
am, bin, see fein.
among, nnter, § 124.
an, ein ; not an, fein, § 9.
and, unb ; — then, ta, § 17, 1.
anger, ber 3oni, beS -(e)«.
330
angry
331
back
angry, bofe, at, auf with ace,
§120,3; gornig.
annihilate, Dernid^tcn, reg., insep.
(^aben).
another, ein aiiber, § 30, 1; nocf)
ein, § 30, 2.
answer, intrans., ontlrorten, reg.
(t)aben); trans., beanttnorten,
reg., insep. (t)aben), § 135, 3;
noun, bie Stnttrort, bie -en.
Anton, prop, name, ber Slntott.
any, irgenb ein ; not — , fetn, § 9 ;
at — rate, jebenfattg, auf jeben
■ %aU, auf oEe galte ; often omit-
ted as in § 35, a, sentence 5.
anybody, (irgenb) jemanb.
anything, etlrag, a following adj.
capitalized, § 217; not — ,
nic^tg, a folloioing adj. capi-
talized, § 217.
anyway, iiber^ou^t, § 160 ; jeben^
faU§.
are, ftnb, see, fetn ; there — , eg
finb, § 85, 2 ; see also progres-
sive form, § 178, Note b.
aren't, see are not.
arise, entfte^en, entftonb, entftan=
ben (fein).
arm, ber Slrm, bie -e; armchair,
ber !i?cf)nftii^(, bie ""e.
army, bag §eer, bie -e ; bie 5lrmee,
bie -n.
arose, past of arise.
around, urn, § 111, 1 ; go — , litei^-
ally, itm'get)en, ging um, umge=
gangen (jein); get — , avoid,
umge'fien, umging, umgangen
(^aben)..
arrive, anfomnten, fam an, ange^
fommen (fein).
art, bie ^unft, bie ''e ; — of print-
ing, bie 33u(i)bru(fer!unft ;. —
exposition, bie ^unftaugftettung,
bie -en.
artist, ber liinftter, bie — .
as, conj.; of reason, ha, § 17, 3 ;
of time, al§, Xo'xt, § 83, 2 ; first
correlative, jo, § 26, 1 ; second
correlative, mie, § 26, \ and
§ 83, 1 ; as if, alg ob with trans-
posed order, or a(§ with inverted
order, § 255, 2.
ask, bitten, § 15, 1 ; for, um with
ace; fragen, § 15, 2, after,
narf) with dat. ; — questions,
fragen ftetten, reg., § 15, 2, h,
Note h.
at, 3U, § 100,2; an, §119,1 ; auf,
§ 120, 3, Note a; um, § 111, 3;
— all, iibert)aupt, § 160; —
school, in ber @d)ule ; — home,
ju §aufe.
attack, augreifen, griff an, auge*
griffeu (I)abeu).
attention, bie 5ld)t ; pay — , arf)t=
gebeu, gab ad)t, ac^tgegeben (^a*
ben), to, auf with ace.
Augustus, prop, name, ber Stugu^
\iVi^ {of ancients) "; of moderns,
ber 2(u'guft.
away, in eg ; get — , eutf omnten,
entfam, entfommen (fein).
6
back, noun, ber 9?ii(fen, bie — ;
adv., juriicf ; to come — , gurii(f=
fommen, fam juriicf, juriidge^
fommen (fein); give — , suriid-
gebeu, gab ^uriid, ^uriidgegeben
(^aben).
bad
332
blue
bad, badly, fc^tec^t.
ball, ber iBolI, bie "f .
Barbarossa, ber 5Rotbart, ^ricbric^
SBarbaroffa.
bathe, baben, reg. (l)aben).
be, fctn, rt)ar, getncfen (fein), id)
bin, bu bift, cr ift, voix finb, it)r
feib, fie fmb ; suhj., i6) fei, etc. ;
of health, fic^ befinben, befanb,
bcfunbcn (^aben) , or e§ ge^t with
dat., § 206, 1 ; to — translated,
I)ei^en, l)icf^, gel)ei|3en (^aben),
§ 49, 2, Note.; to — late, f^at
Fommen, fam, gcfommen (fcin),
§ 219, 2; to — to (affect), an=
ge^cn, giug an, angegangen
(jein), § 206, 2, Note; to —
{cost), foften, reg. (^aben),
§ 206, 2, Note ; progressive
form, § 178, Note h ; specific
uses, liegcn, ftctjen, ^angeu, eic,
§ 206, 2.
beautiful, fd)bn.
became, past of become.
because, tt)eit, with transposed
order.
become, njcrben, tuurbe, gcttjorbeit
(fein), § 42, 3.
bed, ba« i8ett, bie -en ; to — , ju
33ett.
been, gciucfcn, see fein ; see also
progressive form, § 178, Note b.
Beethoven, ihiblDig ban 33ectl)o=
»eu.
before, conj., t^e, § 248, 1 ; prep.,
bor, § 126, 1 and § 248, 3 ; adv.,
noii), § 248, 2, a, frtt^er, Dormer,
§ 248, 2, 6.
began, past o/ begin.
begin, onfangcH; firtg an, angefan=
geVt (^abcn), cr fdngt an, with
ju and infin., § 180, 2 ; more
formal, beginnen, begann, ht'
gonnen (f)aben).
behave, ftd) benetjmcn, bcno!)m,
bcnommcn (f)abcn), er bcnimmt
believe, gfouben, reg. (^abcn),
§ 167, 1 ; in, an with ace, § 167,
1, Note c ; — a person, dat.,
§ 157, 1, Note a; — a thing,
ace, § 157, 1, Note b.
belong, gpI)orcn, reg., insep. (^a^
ben), with dat.
bench, bie S3anf, bie -e.
Berlin, (bag) Berlin.
beside, neben, § 122.
besides, au^er with dat.
besiege, belagern, reg., insep. (^a*
ben).
best, beft, am beften; to like — ,
am liebften mogen, § 76, 2.
better, beffer ; to like — , liebcr
mogen, § 76, 2.
between, jjnjijdjen, icith dat. or
ace, § 117.
bible, bie 33ibel, bie -n; transla-
tion of the — , bie 33ibeliiberjet^»
nng.
big, bigger, biggest, grog, grower,
grbgt, am grb^ten.
bird, ber i^ogel, bie ".
birthday, ber ©ebnrtv^tag, bie -e;
for your — , gum @eburt«tag.
Bismarck, (ber) S3i«mar(f.
black, jrfjmar^.
blame, bie (S(!)utb; to be to — ,
®d)ulb baran feiii.
blood, ba« iBlut.
blue, blaiu
body
333
chancery
body {alive), ber ^'or^jer, bie— ;
{dead) bie ^t\6)t, bie -it.
Bonn, {'tio.^) iBonn.
book, ba§ S3ucl^, bie ""er.
both, beibe, § 170.
boy, ber ^'nabe, beg -n, bie -n.
Brandenburg, {\>a%) S3ranbenburg.
Bratwurstglocklein, ha^ 33rat=
rourftgiocflein.
brave, ta^fer.
bread, bag 33rot, bie -e.
break, gerbrec^en, gerbrad), gerbro^
c^en (t)aben), er gerbrid^t.
bring, bringeu, brad)te, 0ebrad)t
(^abett) ; to — up, erjie^en,
erjog, ergogen (^aben); to
— together, jufantmenbringen,
brac^te jufammen, jiifammcnge-
brad^t (^aben); to — (to fetch),
I)oIen, reg. (^aben), § 42, 2.
broad, breit.
brother, ber 33ruber, bie ''er.
brought, past and participle of
bring.
brown, braun; Brown, prop,
name, 33raun.
build, bauen, reg. (^aben).
building, bag ©ebciube, bie — ; bie
^aute, bie -n.
buried, past o/bury.
bury, begraben, begriib, begraben
(^aben), er begrcibt.
busy, to — oneself, fid) befc^aftigen
(t)aben), reg., insep.
but, conj., aber, § 43, 1 ; fonbern,
§ 43, 2; adv., nur ; nothing — ,
nid)tg a(g, § 43, 1, Note.
buy, faufen, reg. (^aben).
by, ncben, § 122 ; bei, § 95, 1 ;
noc^, § 97, 3 ; fiir, § 109, 2 j
with passive, toon, § 99, 2 ; —
means of, burc^ ; with verbal,
baburrf) ha^ ; to sit down by,
fic^ 3U jemanb fe^en, reg. (l)a=
ben).
call, nennen, nannte, genannt
(t)aben), § 49, 1 ; to be called,
^ei^en, I)ie§, geljei^en (^aben),
§ 49, 2.
came, past of come.
campaign, ber getbpg, bie "e.
can (to be able), fonnen, fonnte,
gefonnt (^aben), er fanti, § 75,
2, Note.
cane, ber @to(f, bie '^e,
cannot, see can not.
care, fid) fiimmern, reg. (t)aben),
about, urn with ace.
careful (ly), forgfcittig ; most — ,
§ 218, 2.
carriage, bie 3)rof(^fe, bie -n ; ber
3Bagen, bie — .
carried, past of carry,
carry, tragen, trug, getragen
(^aben), er tragi; bringen,
brad)te, gebrad)t (tjaben) ; to
— out, burc^'fe^en, reg., sep.
(l)oben).
castle, bog ®d)(o^, bie "er.
catch, fangen, fing, gefangen (t)a=
ben), er fcingt.
caught, past o/ catch.
celebrate, feiern, reg. (i)aben).
century, bag 3al)rt)unbert, bie -e.
certainly, getni^',
chair, ber @tu^(, bie H ; armchair,
ber ^e^nftu^I, bie H.
chancery, bie ^anglei', bie -en.
change
334
country
change, wed)\dn, reg. (l)oben);
to — clothes, fid) um'^iel)en, gog
fic^ um, \\6) umgegogen (t)abcn).
Charlemagne, (bcr) Staxi ber
©ro^e, tarl8 beg ©ro^en.
Charles, (ber) tart.
cheap, billig.
chicken, ba§ §u^n, bie "er.
child, children, 't^a^ f inb, bie -er.
choose, tt)Qt)(en, reg. (l)aben) ;
to elect, ertuii^ten, reg.., insep.
Christmas, bie 2Beit)ua(^ten (pZ.) J
for — , ju 2Seil)nad)ten.
church, bie tircf)e, bie -n.
city, bie @tabt, bie H,
claim, bel)aupten, reg.^ insep. (l)a=
ben),
class, bie tiaffe, bie -n.
classic, ber tlajfifer, bie — .
clever, flug.
climb, intrans., fteigen, ftieg, ge-
ftiegen (jein); trans., befteigen,
beftieg, beftiegeu (l)oben).
clock, bie Ul)r, bie -en, § 169, 1 ;
o'clock, Ul)r, § 50, 4 and § 169, 2.
clothes, bie tleiber (pL); to
change — , fid) um^ie^en, jog
ftd) um, fid) umgejogen (I)abcn).
cloud, bie SBotfe, bie -n.
coat, ber 9tocf, bie "e.
coffee, ber t^affee, bie -e.
cold, fait.
Colosseum, bag totoffeum, beS -8.
combat, baS tampffpiet, bie -e.
come, fommen, fam, gefommen
(feiu); to — back, juriicffom^
men, sep. (fein); to — in, herein-
fommen, sep. (fein).
comfortable, bequem.
command, befel)ten, befal)t, be-
fo^len (I)aben), er befict)It, with
dat., § 190, 1 and^ 197, 2.
common, gemeinfam.
competition, bie .^onfurrenj', bie
-en.
complain, fic^ beflagen, reg.,
insep. (^oben); to — of, to
lament, beflagen, reg., insep.
(l)aben) with ace.
complicated, oertt)icfe(t.
conquer, intrans., fiegen, reg.
(tjaben), § 27 ; trans., befiegcn,
reg., insep. (f)aben), §27; to
subdue, nntermer'fen, unter=
marf, untermor'fen (^aben), er
untermirft.
consequence, bie ^olge, bie -n.
consist, beftef)en, beftanb, beftan*
ben (Ijaben), of, aug with dat.,
§ 269, 1.
constantly, fortmal)renb.
contest, ber tampf, bie H ; singers'
— , ber ^cingerfrieg, bie -e.
continue, fortfal)ren, fut)r fort,
fortgefa^ren (baben), er fdl)rt
fort, with ju and injin., § 180, 2
and § 233, 1 ; fortfe^cn, reg.,
sep. (f)aben), with direct obj. in
ace, § 233, 2.
convent, baS tlofter, bie ".
convince, iiberjeu'gen, reg., imep.
(l)aben).
corner, bie ©cfe, bie -n.
correct, rid)tig ; to — , oerbeffern,
reg., insep. (l)aben).
could, fonnte, fonnte, see can,
fbnnen.
countless, 5al){lo8.
country, ba6 i!anb, bie "er ; to
couple
335
do
the — , auf bo8 $?anb, § 120, 3,
Note a.
couple, bag ^aar, bie -e ; in adj.
sense, a — , ein paax,
course, of — , notiirUc^, § 262.
court {of law), bag ®txi&ji, bie -e.
courteous (ly), ^oftic^.
cousin (male), ber S5ettcr, bie — .
cover, bebecfen, reg., insep. (^a=
ben).
crowd, ha$ ©ebrange, beS -8.
crown, bie ^rone, bie -n ; to —
with a wrfeath, befranjen, reg.,
insep. (f)aben).
cup, bie Soffe, bie -n.
dance, ber Xan^, bie H; to — ,
tan^en, reg. (l)aben) ; there's
going to be a dance, eg tt)irb ge=
tanst, § 204, 2.
daughter, bie 2;oc^ter, bie ^
day, ber 2^ag, bie -e ; market — ,
ber 3Rarfttag, bie -e ; — after
to-morrow, iibermorgen.
dead, tot.
deal, a great — , Diet.
dear, lieb ; (costly) teuer.
death, ber Xob, bie -e.
decide, entfc^eiben, entfd^ieb, ent:^
fcfjieben (^aben) ivith direct obj.,
§ 258, 1 ; fid) entfdiaeBen, ent=
jrfiroB fid), ftrf) entfd)Ioffen (()a=
ben), § 258, 2; befrf)aeBen,
bej(^Io^, befd)(offen (^aben),
§ 258, 2.
decidedly, entfc^ieben, past part,
of entfc^eiben, used as adv.
deep, tief.
depend, fid) t)ertaffen, Derlie^ fid^.
ftd^ bertaffen (f)aben), er berla^t
fid^, upon, auf with ace; that
depends, bag fommt barauf an.
desk, bag ^ult, bie -e (at school);
ber ®(^reibtifd), bie -e (a«
A-owie).
despair, bergftjeifeln, reg., insep.
(^aben).
devastate, bern)uften, re^., twsep.
(t)aben).
develop, enttt)i(feln, regr., insep.
(f)aben).
development, bie Snttt)i(felnng,
bie -en.
Dewey, (ber) 2)en)el).
dialect, bie SiJiunbart, bie -en.
dictionary, bagSSbrterbud), bie^er.
did, tat, see do, tun ; emphatic
form, § 77, 2, Note ; often !^aben,
§ 229, 2.
didn't, see did not.
die, fterben, ftarb, geftorben (fein),
er ftirbt.
Dietrich, (ber) S)ietrid^.
difference, ber Unterfci^icb, bie -e.
difficulty, bie ©c^ftiierigfeit, bie
-en.
dinner, bag 9Kittageffen, bie — .
disagreeable, un'angene^m.
distinct (ly), beuttic^ ; most — ,
§ 218, 2.
distinguish, aug5eid)nen, reg., sep.
(^aben); to — oneself, fid) aug*
3eid)nen.
disturb, ftbren, reg. (^aben).
do, tun, tat, getan (^aben), § 77,
2 ; mac^en, reg. (i)aben), § 77,
1 ; to emphasize imperative,
bod), § 77, 2, Note; for em-
phatic indicative pres. or past
dog
336
excel
use simply German pres. or
past, § 77, 2, Note, and § 227, 1.
dog, ber §unb, bie -e.
done, getan, see do, tun.
don't, see do not.
down, nieber, ^tnunter ; to sit — ,
fi(^ fe^en, reg. (t)aben), § 18, 2;
to sink — , Tiieberfinfen, fan!
ttlebcr, nicbcrgefunfen (fein) ;
— town, in ber, or bie @tabt,
§121.
Dresden, (ha^) S)regben.
dress, ba8 ^teib, bie -er (also
clothes).
drive, fo^ren, fu'^r, gcfa'^ren (l)a=
ben or fein, § 167 and Note), er
fa^rt.
drown, be drowned, ertrinfen,
ertranf, ertrunfen (fein).
dunce, ber 2)ummfopf, bie "e.
during, ti3af)renb, prep, with gen.
E
each, jeber, jebe, iebe€ ; — other,
when ohj. of verb, ^id}, un«, eud^,
etc.; when ohj. of prep., einan=
ber, written with prep. : auSein-
anber, niiteinanber.
eagerly, eifrig.
early, friil).
easier, comparative ofe^Lsy.
east, ber Often, be« -8 ; for adj.,
Oft, usually uniting with a fol-
lowing noun; east wind, ber
Oftiuinb.
easy, easily, easier, easiest, leirfjt,
Ieid)ter, leic^teft, ant leid)teften.
eat, eaten, effen, o^, gegeffeu (l)a-
ben), er i^t.
eight, Qd)t.
elector, ber turfiirft, be8 -en, bie
-en.
else, anberg, § 30, 1, Note; fonft,
§ 30, 1, Note.
emperor, ber ^aifer, bie — .
empire, "ba^ 9^eic^, bie -e ; ba8
^'aiferreid), bie -e.
enemy, ber geinb, bie -e.
enough, genng.
entertain, unter^at'ten, untert)ielt',
unter^al'ten (i)aben), er unter=
^olt'.
enthusiasm, bie 53egMfterung, bie
-en.
entire(ly), gan?, § 113, 1.
envious, neibifd^, of, anf; eifer=
fiidjtig (jealous).
escape, entfom'men, enttam', ent*
fom'men Cfein), from, au« with
dat.
especially, befonberS.
Europe, (bag) ©uropa.
even, fetbft, § 196, 2, Note,
evening, ber ^benb, bie -e; in the
— , abenbg, am 3lbenb ; written
small as an adv. in this evening,
to-morrow evening, ^eute abenb,
ntorgen abenb.
ever, je, § 257, 1; and), § 257, 2;
for — , (anf) emig, § 257, 1,
Note.
every, jeber, jebc, jebcg.
everybody, jebermann.
everything, alle^.
everywhere, iiberaU.
exactly, gonan.
examination, baS ©j.amen, bie
C£janiina ; bie '^^riifnng, bie -en.
excel, iibertref'fen, iibertraf, ilber-
trof'fen (l)aben), er iibertrifft'.
337
French
excuse, cntf(f)utbigcn, reg.^ insep.
(I)oben).
exercise, bie 2lufgabe, bie -n.
exhibition, bie 2tu8ftcEung.
expect, crJtJarten, reg.^ insep. (^a=
ben).
expensive, teuer.
extraordinary, au^eror'bentUd).
fact, W %Cii'\a6)t, bie -n.
fainting, adj.., o^nmdc^tig.
fall {of the year)., ber ^erbft, bie
-e.
fall, foUen, fief, gefollen (jein),
er fallt.
famous, berii^mt.
far, ireit ; as — as, bi^, § 107, 2.
fast, faster, fastest, fd)neir, fc^nef^
ler, am fcf)uell[ten.
father, ber ^ater, bie ^
fear, fiird)ten, reg. (t)abeu); never
-, fd)on, § 128, 2.
feel, empfinben, em^fanb, empfun=
ben (t)aben).
ferry, to — across, ii'berfe^en,
reg.., sep. (^aben), § 154, 2,
Note.
fidelity, bie Streue.
fifteen, fiinfje^n.
fifth, fiinft.
fifty, fiinf^ig.
fight, ber tatn^f, bie H ; to — ,
fompfen, reg. ({)aben).
finally, enblic^, fditte^lic^.
find, finben, fanb, gefnnben (^a=
ben), § 180, 1.
fine, ^ra(^ti)oll.
finish, t)oEenben, reg., insep. (^o=
ben).
fire, bog ^euer, bie — .
firm, feft ; firmer, most firmly,
fefter, am fefteften.
first, adj.., crft, § 268, 1 ; adv.,
juerft, § 268, 2.
Fisher, prop, name, (ber) ^ifd)er.
five, fitnf.
flattery, bie @(f)meid)e(ei, bie -en.
floor, ber S3oben, bie — or "■.
flow, ftei^en, flo^, gefloffen (jein).
follow, fotgen, reg. (fein), with
dat., § 166, Note ; befolgen, reg.,
insep. (^aben), with ace, § 166,
Note.
fly, fUegen, flog, geflogen (jein) ;
of time, fd)nell Derge^en, Der=
ging, Dergangen (fein), § 246,2.
football, ber t^nfiball^ bie ^e.
for, fiir, § 109 ; feit, § 98, 2 ; nm,
§ 111, 2 ; ace. sometimes loith
tang, § 5 and Note; look — ,
furf)en, § 7 ; wait — , marten anf,
§ 8; what — , mofiir, moranf ;
— your birthday, gum @eburt«=
tag ; — to-morrow, auf morgen,
§ 120, 3, Note h.
foreign, fremb.
forest, ber 2BaIb, bie ''er.
forever, (auf) emig, § 257, 1, Note.
forget, bergeffen, oerga^, bergeffen
(^aben), cr Dergi^t.
forgot, past of forget.
fortress, bie 53urg, bie -en.
fought, past of fight.
found, past o/find.
four, Dier.
Fowler, (ber) 35ogfer.
Frederick, (ber) ^riebrtd).
freedom, bie ^rei^eit.
French, adj. , franjbfifci) ; the
friend
338
guest
French language, ba8 f^ran^b*
ftf(^(e) ; in French, auf fran30=^
ftfd).
friend, bcr ^reunb, bic -c.
friendly, freunbUd^.
Fritz, (bcr) ^rife.
fro, to and — , l)in unb t)er, § 149, 2.
from, oon, § 99, 1.
front, in — of, tior, § 125, 1.
funny, !omifrf).
gallery, bte ©atcrie', bic -n ; pic-
ture — , bic ©cmal'bcgatcric'.
game, bag @^iel, bic -c ; bo8 SSctt*
fpict, bic -c.
garden, bcr ©ortcn, bic ^
gate, ba§ Xox, bte -e.
gave, gab, see give, gcbcn.
general, bcr gclbljcrr, bic -en ; ber
©encrat', bie -e or '^e.
gentleman, bcr §err, bc8 -n, bic
-en.
German, adj., bcutfrf) ; — man,
bcr 2)cutfc^c, beg -n ; the — lan-
guage, bag 3)cutfcf)e (3)ciitj(^) ;
to speak — , 2)cutfc^ fpred^en,
fprad^, gefpro(i)en (^abcn), cr
j^ric^t; in — , auf bcutfd), im
2)eutfd)cn, § 156.
Germany, ba^ ^cutfc^Ianb.
get, befommen, betam, bcfom*
men (l)aben), § 42, 1 ; l)oIcn,
reg. (l)abcn), § 42, 2 ; luerbcn,
h)urbe, flctnorben (jctn), er uUrb,
§ 42, 3 ; to — away, cntfom'=
men, entfam', entfom'men
(jetn) ; to — around (avoid),
umgc'{)en, umgtng', umgangeit
(^abcn).
getting, see get.
ghost, bcr ®cift, bic -er.
girl, bag 9JJcibd)en, bic — .
give, geben, gab, gcgeben (^abcn),
cr gibt ; to — back, jururf gcben,
irreg., sep. (t)aben); to — re-
gards to, grii^en, reg. (t)abcn)
with ace.
glad, fro^ ; I am — , eg freut mid) ;
to be — to do something, cttt)ag
gem tun ; gladly, gern, § 76, 2.
glove, bcr §anbfd)u^, bie -c.
go, gelien, ging, gegangen (fein) ;
^ingc^en, irreg., sep. (fein) ;
(of army) giclicn, jog, gcjogcn
(fein) ; to — around, um'ge^en,
irreg., sep. (fein) ; to be going
to, pres. tense, § 228, 1 ; to —
walking, or for a walk, fpajie*
ren ge^en, § 180, 1.
Goethe, (ber) ®octf)c.
gone, gegangen, see go, gc'^cn.
good, gut ; to have a — time,
fid) (gut) amiificrcn, amiificrtc,
amiificrt (baben), § 60, 6.
good-by, abicu.
got, see get.
grammar, bic ©ramma'tif, bic -en.
grass widow, bic ©tro^njitroe,
bie -n.
gray, grau.
great, greater, greatest, gro§;
grower, grb§t, am grbfetcn.
Gretchen, (bag) ©retdjen.
Gridley, prop, name, (ber) ®rib»
let).
ground, bcr S3oben, bic — and «,
§ 260, Note; (reason), bcr
©runb, bie "c, § 260.
guest, bcr ®aft, bic "e.
Gutenberg
339
hot
Gutenberg, prop, name, (ber) ©u^
tenberg.
had, I)atte, see have, l^aben,
hair, 'iia^ §aar, bie -e.
half, ^alb, § 184, 2; bie §atfte,
bie -n, § 184, 1 j — past ten,
\)a\h elf.
hall, ber @aal, bie @ate; bie §alle,
bie -n.
hand, bie §anb, bie H,
handkerchief, 'Qa^ %a\6)txiiVL6),
bie "er.
Hanover or Hannover, {tiOi^) §an»
no'oer.
happen, gefc^e^en, gefdja^, gejcl^e=
Ijen (fein), e8 gefc^ie^t.
hard, harder, fc^raer, fd)tt)ercr,
§173,2;f(eiBig,freiBiger,§173,
3 ; ^art, § 173, 1 ; ftarf, § 173,
4 ; ^eftig.
hardly, !oum.
Harvard, prop, name., §art)arb,
bie §aroarb=Unit)erfitat.
hat, ber §ut, bie ^e.
have, ^oben, ^otte, ge^abt (^aben),
er ^at, § 68, 1, §§ 164, 165, 167 ;
with some verbs (fein), § 68, 2,
§§ 164, 166, 167 ; to — to, miif-
fen, § 68, 3; to — made, ntad)en
laffen, § 68, 4.
Havel, prop, name of a river near
Berlin, bie §at)el.
haven't, see have not.
having, see have.
he, er.
head, ber ^opf, bie ^e ; at the — ,
an ber @pi^e.
health, bie ©efunb^eit, bie -en.
hear, l^oren, reg. (Ijabcn), § 180, 1.
heard, past of hear.
heaven, ber ^immel; for — 's
sake, urn (be8) ^immetS inillen,
help, bie §itfe, bie -n ; to — ,
^elfen, ^a(f, gei)otfen (^aben),
39, 1 ; to — it, bofiir fonnen,
§ 39, 2; can't help, miiffen,
§ 39, 2, Note.
Henry, (ber) §einri(^.
her, i^row., fie, ace, i^r, dat.; it)nt
or e§, § 207, Note; adj., i^r.
here, ^ier; (hither) ^ier^er; tio.,
§ 17, 2.
Hermann, (ber) Hermann.
hero, ber §etb, beg -en, bie -en.
high, ^oc^, declined l^o^er, ^o^e,
i)ol)e8.
Hildegund, bie §i(begunb.
him, i^n, ace, i^m, dat.
himself, fid), reflex, pron.
his, fein.
history, bie @efrf)i(i)tc, bie -n ; bie
Seltgef(f)i(^te.
hither, ^er, l^ier^er; — and
thither, ^in unb Ijer, § 149, 2.
Hohenstaufen, prop, name, (bie)
§oI)enftau'fen (pi.), § 82.
Hohenzollern, prop, name, (bie)
^o^enjol'lern (pL), § 192.
hold, fatten, l^ielt, getjalten (t)a=
ben), er pit.
holy, ^eitig; Holy Land, bag
§eilige !i;anb.
home (to), noc^ §oufe ; at — , gu
§aufe.
honor, bie (S^re, bie -n ; seat of
— , ber (S^renpto^, bie -e ; to — ,
Deref)ren, reg., insep. (pben).
hot, ^ei^.
hotel
340
July
hotel, bag §oteI', tie -«.
hour, bie @tunbe, bie -n, § 169, 2,
Note.
house, bag §au8, bie §dufer,
how, tt)ie.
human being, ber 9Kenj(^, beg -en,
bie -en, § 19, 1.
hundred,, ^unbert.
hundredth, ^unbertfl.
"hurry, eilen, reg. (^aben) ; to be
in a — , eile ^oben.
husband, ber 3J?ann, bie "er, § 19, 2.
hut, bie ^iitte, bie -u.
I, Id).
idea, bie 3bee, bie -n.
if, XotmiiWUh transposed order;
after words of asking^ ob ; as
— , alg ob, with transposed or-
der^ § 255, 2, or alg, loitfi in-
verted order, § 265, 2.
I'm, see I am.
impolite, un'^of(icl).
importance, bie 53ebeutung.
in, in, § 121 ; — it, barin (rest),
I)ineiu (motion) ; bei, § 95, 2 ;
jeit, §98,2; an, § 119, 3; —
the evening, abenbg or am
5tbenb; — German, auf bentfd),
§ 120, 3, Note 6, § 156, or im
2)eutfd)en, § 156 ; to come — ,
l)ereinfommen, tarn l)erein, l^tv-
eingefommen (fein) ; Come in !
(in answer to a knock at the
door), l)erein!
include, umfaj'jen, reg., insep.
(^aben).
influence, beein'fluffen, reg., in-
sep. (Ijaben).
ink, bie Xinte, bie -n.
inn, bag ^irtg^aug, bie 2Btrtg»
^cinjer.
insist, befte^en, beftanb, beftanben
(^aben), on, anf with dat.,
§ 269, 2.
instead of, anftott with gen. ; with
a verbal, infinitive, § 181,
clause, § 190.
interest, bag 3interej'^e, bie -n, in,
fiir with ace.
interested, to be — , fid) intereffte'«
ren, intereffier'te fid), fid) interef*
fiert' (l)aben), in, fiir loith ace.
interesting, intereffant'.
interrupt, nnterbred)'en, unter-
brad)', nnterbrod^'en (t)abcn), er
nntevbridjt'.
into, in with ace. ; — German,
ing 'Dentfd)e, § 156.
invent, erfinben, erfanb, erfunben
(i)aben).
invention, bie ©rfinbnng, bie -en.
iron, bag (Sifen, bie — .
is, ift, see fein; that — {to say),
bog ^ei^t : that — (translated),
bag l)eiBt, § 49, 2, Note ; there
— , eggibt, §85, 1, egifl,§85,2.
isn't, see is not.
it, eg, er, fie, § 207 ; help — (after
negative), bofiir, § 39, 2 ; with
prepositions, ba(r), § 106, 1.
Italian, ber 3taUe'ner, bie — .
Italy, bag Stalien.
it's, see it is.
J
John, (ber) 3ol)ann.
journey, bie 9Jeife, bie -n.
July, (ber) Suti.
just
341
Linden
just, when qualifying another
icord, g era be ; of time, eben,
§ 196, 2, Note.
keep, ht^aiten, be^iett, bel^altcn
(^aben), er bebcilt; — up, uer-
forgen, reg., insep. (t)aben); —
one waiting, UJorten laffen, Ue^,
gefaffen (^aben), er Ici^t.
kept, past of keep.
kind, bie @orte, bie -n; be so — ,
jeien @te jo freunblid) ; all — s
of, attertei.
king, ber tonig, bie -e.
kingdom, ba^ ^onigreid), bie -e.
knew, past of know.
knife, ta^ SJJeffcr, bie — .
knight, ber Splitter, bie — .
know, n)iffen, itjuf^te, gett3uj?t (Ca-
bell), er tt)etf^, § 58, 1, with
ta^^^clause for English infini-
tive, § 191 ; feunen, fannte, ge=
famit (Ijaben), § 58, 2 ; tonnen,
fomite, gefonnt (^aben), er !ann,
§58, 3; well-known, adj., be=
fanttt.
Koberger, prop, name, (ber) ^o=
berger.
Konrad, prop, name, (ber) ^on=
rab.
Kriemhilde, prop, name, (bie)
^riem^ilbe.
lady, bie 2)ame, bie -n.
lake, ber @ee, bie -n.
lamb, bag^amm, bie "er.
lament, bemeinen, reg., insep.
(^aben).
lamp, bie ?am^e, bie -n.
land, bo8 2anb, bie "er ; the Holy
Land, bag §eiUge !Banb.
language, bie ©prat^e, bie -n.
large, larger, largest, gro^, grower,
gro^t, ant grb^ten.
last, (e^t; — summer, borigen
©ommer.
late, later, latest, f^ot, f^ater, am
jpdteften, § 219, 2.
laugh, (ad)en, reg. (fjaben),
lay, past of lie.
lead, fiit)ren, reg. (^aben).
leader, ber ^ii^rer, bie — .
learn, (erneit, reg. (l)aben) ; with
infin., § 81.
learned, adj., getel)rt.
least, am it»enigften.
leave (depart from), tjerlaffen,
tjerltc^, toerlaffen (^aben), er
Dertcif^t ; (let alone or fail to
take), tafjctt, liefi, gelaffen (l)a=^
ben), er tdj^t.
led, past o/lead.
lesson, bie @tunbe, bie -n, § 169,
2, Note.
letter, ber 33rief, bie -e.
liberator, ber ^efreier, bie — .
library, bie S3ibtiot^ef', bie -en.
lie, liegen, kg, gdegen (^aben).
life, 'i^a^ ?eben, bie — .
like, mogen, mod)tc, gemod)t {\)a-
ben), er mag, § 76, 1 ; gefat*
ten, gefief, gefatten (^aben), er
gefciEt, § 76, 3 ; gem, § 76, 2
and 1 ; to look — , gteid^en,
glid^, geglic^en (^aben), with
dat., § 76, 3, Note ; — that, fo.
Linden, prop, name, (ba«) ^inben,
a city near Hanover.
line
342
messenger
line (on a page), bie ^dU, blc -n ;
bic ^eilje, bie -n.
listen, Ijord^cn, reg. (l)aben), to,
auf with ace.
little, flein, § 194, 1 ; tvenig, § 194,
2.
live, njo^nett, reg. (t)oben), § 6, 1 ;
leben, reg. C^aben), § 6, 2.
long, longer, longest, adj., lang,
Icinger, am (angftcn; adv., a —
time, longe ; no longer, ntrf)t
me^r ; as — as, conj., fotangc.
look, fe^cn, ja§, gefc^en (l)abcn),
ex ftc^t ; oh, look ! fiet) tod} !
in sense of to appear, au8=
fel)en, irregr.,sep. (I^abcn); to —
at, anfel)en, irreg., sep. (^aben);
to — for, juci)cn, reg. (l)aben),
§ 7 ; to — like, gleic^en, glic^,
gcgUd)cn (t)oben), with dat.,
§ 76, 3, Note ; to — through,
burd)'je^en, irreg., sep. (^oben);
to — up (in dictionary), nad^'-
frf)tagen, fd)fug naci), nadjgc-
fc!)lagcn (^aben), er fd^Icigt naci).
lose, tocrtieren, bcrlor, Dcrloren
(I)aben).
loss, ber SSertuft, bic -e.
lost, past of lose.
loud, louder, loudest, lout, tauter,
am lauteften.
love, licben, reg. C^aben) ; loving,
Itebenb.
Ludwig (Louis), (ber) ?ubung.
Luise (Louise), (blc) ?utje.
lying, see lie.
M
made, past of make,
maintain, betjaupten, reg., insep.
(l^obcn) ; to — oneself, ftd) be*
^au^ten.
make, madden, reg. (t)aben) ; to
— a speech, cine 9^ebc tjaltcn,
Ijielt, ge^alten (l)abcn), er ^dlt,
§ 270, 2, Note.
man, ber 9J?ann, bie "er, § 19, 2 ;
ber 2Rcnf(^, beS -en, bic -en,
§ 19, 1.
many, pi., biete.
Margaret, (bie) 2Rargarc'te.
mark (German coin icorth 24 f),
bie 9Rarf, used in the singular
with numerals: groanjig 9Jiarf.
market, ber 9JJarft, bie "e; — day,
ber SJ^arfttag, bic -c.
married, see marry,
marry, toerl^etraten, reg., insep.
(l)aben), § 51, 1 ; ^eiraten, reg.
(Ijaben), § 61, 2.
marrying, see marry.
Mary, (bie) 9J?arie'.
matter, what's the — ? SSa« ifl
log?
Maximilian, (ber) SD^ayimiliau.
may, biirfen, burfte, geburft (^a-
ben), er barf, § 75, 1; fbnnen,
fonnte, gcfonut (^aben), er faun,
§ 75, 2 ; uicUeic^t, § 76, 3.
me, mir, dat., mid), ace.
mean, of things, bebcuten, reg.,
insep. (babcn) ; of persons,
meinen, reg. (^aben).
meet, begcgnen, reg., insep. (fein),
with dat., § 171, 2; treffen,
traf, gctroffen (^aben), er trifft,
§ 171, 1 ; feunen Icrnen, reg.
(I)aben), § 171, 2, Note.
message, bie ^otfd^aft, bic -en.
messenger, ber ©otc, bc8 -n, bie -n.
met
343
noise
met, see meet.
middle, bie Mittt ; Middle Ages,
bag mitteMtev.
midnight, bie Mxttexnadjt, bic H,
might, see may.
milk, bie SJJitd), ber — .
mine, mein, ber meme, ber meinige.
minnesinger, ber 3Jlinnejdnger,
bie — .
minute, bie 9JJtnu'te, bie -n.
Miss, (bag) grduteitt, bie — .
misspeak, fid) Derfpred)en, Der=
]pxadi ft(^, ftc^ berf^roc^en (^a=
belt), er Derfprid^t fid).
mistake, ber %d)Ux, bie — .
misunderstand, mi^Derfte'ljen,
mi^oerftanb, tni^t)erftanben (I)a=
ben).
misunderstood, see misunder-
stand.
moat, ber ^eftuttgggraben, bie ^eft*
nngggrciben.
Moltke, (ber) ^oUte.
moment, ber Slugenbtid, bie -e.
Monday, ber SD^ontag, bie -e.
money, bog @elb, bie -er.
month, ber 9}ionat, bie -e ; for — s,
monotelang.
more, niel)r ; nod), § 30, 2, § 62;
comparative, § 218, 3.
morning, ber 2Rorgen, bie — ; in
the — , am 9Jiorgen, morgeng ;
written small as an adverb when
used with another abverb : ^ente
morgen, geftern morgen.
most, ttteift, am meiften ; superla-
tive, § 218, 3 ; mostly, meifteng.
mother, bie HJJntter, bie ^
mountain, ber 53erg, bie -e.
Mr., (ber) §err, beg -n, bie -en.
much, 'out, usually not declined;
as adv. often fe^r ; how — ?
irietjiel?
Miiller, prop, name, (ber) 9}luIIer.
Munich, (bag) 9}Jiinc^en.
musician, ber 2)'?u[tfer, bie — .
must, miiffen, mu^te, gemn^t (l)a-
ben), er mu^, § 68, 3.
my, mein.
myself, reflex., mtr, mi(^, § 196,
1 ; intens., felbft, § 196, 2.
N
name, ber '^ame, beg -ng, bie -n ;
my — is, ic^ f)ei^e, § 49, 2.
named, genannt, see nennen, § 49,
1 ; to be — , t)ei^en, f)ie§, ge=
^eif^en, § 49, 2.
Napoleon, (ber) 9fJapoteon.
narrow, eng.
near, adj., na'^e (not)er, am ndc^=
ften) with dat. ; prep., bei, with
dat., § 95, 1.
nearly, beina^e.
need, brand)en, reg. (^aben).
nephew, ber 9^effe, beg -n, bie -n,
never, nie, niemalg; — fear,
jdion, § 128, 2.
new, neu.
news, bie 9^ad)ric^t, bie -en.
newspaper, bie 3fitung, bie -en.
next, ndrf)ft.
night, bie 9^a^t, bie H.
nightingale, bie Sfla^ix^oM, bie -en.
nine, neun.
nineteen, neunje^n.
no, adv., nein ; adj., fein, § 9.
noble, adj., ebet; noun, ber 2lbtige,
bie -n.
noise, ber ?drm, beg -g.
not
344
Otto
not, ttlrf)t ; — a, fein, § 9,
nothing, nid^tS ; a following ad-
jective is written with a capital :
mdltg @c^ted)teg, § 217.
notice, bemerfen, reg., insep. (^a*
ben).
now, je^t ; less often, nun.
nowhere, nirgenb^.
number (of a house), bie ^fJum*
nter, bie -n ; (figure), bie ^a\)l,
bie -en.
Nuremberg, (bag) ^Jiirnberg.
oak (wood), baS 6i(f)en^ot5, bie
^er ; — tree, bie (Sic^e, bie -n.
objection, to have any — , ettnaS
bagegen t)aben, I)atte, ge^abt
(l)aben), er ^at.
occupy, befe^en, reg., insep. (()a>
ben).
occur, Dorfommen, fam toor, »or=
gefommen (fein), § 231, 1 ; ein=
fallen, fiet ein, eingefallen (fein),
to, with dat., § 231, 2.
0^ clock, U^r, omitted as in Eng-
lish, except when exact hour is
spoken of, § 50, 4 and § 169, 2.
of, Don, § 99, 3 ; ait8, § 94, 2 ;
omit, § 99, 3, Note a ; gen.,
§ 99, 3, Note h ; — course,
natilrlid), § 262 ; to be afraid
— , fid) fiird)ten, reg. (^aben),
Dor, § 26 ; to think — , benfen,
bac^te, gebad)t (t)aben), an or
Don, § 41 (baran or baoon).
office, ba« @efcl)dft, bie -e.
often, oftener, often est, oft, bfter,
am ofteften.
oh, o\)\ o! al)! ad)\
old, older, oldest, alt, alter, am
otteften, olteft.
on, anf, § 120 ; on Hermann
street, in ber ^ermannftra^e ;
— foot, 5U ^u^; to read — ,
n)eiterlefen, lo8 n»eiter, tt)eitcr»
getefen (t)aben), er Ueft tt)eiter.
once, einmal.
one, ein; man, § 57 ; not — , fein,
§ 9; no — , nicmanb; one's,
fein ; the — , ber eine, § 29, 2
or ber (berjenige), § 29, 1 and
Note, or translated by an adjec-
tive, § 29, 3 and § 217.
only, adv., nur, § 185, 1, a ; erft,
§ 185, 1,6; adj., einjig, §185,2.
onto, anf toith ace.
open, bffnen, reg. (^abcn) ; anf*
madden, reg., sep. (^aben) ;
§146.
opera, bie Oper, bie -n.
opinion, bie 9TJeinung, bie -en; in
my — , meiner 2)ieinung nac^,
§ 101, c, 2.
or, ober.
order, bie Orbnung, bie -en ; to
put in — , in Orbnung bringen ;
to — , beftellen, reg., insep. (\)a-
ben), § 197, 1 ; befel)ten, befaljt,
befol)len (baben), er befiet)lt,
§ 191, 1 and § 197, 2 ; in — to,
um with infin. or bamit with
clause, § 197, 2, Note.
other (different), anber, § 30, 1;
(more), noc^, § 30, 2 ; each — ,
ohj. of verb, fid); obj. of prep. ^
einanber, written together with
preposition : mitclnanber.
otherwise, fonft.
Otto, (ber) Otto.
ought
B45
play
ought, jollen, reg. (^abcn), idf) fott,
§ 69, 2 and 4, c.
out of, au8, § 94, 1 ; — it, borauS ;
to carry — , burrfj'fe^en, reg.^
sep. (^aben); to go — , augge^en,
ging au«, auSgegongcn (fein).
outing, ber 2tugfhig, bie ^ilu^fliige.
outside, adv., brau^en.
over, adv., l^iniiber ; — there,
bort(^in), § 16, 1 ; prep., iiber,
§ 123, 1.
overwork, jtrf) iiberor'beiten, reg.,
insep. (t)oben).
owe, to — to, oerbanfen, reg.,
insep. (tjahen), with dat.
own, adj., eigen.
page, bie @eite, bie -n.
paid, see pay.
pains, bie 3}?u^e, bie -n ; to take
— , fid^ 9)iii^e geben, gab, gegeben
(t)aben), er gibt, § 183, 4, Note.
painting, ba§ ©emalbe, bie — .
paper, bag ^^apier', bie-e; news — ,
bie 3eitung, bie -en.
parents, bie ©(tern {pi.).
park, ber ^^arf, bie -e.
parliament, \ia<i ^arlament', bie
-e.
parlor, ber @aIon', bie -8.
part, ber ^^eil, bie -e ; to take — ,
teiine^men, nat)m teil, teilge=
nomnten (^aben), er nimmt teil,
in, an with dat.
particular, bcfonber.
pass, reic^en, reg. (^aben), § 246,
1 ; {time) ucrge^en, ijerging, t)er=
gangen (fein), § 246, 2; t)er=
bringen, berbradite, oerbrad)t
(^aben), § 246,3; {to go by)
an etraaS {dat.), borbeige^en,
irreg., sep. (fein), § 246, 4 ; {in
school, intrans.) tierfe^t toerben,
ftjurbe, gettjorben (fein), er iDirb
ijerfe^t, § 246, 4, Note; {in
school, trans.) be[tel)en, beftattb,
beftanben (^aben), § 269, 2,
Note.
past, see pass ; half — ten, ^alb
etf.
path, ber ^fab, bie -c.
pattern, ba§ SJiufter, bie — .
pay, bejaf)len, reg., sep. (^aben);
to — attention, od^tgeben, gab
ac^t, ac^tgegeben (^oben), er gibt
ad)t, to, auf with ace.
peace, ber griebe, beg -ng.
pen, bie ^ebev, bie -n.
pencil, ber 33leiftift, bie -e.
people, bie l^ente {pL); bie 3JJen*
fd)en, § 19, 1 ; man, § 57 ; nation
or race, bag ^olf, bie ""er.
perhaps, l)ieUeici)t.
person, ber 9}?enfd), beg -en, bie
-en, § 19, 1 ; bie ^erfon', bie -en.
philosophy, bie ^t)i(ofop^ie'.
piano, bag Glacier', bie -e.
picture, bag iBilb, bie -er ; bag @e=
mcilbe, bie — {painting); —
gallery, bie ©emcilbegolerie', bie
-en.
picturesque, ntalerifd).
piece, bag @tiic!, bie -e.
place, ber Ort, bie -e and "er,
§ 150, 1; bie @teUe, bie -n,
§ 150, 3; bie ©teEung, bie -en,
§ 150, 4 ; to take — , ftattfinben,
fanb [tatt, ftattgefunben (^aben).
play, bag 2>pid, bie -e; bag @c^au=
pleasant
346
rave
fplel, ble -e ; to — , j^ielen, reg.
(l^abcTi).
pleasant(ly), angenc^m.
please, gefallen, gefiel, gefaHen
(Ijaben), er gefciUt, with dat.;
as he — d, tt)ie eS i^m gefiet ; if
you — , bitte, § 15, 1, 6, Note.
pocket, bie XaS^t, bie -en.
polite(ly), I)ofIi^.
poor, orm.
popular, beliebt.
post office, bie ^^oft, bie -en ; to the
— , auf bie ^oft, § 120, 3, Note a.
Potsdam, {^^a^) ^otSbam.
power, bie 50Jac^t, bie "^t ; a great
— , eine @ro§morf)t.
present', {introduce), Dorftellen,
reg., sep. (l)aben), with two
objects, ace. and dat.
pres'ent, ba'i @cfci)enf, bie -e,
pretty, ^iibfd^.
prince (appointed), ber ^^iirft, bc8
-en, bie -en; young son of a
king, ber ^ring, be8 -en, bie
-en.
printing, bie 2)rucferei', bie -en;
art of — , bie S3nd)brn(ferfunft.
print shop, bie 2)ru(!erei', bie -en.
prison, ba8 ©cfangni^, beS -ffe8,
bie -f[e.
prisoner, ber ©efangene, be« -n,
bie -n.
prize, ber ^rei«, bie -e.
probably, n)al)rfd)einUci) ; tt)ol)t,
§88.
professor, ber ^^rofef'for, be« -8,
bie ^^rofeffo'ren.
pronounce, angfpred)en, jprad) au8,
au«gcfprod)en (l)aben), er jpric^t
proud, ftolg, of, ant with ace.
Prussia, (bag) ^reufeen.
public, ta^ ^nblitum, beg -8.
punish, beftrafen, reg.,in8ep. (l)a»
ben).
pupil, ber @d)u{er, bie — .
put, fteUen, reg. (t)aben), § 222,
1; Iegen,re9f. (l)aben), § 222, 2;
fe^en, reg. (^aben), § 222, 3;
fteden, reg. (fjaben), § 222, 4 ;
tun, tat, getan (t)aben), § 222, 5 ;
to — on (a hat), auffe^en, reg.,
sep. (I)aben) ; (clothes), anjie*
I)en, jog an, angejogen (^aben).
quality, bie (Sigenfc^aft, bie -en.
quarrel, ganfen, reg. (f)aben) ;
ftreiten, ftritt, geftritten (t)aben);
quarrelling, jan!enb.
quarter, ba^ 35iertet, bie — ; (of
money), eine Tlaxt ; — to three,
brei 3>iertel brei.
queen, bie ^onigin, bie -nen.
question, bie ^rage, bie -n ; to ask
(put) —a, ^ragen ftellen, reg.
(t)aben).
quiet, rnl)ig.
quite, ganj.
R
rain, ber 5Regen, bie — ; to — ,
regnen, reg. (tjaben).
rapidly, jc^neU.
rate, at any — , jebenfaUS, auf je-
ben gaU, auf alle '^dUe.
reach, erreic^en, reg., insep. (^a»
ben).
rave, jdjnjcirmcn, reg. (^aben),
about, fttr.
read
347
sank
read, tefen, tag, gelcfen (^aben), er
Ueft.
ready, bereit, § 195, 1 ; fertig,
§ 195, 2.
really, tt)ir!(ict).
reason, ber ®runb, bie ''t, § 260.
receive, empfongen, em^fing, tmp=
fangeit (^obcn), er em)3fangt,
§ 261, 2 ; er^alten, er^ielt, ert)al=
ten (^aben), er er^alt, § 261, 1.
recognize, erfennen, erfannte, er-
fannt (^aben).
recommend, em^fel)(en, empfa^t,
empfo^len C^aben), er empfiel)It.
recover, fid) er^olen, reg., insep.
(^aben).
red, rot.
redbeard, (ber) 5Rotbart; (ber)
S3arbarof[a.
regards, to give — to, grii^en, reg.
(^aben), with ace.
remain, bletben, btieb, gebfteben
(fetn), § 180, 1.
remark, bie S3emer!itng, bie -en.
remember, fic^ erinnern, reg., in-
sep. (\}ahen), with gen. or an
with ace.
remind, erimtern, reg., insep. (f)a=
ben), of, an with ace.
reply, antlDorten, reg. (^aben).
resound, ertbnen, reg., insep. (^a=
ben) ; er^allen, reg., insep. (ija--
ben).
rest, to — thoroughly, fid) augru=
^en, reg., sep. (\)ahen).
restore, ttJieberl^er'ftetten, reg., sep.
(^aben).
retire, fic^ ;mrucf';5ief)en, jog ftc^
juriicf, fid) guriid'gejogen (t)a^
ben).
return, i^uriid'febren, reg., sep.
(jein).
right, bo6 5fte(^t, bie -e ; to be — ,
rec^t :^aben, § 172, 1; ric^tig
fein, § 172, 2 ; ba§ ftimntt, § 172,
2, Note ; all — , frf)on, gut.
river, ber ^tu^, bie "e.
rock, ber ^ets, beg -en, bie -en.
Roland, (ber) ^olanb.
roll (bread), ba^ S3rbtd)en, bie — .
Roman, ber Stomer, bie — ; adj.,
romifd).
Rome, (ba^) 9fiom.
room, bag 3itttmer, bie — ; ber
fla^, § 150, 2, b ; ber 9^aum,
§ 150, 2, c, Note.
round, prep., um, § 111, 1; —
about, utn . . . I)erunt.
ruin, bie 'Stui'ne, bie -n.
rule, bie 9lege(, bie -n; to — ,
regieren, regierte, regiert (^a=
ben).
ruler, ber §errfc^er, bie — .
run, laufen, lief, gelaufen (fein), er
Iciuft.
sadly, traurig.
saga, bie @age, bie -n.
said, see say.
sake, WiUen ; for my — , um mei=-
nettt)itten ; for heaven's — , um
§imttte(8 raillen.
same, fetb ; the — , berfelbe, bie-
felbe, bagfelbe, gen., begfelben,
etc.
sandwich, bag iButterbrot, bie
-e; ham — , 33utterbrot ntit
@d^infen.
sank, see sink.
Sans Souci
348
sitting
Sans Souci, (bag) @an« @ouci,
(bo8) 0{)ne @orge.
sat, see sit.
satchel, bie 3^cifetojrf)e, bic -n.
saw, see see.
say, fagen, reg. (^aben).
Schiller, (bcr) @(i)iUer.
Schoneberg, (ha^) (Sc^oneberg.
school, bic <S(i)ii(c, bie -n ; to — ,
in bie ©djule, § 121, jur @ci)u(c,
§ 121, Note.
scold, fdjelten, fc^att, gefc^olten
(^abcn), er fd)i(t.
seat, ber ^(a^J, bie ""e, § 150, 2, c;
— of honor, ber (S^ren^ta^, bie
seated, to remain — , fl^en bfeibcn,
biteb, gebUeben (fein), § 180, 1.
see, feben, fat), gejet)eu (babeu),
§ 180, 1 ; (to look at), an'fet)en,
irrcg.y sep. (babeu) ; (to inter-
view), fpred)eu,fprarf), gef)3rod)eu
(tjaben), er fprid)t, § 270, 1,
Note.
seem, jd^einen, fc^ien, gefc^ienen
(^aben).
self, reflex, (him, her, them, etc.),
fid), § 196, 1 ; my—, mid^ ; thy
— , bid) ; intens., felbft, felber,
§ 196, 2.
sell, toerfaufen, reg., insep. (j:)a^
ben).
senator, ber @ena'tor, bic @enato'*
ren.
'send, fd)icfen, ref7. (boben); fenben,
fonbte, gefanbt (babeu).
sentence, bcr <Sa^, bie "e.
set, fetjen, reg. (babeu); of a
watch, ftellen, reg. (^aben),
§ 222, 1, Note,
seven, fieben.
seventh, bag @ieb(eu)tel, bic — .
several, (pi.) me^rere.
severity, bie ©trenge, ber — .
sew, nd^en, reg. (^aben).
shady, fd)attig.
shall, merben, § 69, 1 ; foUen, § 69,
2 ; rt)olIen, § 69, 3, and Note,
she, fie ; c8, § 207, Note.
sheet (of paper), bcr 33ogcu,
bic — .
short, shorter, shortest, fnrg,
furijcr, am fiirjeften.
should, foUtc, see foUen, § 69, 2.
shouldn't, see should not.
show, geigen, reg. (i)abcn) ; to —
oneself, ftd^ geigen ; (to prove)
beineifeu, bettjieg, bett)iefcn (I)a-
beu).
sick, frant.
siege, bie 33elageruug, hie -en.
Siegfried, (ber) @iegfrieb.
silk, bie @cibc, bic -u ; of — , uon
@eibe, feibcn.
simple, ciufad).
since, prep., feit, § 98, 1 ; conj.,
feitbem icith transposed order.
sing, ftugcn, fang, gefungeu (ba=
\iex(),
singer, ber (Sanger, bic — ; — 's
contest, ber (Saugcrfrieg, bic -c.
single, cinjig, § 9.
sink, finfen, fanf, gefunfeu (feiu) ;
to — down, nie'berfiuten, irreg.,
sep. (feiu).
sister, bic @d)mcfler, bic -n.
sit, fi^en, fafj, gefeffcu (babeu),
§ 18, 1 ; to — down, fic^ fc^cn,
reg. (bobcu), § 18, 2.
sitting, see sit ; was sitting, fa§.
sixty
349
study
sixty, jcd^sig,
sleep, fc^kfen, fc^Iief, gefc^tafcn
(^aben), er fd)(oft
slept, see sleep.
slowly, langfam.
Smith, @d)mibt.
snow, ber ©c^nee, be§ -g.
so, jo, § 26, 1 ; alfo, § 26, 2 ; fo
jc^r, § 35, a, sentence 4 ; to
think — , e§, ba?, or omit, § 157,
1 ; eben, § 20, 2, Note.
sofa, ba^ ®ofa, bic -§.
sold, see sell.
solve, lofen, reg. (l)aben).
some, etnig ; often omitted; —
more, nod), § 30, 2 ; — bread,
ettt)a§ SSrot.
someone, jentanb,
something, ettDOS; a foUomng
adjective is written with a cap-
ital : etttjag @ute«, § 217.
sometimes, juttjeileu, § 50, 3, Note.
son, ber ®o^n, bie "e.
song, ber ©efang', bie "e ; ba« !?ieb,
bie -er.
soon, balb.
sorry, leib tun, tat, getaii C^oben),
with dat. ; I am — , e8 tut mir
leib.
soul (person), ber 9}ienfd), beg
-en, bie -en ; {spirit), bie @ee(e,
bie -n»
Spain, (bag) @^anten.
speak, ipxe6)tn, fprad), gefprod^en
(^aben), er f|3rtd)t, § 270, 1
reben, reg. c!)aben), § 270, 2
to — German, 3)eutf(^ fpred)en
to — to, ajtreben, reg., sep. (^a=
ben), with ace.
speaker, ber 9?ebner, bie — .
speech, bie 9?ebe, bie -n ; to make
a — , eine dttht ^alten, ^iett, ge=
l)alten ({)aben), er pit.
spend (time), Derbringen, Der=
brac^te, tierbrod^t (Ijaben).
spread, fid^ Oerbreiten, reg., insep.
(baben).
spring (season), ber ^riitjling, bie
-e ; (water), bie OueEe, bie -u.
square, ber ^ta^, bie H, § 150, 2, a.
stage (theatre), bie S3iif)ne, bie -n.
stand, fte^en, ftanb, geftanben (ba=
ben), § 221, 1 ; tetben, litt, ge=
atten (l^aben), § 221, 2 ; to —
up, anf fteljen, irreg., sep. (fein),
stay, bteiben, blieb, geblieben
(fein\
still (of time, yet), nod).
stop, aufpren, reg., sep. (I)aben),
with ju andinfin., § 180, 2 ; (o/
pupils in the class) [tel)en
bleiben, bUeb, geblieben (fein).
store, ber i^aben, bie — and \
story, bie ®ej(^id)te, bie -n; bie
Sr^ci^tung, bie -en.
strange, fremb, § 271, 2 ; jettfani,
§ 271, 1; stranger, noun, ber
grembe, beg -n, bie -n.
street, bie @tra^e, bie -n ; icith
prop, nouns, § 299.
strike, fd)ta gen, jd^tug, gefd^Iagen
(baben), er fd)Iagt.
strong, stronger, strongest, [tarf,
ftarfer, ftdrfft, om ftarfften.
struck, see strike.
study, lernen, reg. (pben) ;
treiben, trieb, getrieben (pben);
to do advanced — , to be a stu-
dent, ftubie'ren, [tubier'te, ftu=
biert' (Ijaben).
subjugate
350
that
subjugate, unterrt)er'fen, untcr=
tt)arf' , untemor'fen (^aben), er
unteririrft'.
succeed, getingen, gelong, gc=
lungen (fetn), with dat., § 180,
2 ; I — , eg gelingt mir.
such, fold), fo ; had — a good
time, fo gut amiifiert ; — a good
man, ein fo guter 2Jiann.
suddenly, ptotjUci^.
sugar, ber ^ndex, be8 -«.
suit, ber ^Ingug, bie ^Injiige.
summer, ber @ommer, bie — .
Sunday, ber ©onntag, bie -e.
sunset, ber ©on'nenun'tergattg,
bie (Son'nenuTi'tergange.
sup, 5u 3tbenb effen, a^, gegeffen
(^oben), er i^t.
supper, bag 5lbenbe[fen, bie — .
support, unterftut'jen, reg., insep.
(^aben),
sure, [ic^er.
surrender, fi(^ ergcbcn, ergab ftd^,
ftd^ crgcben (l)abcn), er ergibt
sweet, fii^.
swiftly, frf)neU.
sword, bag <Bd)Wext, bie -er.
table, ber Xifrf), bie -e.
tailor, ber @d)neiber, bie — .
take, net)men, ual)in, genommcn
(^aben), er nimmt, § 183 ;
(of time) bauern, reg. (Ijabeu),
§ 183, 1 ; (a train) fal)ren mit,
fu^r, gefaljren (jein), er faljrt mit
with dat., § 183, 2; (trip), ma-^
d)en, reg. (l)aben), § 183, 3 ; to
— for, l)alteu filr, l)ielt, gel)alten
(^aben), er I)alt fflr with acc.^
§ 183, 4 ; to — out, \)evavi^ne\)-'
men, irreg., sep. (^aben); to —
part, teilnel)men, irreg., sep.
(^aben); to — place, [tattfinben,
fanb ftott, ftattgefunben (^aben) ;
to — pains, fid^ (^dat.), 2}JuI)e
geben, gab, gegeben (Ijabcn),
er gibt ftd) miilje, § 183, 4,
Note.
talk, fpred)en, fprad), gefprorfjen
(fiaben), er ]pvid}t, § 270, 1;
reben, reg. (^aben), § 270, 2.
Tannhauser, (ber) S^ann^dufer.
tavern, ta^ BirtS^aug, bie 2Birtg=
pufer.
tea, ber Xttj beg -g, bie -e or bie
-g.
teach, lebren, reg. (^aben), with
infln., § 81.
teacher, ber !?el)rer, bie — ;
(woman) bie ^el)rerin, bie -ncn.
tear, rei^en, ri0, gerifjen (^aben) ;
to— up, jerrei^en, irreg., insep.
(^abeu).
Tell, (ber) Sett.
tell, erjdliten, reg., insep. (^aben),
§ 28, 1 ; fagcn, reg. (^abcn),
§ 28, 2 ; with ta^-^clause, § 191.
ten, 5el)n.
tennis, bag Xennig, beg — .
than, alg, § 83, 1.
thank, banfeu, reg. (l)aben), with
dat. ; — you 1 banfe I
that, con}., ba^ loith transposed
order, § 211, 1 ; demonstrative,
ber, bie, bag, § 211, 3, a, or
jcner, § 211, 3, b ; relative, ber
or n)clrf)er, § 211, 2, or \va9,
§ 211, 2, Note ; like — , fo.
the
351
together
the, art., hex, bie, ba§; correL,
the . . . the, jc . . . befto, § 223.
theatre, baS 2;^eater, bie — »
their, i^r,
them, dat., il^nett; ace., jte, biefe(=
ben ; with preps., ba(r), § 106, 1.
themselves, fid^,
then, bann, § 59, 1 ; bamalg, § 59,
2 ; and — , ta, § 17, 1 and § 59,
3.
there, bort, § 16, 1 ; ba, § 16, 2 ;
— is, e8 gibt, § 85, 1 or e« ift,
§ 85, 2 ; omitted, § 85, 2, and
Note.
these, see this.
they, fie ; man, § 57.
thief, ber S)ieb, bie -e.
thing, bag 3)ing, bie -e; — s,
bie @ad^en.
think, benfen, bocf)te, gebac^t (^a=
ben), of, an, §41, 1 or don, §41,
2 ; gtauben, reg. (^aben), § 157,
1, and Note ; meinen, reg. (^o-
ben), § 157, 1 ; ein'faUen, fiet ein,
eingefallen (jein), eg fcittt ein,
with dat., § 41, 1, Note ; finben,
fanb, gefunben (^aben) or fatten
fiir, ^ielt, gel)a(ten (i^ahen), er
l^alt fiir with ace, § 157, 3.
thirty, brei^ig.
this, these, biefer, biefe ; — even-
ing, l^eute abenb.
thither, l^in, § 149, 1 ; hither and
— , ^in unb ^er, § 149, 2.
thorough, tiidjtig ; thoroughly
convinced, feft iiberjengt !
those, see that ; — are, ha^ fmb,
§211,3, Note,
though, obtDO^t with transposed
order.
thought, see think.
thousand, taufenb ; — s, bie %a\X'
fenbe.
three, bret; — times, breimal,
§ 50, 3, Note.
thrive, gebei^en, gebie^, gebie^en
(fein).
throne, ber 2::t)ron, bie -e.
through, burc^ ivith ace. ; to look
— , bnrrf)'fel)en, fa^ burc^, burd^':=
gefe^en (^aben).
till, conj., big icith the transposed
order ; prep., big, § 107, 1.
time, bie ^eit, bie -en, § 50, 1 ;
eine 3^it(ang, § 50, 2 ; a long
— , lange, § 50, 2, Note ; bag
ma\, bie -e, § 50, 3 ; three — s,
etc., breimal, § 50, 3, Note;
sometimes, juttjeiten, § 50, 3,
Note ; how many times, lt)ie oft,
§ 50, 3, Note ; what — is it ?
iDieoiet U^r, § 50, 4 and § 169,
2, or tt)ie f|3at, § 50, 4 ; to have
a good — , fid) (gut) antiifie'ren,
amiifier'te, amiifiert (^aben),
§ 50, 5.
tired, niiibe, of, gen., § 99, 3,
Note h.
to, nac^, § 97, 1 ; ju, § 100, 1 ;
auf, § 120, 3, Note a ; gegen,
§ 110, 2; in, § 121 ;withinfin.,
gn or nm ju ; — and fro, l)in
nnb l^er, § 149, 2 ; sometimes
dative; sometimes a clause
after to tell, as in § 32, 6, 1
and c, 2.
to-day, adv., i^ente ; adj. (of) — ,
^entig, Prussia of — , bag
^eutige ^^reu^en.
together, sufammen.
told
352
voice
told, see tell.
to-morrow, tnorgen; for — , auf
morgen; day after — , uber=
morgen.
to-night, ^eutc aBcnb.
too, gu, aud), § 100, 4, Note.
took, see take.
top, bie ®pifec, bie -n ; {of a
mountain), ber ©i^fel, bie — ;
on — of, auf, § 120, 1.
toward, gegen with ace, § 110.
town, bie @tabt, bie ^e ; down — ,
in ber or bie @tabt; to — , in
bie @tabt.
train, ber 3ug, bie "e.
translate, iiberfet'i^en, regr., insep.
(^aben), see also § 164, 2, Note ;
{in class) to be translated, t)ei=
J3en, ^ie^, ge^ei^en (^aben), § 49,
2, Note.
translation, bie Uberfe^ung, bie
-en ; — of the Bible, bie ^i'be(=
iiberfe^ung, bie -en,
travel, reifen, r^'gf. (l)aben or jein),
§ 107, 1 and 2.
tree, ber S3auin, bie 53anme.
tremble, gittern, reg. (i)aben).
trip, bie 5Reife, bie -n.
true, tt)a\)v ; it's — , I'max, aller=
bing«, § 274.
try, t)erfud)en, reg., insep. (l^a»
ben).
twelve, gnjolf.
twenty, jman^ig.
twenty-five, funf'unbjinan'jlg.
twice, jiueimal.
twist, DerbreMjen, reg., insep. (^a«
ben).
two, jttjel ; the — , bie beiben, 170,
2, Note.
uncle, ber Onfet, bie — .
unconscious, ot)nmdd)tig.
under, unter with dat. or acc.^
§124.
understand, tjerfte^en, tjerftanb,
berftanben (l)aben).
undertake, unternei)'men, unter=
na^m', nnternom'men (^ben),
er nnternimmt'.
unhappy, nn'gtiicflid).
unification, bie Sinigung, bie -en.
unite, oereinen ; united, einig.
until, conj., big with the trans-
posed order; prep., biS, § 107,
1.
up, oben {rest); entpor {motion);
to bring — , erijietjen, ergog, er»
jogen (I)aben) ; to keep — , oer=
forgen, reg., insep. (^aben) ;
to tear — , jerrci^en, gerri^, ger=
ri^en (^aben).
upon, an^with dat. or ace, § 120, 1.
us, un«.
used, adj., gettjo'^nt, to, an with
ace.
usually, gett)ol}ntic^.
valley, baS %a\, bie «cr.
van {Dutch), Dan ; {German)
Don.
Varus, (ber) 9?arn«.
vault, bie ©ruft, bie "e.
very, ic{)r.
Vienna, (baS) SSicn.
village, boe ^orf, bie «er.
visit, ber 33ejnd), bie -c; to — ,
befuci)en, reg., insep. (l)abcn).
voice, bie ®ttmnie, bie -n.
vote
353
William
vote, ftintnten, reg. (^aben), for,
fiir with ace.
W
wager, bie SBettc, bie -n ; for a
— , urn bie 2Bettc, § 111, 2, Note.
Wagner, (ber) Sogner.
wait, trarten, reg. (^aben), for,
auf, § 8 ; to — on, bebienen,
reg.., insep. (^aben).
waiter, ber ^eltner, bie — .
walk, to go — ing, or for a — ,
j^agierett gel)en, ging, gegangen
(fein), § 180, 1.
Walter, (ber) SBatt^er.
want, to — to, rtJoUen, iDoIIte, ge=
tDottt (^aben), er triU, § 40, 1.
war, ber ^rteg, bie -e.
warm, iDarm.
Wartburg, bie SBartburg.
was, see be.
wasn't, see was not.
watch, bie Ut)r, bie -en, § 169, 1.
waterfall, ber SSafferfoII, bie ^aU
jerfdUe.
way, ber 2Beg, bie -e, § 249, 1 ;
bie SSeife, bie -n, § 249, 2 ; in
this — , aitf biefe SBeife ; by —
of, iiber, § 123, 2, Note.
we, tt)ir; man, § 57.
weather, ba« ^Better, bie — .
week, bie 3Bocf)e, bie -en.
Weinsberg, (bag) 2Bein8berg,
welcome, you're — , bitte, § 15, 1,
&, Note.
well, noun, ber S3runnen, bie — ;
adv., gut, § 234, 1 ; nun, § 234,
2 ; adj., rt)o^I, § 206, 1, and
§ 234, 3 ; see also § 88, Note ;
— known, betannt.
went, see go.
were, see be.
west, adj., njefttic!^.
what, Ujag, n)elc^, § 210; — kind
of, rt)aS fiir (ein), § 210 ; —for,
ujarum, h)ofiir; tnorauf (n)ar=
ten) ; — of, njoran (benfen),
§ 41, 1 ; — is your name ? 2Bic
^ei^en @te ? § 49, 2 ; — time,
iDieDiet U^r, § 50, 4.
whatever, tt)a8 and), § 257, 2.
when, atg, § 84, 1 ; njenn, § 84, 2 ;
rtjonn, § 84, 3.
whenever, tt)enn, § 84, 2.
where, tt)0 ; n)ol)in (whither),
wherever, wo audj.
whether, ob with the transposed
order.
which, rel., ber, totldjn, § 209;
interrog., n^eld^er, § 209 ; with
preps., tt)o(r), § 106, 2.
while, n)al)renb with the trans-
posed order ; bei, § 95, 2.
whisper, fUiftern, reg. (!)aben).
who, rel., ber, ttJeld^er, § 208 ; in-
terrog., rt)eld)er, votx, § 208.
whole, ganj.
whom, see who.
why, tnarum ; ja, § 200, 2.
wide, breit {not n^eit, far).
widow, bie 3Bittt)e, bie -n ; grass
— , bie ® tropin itnje.
wild, n)i(b ; to be — about, fd)tt)ar^
men fiir, reg. (I^aben), § 109, 2.
will, ber SBitte, beg -nS ; against
my — , miber meinen 2Bitten;
verb {future), luerben, § 69, 1 ;
{wish), moEen, § 40, 1, and
§ 69, 3.
William, (ber) SBit^elm.
354
youth
win, intrans.^ ftegcn, reg. (^oben),
§ 27 ; trans. ^ to — over, gett)in=
ncn, gcnjann, gchjonncn (^a*
ben).
window, bag ^enfter, bie — .
winter, ber SBinter, bic — .
wish, miinfd^en, reg. (^aben), § 40,
2 ; with phrase or clause., § 191,
.1 ; njollen, tDottte, gettJoUt (^a^
ben), er tt)iU, § 40, 1.
with, mit, § 96 ; bet, § 95, 2 and 3.
without, o^nc, with ace. ; with
injin., § 181 ; with clause, § 190.
woman, bie ^rau, bie -en ; (po-
etic), bag SSeib, bie -er; the
women of Weinsberg, bie 2Bei*
ber bon SBcinSberg.
won, see win.
wonderful, tt)unberbott ; more — ,
§ 218, 3.
won't, see will not.
wood, (forest), ber SSatb, bic "er;
(for fire), bag ^ot^, bie "er.
word, bag SSort, bie SSorter (sep-
arate words, as in bag 2Borter=
buc^, dictionary), or bie SBorte
(connected discourse).
work, bie Slrbeit, bie -en (labor) ;
bag SSerf, bie -e (the results of
labor, as a book, statue, etc. ) ;
to — , orbeiten, reg. (^aben).
Worms, (bag) SBormg.
would, iDiirbe, n)oUte ; see also
subj., § 254.
wreath, ber ^ranj, bic "t; to
crown with a — , befronsen,
reg., insep. (^aben).
write, fd)reiben, fd)ricb, gcjrfjrieben
(^aben).
writing, bie @d)rift, bie -tn.
written, see write.
wrong, fa(jd), un'ric^tig.
wrote, see write.
year, bag 3al^r, bie -e ; for — s,
jia^retang.
yes, ja, jan)ot)t ; answering a neg-
ative, bod^, § 237, 1.
yesterday, geftern; a following
noun is written small as an ad-
verb : — evening, geftern ahmh,
yet, (time), nod) ; (adversative),
bod).
you, ®ic (formal) ; bu (inti-
mate) ; man, § 57.
young, younger, youngest, jung,
jiinger, am jiingften.
your, 3^r, bein.
yourself, ftd), § 196, 1; (etc)
felbft, § 196, 2.
youth, bic 3ugenb.
INDEX.
For special word-studies^ see Vocabularies.
Aachen
burial place of Charlemagne,
§ 65 ; of Otto III, § 65.
Cathedral, picture of, page 30.
Coronation chair, picture of, page
49.
' Abbreviations
German partiality to, § 365.
list of, § 365.
Ablative of "attendant circum-
stance," rendered by hzi,
§ 95, 2.
Abstract nouns, § 307.
Accent
correct German accent, see Pro-
nunciation.
in inseparable verbs, § 132.
in sentences, § 342.
Accusative
in expressions of time
in eine 3stt^«ng/ § 50, 2.
to translate /or in for years, § 5.
with ^cr, § 4, Note,
with adverbs baljer and cnltang,
§ 247, 1.
with prepositions, § 104, §§ 106-
112; § 117, §§ 119-125.
figurative use, § 117, 1.
regular use, § 104.
to show motion toward, § 117.
to show mental motion toward,
§ 119, 2.
with fc^cn \\6) to show place
where, § 18, 2.
356
with t)or, § 125, 1.
with certain verbs
anrcben, § 270, 2, Note.
6ttten, § 15, 1.
bitten um, § 15, 1, a.
benfcn an, § 41, 1.
fragcn, § 15, 2 ; § 15, 2 6, Note a.
in idiom, eg gibt, § 85, 1.
glauben (of things), § 157, 1,
Note &.
glauben an, § 157, 1, Note c.
fagcn, § 28, 2.
fud^en, § 7.
jprcc^en, § 270, 1, Note,
tear ten auf, § 8.
tjergeben, § 140, 3, Note.
Sugeben, § 232, 2.
Active Voice
man with active instead of Eng-
lish passive, § 204, 1, Note,
passive infinitive active in Ger-
man, § 204, 2, Note.
Adjectives
as nouns, capitalization of, § 217 ;
§ 219, 1 ; after ettoaS and
nic^tg, § 217.
comparison of, § 218.
of long words, § 218, 3.
superlative with am, § 218, 1.
superlative with auf, § 218, 2.
difference between English and
German, § 215.
with personal pronoun, § 219, 1.
untranslatable adjectives,
§219,2.
356
INDEX,
For special word-studies, see Vocabularies.
Adjectives— Continued
inflection of, § 216.
predicate adjectives never in-
flected, § 216.
adverbial superlative, § 218, 1.
with genitive, § 99, 3, Note h.
Adverbs
adjectives used for, except in
superlative, § 218, 1.
superlative with am, § 218, 1 ;
with auf, § 218, 2.
compounded, to express time,
§ 5, Note ; to express manner,
compounded of adjectives
and hjcifc, § 249, 2.
independent, as ^in unb l^cr,
§ 149, 2.
numeral, § 50, 3, Note.
position in sentence, § 47 ; see
also Word Order.
Affirmatives
bod^ in answer to negative, § 237, 1.
repetition of question, § 237, 2,
Note,
ja, § 200.
Appositives, § 99, 3, a.
Arzninius, Latin name for .^cr*
ntann.
Amdt, Ernst Morltz (1769-1860),
§ 230.
quoted, § 109, 2; § 196, 2, Note;
§ 246, 2 ; § 269, 2, Note,
picture of, page 207.
Art gralleries of Germany,
§ 152, c.
Article, the definite, § 29, 3.
Asia Minor, German trade in,
§ 289.
Augrustus, Roman Emperor, § 1.
Austria
Habsburg rulers of, § 133; § 148;
§168.
in Seven Years' War, § 220.
rivalry with Prussia for leader-
ship, § 267.
expelled from Germany, § 277 and
§278.
Auxiliary
emphatic, do, by simple verb,
§ 77, 2, Note.
simple future, hjcrben, § 69, 1 and
4, a ; desire, tDoUen, §69, 3;
intention, § 69, 4, h ; obliga-
tion, foacn,§ 69, 2 and § 69, 4,
6, c ; substitutes for, § 228, 1.
]^ai>en
used with all transitives, all re-
flexives, all modals and all
impersonals (except three),
§ 164 and § 165; used with
certain intransitives, indicat-
ing verbal action, § 167, 2;
with any intransitive when
used transitively, § 167, 2,
Note; with certain verbs
(inseparable) when used fig-
uratively, § 154, 2.
of mode, see MoJals.
of passive voice, tocrbcn, § 204.
position of
in simple sentence, § 2.
in compound sentence, § 23.
for emphasis, § 23, 1.
repetition of, in English, ren-
dered by nid^t or nic^t toai)v,
§ 237, 2, Note.
fein, use of, with certain intrans-
itives, impersonals, jctn and
btcibcn, § 166 ; with follow and
meet, § 166, Note ; with cer-
tain intransitives indicating
the goal of the act, § 167, 1.
follcn, to express obligation, § 69,
2 ; § 69, 4, 6, c ; to be avoided
for simple futurity, § 228, 1.
INDEX.
357
For special word-studies, see Vocabularies.
Rudolf (1841-1905),
§ 204, 2.
Auxiliary — Continued
tooUen, to express desire, § 69, 3 ;
to be avoided as future auxil-
iary, § 228, 1.
Bad Reichenhall, picture of Bar-
barossa sculpture at, page 70.
Bach, Johann Sebastian (1685-
1750), composer, § 245.
Baedeker, guide book to Ger-
many, § 282.
Barbarossa, see Frederick I, of
Hohenstaufen.
Barmen-Elberfeld, picture of the
Hanging Railway in,
230.
Baumbach,
§230.
quoted, § 166,
S3c-, § 135.
Beethoven, Ludwig* van (1770-
1827)
anecdote of Goethe and — , § 240.
sketch of, § 245, § 251, c.
picture of, page 188.
Benedix, Roderick (1811-1873)
quoted, § 261, 2.
Berlin, capital of German Empire
industrial center of Europe, § 290.
picture of 9fici(^§tag8gebaubc
(House of Parliament) in,
Frontispiece ; statue of
Great Elector, page 149;
Frederick the Great, page 169.
Bern, Verona, Italy (not Bern,
Switzerland), capital of The-
odoric the Great, § 22, § 24.
Bible, translation of New Testa-
ment by Luther, § 153.
quoted, § 6, 2 ; § 15, 2, a ; § 43, 1 ;
§ 69, 2; § 77, 2; §85, 2;
§ 107, 2; §112; §124; § 132
§149,1; § 172, 1, a; §180,2
§ 197, 2; § 198, c; § 208
§216; § 217; § 222, 2; §232,
1; § 258, 2; §268, 1.
Bismarck, Count Otto von
(1815-1898)
anecdote of, § 277 ; § 285.
work for Germany, § 277 and
§278.
quoted, § 13; § 75, 3; § 77, 1;
§ 150, 1; § 150, 4; § 219, 1;
§222, 3; § 244.
picture of statue in front of Par-
liament Building, Frontis-
piece ; as a student, page 214 ;
picture from a photograph,
page 217.
Blankenburg, picture of ruined
castle at, page 44.
B5rne, Ludwigr (1786-1837)
quoted, § 140, 2.
Brandenburg, see Brandenburg-
Prussia.
Brandenburg- Prussia [Brand-
enburg ** mark " (frontier)
against Slavs in 10th cen-
tury ; in 1150, first " mar-
grave" ; 1415, bought from
Emperor by Hohenzollerns,
who become Electors ; 1618,
Elector inherits Duchy of
Prussia — hence Branden-
burg-Prussia], §188; §192;
§ 199, c; 1648, acquisition
of Pomerania, § 192; elector
becomes King (1701), § 192;
[thenceforward Prussia,]
1748, acquisition of Silesia,
§ 220; 1772-1795, Poland,
§ 220. For later history, see
Prussia.
358
INDEX.
For special word-studies, see Vocabularies.
Bremen, picture of the " Roland "
at, page 57.
Bryce, James, quoted, § 93.
BUrgrer, Gottfried August
(1747-1821)
quoted, § 28, 1; §95,2
Capitalization
of adjectives as nouns, and after
ettuaS and nic^t^, § 217.
of names of streets, § 299.
Case, see Nominative, Genitive,
Dative, Accusative.
Castles, pictures of, pages 8, 44, 53,
74, 77, 82, 84, 87, 124, 143, 163.
Catholics, in 1018, § 182.
Chamisso, Adelbert von (1781-
1838)
quoted, § 126, 2; § 140, 1 ; § 170, 1 ;
§ 183, 4.
Charlemagne, ^arl ber @ro§e
(reigned, 768-814)
anecdote of, § 3() ; § 45, c.
as ruler, § 30.
division of his empire, § 56.
picture of, from painting by Al-
brecht Diirer, page 24.
Charles the Great, see Charle-
magne.
Charles V
anecdote of, § 163; sketch of,
§ 168, § 175, c; death of,
§176.
picture of, from painting by
Titian, page 131.
Classics, the German, § 236, c ; see
also Literature.
Clauses
always periodic, § 23, 1.
English verbals translated by,
§ 189, land 2; § 190; §191.
indirect discourse, § 242.
order of verbs in, § 13; § 23; § 73,
1 and 2.
used after fragen o6, § 15, 2, a.
Coblentz, picture of monument to
William I, page 219.
Coburgr, picture of the castle, page
143.
Cogrnates, § 348 ; § 350, Note ; § 352 ;
§364.
-Collective nouns, § 304, 2, a.
Cologrne, portrait of Queen Luise
in, page 197.
Colosseum, § 12.
Commerce
of Hanseatic League, § 74 ; of
modern Germany, § 290.
-<3ommon prefixes (that is, sep-
arable and inseparable)
as separable, § 154, 1 ; as insepa-
rable, § 154, 2.
illustrations of use, § 154, 2, Note.
Comparatives, see Comparison.
Comparison
use of al«, § 83, 1; fo, § 26, 1;
tt>k, § 83, 1.
jc — befto, § 223.
of adjectives, see Adjectives.
of adverbs, see Adverbs.
Composers, musical, of Grerraany,
§ 245.
Composition of Words, see
Words.
Compound words, § 310 ; adjec-
tives, § 312; nouns, § 311;
verbs, § 313; Latin deriva-
tives, § 314. See also Words,
Composition of, Part II, Chap-
ter II.
Ooncesslves, § 274.
INDEX.
359
For special word-studies, see Vocabularies.
Concrete nouns, § 306.
Conditional Mode
contrasted with English, § 255.
formation and use of, § 254.
inversion of conditional in Ger-
man, § 255, 1 ; of comparative
conditional, § 255, 2.
substitution of past subjunctive,
§ 254, Note.
Conjunctions
coordinating, hut, abcr, §43, 1;
fonbern, § 43, 2.
correlatives, § 83, 1.
subordinating, § 13; with past,
al«, § 83, 1, § 84, 1 ; with pres-
ent and future, h)cnn, § 84, 2 ;
it){c with present, § 83, 1; ba,
§17,3; that, ^2n, 1.
Conrad
the Franconian (reigned 911-918),
§ 54, § 61, c.
the Hohenstaufen (reigned 1138-
1152), §91; §102, c.
Conradin, § 82.
Contrasts, § 29, 2; § 43, 1, Note.
Consonants, see Pronunciation.
Conversation
bcnn in questions, § 33.
use of inseparable verbs in, § 132.
rare uses in, bcricntgc, § 29, 1,
Note ; participles, § 178; h)iin==
fc^en, § 40, 2.
Correspondence, International,
for pupils, § 293, Note. See
also Letter- Writing.
Courts, establishment in Prussia
by Frederick II, § 205.
Cranach, Lucas (also Kranach),
painter of Luther's portrait,
page 127.
Crusades, § 48.
Dach, Simon (1605-1659), quoted,
§ 70, 3.
Dahn, Felix (1834-1912), quoted,
§19,2; § 150,2, c. Note.
Dative case
with certain prepositions, § 92,
§§94-100; §117, §§119-125;
after fi^cn, § 18, 1 ; to show
place where, § 117 ; with »or
{ago), § 4.
after certain verbs
fcefe^Ien, § 197, 2.
begcgncn, § 166, Note,
beftctjen auf or au«, § 269, 1 and 2.
benten s?on, § 41, 2.
emfatlen, § 41, 1, Note, § 231, 2.
fragen nac^, § 15, 2, h.
\\^ fiirc^ten t)or, § 25.
glaubcn (with persons), § 157,
1, Note a.
fjelfcn, § 39, 1.
fagcn, § 15, 2, h, Note a; § 28, 2.
ijcrgebcn, § 140, 3, Note.
. Demonstratives
the one, § 29, 1 ; that, those,
§ 211, 3.
to show contrast, jcncr, § 211,
3,6.
Denmark, in Thirty Years' War,
§ 182; defeated by Prussia,
§278.
Dependent clauses, see Clauses.
Dependent order of sentence,
see Word Order.
Derivation, see Words, Composi-
tion of.
2)cutfd^, origin of the word, § 354.
Dialects, attempts to unite,
§ 159, c.
See German Language, Part II,
Chapter IV.
360
INDEX.
For special word-studien, see Vocabularies.
2)ietric^ ioon 33crn (Theodoric the
Great, died 526), §22, §24,
§ 32, c ; decline of his king-
dom, § 38 ; legends of, § 48 ;
see also Theodoric the Great.
Digraphs, § 325.
Diminutives, § 306, 1.
Diphthongs, § 323.
different from English, § 323 ;
§324.
ai Cc{),§ 323, 1.
ou, § 323, 2.
m {iv), § 323, 3.
Discourse, direct, tense of, re-
tained in German in indirect,
§243.
indirect, § 241 ; §242; §243.
Dud en, Konrad, authority on
German spelling, § 356.
Diirer, Albrecht (1471-1528), citi-
zen of Nuremberg, § 116.
sketch of, § 144; patronized by
the Kaiser, § 148.
picture of, from painting by him-
self, page 114.
picture of his house in Nurem-
berg, page 117.
painting of Charlemagne by,
page 24.
Eichendorff, Joseph von (1788-
1857), § 2.'K).
quoted, §1)9, 1; § 121.
Eisenach, see Wartburg.
Elector, the Great (bcr @ro^c
.^urfiirft), see Frederick Will-
iam of Brandenburg.
picture of statue in Berlin, page
149.
Electors, seven (later nine) rulers
who chose the German Em-
perors, § 192.
em^=, § 136, 2, Note.
Emphasis
in sentence, see Word Order.
ja, §200, 2; boc^, § 237, 2.
change of tense for, § 229, 2,
Note b.
Emphatic form of verb
rendered in German by simple,
verb, § 77,2, Note; §227, 1.
Empire, the (in full, " Holy Roman
P'mpire of the German Na-
tion," 800-1806), §38; §56;
§61,c; §67; §74; §82; §93;
§ 133; § 148; § 163; § 168.
the new German Empire, § 277 ;
§278; 282.
See also Germany and German
Empire.
Engel, Karl, quoted, § 190.
England, ally of Frederick the
Great, §214; §220.
ent>, § 136.
(Sr., § 137.
eg, in c« gtbt and c« tft, § 85, 2.
as grammatical subject of other
verbs, § 85, 2, Note.
in c« gcH § 206, 1.
Exclamations, see § 366.
Factitive, there, in c« gibt, § 85, 1;
ccl ift, § 85, 2; distinguished
from ba, and bcrt, § 16.
Fallersleben, Hoffmann von
(1798-1874), §230.
quoted, § 100, 4, Note; § 185,
l,a.
Ferdinand I (reigned 1556-1564),
Holy Roman Emperor of the
Habsburg line, successor to
Charles V, § 163; § 168.
INDEX.
361
For special word-studies, see Vocabularies.
Ferdinand III (reigned 1637-1657) ,
Holy Roman Emperor, grand-
nephew of Charles V, § 182.
Feuchtersleben, Ernst von
(1806-1849), quoted, § 222, 5.
Feuerbach, Ludwig- Andreas
(1804-1872), quoted, § 210.
Fichte, Johann Gottlieb (1762-
1814), §285.
Folksongs (iBoIfSIieber) , quoted,
§81; § 117; § 180,1, Note.
Fouqu^, Friedrich Karl Hein-
rich, Freiherr de la Motte
(1777-1843), quoted, § 147, 1;
§ 195, 1.
France
in Thirty Years' War, § 182 ; in
Seven Years' War, § 220 ; in
Napoleonic Wars, § 252;
§ 256; in Franco-Prussian
War, § 277, § 278.
Franks, conquests of, § 24 ; § 38 ;
§48.
Frankfort, parliament of, § 265;
§ 267 ; § 273, c.
picture of St. Paul's Church at,
page 205.
Frederick I, ** Barbarossa "
(reigned 1152-1190)
Emperor of the Hohenstaufen
line, § 80; § 82; § 86, c.
contemporary sculpture of, page
70.
idealized figure of, at Kyffhauser,
page 67.
Frederick II, grandson of Bar-
barossa. Emperor (1212-1250),
§ 105, § 118.
Frederick I, King in Prussia
(1701-1713), (elector, 1686-
1701), § 192.
Frederick II, the Great, King of
Prussia (1740-1786)
descent from the " Great Elector,"
§192.
establishment of Berlin courts
(windmill legend), § 203.
sketch of life and work, § 205.
life in Potsdam, § 213, c.
admiration for George Washing-
ton, § 214.
military operations of, § 220,
great popularity, § 205 ; § 225, c.
descendants of, § 256; § 267;
§282.
picture of palace at Potsdam
(Sans Souci), page 163.
picture of statue in Berlin, page
169.
Frederick III, German Emperor
and King of Prussia (reigned
99 days, 1888), „Unfcr ^x\%,"
§ 282 (called "the third"
because he was the third
King Frederick of Prussia.
There was an Emperor Fred-
erick III of the *'Holy Ro-
man Empire," 1440-1493.).
Frederick William, "the Great
Elector" (bcr groge ^urfitrft),
Elector of Brandenburg and
Duke of Prussia (1640-1688),
§ 188 ; § 192 ; § 199, c ; § 220.
descendants of, § 192.
picture of statue in Berlin, p. 149.
Frederick William I, King of
Prussia (1713-1740), „@oIba*
tenfontg/' father of Frederick
the Great, § 192.
Frederick William II, King of
Prussia, nephew and succes-
sor of Frederick the Great
(1786-1797), §265.
362
INDEX.
For special word-sttidies, see Vocabularies.
Frederick William III, King of
Prussia (1797-1840), husband
of Queen Luise; patron of
art and of learning, § 256;
§ 207.
Frederick William IV, King of
Prussia (184(>-18(jl) , offered
imperial crown, § 265; re-
fuses, § 267 ; death, § 278.
Free cities Oi the Empire, § 74.
Freiligrath, Hermann Ferdi-
nand (1810-1876), quoted,
§ 19, 2 ; f; 271, 2.
Freytagr, Gustav (1816-1895),
§230.
quoted, §15, 1, 6; §41, 2; § 47;
§55; §69,2; §75,2; §84,3;
§99,2; §149,2; §150, 3; §157,
3; §171,1; §183,4; §206,1;
§207, Note; §232,2; §234,1;
§2(>0; §266,2; § 2()9, 2.
Future tense, see Tense.
Galleries, of art, in Germany,
§ 152, c ; § 144.
@c=, § 138.
Geibel, Emmanuel (1815-1884),
§ 230; quoted, § 50, 3, Note
a.
Gellert, Christian FUrchtegrott
(1715-1775), quoted, § 138;
§165.
Gender, § 207, Note.
Genitive, special use of, § 99, 3,
Note b.
German Empire
restoration of the Roman Em-
pire in the west as the
German Empire, by Charle-
magne (800 A.D.), § 38.
revived by Otto I, as " the Holy
Roman Empire of the German
nation," § 56.
decline of, § 67.
glory revived by the Hohenstau-
fen line, § 82.
condition in the Middle Ages, § 93.
under the Habsburg family, § 133,
§148.
importance under Charles V,
§168.
weakened by division, § 163, § 168,
and by religious war, § 182.
title of ** Holy Roman Emperor "
abandoned 1806, § 256.
crown of proposed new German
Empire offered to King of
Prussia and refused, § 265 ;
§267.
proclamation of the new German
Empire (1871), §277; § 278;
§282.
See also Germany.
©crmanen, technical Grerman name
for the "early Germans," § 3.
Germania, the Roman province,
§14.
of Tacitus, § 14.
Germanicus, Roman general, § 3.
German language
abbreviations in, § 365.
colloquialisms (2llltag«bcutfd)),
§.366.
development of, as shown in
Lord's Prayer, §§ 357-362.
historical sketch of, §§ 345-362.
Indo-European, the parent
language, § 345; drawing of,
page 279.
first sound shift, § 346.
Grimm's law of, § 346, § 347,
§318.
INDEX,
363
For special word-studies, see Vocabularies.
German language — Continued
Gothic, oldest known Ger-
man, § 349; Lord's
Prayer, § 357.
second sound shift, § 350.
High and Low German and
English, § 350, Note,
§351.
Grimm's law of, § 352.
High German, § 353.
Old High (750-1100 a.d.)
writings in, § 354.
Lord's Prayer in, § 358;
§359.
Middle High (1100-1350)
writings in, § 355.
Rudolph of Habsburg's
influence, § 133.
Lord's Prayer in, § 360.
New High (1534-present)
(after transition pe-
riod, 1350-1534)
Lord's Prayer in, § 361,
§362.
modern German, § 356.
influences upon
Rudolph of Habsburg, § 133,
§ 355 ; the Reformation and
Printing, § 35() ; Maximilian,
§ 155 ; § 159, c ; Luther, § 155 ;
§ 159, c; §356.
name „beut|c^/' § 354.
official orthography, Duden,
§356.
See also Composition of Words,
Pronunciation.
Germans, the early, § 3 ; § 12 ;
§14; §20, c.
Germany-
appreciation of German classics
in, § 286, c.
artistic centre of, in Middle Ages
(Nuremberg), § 118.
cities of Middle Ages, § 72 ; " free
cities," § 74.
growth of national feeling in
nineteenth century, § 267.
history of, in Roman times, § 1 ;
§ 3; province " Germania,"
§ 14; under the Goths, Lom-
bards and Franks, § 38 ; em-
pire of Charlemagne, § 38;
work of Henry the Fowler,
§ 56; empire of Otto the
Great, § 56; decline, § 67;
§ 82; glory of Hohenstaufen,
§82; under the "robber
barons," § 93; under the
Habsburgs, § 133; § 148;
failure of Maximilian to mod-
ernize Germany, § 148 ; union
with Spain, § 163; abdication
of Charles V, § 168 ; suc-
cessors of Charles V, § 182;
Thirty Years' War, § 176;
Treaty of Westphalia (1648),
§182; the "Great Elector,"
§ 188 ; § 192 ; under Frederick
the Great, see Frederick II
of Prussia; Seven Years'
War, 220; Queen Luise,
§ 252 ; § 256 ; the Napoleonic
period, § 256 ; growth of na-
tional feeling, § 267 ; Frank-
fort Parliament, § 265; § 267;
founding of the new German
Empire, § 277; § 278; § 282.
invention of printing in, § 131;
§133.
literature of, § 230.
musicians of, § 245.
national flower of, § 252.
parliament (first elected) of,
§265; §267.
scieucein, §285; §286.
trade of, §289; §290.
364
INDEX,
For special word-studies, see Vocabularies.
Gerstacker, Friedrich (1816-
1872), quoted, § 8; § 17, 3;
§ 76, 1; § 77, 2, Note; §111,
3; § 122; § 229, 2; § 246, 3;
§ 257, 1.
Goethe, Johann Wolfgangr von
(1749-1832)
anecdotes of — and Beethoven,
§ 240 ; of — and Schiller, § 226.
place in literature, § 230.
picture of bust in Weimar Li-
brary, page 195.
of house in Weimar, page 181.
of statue " Dichterpaar," page
177.
quoted, § 7 ; § 19, 1 ; § 26, 1 ; § 30,
2; §41,1, Note; §58, 3, Note
6; §68,3; §75,1; § 81 ; § 83,
2 ; § 99, 3, Note 6 ; § 100, 1 ;
§ 108; § 119, 1; § 120, 3;
§ 123, 1 ; § 132 ; § 147, 2 ; § 156 ;
§157,2; § 167,2; § 178, Note
6; § 189, 2; § 197, 1; §211,
3,6; §216; §218,1; §228,1;
§ 247, 1; § 254; § 255, 1 ;
§258,1; §271,1.
Goslar, picture of Palace of Ger-
man Emperors, page 53.
Gothic, earliest known German
language, §§ 347-352.
Lord's Prayer in, § 357.
Goths, East, see Ostrogoths ; West,
see Visigoths.
Great Elector, see Frederick Will-
iam.
Grillparzer, Franz (1791-1872),
dramatist, quoted, § 2{), 1;
§ 58, 3, Note c; § 169, 1;
§ 196, 2.
Grimm, Jakob (1785-1863), phi-
lologist, § 285.
adoption of term "umlaut,"
§ 322 ; discoverer of Grimm's
Laio, §§ 346-352.
Grimm, Wilhelm (1786-1859)
Grimm Brothers (btc @c6riibcr
©rimm), Jakob and Wil-
helm
quoted, §23, 1; §42, 2; §50, 3;
§ 170, 2, Note a ; § 248, 2, a.
Grtin, Anastasius, pseudonym
for Anton Alexander, Graf
von Auersperg (1806-1876),
quoted, § 18, 1.
Gutenberg, Johann (1400-1468)
inventor of printing, § 131 ; § 133 ;
§ 143, c.
picture of statue in Mayence;
page 105.
as auxiliary, see Auxiliary.
used with rcc^t, to be right, § 172,
1,6.
Habsburgr (less correctly, Haps-
burg), the ruling line of the
Holy Roman Empire during
most of the period 1273-
1740. [Descendants through
female line (Maria Theresa),
German Emperors, 1745-1806 ;
emperors of Austria, 1806 to
present time.]
founding of, § 133; fortunes of,
§ 148; under Charles V and
descendants, § 163 ; § 168.
Halle, picture of the " Roland " at,
page 61.
Hamburg", picture of the harbor
of, page 228.
Hamburg- America, line of
steamships, § 289.
INDEX,
365
For special word-studi,
Handel, Georg Friedrich (1685-
1759); German composer,
§ 245.'
Hansa, see Ilanseatic League.
Hanseatic League, § 74.
Hauff, Wilhelm (1802-1827),
quoted, § 119, 2.
Hauptmann, Gerhart (1862 — ),
§ 230; quoted, § 29, 1; §40,
1; §49, 1; § 76, 1; § 85, 1;
§95, 3; § 135, 2; § 136, 2;
§157, 1; §172, 1, 6; §242.
Haydn, Johann Michael (1732-
1809), Germau composer,
§245.
Hebbel, Friedrich (1813-1863),
German dramatist, § 230;
quoted, § 9; § 17, 2; §58, 3;
§76,2; § 170, 2, Note 6 ; §209;
§ 266, 2 ; § 270, 2.
Hegel, Georg Wilhelm Fried-
rich (1770-1831), German
philosopher, § 285.
Heine, Heinrich (1799-1856) ,
German poet, § 230; quoted,
§2,2; §16, 1; § 58,1; §76,
3, Note ; § 94, 1 ; § 98, 1 ; § 99,
3, Note a ; § 227, 1 ; § 269, 1.
Heinrich der Vogler, see Henry
the Fowler.
Helmholtz, Hermann Ludwig
Ferdinand von (1821-1894) ,
German scientist, § 285.
Henry the Fowler (reigned 919-
936) ; " King of Germany,"
§54; § 56; §61, c; "Builder
of Cities," § 74; picture of his
tomb, page 39 ; one of his cas-
tles, page 44.
?, nee Vbcahularies.
Herder, Johann Gottfried (1744-
1803), quoted, § 97, 1; § 110,
2; §218,1.
Hermann the Liberator, § 1;
§ 3; picture of monument to..
page 2.
Hermann, Count of Thuringia,
§103.
Hermannsschlacht (battle) , in
Teutoburger Forest, § 1.
Heyse, Paul (1830 ), § 230
quoted, § 6, 1; § 13; § 25
§33; §39,1; §51, 1; § 59, 2
§68,2; §84,2,a;§88; §110
1; §111,2; § 135, 1 ; § 150, 2, 6
§ 196, 1; § 211, 2; § 231, 2
§ 248, 1.
High German, see German Lan-
guage.
Hildegund, the betrothed of Ro-
land, § 46.
Hillern, Wilhelmine von (1836-
); quoted, § 2, 2; § 16,
2; § 50, 2, Note ; § 84, 1 ; §139;
§ 185, 1, &; § 197, 2, Note;
§ 211, 2, Note ; § 222, 4 ; § 228,
2, Note ; § 257, 2 ; § 266, 1.
Hohenstaufen line of emperors
(reigned 1138-1254), § 82;
§105.
See also Frederick I and II, and
the German Empire.
Hohenzollern line, § 192. See
individual names below,
(a) Electors of Brandenburg
(1415-1701), § 188, § 192; see
Great Elector.
(6) Kings of Prussia (1701-1871),
§ 192; §205; § 220; § 256;
§267; §278.
366
INDEX,
For special word-studies, see Vocabularies.
HohenzoUern line — Continued.
Frederick I (1088), 1701-1713.
Frederick William 1, 1713-1740.
Frederick II, the Great, 1740-
1786.
Frederick William II, 1786-
1797.
Frederick William III (Queen
Luise), 1797-1840.
Frederick William IV, 1840-
1861.
(c) German Emperors and Kings
of Prussia (1871 ) , § 278 ;
§ 281 ; § 282.
William I (1861), 1871-1888.
Frederick III, 1888.
William 11, 1888 .
Holderlin, Priedrich (1770-1843) ,
quoted, § 84, 2, 6.
Holy Roman Empire (962-1806),
see German Empire.
Hungarians, repulsed by Ger-
mans, § 56.
Imperative sentence
inverted order in, § 2.
use of bo(f> in, § 77, 2, Note ; of \a,
§ 200, 1.
Imperfect, see Tense, imperfect.
Imperial chancery, § 155.
Impersonals, " there is," § 85, 1
and 2 ; " they say," § 57.
See also Verbs.
Indefinite article, negative, § 9.
Indefinite pronouns, see Pro-
nouns.
Indicative Mode
contrasted with subjunctive,
§ 241 ; special use in indirect
discourse, § 244.
r Indirect discourse
rule for use of, § 242 ; tenses of,
§ 243.
Indo-European languag'e, par-
ent of German, § 345; see
German language.
drawing of, page 279.
Industry, growth of, in German
Empire, § 290.
Infinitives
after laffcn, § 68, 4, Note,
after o^ne and anftatt, § 181.
omission of ju, § 180, 1 ; use of
SU, § 180, 2.
order of, in sentence with medals,
§66.
passive in English, active in Ger-
man, § 204, 2, Note,
translations of English infinitive
into German, §191, 1; of
German infinitive into Eng-
lish (verbals) ,§ 180.
" two infinitives," with modals,
§ 73, 1 ; without modals, § 81.
Inflection of adjectives, § 216,
- Inseparable prefixes
discussion of, § 132 ; meanings of,
§ 134; U>, § 135; ent* (cmH,
§136; CX'; §137; gc*, § 138;
mif;-', § 139; ux^, § 140; jcr»,
§141.
for prefixes that are both sepa-
rable and inseparable, see
Common prefixes.
Interjections, see § 3(k).
International correspondence
for pupils, § 293, Note.
Interrogrative pronouns, w/io,
§208; which, §209; what,
§ 210; what kind of, § 210.
sentences, inverted order in, § 2;
use of n^ann in, § 84, 3.
INDEX.
367
For special word-studiea, see Vocabularies.
Intransitive verbs
with fjaben, § 165 ; witli fetn, § 166 ;
in German become transitive in
English, § 166, Note,
with l^abcn or fcin, § 167, 1 and 2.
Introduction, forms of, § 171,
2, Note.
Inverted order of sentence,
see Word Order.
Italy, under the Ostrogoths, § 24;
under Charlemagne, § 38 ; un-
der the Ottos, § 56 ; quarrels
of the emperors with, § 67 ;
§ 82; change of policy to-
ward, § 133.
Kaiser Karl der Grosse, see
Charlemagne.
Kaiser Karl V, see Charles V.
Kaiser Maximilian, see Maxi-
milian.
Kaisers, see German Empire.
Kant, Imanuel (1724-1804) , § 285.
Keller, Gottfried (1815-1890),
§ 230; quoted, § 6, 2; § 88,
Note; § 111, 1; § 173, 3;
§184,2; §193,3.
Kerner, Andreas Justinus (1786-
1862), § 230; quoted, § 119, 3.
Kiel, picture of canal at, page 231.
Kleist, Heinrich von (1777-
1811), §230; quoted, §30, 1,
Note ; § 193, 2.
Klopstock, Priedrich Gott-
fried (1724-1803)
quoted, § 181.
influence on language, § 322.
Koberger, Anton, printer, § 131 ;
§ 143, c.
Koch, Robert (1843-1910), § 285.
Konrad, see Conrad.
Konradin (Conradin), the last of
the Hohenstaufen line, § 82.
Korner, Theodor (1791-1813),
§ 230; quoted, §42, 3; § %;
§ 147, 1.
Kranach (Cranach) , Lucas,
German painter of Luther's
portrait, page 127.
Kriemhilde, § 22.
Kyffhauser, legend of, § 80.
picture of monument to William
I at, page 65.
of Barbarossa statue at, p. 67.
Latin
language of courts in the Middle
Ages, § 105.
derivation of German words
from, § 314.
Legrends
See Barbarossa, Dietrich von
Bern, Roland, Hildegund,
and Siegfried.
Lenau, pseudonym for Nikolaus
Niembseh von Strehlenau
(1802-1850), quoted, § 255, 2.
Lessing, Gotthold Ephraim
(1729-1781) , § 230 ; quoted, § 4 ;
§23, 1; §33; §43, 1, Note;
§49,2, Note; §68,4; §77,2,
Note ; § 97, 2 ; § 113, 2 ; § 149,
2, Note ; § 172, 2 ; § 184, 1 ;
§ 200,1; §211,3, a; §218, 3;
§ 234, 2, § 237, 2, Note ;
§ 253, h.
Letter- Writing, Part II, Chapter I
general rule for, § 293.
examples of
business, page 241.
friendly, page 238.
368
INDEX,
For special word-studies, see Vocabularies
Letter- Writing — Continued
intimate, page 236.
exchange of letters between Ger-
man and American pupils,
§ 293, Note,
proper forms to use in
the date, § 294 ; address, § 295 ;
the close, § 2f>6; the envelope,
§ 298 ; address of sender, 2lb-
fenbcr, § 298 ; rules for names
of streets, § 299.
summary, § 297.
Licbtenberg-, Georg Christopb
(1742-1799), quoted, § 83, 1 ;
§254.
Liliencron Detlev von
(1844-
1909), quoted, § 50, 4; § 169,
2; §231,1.
Liszt, Franz (1811-1886), § 245.
Literature, German
periods of, § 230.
popularity of classics, § 236, c.
Logau, Friedricb von (1604-
1055), quoted, §47, 1; §135,
3; §156.
Lombards, § 24.
Lord's Prayer, in German, § 356-
§ 362.
Low German, see German lan-
guage.
Luise, or Louise, Queen of
Prussia,
story of, § 252.
work for Prussia, § 256; § 264,
c.
picture of portrait in Cologne,
page 197.
Luther, Martin (1483-1546)
anecdote of, § 153 ; influence on
the German language, § 133 ;
§ 155; 169. c; §363; §356;
translations of the New
Testament, § 153; §355.
picture of Luther's room at Wart-
burg Castle, page 121; of
the court at the Wartburg,
showing location of Luther's
room, § 124.
painting of Luther by Lucas
Kranach, page 127.
Mastersingers, § 116 ; § 118.
Maximilian, Emperor of Germany
(1493-1519), grandfather of
Charles V ; § 168 ; influence on
the German language ; § 148 ;
§155; §159, c.
Mayence, statue of John Guten-
berg and the Cathedral at,
page 105.
Measure, expressions of, § 99, 3,
Note a.
Mendelssohn, Felix Mendels-
sohn-Bartholdy (1809-
1847), §245.
Middle Age«
growth of the towns in, § 74.
history of Germany during, see
Qermany.
language of, see German, Middle
High,
• mastershigers of, § 118.
minstrel poets of, § 103 ; § 105.
Nuremberg in, § 116; § 118.
robber barons of, § 93.
" Roland," symbol of civic liberty
in, § 72; § 74.
Middle High German
discussion of, see German, Mid'
die High.
language of the Minnesingers,
§ 105; of Mastersingers,
§116; §118.
INDEX.
3^9
For special icord
Minnesingers, § 103; § 105.
^ mih § 139.
x^ Modals, in simple tenses, § 66 ; in
compound tenses alone, § 73;
with other verbs, § 73, 1 ; in
dependent order, § 73, 2.
German and English compared,
§ 66, Note,
subjunctive, § 266.
— Mode, see Conditional, Impera-
tive, Indicative, Subjunctive.
Mohammedans (Moors), driven
out by Franks, § 48.
Moltke, Graf Hellmuth Karl
Bernhard von (1800-1891)
chief of staff of the German army,
§282.
picture of, page 222.
quoted, § 180, 1.
Mommsen, Theodor (1817-1903),
§ 285 ; picture of, page 226.
Morike, Eduard (1804-1875),
§ 230 ; quoted, § 170, 2.
— Motion, direction of
away from the speaker (^tn), § 18,
2; § 149, 1; toward the
speaker (^cr), § 149, 1.
definite purpose or no motion, ^u,
§ 100, 1.
difficulty with l^in and i)tx, § 149,
2, Note,
prepositions showing motion or
place where, § 117.
toward or to a place (nac^), § 97, 1.
Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus
(1756-1791), §245.
Miiller, Wilhelm (1794-1827),
quoted, § 100, 2; § 125, 1;
§ 180, 1.
Music of Qermany, § 245.
see Vocabularies.
Narrative, use of imperfect tense
in, § 23, 1 ; § 229, 1.
National flower of Germany,
§252.
Neg-atives
bod^ in answer to, § 237, 1.
tein, § 9.
ntc^t irafjr, for repetition of,
§ 237, 2, Note,
noc^, § 62 ; § 248, 2, a.
position of nid^t, see Word Order.
Netherlands, part of "the Em-
pire " under Charles V, § 168.
Neuter gender, § 207, Note.
Verbs, see Verbs, intransi-
tive.
New Testament, translated by
Luther, § 153 ; § 159, c.
Nominative, with c^ tft, § 85, 2.
Normal order of sentence, see
Word Order.
North German Lloyd, line of
steamships, § 289.
North Germans
accent of, § 316.
in Franco-Prussian War, § 277.
Nouns
abstract, § 307.
collective, § 304, 2, a.
concrete, § 306.
derivation from verb roots, § 302.
Novalis, pseudonym for Friedrich
von Hardenberg (1772-1801),
quoted, § 136, 2, Note.
Nuremberg (9^i:rnbcrg), § 116;
§118.
home of Diirer, § 144; of Hans
Sachs, § 116; of Koberger,
§131; §143, c.
influence on printing, § 131.
370
INDEX,
For special tcord-studies, see Vocabularies.
Nuremberg" — Continued
picture of the river Pegnitz and
the walls of, page 92.
picture of the Woman's Gate
(O^raucntor) at, page 100,
statue of Hans Sachs at, page 97.
house of Albrecht Diirer, page 117.
Numeral adverbs, see Adverbs.
Objects, order of, see Word Order.
Order of sentence, see Word
Order.
Orthography, authority on Ger-
man, Duden, § 356; names of
streets, § 299.
Ostrogoths, § 24.
Otto I, the Great (936-973), re-
storer of the Holy Roman
Empire, §56; §61, c; §67.
Otto III (983-1002), anecdote of,
§ 65; sketch of, §67; 71, c.
decline of Empire, after, § 82.
Parliament at Frankfort, § 2(i5;
§267; picture of meeting
place, page 205; of members,
Arndt, page 207; Uhland,
page 211.
Particles
at(crbing«, § 274 ; bcnn, § 33 ; boc^,
§ 237 ; ja, § 200 ; no(^, § 62 ;
fc^on, § 128 ; ilfccr^au^^t, § 160 ;
h)o()t, § 88 ; jh)or, § 274.
Participles
present
used to translate English verbal
In ing, § 178 ; in English
rendered in German by infini-
tive, § 180, § 181 ; by clause,
§ 189 ; by German past par-
ticiple {came running, tarn
gclaufcn), § 180, 1, Note ; ob-
ject required, § 296, Note;
English progressive, § 178,
Note b ; § 227, 1.
past, § 178, Note a.
of inseparable verbs, § 132;
order of in sentence, § 23 ;
prefix gc= in, § 138; used to
translate English verbal,
caine running, § 180, 1,
Note.
Passive Voice, formation and
peculiarities of, in German,
§ 204 ; use of bon to tell the
agent, §99, 2; §204; per-
sonal passive, § 204, 1 ; Eng-
lish passive infinitive, active
in German, § 204, 2, Note ; the
impersonal passive, § 204, 2 ;
German substitutes for (man
with the active), § 204, 1,
Note.
Past Participle, see Participles.
Past Tense, see Tense.
^aiMliv(i)c, at Frankfort, picture
of, page 205.
Peace of Westphalia, § 182.
Pegnitz, river, § 116; picture of,
page 92.
Perfect Tenses, see Tense.
Person, capitalization of second
person pronouns in letter-
writing, § 2i^i, Note.
Personal pronouns, see Pro-
nouns.
Philip, son of Charles V, § 163.
Phrases
after bitten, §15, 1, b; after to
command, § 191, 1.
concessive, § 274.
INDEX.
871
For special word-Htudies, see Vocabularies.
Phrases — Continued
order of, § 47 ; § 92, Note,
participial phrase becomes clause
in German, § 189, 1.
position of n^t in, § 37.
um ju with an infinitive phrase,
§ 197, 2, Note.
Platt-Deutsch, § 350, Note.
Pluperfect Tense, see Tense.
Plural
with ba8, § 211, 3, 6, Note ; eg,
§ 85, 2.
Poland, annexation of part of, to
Brandenburg, Prussia, § 220.
Pomerania (^ommern), won by
the " Great Elector," § 192.
Position, " place where"
greater exactness of German in
expressing, § 206, 2.
Potential
form of the conditional, § 254 ;
of the subjunctive, § 253, c.
Potsdam, § 203 ; § 213, c.
picture of the windmill at, page
159; of the palace, Sans
Souci, page 163.
Predicate, adjective, §216; am
with the superlative, § 218, 1 ;
order in, § 37, Note; see also
Word Order.
Prefixes
general, § 304 ; ers», § 304, 1 ; ge=,
§ 304, 2, a and 6 ; m\^', § 304,
3; un^, §304,4; ur=, §304,5.
verbal
separable, see Separable pre-
fixes.
inseparable, see Inseparable
prefixes.
common, see Common pre-
fixes.
Prepositions
with accusative, § 104; § 106-
§ 112; accusative or dative,
§ 117; §§ 119-125; with da-
tive, § 92; §§ 94-100; with
inanimate objects, bfl(r), § 106,
1 ; h)o(r), § 106, 2 ; with the
genitive, § 99, 3, Note b.
Present participles, see Parti-
ciples.
Present tense, see Tense.
Preterit (Imperfect), see Tense.
Printing", invention of, § 131 ;
§133; §143, c.
Progressive form of verb, ren-
dered by present, § 178, Note
b ; § 227, 1.
Pronouns
capitalization in letter-writing,
§ 296, Note,
demonstratives, § 29, 1, and Note ;
§211, 3; other, § 30.
impersonal, bag, 211, 3, 6, Note;
C«, § 85.
indefinite, § 29, § 30.
order of pronominal objects,
§55.
personal, bcr, § 211, 3, a.
use of adjectives with, § 219,
1.
congruence of it, § 207.
reflexive, § 196, 1.
relative (conjunctive),
not to be omitted in German,
§29, 1; §208; §209; §211,2.
regular relatives, who, § 208 ;
that, §211,2; that referring
to neuters, § 211, 2, Note;
compound {Jie who), §208;
indefinite compound {Jihat
which) , § 210.
372
INDEX.
For special word-studies, see Vocabularies.
Pronunciation
accent
the best German, § 315, § 316.
authority on, § 316, Note ; § 343,
footnote,
in sentence, § 342.
assimilation, § 343.
consonants
identical, § 331, 1 and 2; equiv-
alent, § 332.
dissimilar, § 333; d), § 334; g,
§335; I, § 336; r, § 337, land
2.
quantity of, §339; §340.
difficulties of, § 317.
digraphs, § 325.
diphthongs, § 323, § 324.
glottal catch, §§ 326-330.
syllable bearers, § 338.
pitch, § 341.
sentence accent, § 342.
syllable stress, §§ 338-341.
Proper names, of streets, § 299.
Protestant Reformation, in-
fluence on German language,
§133; gains of ,§ 182.
Proverbs (^^rtt^iuortcr), quoted,
§19.1; §26,1; §30,1; §37;
§50, 3, Note; §50,5; §69,3;
§113,2; §119, 3, Note; §140,
2; § 147,2; §147, 3; § 154,2;
§ 157, 1; § 194, 1;.§ 249, 2;
§ 255, 2 ; § 259, 1 ; § m), Note.
Prussia, kings of, §192; § 256;
§ 267 ; § 278 ; § 282 ; establish-
ment of courts, § 205; gains
of territory, § 220; in the
Napoleonic era, § 256; ri-
valry with Austria for leader-
ship of Grerman states, § 2(>7;
wars for primacy in Ger-
many, § 278.
Pure vowels, characteristic
German, § 318.
oi
Quantity of consonants, § 338-
§340; see also Pronunciation.
Quantity of vowels, §§ 320-322 ;
see also Pronunciation.
Quedlinburgr, picture of burial
place of Henry the Fowler at,
page 39.
Queen Louise, see Luiae, Queen
of Prussia.
Questions
answer to negative, § 237, 1 ; beun,
in, § 33.
See Interrogative pronouns and
sentences.
Ramler, Karl Wilhelm (died
1798) ; quoted, § 92 ; § 104.
Ravenna, capital of Theodoric,
§ 24; picture of Theodoric's
tomb at, page 15.
Reflexive verbs, see Verbs.
Reg-enstein, picture of, page 44.
Reichenhall, sculpture of Barba-
rossa at, page 70.
Reichstag^sg-ebELude (House of
Parliament) , picture of, Fron-
tispiece.
Relative (Conjunctive) pro-
nouns, see Pronouns.
Rlchter, Johann Paul Fried-
rich, commonly called Jean
Paul (1763-1825), quoted,
§223.
Robert, Ludwigr (1778-1832) ;
quoted, § 68, 3, Note a.
Roentgren, Wilhelm (1^5 ),
§ 285; picture of, page 224.
INDEX,
373
For special word-studies, see Vocabularies.
Roland, nephew of Charlemagne,
§ 46 ; § 48 ; § 53, c ; as symbol
of civic liberty in Middle
Ages, see Bolandsdule.
Roland's Arch, § 46; picture of,
page 33.
Rolandsaule, symbol of civic free-
dom ; § 72 ; § 74 ; picture of
Roland at Bremen, page 57;
at Halle, page 61.
Romans
in Germany, § 1 ; § 3 ; § 14.
picture of remains of palace at
Trier (Treves), page 8; of
Porta Nigra, page 13.
Romantic school of German
literature, § 230.
Roncesvalles, important battle in
medieval legends, § 48.
Rosegger, Peter (1843 ),
quoted, §51, 2; §68,4; § 173,
2; §207.
Rotbart, see Frederick II, Barba-
rossa.
Rothenburg, picture of, page 139.
Ruckert, Priedrich (1788-1866),
§ 2.30; quoted, §94, 2; § 113,
1 ; § 117, 1 ; § 211, 1.
Rudelsburgr, statue of Bismarck
at, page 214.
Rudolph of Habsburg, emperor
of the Holy Roman Empire
(127^-1291), influence on the
German language, § 133;
§ 355 ; death of, § 148.
Russia, in Seven Years' War,
§220.
Sachs, Hans (1494-1576), "Mas-
tersinger," § 116; picture of
statue in Nuremberg, page 97.
(Sangcrfrieg at the Wartburg
(Singers' Contest), § 103;
§ 105; § 115, c.
Sans Souci, picture of mill at,
page 159; of palace, page 163.
Saxon, line of German kings and
emperors, § 56.
Scheffel, Josef Viktor von (1826
-1886), § 230; quoted, § 140,3.
Schenkendorf, Max von (1783-
1817), quoted, § 253, c.
Schiller, Friedrlch Christoph
(1759-1805)
account of, § 230.
anecdote of — and Goethe, § 226.
picture of statue of the „T)id)tev^
paat/' page 177.
of bust of Schiller in
Weimar Library, page
184.
quoted, § 5; § 15, 1, a; § 26, 2;
§27; §41,1; §49,2; §58,2;
§ 68, 1 ; § 85, 2 ; § 97, 3 ; § 100,
8; § 107, 1; § 132; § 150, 2, c.
Note; § 167,1; §183,3; §185,
2; §211,3, b, Note; §218, 1;
§ 228, 2; § 234, 3; § 237, 1;
§ 243 ; § 249, 1 ; § 253, d ; § 257,
1, Note ; § 270, 2, Note.
Schleg-el, August Wilhelm von
(1767-1845), § 230; quoted,
§ 157, 1, Note c.
Schlegel, Friedrlch von (1772-
1829), §230; quoted, §95,1;
§ 98, 2.
Schopenhauer, Arthur (1788-
1860), §285.
Schubert, Franz (1797-1828),
§245.
Schumann, Robert (1810-1856),
§245.
874
INDEX.
For special word-studies, see Vocabulariea.
Schwab, Gustav (1792-1850),
quoted, § 270, 1.
Science, German superiority in,
§ 285, § 286.
Script, illustrations of, pages 236;
238; 241.
(Setn
as auxiliary, see Auxiliary.
more exact use of, than in English,
§206.
use of fic^ fccftnbcn and c« gc(;t or
of fein with the dative, § 206,
1.
" place where " demands specific
term, § 206, 2, and Note,
with bag, § 211, 3, 6, Note.
Sequence of tenses, § 243.
Seven Years' War, § 220.
Siegfried, § 22; § 32, c,
Silesia, won by Prussia from
Austria, § 220.
Singular with plural verb, § 85,
2; §211, 3,6, Note.
South America, German trade
in, § 289.
South Germans in Franco-
Prussian War, § 277.
Spain, crusades against Moors in,
§48.
part of "the Empire," §163;
separated from, § 168.
Steamship lines, § 289.
Storm, Theodor (1817-1888),
§230.
quoted, §9; § 18, 2; §28, 2
§42,1; §50,2; §57; §69,1
§109,1; §123,1; §137; §171
2; §183, 1; §206,2, Note
§219, 2; §222, 1; § 247, 2
§ 261, 1.
Streets, names of, § 299.
Students of German Univer.
slties, § 285.
Subject
accusative with infinitive be-
comes German clause, § 191, 1.
grammatical, „t^," § 85, 2, and
Note,
place in sentence, § 2.
Subjunctive
conditional mode with subjunc-
tive of tDcrbcn, § 254 and
Note. See Conditional.
distinguished from indicative,
§241.
divisions
(a) of indirect discourse (de-
pendent), § 242, § 243.
(6) unreal (contrary to fact),
§253.
(tt) hortative, § 253, a.
(b) optative, § 253, b.
(c) potential, § 253, c.
(d) contrary to fact, § 253, d.
special uses of
"should like," "could have,"
§ 266, 1 and 2.
past for conditional, § 254, Note,
pluperfect, § 266, 2.
Subordinating: conjunctions,
see Conjunctions.
Substantive adjectives, § 217.
Sudermann, Hermann (1857-
), §230; quoted, §49, 1;
§ 59, 1; § 157, 1, Note a;
§ 204, 1 ; § 246, 4.
SufElzes
formation of nouns
concrete, =(^cn, 4ctn, *er, aw,
»Itng, § 30(i.
abstract, ^, -^x, A^ziif .fett, »fc^tt,
=ung, § 307.
INDEX.
375
For special word-studies, see Vocabularies.
SuflBxes — Continued
formation of adjectives
=bar, =en, ^aft, =tg, 4^6), 4i^, ^fam,
§ 308.
formation of verbs
-en, =crn, Acven, =tgcn, § 309.
Superlative, see Comparison.
Sweden, in Thirty Years' War,
§ 182; in Seven Years' War,
§220.
Syllable stress, see under Pro-
nunciation.
Tacitus, Roman historian, § 12 ;
§14.
Tense
present
used in German for the future,
§ 228, 1 ; for the progressive
and emphatic forms, § 227, 1 ;
§ 228 ; with f(f)on for the per-
fect, § 228, 2 ; in indirect dis-
course, §243; use of ttjcnn
with, § 84, 2.
past (preterit, imperfect)
in connected narrative, § 229, 1 ;
change from perfect to past,
§ 229, 2, Note a ; past to per-
fect, § 229, 2, Note b ; with
fd^on for past perfect (pluper-
fect), § 228, 2, Note; for pro-
gressive and emphatic forms,
§ 178, Note h ; § 227, 1 ; use of
aU with, § 84, 1.
future
general rule, § 69, 4, a, b, c.
simple auxiliary, toerbcn, § 69, 1
and 4, a ; to express desire,
hjoacu, §69, 3; intention,
§ 69, 4, i ; obligation (foHen),
§69,2; §69,4, 6 and c.
substitute for, § 228, 1.
perfect
general rule for use in German,
§ 229, 2 ; change to past,
§ 229, 2, Note a ; for empha-
sis, § 229, 2, Note b ; German
present with fdjon for English
perfect, § 228, 2.
pluperfect
German past with fci^on for
English, § 228, 2, Note,
subjunctive, § 266, 2.
Teutoburger Forest, § 1 ; § 3.
picture of monument in, page 2.
Theodoric the Great, § 22 ; § 24 ;
§ 38; see also Dietrich von
Bern; picture of tomb at
Ravenna, page 15.
There, adverb, § 16, 1 and 2;
"factitive," § 16; e§ gibt,
§85,1; cSift, §85, 2.
Thirty Years' War, § 176 ; § 182 ;
§ 187, c.
Thoma, Ludwigr, quoted, § 30, 1,
Note; § 206, 2; § 221, 2;
§ 246, 4.
Thuring-ia (Xfjiirtngcn), § 103.
Thusnelda, wife of Hermann, § 3.
Tieck, Ludwigr, (1773-1853),
§ 230; quoted, § 120, 2.
-^ime
accusative of , § 5 ; § 50, 2.
adverbs of, § 5, Note,
duration of, § 50, 1 and 2.
extent of , § 5 ; § 98, 2.
particular point of , § 50, 3 ; § 98, 1.
telling time (of day), § 50, 4;
§ 169, 2.
Titles, § 295 ; § 298.
Tours, battle of, § 48.
Towns, growth of, in Middle Ages,
§ 72, § 74.
876
INDEX.
For special word studies, see Vocabularies.
Trade, growth in German Empire,
§289; §290.
Transitive verbs, see Verbs.
Transposed order of sentence,
see Word Order.
Trier (Treves), Koman remains at,
§14.
picture of Roman palace at, page
8.
of tlie Porta Nigra (Black
Gate), page 13.
Two infinitives, § 73, 1 and 2;
§81.
Uhland, Ludwig (1787-1862),
§230.
picture of, page 211.
quoted, §15, 2, &; §29,3; §40, 2;
§47; §99, 3; §100, 4; §119,
3; § 141; § 147, 3; § 150, 2, a ;
§ 154, 2; §173, 1; §196, 2;
§ 218, 2 ; § 234, 2, Note.
Ulfllas, translator of the Bible into
Gothic, §349; §357.
Umlaut
derivation of, § 322 ; sounds of,
§ 322, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
used with suffixes, »c^en, 4dn,
§ 30(), 1 ; ^er, § 306, 2, 6 ; 4ing,
§306, 4, d; ^,§307,1, b.
Universities, discipline in, § 285.
Varus, Roman general, § 1.
SSeX'^, § 140.
Verbals
English verbal in ing
1. When not participial modi-
fier
(a) as clauses, when in
phrase of time or cause,
§ 189, 1 ; or the object of a
preposition, § 189, 2; or
when the verbal after with-
out or instead of is modified
by possessive, § 190.
(6) as infinitives
omission of ju, § 180, 1 ; use
of 5U, § 180, 2.
verbals after instead of or
without, if unmodified,
§181.
2. When participial modifiers
(a) present participles, § 178.
(6) past participles, § 178.
Note a.
(c) predicate verbal, came
running, § 180, 1, Note.
3. Progressive form, § 178, Note
6 ; § 227, 1.
verbal nouns, § 304, 2.
Verbs
transitive
with ^abcit, § 165; § 167, 2, and
Note ; follow and meet intran-
sitive in German, § l<i6. Note,
use of he^ to make transitives,
§ 135, 3.
intransitive (neuter)
with f)ahcn, § 165; with fcin,
§ 166; with ^abcn or fein,
§ 167, 1 and 2.
fccgcgncn and folgcn, § 166, Note.
separable, see Separable prefixes.
inseparable, see Inseparable pre-
fixes.
common, see Common prefixes.
impersonal
with i^aben, § 165; exceptions,
§166.
c« gibt, § 85, 1.
impersonal passive, § 204, 2.
reflexive
with ^a6cn, § 165.
iid) bcfinbcn, § 206, 1.
INDEX.
377
For special word -studies, see Vocabularies.
Verbs — Continued
emphatic form, § 77, 2, Note;
§ 227, 1.
progressive form, § 178, Note h ;
§ 227, 1.
Verona (Bern), capital of Tlie-
odoric, § 22; §24.
Vienna, Beethoven and Goethe in,
§240.
Visigoths, Bishop Ulfilas of, § 349.
■ Voice, see Active and Passive.
Voss, Johann Heinrich (1751-
1826), quoted, § 217.
Vowels, see Pronunciation.
Wagner, Richard (1813-1883),
§ 245 ; picture of, page 190.
Walther von der Vogelweide,
§ 103; § 105.
Wartburg Castle at Eisenbach,
§ 103 ; Luther at, § 153.
picture of the castle, page 87.
of the inner court, page
124.
of Luther's room, page 121.
of the Singers' Hall in the
castle, page 84.
Washington, George, admired
by Frederick II, § 214.
Weber, Karl Maria von (1786-
1826), §245.
Weibertreu, fortress, see Weins-
berg.
Weimar
picture of Goethe in library at,
page 195. ,
of Goethe's Garden in,
page 181.
of „S)ic^ter^aar/' page 177.
of Schiller in library at,
page 184.
Weinsberg, siege of, § 91 ; § 93.
pictures of fortress, pages 74 and
79.
the octagonal tower at, page 82.
SScrbcn, see Auxiliaries.
Werder, Karl, quoted, § 248,
2, b.
Westphalia, Peace of (1648),
§182.
Wieland, Christoph Martin
(1733-1813), quoted, § 120, 3,
Note b ; § 157, 1, Note 6 ; § 206,
1 ; § 233, 2.
Wildenbruch, Ernst von (1845-
1<K)9), § 230; quoted, § 4,
Note ; § 29, 2 ; § 39, 2 ; § 120,
1; §123,2; § 128, 1; § 136, 1 ;
§ 150, 2, c; § 160; § 166, c,
Note; §169, 2, Note; §173,4;
§ 191, 1; § 200, 2; § 204, 2,
Note; §206,2; §221,1; §233,
1; §237,2; §246, 1; §246,4,
Note ; § 262 ; § 268, 2.
William I, German Emperor and
King of Prussia (1871-1888)
(King, 1861-1871)
anecdote of Kornblumen, §252;
of Heldengreis, § 281.
appoints Bismarck prime minis-
ter, § 277 ; § 278.
historical sketch of, § 278 ; § 282.
later years of, § 281 ; § 282.
picture of monument at Kyff-
hauser, page 65.
at Coblentz, page 219.
William II (born, 1859, crowned,
1888), present emperor, § 282.
Windmill, legend of the, at Sans
Souci, § 203.
Wolfram von Eschenbach,
§105.
878
INDEX.
For special word-atudies, see Vocabularies,
Henriette, Frei-
von (1745-1788),
183, 2.
Wolzogren,
frau
quoted
Word composition
German rich in compound words,
§300.
roots, § 301.
miaut (Sanlaut, ^nlaut, 2tu81aut),
§ 301 and Note,
derivation of nouns from verbs,
§ 302, § 303.
prefixes
verbal
See Separable, Inseparable,
and Common.
general
ers^, § 304, 1; gc, § 304, 2;
mi^^, § 304, 3 ; un=, 304, 4 ;
ur=, § :«)4, 5.
suffixes, §§ 305-309, see also Suf-
fixes.
compound words, § 310; German
partiality to, § 300.
adjectives, § 312.
nouns, § 311.
verbs, § 313.
derivation through the Latin,
§314.
Word formation, see Word com-
position.
Word Order
normal
emphatic position in German
sentences, § 37, Note,
position of
adverbs, § 47 ; § 47, 1 ; ad-
verbial phrases, § 47.
infinitives with modals, § 66;
"two infinitives," § 73, 1.
nic^l, modifying the whole,
§37; special word, § 37, 1.
objects, direct and indirect,
§ 55; for emphasis, § 55,
Note,
prepositional phrases, § 47 ;
§ 92, Note,
separable prefixes, § 147, 1
and 3.
special subjunctive, § 266, 2.
verbals as participles, § 178,
and Note a.
inverted
general rule for, § 2 ; after sub-
ordinate clause, § 2, 2.
German partiality to, § 2, 1.
omission of e3 in impersonal
passive, § 204, 2.
inversion of conditional, § 256,
1 and 2.
transposed
in simple tenses, § 14 ; in com-
pound, § 23.
after ba, § 17, 3.
omission of c« in impersonal
passive, § 201, 2.
of modals, §73, 2; of "two
infinitives," § 73, 2.
of special subjunctive (^Stte),
§266,2.
3cr", §141.
Zschokke, Heinrlch (1771-1848)
quoted, § 17, 1; §43, 2; §66;
§ 178, Note a ; § 194, 2 ; § 204,
1, Note; §229,1.
omitted after certain verbs, § 180,
1 ; with modals, § 66.
not omitted, § 180, 2.
ALLYN AND BACON'S SERIES OF
GERMAN TEXTS
i€mo, cloth. With Introduction, Notes, Vocabulary, and
Exercises for Retranslation into German.
IMMENSEE. By Theodor Storm. Edited by E. A. Whitenack.
1 1 5 pages.
HOHER ALS DIE KIRCHE. By Wilhelmine von Hillern.
Edited by J. B, E. Jonas, 1 50 pages.
L'ARRABBIATA. By Paul Johann Ludwig Heyse. Edited by
Paul V. Bacon. 128 pages.
GERMELSHAUSEN. By Friedrich Gerstacker. Edited by R. A,
von Minckwitz. 122 pages.
DER ZERBROCHENE KRUG and DAS WIRTSHAUS ZU
CRANSAC. By Johann Heinrich Daniel Zschokke. Edited
by Edward Maniey. 1 69 pages.
DER SCHWIEGERSOHN. By Rudolf Baumbach. Edited by
W. W. Florer and E. H. Lauer. 264 pages.
DAS EDLE BLUT and DER LETZTE. By Ernst von Wilden-
bruch. Edited by W. W. Florer and M. R. Shelly. 238 pages.
DIE JOURNALISTEN. By Gustav Freytag. Edited by Edward
Maniey. 272 pages.
DER NEFFE ALS ONKEL. By Friedrich von Schiller. Edited
by C. F. Raddatz. 147 pages.
GRIECHISCHE HEROENGESCHICHTEN. By Barthold Georg
Niebuhr. Edited by George E. Merkley. 128 pages.
MARCH EN. By Jakob and Wilhelm Grimm. Edited by George
E. Merkley. 140 pages.
WILHELM TELL. By Friedrich von Schiller. Edited by Carl
Schlenker. 000 pages.
GERMAN
A German Grammar for Beginners
By Paul V. Bacon. Revised Edition. i2mo, cloth, 448 pages.
Price, $1.25.
THIS is a. beginning book which introduces easy reading from
the first, along with the usual drill in grammar. The object
is to stimulate interest, to economize vocabulary, and to give
unity to the first year work.
Distinguishing features of the Grammar are : —
I. Complete stories, full of interest, connected with the gram-
matical exercises and using the same words. The first is about
the school, the second about the home, and so many cognates
are used that reading may be begun as soon as the alphabet is
learned. There are 105 pages of this reading matter, including
poems from Goethe, Heine, and Uhland, The stories are sim-
ple and delightful and make use of every-day words. They will
attract the young pupil and enliven the grammar drill. The cor-
relation of stories and grammar makes possible a small working
vocabulary.
II. Systematic drill on grammar, each topic being treated in
a group of five lessons. The language of the rules is especially
simple.
III. Every fifth lesson is a review, and in addition three com-
plete lessons are devoted to a review of the first half of the book
and seven to tht; whole book. These reviews are twenty-three
in number.
IV. Attractive material for memorizing. Each lesson begins
with a proverb, idiom, or short poem, to be committed to mem-
ory. These include selections from Goethe, Schiller, Heine,
RUckert, SchefFel, Muller, and many others.
The New Edition contains at the back of the booK a complete
Summary of Inflections arranged for ready reference. This, with
the Index to Syntax, makes the book suitable for a reference
grammar as well as for a beginning book.
66
GERMAN
Im Vaterland: A Reader for Pupils in their First oi
Second Year of German
By Paul V. Bacon. lamo, cloth, 430 pages. Price $1.2^
w'T'O give the American student a better understanding and
1 appreciation of Germany and the Germans ; to furnish him
with an adequate vocabulary of colloquial idioms ; to point out
and explain differences between German and American customs ;
In short, to broaden and deepen the American's knowledge and
love of the German language, music, poetry, and people ; these
are the aims of /m Vaterland.'''^
Distinctive features of this remarkable book are :
I, Dialogues on thirty-six different subjects (such as the Ger-
man Empire, The Imperial Family, In School, At a Store, Berlin
University, The Army, The Hotel, In a Theatre, At a Station, In
a Train, etc.)» These give the pupil a knowledge of German
customs and prepare him for appreciative and intelligent travel in
Germany.
II. Illustrations from photographs of German scenes, build-
ings, paintings, churches, and castles. Besides forty-nine of
these illustrations there are six maps, including a two-page
colored map of the German Empire,
. III. Songs, with music arranged for high school pupils.
There are twenty-seven characteristic German songs from sixteen
different composers.
IV. Poems — thirty-six of them — ranging from the thirteenth
to the twentieth century, especially adapted for memorizing.
V. Notes on all idioms and grammatical difficulties. They
serve also to supplement the text. For example, they contain a
complete list of the German States, an outline of a gymnasial
course of study, biographies of the authors mentioned in the
book, and kindred matters.
VI. Composition exercises on each chapter of the dialogues.
VII. A vocabulary made with unusual care, and including aU
the idioms used in the book.
VIII. A full, practical index of persons and of topics.
56
FRENCH
ChardenaPs Complete French Course
New Edition, revised and rewritten by Maro S. Brooks, of the Brook*
line High School. i6mo, cloth, 437 pages. Price, $1.20.
FOR many years ChardenaPs Course has been the most popu-
lar book for beginners in French. Its success is largely
due to its simplicity, thoroughness, and the care with which the
lessons are graded. In revising the book for a new edition the
editor has retained these excellent qualities and has endeavored
to give the book even wider vogue by the following changes and
additions :
I. The order of presentation has been so altered as to secure
greater variety in the exercises from the outset. To this end
pronouns have been introduced earlier, and the most common
tenses of the verb in all conjugations.
II. The practical value of the vocabulary has been increased
by the insertion of many words and phrases of frequent occur-
rence in ordinary conversation.
III. The sentences for translation have been made lively
and colloquial. In most of the English exercises of the first
twenty-four lessons there are series of questions which cannot be
answered by yes or no, and in many lessons after that point
whole exercises consisting of such questions only have been
added. These questions are intended as a basis for conversa-
tional work in the classroom and may all be answered from
material already provided. To stimulate conversation still fur-
ther a list of expressions for classroom use has been prepared.
While most of the subjects have been presented one topic at a
time as in the former edition, every subject will be found sum-
marized in a single lesson.
A feature of the book is the appendix, which contains the ir.ost
necessary rules of grammar, notably those for the formation of
the plural and feminine of nouns and adjectives. There are
complete tables of the conjugations of regular and irregular
verbs, and other useful lists.
The book has also several pages of reading exercises.
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST
STAMPED BELOW
AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS
WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY
WILL INCREASE TO SO CENTS ON THE FOURTH
DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY
OVERDUE.
4UG Q
MAR 23 1935
■^^p 7 ms
^£r' 25 1935
OCT 29 1935
APR XI ^936
1936
MAY 21
AUG 7 mo
ii'^h
JAN
I4Nov'57CS
lU
LD 2lA-60m-8,*65
(P2336sl0)476B
General Library .
University of Califorma
Berkeley
335658
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORrilA H|RARY